Some symbolic expressions for the white colour
CONTENS
अण्ज्येत अचल अधस् अर्जुन अर्जुनच्छवि अवदात अवलक्ष असित इंद्रः ईषत् ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र ऋक्षदेव ऋश्यक कदम्ब कपोतः कपोताभ कल्माष कापोत कृ कृष्ण कृष्णवर्ण खरु गंधः गरुडः गो गौर घन चर्मानुरण्जन चित्र जरठ तमाल दर्शन दुर् धवल धवलिमन् धावल्य धूसर धूसरिमन् ध्वांतम् निर्जल पंगुल पङ्गुल पद्म परिपण पांडु पांडुकः पांडुरिमन् पाण्डु पाण्डुक पाण्डुच्छाय पाण्डुर पाण्डुरता पाण्डुरय पाण्डुरित पाण्डुरिमन् पाण्डुरीकरण पाण्डुरीकरणकृ पीत पुंडरीकम् पुण्डरीक पुण्ड्र प्रपाण्डु बलक्ष बहल ब्रह्मदत्त मुटः रजत राम रूपम् ललाम लोहित वंशरोचना वंशलोचना विचित्र विशद वेणुमन्त वोरुखान शार शित शिथिल शिलाधातु शुक्र शुक्ल शुक्लक शुक्लरूप शुक्लिमन् शुण्ठ शुचि शुब्र शुभ्र शुभ्रता श्येत श्येन श्येनः श्रवण श्वितान श्विति श्वित्य श्वेत श्वेतरण्जन श्वेतवर्ण श्वेतिमन् सित सितकमल सितकृष्ण सितरुचि सितलोहित सितश्याम सिति सितेतर सु सेराह सेराहः स्वच्छ हंस हंसांशु हरि हरिण हरिनेत्र
अण्ज्येत – aṇjyeta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aṇjyeta “aṇjy-eta” mfn. black and white coloured |
अचल – acala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899acala “a-cala” mf (“ā”) n. not moving, immovable
acala “a-cala” m. a mountain, rock acala “a-cala” m. a bolt or pin acala “a-cala” m. the number seven acala “a-cala” m. N. of śiva and of the first of the nine deified persons, called “white Balas” among the Jainas acala “a-cala” m. of a Devarshi acala “a-cala” mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. the earth acala “a-cala” m. one of the ten degrees which are to be ascended by a Bodhisattva before becoming a Buddha. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 acala a. Steady, immoveable, motionless, fixed, permanent; citranyastamivācalaṁ cāmaraṁ V. 1. 4; tapase’dhivastumacalāmacalaḥ Ki. 6. 18; samādhau -lā buddhiḥ Bg. 2. 53; yatra sthāṇurivācalaḥ S. 7. 11 immoveable. –laḥ (1) A mountain; (rarely) a rock. (2) A bolt or pin (śaṁku). (3) The number seven. (4) N. of Śiva, of the soul, of the first of the 9 deified persons among Jainas. –lā The earth (so called because the earth is immoveable according to one view, or, according to Ārya Bhaṭṭa who rejects this view, acalāḥ parvatāḥ saṁtyatra, astyarthe ac; acalatvāt svakakṣāto bahirgamanāṁbhāvādvā). –laṁ Brahma. — Comp. –kanyakā, –sutā, –duhitā, –tanayā &c. N. of Pārvatī, daughter of the Himālaya mountain. –kīlā (ba. the earth (immoveably fixed or pinned). –ja, –jāta a. mountain-born. ( –jā –jātā) N. of Pārvatī. –tviṣ a. [acalā tviṭ yasya] of fixed or permanent lustre or colour. (–m, -ṭ) a cuckoo (bahuprakṣālanenāpi mālinyānapagamāt sthirā tviṭ). (f.) permanent colour. –dviṣ m. [acalān dveṣṭi, dviṣ-kvip] the enemy of mountains, epithet of Indra who clipped off their wings. –dhṛtiḥ f. a metre of four lines of 16 short syllables each (gītyāryā). –patiḥ, –rāṭ lord of mountains, N. of Himālaya; so -adhipaḥ, – śreṣṭhaḥ. –saptamī N. of a book in the bhaviṣyottarapurāṇa; the 7th day of the bright half of Aśvina. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch acala (3. a + cala) 1) adj. f. ā “unbeweglich”: yadā – acalāni calanti ṢAḌV. BR. in Ind. St. I, 41, 20. R. 1, 44, 2. 2, 15, 42. 6, 79, 49. ŚĀK. 170. Uebertr.: yadā sthāsyati niścalā. samādhāvacalā buddhiḥ BHAG. 2, 53. — 2) m. a) “Berg” AK. 2, 3, 1. TRIK. 3, 3, 379. H. 1027. an. 3, 623. MED. l. 59. R. 1, 6, 24. 40, 4. N. 5, 3. 12, 4. acalendra R. 2, 94, 6. 3, 33, 38. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā R. 4, 26, 15. — b) “Nagel, Bolzen” H. an. 3, 623. MED. l. 59. — c) Śiva, ŚIV. — d) “der erste der 9 weissen” Bala’s H. 698. — 3) f. acalā a) “Erde” AK. 2, 1, 2. TRIK. 3, 3, 379. H. 936. an. 3, 624. MED. l. 59. — b) Name einer der 10 Erden bei den Buddhisten; s. zu H. 233. acala 2) e) N. pr. eines Dichters Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,b,12. eines Lexicographen: -kośa UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 68. — 3) a) MṚCCH. 178, 1. — b) lies Bez. “einer der 9 Stufen, die ein” Bodhisattva “zu ersteigen hat, bevor er” Buddha “wird”, und füge DAŚABHŪMĪŚVARA 95 hinzu. — c) N. pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2632. — d) N. pr. einer Rākṣasī Lot. de la b. l. 240. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 acala 1 I 1) (General.) Acala was the son of Subala, a King of Gāndhāra. He was Śakuni’s brother and a heroic Charioteer on the side of the Kauravas. (M.B. Udyoga Parva, Chapter 168, Verse 1). acala 2 II Name of a bull. Among the pārṣadas of Skanda we see the bull named Acala. (M.B. Śalya Parva, Chapter 85, Verse 74). acala 3 III An epithet of Mahāviṣṇu. Among the thousand names of Mahāviṣṇu we see the name Acala also. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 149, Verse 92). acala Subrahmaṇya, who was born from Śiva’s semen which fell into the fire, was made Commander-in-Chief (Generalissimo) by the gods to kill Tārakāsura. A large number of warriors and mothers were assigned to assist him. A woman named Acalā was included among those mothers. (M.B. Śalya Parva, Chapter 40, Verse 14). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 acala a-cala. I. adj., f. lā. 1. Immovable. 2. Steady, Pañc. 202, 19. II. m. A mountain. — Comp. kula-, m. a principal mountain. tuhina-, m. Himālaya. mahā-, m. a great mountain. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 acala a. the same; m. mountain, f. ā the earth. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 acala a-cala, a. immovable; m. mountain. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 acala pu° na calaḥ .. (goṁja) iti khyāte śaṅkau . parvate, acalāḥ sāgarāḥ grāmāḥ prāsādadhavalā gṛhāḥ dhāritaṁ ca tvayāsarvamiti pṛthivīprārthanāmantraḥ . acalaeṣa bhavāniva rājate iti māghaḥ . pṛthivyāṁ strī . bhūmeracalatvādikamuktaṁ si° śi° go° bhūmeḥ piṇḍaḥ śaśāṅkajñakaviravikujejyārkinakṣatrakakṣāvṛttairvṛtto vṛtaḥ san mṛdanilasalilavyomatejomayo’yam . nānyāghāraḥ svaśaktyaiva viyati niyataṁ tiṣṭhatīhāsya pṛṣṭhe niṣṭhaṁ viśvaṁ ca śaśvatsadanujamanujādityadaityaṁ samantāt . sarvataḥ parvatārāmagrāmacaityacayaiścitaḥ . kadambakusumagranthiḥ kesaraprakarairiva . yathoṣṇatārkānalayośca, śītatā vidhau, drutiḥ ke, kaṭhinatvamaśmani . maruccalī bhūracalā svabhāvato yato vicitrā vata vastuśaktayaḥ . ākṛṣṭaśaktiśca mahī tayā yat khasthaṁ guru svābhimukhaṁ svaśaktyā . ākṛṣyate tatpatatīva bhāti same samantāt kva? patatviyaṁ khe iti . āryabhaṭṭamate tu asyāścalatve’pi acalāḥ parvatāḥ santyatra astyarthe’ci . acalavattvāt svakakṣāto vahirgamanābhāvādvā acalatvam . tena ca tasyāścalatvaṁ dṛṣṭāntavidhayoktaṁ tacca vistarato bhūgolaśabde vakṣyate . calanaśūnye tri° tasmāttvamacalobhaveti kalasasthāpanamantraḥ . tasmānmama gṛhe nityaṁ lakṣmi! tvamacalā bhaveti purā° . samādhāvacalā buddhiriti, gītā, acalā bhaktirīśvare iti purā° . na calati svabhāvāt . śive pu° tasya sthāṇutvāt tathātvam . brahmaṇi na° . niṣkalaṁ niṣkriyaṁ śāntamiti śrutyā asya sarvakriyāśūnyatvokteracalatvam . ātmani pu° nityaḥ sarvagataḥ sthāṇuracalo’yaṁ sanātana iti gītā . |
अधस् – adhas | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899adhas ind. (see “adhara”), below, down; in the lower region; beneath,
under; from under (with acc. gen., and abl.); also applied to the lower region and to the pudendum muliebre ([cf. Lat. ‘infra’]). Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 adhas , adhaḥ ind. [adhara-asi, adharaśabdasthāne adh ādeśaḥ P. V. 3. 39.] (1) Below, down; patatyadho dhāma visāri sarvataḥ Śi. 1. 2; in the lower region, to the infernal regions or hell; vyasanyadho’dhovrajati svaryātyavyasanī mṛtaḥ Ms. 7. 53. (According to the context adhaḥ may have the sense of the nominative, -aṁkuśaḥ &c.; ablative, adho vṛkṣāt patati; or locative, adho gṛhe śete). (2) Beneath, under, used like a preposition with gen.; tarūṇāṁ- S. 1. 14; rarely with abl. also; bāhitthaṁ tu tatopyadhaḥ Hemachandra; (when repeated) lower and lower, down and down; adhodhaḥ paśyataḥ kasya mahimā nopacīyate H. 2. 2; yātyadhodho vrajatyuccairnaraḥ svaireva karmabhiḥ H. 2. 48; adhodho gaṁgeyaṁ padamupagatā stokaṁ Bh. 2. 10; from under, just below (with acc.); navānadho’dho bṛhataḥ payodharān Śi. 1. 4. In comp. with nouns adhaḥ has the sense of (a) lower, under, as -bhuvanaṁ, -lokaḥ the lower world; -vāsaḥ or -aṁśukaṁ an under-garment; or (b) the lower part; -kāyaḥ the lower part of the body; adhaḥkṛ means to surpass, eclipse, overcome, vanquish, despise, scorn; tapaḥ śarīraiḥ kaṭhinairupārjitaṁ tapasvināṁ dūramadhaścakāra sā Ku. 5. 29; adhaḥ kṛtāśeṣāṁtaḥpureṇa K. 177; -kṛtakusumāyudhaṁ 179; Śi. 1. 35, 3. 52; -kṛtainasaḥ Śi. 16. 8 dispelled. — Comp. –akṣa a. situated below the axle or car. ( –kṣaṁ) adv. below the car, under the axle. –akṣajaḥ [akṣāt iṁdriyājjāyate iti akṣajaṁ pratyakṣajñānaṁ, tadadharaṁ grāhakatvābhāvāt hīnaṁ yatya saḥ Tv.; adhaḥkṛtaṁ akṣajaṁ iṁdriyajñānaṁ yena Malli.] N. of Viṣṇu; other etymologies of the name are also found: (1) adho na kṣīyate jātu yasmāttasmādadhokṣajaḥ; (2) dyaurakṣaṁ pṛthivī cādhastayoryasmādajāyata . madhye vairājarūpeṇa tato ‘dhokṣaja iṣyate .. –adhas See above. –upāsanaṁ sexual intercourse. –aṁgaṁ, –dvāraṁ-marma the anus; Pudendum Muliebre. –karaḥ the lower part of the hand (karabha). –karaṇaṁ excelling, defeating, degradation; K. 202; so -kriyā; sahate na janopyadhaḥkriyāṁ Ki. 2. 47 degradation, dishonour. –khananaṁ undermining. –gatiḥ f., –gamanaṁ –pātaḥ 1. a downward fall or motion, descent; going downwards. 2. degradation, downfall. going to perdition or hell; mūlānāmadhogatiḥ K. 41 (where -ti has both senses); -tiṁ āyāti Pt. 1. 150 sinks, comes down (feels dishonoured); Ms. 3. 17; arakṣitāramattāraṁ nṛpaṁ vidyādadhogatiṁ 8. 309 destined to go to hell. –gaṁtṛ m. one who digs downwards, a mouse. –gaṁ-ghaṁ-ṭā [adharāt adhastādārabhya ghaṁṭeva tadākāraphalatvāt] a plant Achyranthes Aspera (apāmārga). –caraḥ [adhaḥ khanitvā carati-ac] 1. thief. 2. one who goes downwards. –jānu n. the lower part of the knee. (-ind.) below the knee. –jihvikā [alpā jihvā jihvikā, adharā jihvikā] the uvula (Mar. paḍajībha). –talaṁ the lower part or surface; śayyā-, khaṭvā-. –diś f. the lower region, the nadir; the southern direction. –dṛṣṭi a. casting a downward look; a posture in Yoga; karaṇānyabahiṣkṛtya sthāṇuvanniścalātmakaḥ . ātmānaṁ hṛdaye dhyāyet nāsāgranyastalocanaḥ .. cf. also Ku. 3. 47. (–ṣṭiḥ) a downward look. — padaṁ [adhovṛtti padaṁ, pādasyādhaḥsthānaṁ vā] the place under the foot, a lower place. –pātaḥ = -gati q. v. above. –puṣpī [adhomukhāni puṣpāṇi yasyāḥ] N. of two plants avākpuṣpī (Pimpinella Anisum) and gojihvā (Elephantopus Scaber). –prastaraḥ a seat of grass for persons in mourning to sit upon. –bhaktaṁ [adharaṁ bhaktaṁ yasmāt] a dose of water, medicine &c. to be taken after meals &c. (bhojanāṁte pīyamānaṁ jalādikaṁ). –bhāgaḥ 1. the lower part (of the body); pūrvabhāgo guruḥ puṁsāmadhobhāgastu yoṣitāṁ Suśr. 2. the lower part of any thing, the region below, down below; -vyavasthitaṁ kiṁcitpuramālokitaṁ Pt. 1. situated down below, See pātāla. –bhūḥ f. lower ground, land at the foot of a hill. –mukha –vadana a. having the face downwards; -khī tiṣṭhati; – khaiḥ patribhiḥ R. 3. 57. 2. head-long, precipitate, flying downwards. 3. upside down, topsyturvy. (–khaḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. (–khākhī) N. of a plant gojihvā Premna Esculenta. (–khaṁ) (nakṣatraṁ) 1. flying downwards, having a downward motion; these nakshatras are: mūlāśleṣā kṛttikā ca viśākhā bharaṇī tathā . maghā pūrvātrayaṁ caiva adhomukhagaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ .. Jyothisha. 2. N. of a hell. –yaṁtraṁ a still. –raktapittaṁ discharge of blood from the anus and urethra. –rāma a. [adhobhāge rāmaḥ śuklaḥ, dṛṣṭitarpakatvāt tasya rāmatvaṁ] having a white colour or white marks on the lower part of the body (said of a goat) –laṁbaḥ 1. a plummet. 2. a perpendicular. 3. the lower world. –varcas a. strong in the lower regions; whose lustre penetrates downwards. –vaśaḥ Pudendum Muliebre. –vāyuḥ [adhogāmī vāyuḥ śāka. ta.] breaking wind, flatulency. –śaya-yya a. sleeping on the ground. (–yyā) sleeping on the ground; agnīṁdhanaṁ bhaikṣacaryāmadhaḥśayyāṁ gurorhitam . āsamāvartanāt kuryātkṛtopanayano dvijaḥ .. Ms. 2. 108. –śiras a. = mukha. (–n.) N. of a hell. –stha, –sthita a. situated below. –svastikaṁ the nadir. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch adhas 1) adv. P. 5, 3, 39. VOP. 7, 108. a) “unten” NIR. 2, 11. H. 1526. adhaḥ svidāsī3dupari svidāsī3t ṚV. 10, 129, 5. 119, 11. adha iva hi manuṣyalokaḥ ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 1, 10. (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 1, 8.) INDR. 5, 10. sa (prajāpatiḥ) striyaṁ sasṛje tāṁ sṛṣṭvādha (so dass das Weib “unten” ist) upāsta tasmātstriyamadha upāsīta ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 2. = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 4, 2. “auf dem Erdboden”: adhaḥ śayīta ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 1, 11. M. 11, 224. vom “pudendum muliebre” TRIK. 2, 6, 21. hierher gehört vielleicht adho ramaṇīyam beim Sch. zu P. 5, 3, 39. — b) “hinunter, hinab”: adhaḥ paśyasva mopari ṚV. 8, 33, 19. adhaścordhvaṁ ca prasṛtaṁ brahmaivedam MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 2, 11. vilokya ŚĀK. 32, 20. avalokya 99, 7. adho’vekṣin PAÑCAT. I, 214. adho ‘dho paśyataḥ kasya mahimā nopacīyate HIT. II, 2. kṣipta H. 1482. bhraṣṭa N. 20, 1. yāvattanna vrajatyadhaḥ (von der Speise) M. 11, 153. yātyadhaḥ PAÑCAT. II, 74. mukhātpatantyadho viśīryamāṇā daśanāḥ sahasradhā R. 2, 12, 103. “zur Hölle” TRIK. 1, 2, 1. vyasanyadho ‘dho vrajati svaryātyavyasanī mṛtaḥ M. 7, 53. 6, 35. 37. patati hyupayannadhaḥ 11, 172. — c) “von unten her”: āgataḥ P. 5, 3, 39, Sch. — 2) praep. “unter, unterhalb” (auf die Frage “wo” oder “wohin)”: a) mit dem acc.: pṛthivīradho astu viśvāḥ ṚV. 7, 104, 11. wird zur Bezeichnung der “Nähe” verdoppelt P. 8, 1, 7. adho ‘dho lokam Sch. SIDDH. K. zu P. 2, 3, 2. lokānuparyuparyāste ‘dho ‘dho ‘dhyadhi ca mādhavaḥ VOPAD. 5, 7. te dakṣiṇasya havirdhānasyādho ‘dho ‘kṣaṁ sarpanti ŚAT. BR. 4, 6, 9, 13. uparyuparyevākṣamadhvaryuḥ somagrahaṁ dhārayatyadho ‘dho ‘kṣaṁ neṣṭā surāgraham 5, 1, 2, 18. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 2, 16. 14, 2, 7. — b) mit dem gen. VOP. 5, 23. nachf.: tayoradhaḥ M. 2, 59. ŚĀK. 14. AK. 2, 6, 2, 30. 31. H. 589. 1226. VID. 86. 234. vorangehend: adhastayoḥ AK. 2, 6, 2, 23. H. 590. adho ‘sya yat AK. 2, 8, 2, 7. — c) mit dem abl.: vṛkṣādadhaḥ samupaviṣṭau PAÑCAT. 115, 25. vāhitthaṁ tu tato ‘pyadhaḥ H. 1227. — d) unbestimmt ob mit dem gen. oder abl., wegen Zusammenfallens der Casusendungen: adhaḥ padoḥ ṚV. 10, 166, 2. ye te panthā adho divaḥ SV. I, 2, 2, 3, 8. adhaste aśmano manyumupāsyāmasi yo guruḥ AV. 6, 42, 2. cūtatarordhaḥ Up. 10. tarornimātumicchāmyadhaḥ ŚĀK. 144. ūrdhvaṁ nābheryāni khāni medhyāni sarvaśaḥ. yānyadhastānyamedhyāni M. 5. 132. — e) am Ende eines comp.: vāhitthādhaḥ pratimānam H. 1227. asikādhastu cibukam 582. tadadhaḥ 611. — f) verbindet sich mit dem regierten Worte zu einem adj. oder adverb. comp., s. adhaḥkṛṣṇājinam, adhaspada, adhojānu. — Vgl. adhama und adhara; vielleicht steht adhas auch mit adhi in einem etym. Zusammenhange: wenn dieses als loc. (“in der Höhe”) gefasst wird, kann jenes als abl. (“von der Höhe herab”) gedeutet werden. adhas 1) a) Z. 6 schalte ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 7, 6. PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 9, 8. vor M. 11, 224. ein. — b) adhaḥ kṛtasyāpi tanūnapāto nādhaḥ śikhā yāti kadācideva Spr. 591. tapaḥ śarīraiḥ kaṭhinairupārjitaṁ tapasvināṁ dūramadhaścakāra saḥ so v. a. “übertreffen” KUMĀRAS. 5, 29. — 2) b) jātiryātu rasātalaṁ guṇagaṇastasyāpyadho gacchatām Spr. 965. — e) WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 300. 321. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 adhas a + dhas (cf. idam). I. adv. 1. Underneath. 2. Low, Man. 11, 224. 3. Down, Pañc. i. d. 214; to hell, Man. 7, 53. II. prepos. Under, with the gen., Man. 2, 59, and abl. Pañc. 115, 25. III. doubled: adhodhas, i. e. adhas-adhas, adv. 1. Lower and lower, Man. 7, 53. 2. One below the other. — Cf. [greek] and see adhara. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 adhas adv. below, down; adho’dhas deeper and deeper. With kṛ put low, despise; w. pat sink down. As prep. under, below, w. acc. (also adho’dhas), gen., abl., & –°. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 adhas adhas, ad. below, on the ground; downwards, to hell; adho’ dhaḥ, lower and lower; adhaḥkṛ, put below, surpass; -pat, sink down; prp. with ac. under (motion); with ab., g., or -°, below. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 adhas avya° adhara + asi adharaśabdasthāne adhādeśaśca . pātāle, adhasthānamātre ca . tatrāpi arthavaśāt prathamāpañcamīsaptamyarthā unneyāḥ . tatra prathamārthe adhoramyaṁ, pañcamyarthe adhovṛkṣāt patati, saptamyarthe adhogṛhe śete ityādi . adhaḥ kathañciddhṛtabhūmibhāgamiti kumā° . patatyadhodhāma visāri sarvataḥ, iti māghaḥ . |
अर्जुन – arjuna | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899arjuna mfn. (cf. “ṛjra” and “raj”) white, clear (the colour of the day ; of
the dawn ; of the lightning; of the milk; of silver, &c.) mfn. made of silver arjuna m. the white colour arjuna m. a peacock arjuna m. cutaneous disease on arjuna m. the tree Terminalia Arjuna and arjuna m. N. of a man arjuna m. of Indra , of the third of the Pinḍava princes (who was a son of Kṛitavīrya who was slain by Paraśurāma) arjuna m. of a śāskya (known as a mathematician) arjuna m. of different other persons arjuna m. the only son of his mother arjuna m. a kind of serpent, (voc. “aijuni”) arjuna m. a procuress, bawd arjuna m. N. of Uṣā (wife of Aniruddha) arjuna m. of the river Bāhudā or Karatoys arjuna m. (“-nyau”, or “-nyas”) f. du. or pl. N. of the constellation Phalgunī arjuna n. silver arjuna n. gold arjuna n. slight inflammation of the conjunctiva or white of the eye arjuna n. a particular grass (used as a substitute for the Soma plant) &c. arjuna n. (= “rūpa”) shape arjuna m. pl. the descendants of Arjuna Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 arjuna a. [arj-unan ṇiluk ca Uṇ. 3. 58] (nā-nī f.). (1) White, clear, bright, of the colour of day; ahaśca kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ ca Rv. 6. 9. 1; piśaṁgamauṁjīyujamarjunacchaviṁ Śi. 1. 6. (2) Silvery. –naḥ (1) The white colour. (2) A peacock. (3) A sort of cutaneous disease. (4) A tree (Mar. arjunasādaḍā), with useful rind. (5) N. of the third Pāṇḍava who was a son of Kuntī by Indra and hence called aiṁdri also. [Arjuna was so called because he was ‘white’ or ‘pure in actions’ (pṛthivyāṁ caturaṁtāyāṁ varṇome durlabhaḥ samaḥ . karomi karma śuddhaṁ ca tena māmarjunaṁ viduḥ). He was taught the use of arms by Droṇa and was his favourite pupil. By his skill in arms he won Draupadī at her Svayamvara (see Draupadī). For an involuntary transgression he went into temporary exile and during that time he learnt the science of arms from Paraśurāma. He married Ulūpi, a Nāga Princess, by whom he had a son named Irāvat, and also Chitrāṅgada, daughter of the king of Maṇipura, who bore him a son named Babhruvāhana. During this exile he visited Dwāraka, and with the help and advice of Kṛṣṇa succeeded in marrying Subhadra. By her he had a son named Abhimanyu. Afterwards he obtained the bow Gandiva from the god Agni whom he assisted in burniṇg the Khāṇḍava forest. When Dharma, his eldest brother, lost the kingdom by gambling, and the five brothers went into exile, he went to the Himālayas to propitiate the gods and to obtain from them celestial weapons for use in the contemplated war against the Kauravas. There he fought with Śiva who appeared in the disguise of a Kirāta; but when he discovered the true character of his adversary he worshipped him and Śiva gave him the Pāśupatāstra. Indra, Varuṇa, Yama and Kubera also presented him with their own weapons. In the 13th year of their exile, the Pāṇḍavas entered the service of the King of Virāta and he had to act the part of a cunuch, and music and dancing master. In the great war with the Kauravas Arjuna took a very distinguished part. He secured the assistance of Kṛṣṇa who acted as his charioteer and related to him the Bhagavadgītā when on the first day of the battle he hesitated to bend his bow against his own kinsmen. In the course of the great struggle he slew or vanquished several redoubtable warriors on the side of the Kauravas, such as Jayadratha, Bhīṣma, Karṇa &c. After Yudhiṣṭhira had been installed sovereign of Hastināpura, he resolved to perform the Aśvamedha sacrifice, and a horse was let loose with Arjuna as its guardian. Arjuna followed it through many cities and countries and fought with many kings. At the city of Maṇipura he had to fight with his own son Babhruvāhana and was killed; but he was restored to life by a charm supplied by his wife Ulūpi. He traversed the whole of Bharata khaṇḍa and returned to Hastināpura, loaded with spoils and tributes, and the great horse-sacrifice was then duly performed. He was afterwards called by Kṛṣṇa to Dvārakā amid the intestine struggles of the Yādavas and there he performed the funeral ceremonies of Vasudeva and Kṛṣṇa. Soon after this the five Pāṇḍavas repaired to heaven having installed Parīkṣit-the only surviving son of Abhimanyu-on the throne of Hastināpura. Arjuna was the bravest of the Pāṇḍavas, high-minded, generous, upright, handsome and the most prominent figure of all his brothers. He has several appellations, such as Pārtha, Gudākeśa, Savyasāchi, Dhananjaya, Phālguna, Kirīṭin, Jiṣṇu, Śvetavāhana, Gandivin &c. &c.] (6) N. of Kartavīrya, slain by Paraśurama. See kārtavīrya. (7) N. of a country Bṛ. S. 14. 25. (8) The only son of his mother. (9) N. of Indra. –nī (1) A procuress, bawd. (2) A cow. (3) A kind of serpent. (4) N. of Uṣā wife of Aniruddha. (5) N. of a river commonly called karatoyā. (6) (nyau, –nyaḥ dual and pl.) N. of the constellation Phalgunī. –naṁ (1) Silver. (2) Gold. (3) Slight inflammation of the white of the eye. (4) Grass. –nāḥ (pl.) The descendants of Arjuna. — Comp. –upamaḥ the teak tree; also śākaduma and mahāpatrākhyavṛkṣa. –kāṁḍa a. having a white stem or appendage. –chavi a. white, of a white colour. –dhvajaḥ ‘white-bannered’, N. of Hanūmat. –pākī N. of a plant and its fruits. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch arjuna (von 5. arj) Uṇ. 3, 58. 1) adj. f. ī. a) “weisslich, licht, die Farbe des Tageslichts” (als m. die Farbe in abstr.) AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 83. TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. 1393. an. 3, 352. MED. n. 30. ahaśca kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ (NIR. 2, 11: = śuklam) ca ṚV. 6, 9, 1. kṛṣṇāyāḥ putro arjuno rātryā vatso ‘jāyata AV. 13, 3, 26. kṛṣṇā rūpāṇyarjunā ṚV. 10, 21, 3. vajram 3, 44, 5. vastrāṇi 39, 2. atke (von der Milch; SV. v. l. vom Soma) 9, 107, 13. vāramavyayam 69, 4. von Insecten AV. 2, 32, 2. 5, 23, 9. so heisst “die Erde” 5, 84, 2. “die Morgenröthe” 1, 49, 3. NAIGH. 1, 8. na hi rājatyayodhyeyaṁ sāsārevārjunī kṣapā R. 2, 114, 14. — b) “silbern”: preṅkhā haritā arjunā uta AV. 4, 37, 5. — 2) m. a) “Pfau” TRIK. 3, 3, 229. MED. n. 30. — b) “eine bes. Hautkrankheit” (nach SĀY.) ṚV. 1, 122, 5. — c) “Terminalia Arjuna W. u. A.”, ein starker Baum mit wirksamer Rinde, AK. 2, 4, 2, 25. TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. 1135. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. N. (BOPP) 12, 3. R. 3, 39, 13. 4, 1, 12. 27, 5. 5, 95, 8. SUŚR. 1, 138, 4. 2, 13, 4. 106, 12. 113, 18. arjunadrumaḥ TRIK. 3, 3, 285. arjunapuruṣam und arjunaśirīṣam gaṇa gavāśvādi. — d) ein Name Indra’s: ariṣṭo arjunaḥ VS. 10, 21. arjuno ha vai nāmendro yadasya guhyaṁ nāma ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 12. 5, 4, 3, 7. Ind. St. 1, 189. fg. WEBER, Lit. 110. 131. fg. — e) N. pr. der 3te Sohn Pāṇḍu’s, gezeugt von Indra mit Kuntī, TRIK. 2, 8, 16. 3, 3, 229. H. 708. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. INDR. 1, 10. fgg. DRAUP. 3, 6. MBH. 1, 3814 (vgl. 4785. fgg.). 4, 1375. VP. 437. 459. 613. 615. fg. KATHĀS. 9, 7. LALIT. 26. LIA. I, 638. 614. Anh. XXV. Ind. St. 1, 184. 189. fg. 206. 415. fg. WEBER, Lit. 36. 49. 110. fg. 113. fg. 176. fg. Verz. d. B. H. No. 434. arjunaparicaya GILD. Bibl. 179. -samāgama 166. arjunāḥ “die Nachkommen des” A. P. 2, 4, 66, Sch. — f) N. pr. ein Sohn Krtavīrya’s (daher Kārtavīrya zubenannt), der von Paraśurāma erschlagen wird, TRIK. 2, 8, 9. 3, 3, 228. H. 702. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. MBH. 12, 1750. R. 1, 75, 23. VP. 417. HARIV. 1850. fgg. LIA. I, 715. Anh. XXVII. Ind. St. 2, 136. 142. — g) N. pr. ein Śākya und grosser Mathematiker LALIT. 139. fgg. Auch in der spätern Zeit tritt Arjuna als Mannsname auf Z. f. die K. d. M. I, 226. Verz. d. B. H. No. 457. 814. arjunamiśra 392. 395. 398. — h) N. eines Landes VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 25 in Verz. d. B. H. 241. — i) “der einzige Sohn einer Mutter” (wohl mit Anspielung auf den Eigenn. Arjuna) H. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. — 3) f. -nī. a) “Kupplerin” H. an. MED. n. 31. — b) “Kuh” AK. 2, 9, 67. TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. 1265. an. MED. — c) “eine bes. Schlange” AV. 2, 24, 7. — d) du. und pl. N. eines Sternbildes, sonst auch phalgunyau genannt: maghāsu hanyante gāvo ‘rjunyoḥ paryuhyate ṚV. 10, 85, 13. Vgl. KAUŚ. 75. arjunyo vai nāmaitāstā etatparokṣamācakṣate phalgunya iti ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 11. Ind. St. 1, 190. WEBER, Lit. 222. — e) N. pr. Uṣā (vgl. u. 1, “a”, am Ende, wo “die Morgenröthe” so heisst), die Gemahlin Aniruddha’s TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 31. — f) N. eines Flusses, der sonst Bāhudā oder Karatoyā heisst, H. 1086. an. MED. — 4) n. a) = rajata “Silber”: divastvā pātu haritaṁ madhyāttvā pātvarjunam. bhūmyā ayasmayaṁ pātu AV. 5, 28, 9. 5 (vgl. ebend. 1: harite trīṇi rajate trīṇyayasi trīṇi). Nach NAIGH. 3, 7 ein rūpanāman — b) “Gold” H. 1044. — c) “eine Krankheit des Weissen im Auge” H. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 31. SUŚR. 2, 311, 2. — d) “Gras” AK. 2, 4, 5, 33. H. 1195. an. 3, 352. MED. In dieser Bed. oxytonirt Uṇ. 3, 59. ŚĀNT. 1, 17. arjuna 1) a) und zugleich 2) e) KATHĀS. 90, 43. — 1) a) am Ende arjunī R. 2, 114, 14 ist nach dem Schol. = śāradī oder śuklapakṣasaṁbandhinī. — 2) c) HARIV. 3453. v. l. für añjana HALĀY. 5, 26. — g) -deva Spr. 2216, v. l. — h) zu streichen; vgl. ārjunāyana. — 3) b) yathā hi gaṅgā saritāṁ variṣṭhā tathārjunīnāṁ kapilā variṣṭhā MBH. 13, 3596. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 arjuna The third of the Pāṇḍavas. arjuna 2 II A son of Emperor, Nimi. One Arjuna, son of emperor Nimi, got philosophical advice from a Muni named Asita (Brahmāṇḍapurāṇa, Chapter 47). arjuna 3 III (See Kārttavīryārjuna). arjuna 4 IV A member of Yama’s assembly. The other members are: Kapotaroma, Tṛṇaka, Sahadeva, Viśva, Sāśva, Kṛśāśva, Śaśabindu and Mahīśvara. (M.B., Sabhā Parva, Chapter 8, Verse 17). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 arjuna arj-una (from a lost vb. akin to rāj). I. adj., f. nī, White, Chr. 288, 3 = Rigv. i. 49, 3. II. m. 1. A tree, Terminalia Arjuna, Rām. 3, 19, 13. 2. The name of the third son of Pāṇḍu, Indr. 1, 10. III. f. nī, The dawn, Rām, 2, 114, 14. — Cf. [greek] Lat. argentum; the base of these forms is arj + vant: cf. also [greek] see rañj, rajata. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 arjuna f. ī silver-white. m. Arjuna, one of the Pāndavas, N. of a tree; f. du. & pl. name of a lunar mansion. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 arjuna arj-una, a. (ī) white, bright; m. N. of a son of Pāṇḍu. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 arjuna pu° arja–unan . svanāmakhyāte 1 vṛkṣe, so’ṅgaṇānniḥsṛtaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ karṣamāṇa ūdūkhalam . yamalābhyāṁ pravṛttābhyāmarjunābhyāṁ nivāritaḥ . madhyānniścakrāma tayoḥ śiśuḥ karṣannudūkhalam . tattasya karṣato baddhaṁ tiryaggatamudūkhalam . lagnaṁ tābhyāṁ samūlābhyāmarjunābhyāñcakarṣa saḥ . tāvarjunau kṛṣyamāṇau tena bālena vakṣasā . samūlaviṭapau bhagnau sa ca madhye jahāsa vai iti harivaṁ° . kadambaṁsarjārjunanīpaketakī ṛtu° . 2 madhyamapāṇḍave śuddhacaritatvānmadhyamapāṇḍavasyārjunatvam . pṛthivyāṁ caturantāyāṁ varṇīme durlabhaḥ samaḥ . karomi karma śuddhañca tena māmarjunaṁ viduḥ bhā° vi° pa° uttaraṁ prati tasya svanāmavyutpattikathanam . sa ca pāṇḍoḥ kṣetre kuntyāṁ śakreṇa janitaḥ evamuktā tataḥ śakramājuhāva yaśasvinī athājagāma devendro janayāmāsa cārjunam . jātamātre kumāre tu vāguvācāśarīriṇī . mahāgambhīranirghoṣā nabhonādayatīva ha . śṛṇvatāṁ sarvabhūtānāṁ teṣāṁ cāśramavāsinām . kuntīmābhāṣya vispaṣṭamuvācedaṁ śucissitām . kārtavīrya samaḥ kunti! śivatulyaparākramaḥ . eṣa śakra ivājayyo yaśaste prathayiṣyati . adityā viṣṇunā prītiryathā’bhūdabhivardhitā . tathāviṣṇusamaḥ prītiṁ vardhayiṣyati te’rjunaḥ . bhā° ā° pa° . pārthaḥ karṇabadhāya mārgaṇagaṇān yānarjunaḥ saṁdaghe līlā° 3 haihayādhipe kārtavīrye etassinneva kāle tu kṛtavīryasutobalī . arjuno nāma tejasvī kṣatriyo haihayādhipaḥ . dattātreyaprasādena rājā bāhusahasravān . cakravartī mahātejā viprāṇāmāśvamedhike . dadau sa pṛthivāṁ saptadvīpāṁ savanaparvatām . harivaṁ° 4 karavīre, 5 mayūre, tṛṇākhyāyāmityukteḥ 6 tṛṇe 7 dhavale . 8 śubhratāguṇavati tri° . ahaśca kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ ca ṛ° 6, 9, 1, arjunaṁ saureṇa tejasā śuklavarṇam bhā° . kṛṣṇā rūpāṇyarjunā vi vo made viśvā ṛ° 10, 21, 3 he agne! tvaṁ kṛṣṇā kṛṣṇānyarjunā arjunāni śvetavarṇāni bhā° piśaṅgamauñjīyujamarjunacchavim māghaḥ . (ājani) iti khyāte 9 netrarogabhede ekoyaḥ śaśarudhiropamastu vinduḥ śukrastho bhavatitadarjunaṁ vadanti mādhavaḥ . ephasyāmāturekasmin 10 putre medi° 11 indre arjunovai indroyadasya guhyaṁ nāma śata° vrā° . arjunasyāpatyam iñ . ārjuniḥ ābhimanyau . |
अर्जुनच्छवि – arjunacchavi | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899arjunacchavi “arjuna-cchavi” mfn. of a white colour, white. |
अवदात – avadāta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899avadāta “ava-dāta” mfn. ( “das”), cleansed, clean, clear
mfn. pure, blameless, excellent &c., of white splendour, dazzling white mfn. clear, intelligible avadāta “ava-dāta” m. white colour Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 avadāta a. [ava-dai-kta] (1) Beautiful; avadātakāṁtiḥ Dk. 107, 37. (2) Clean, clear, pure, spotless, refined, purified, polished; sarvavidyāvadātacetāḥ K. 36; so vidyāvadātaṁ mukhaṁ; śāstra-. (3) Bright, white; āpiśaṁgāvadātayā dehaprabhayā K. 36, 65, 128, 187, 189, 43, 62, 95; rajanikarakalāvadātaṁ kulaṁ K. 233; kuṁdāvadātāḥ kalahaṁsamālāḥ Bk. 2. 18; cf. also Bh. 2. 25; Ki. 11. 75, 3. 25; 13. 37; Śānti. 3. 14. (4) Virtuous, meritorious; anyasmiñ janmani na kṛtamavadātaṁ karma K. 62. (5) Yellow. –taḥ White or yellow colour. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch avadāta (von dā, dāyati mit ava) adj. 1) “rein” AK. 3, 4, 83. H. 1436. an. 4, 92. MED. t. 178. karuṇāvadāte (hṛdi) ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 14. PRAB. 35, 10. DHŪRTAS. 67, 3. BHAṬṬ. 2, 18. — 2) “weiss” oder “gelb” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 83. H. 1393. an. MED. śyāmāvadāta SĀV. 5, 8. R. 5, 14, 23. Als m. die Farbe in abstr. — 3) “angenehm” (manojña) H. an. avadāta 4) “klar, deutlich, verständlich” SĀH. D. 124, 14. 268, 11. — Vgl. u. 7. dā mit ava. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 avadāta a. clean, pure, white, clear. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 avadāta ava-dāta, pp. pure, white, clear: -tā, f. whiteness; -dāna, n. heroic deed; -dā-ra, m. breach: -ṇa, n. a. rending; bursting. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 avadāta pu° ava + dai–kta . 1 śubhre, 2 pīte ca varṇe . 3 tadvati 4 viśuddhe anyasmin janmani ca na kṛtamavadātam kāda° . 5 manojñe ca tri° . |
अवलक्ष – avalakṣa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899avalakṣa “a-valakṣa” mfn. = “balakṣa” q.v.
Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 avalakṣa a. (also written valakṣa) White. –kṣaḥ [avalakṣyate, ava-lakṣ- ghañ] The white colour. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch avalakṣa = valakṣa adj. “weiss”, m. “die weisse Farbe” SVĀMIN zu AK. 1, 1, 4, 22 im ŚKDR. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 avalakṣa ava-lakṣa, adj. White. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 avalakṣa pu° avalakṣyate ava + lakṣa–ghañ . 1 śvetavarṇe arśa° ādyac . 2 tadvati tri° . atolope valakṣopyubhayatra . |
असित – asita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899asita “a-sita” mfn. unbound
asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“sita”, “white”, appears to have been formed from this word, which is probably original, and not a compound of “a” and “sita”; cf. “asura” and “sura”), dark-coloured, black &c. asita m. the planet Saturn asita m. a poisonous animal (said to be a kind of mouse) asita m. N. of the lord of darkness and magic asita m. of a descendant of Kaśyapa (composer of , named also Devala ([]) or Asita Devala ([ asita m. N. of a man (with the patron. Vārṣagaṇa) asita m. of a son of Bharata asita m. of a ṛiṣi asita m. of a mountain asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“as”) m. a black snake asita m. a Mantra (saving from snakes) asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“ā”) f. a girl attending in the women’s apartments (whose hair is not whitened by age) asita m. the indigo plant asita m. N. of an Apsaras 12472 asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“asiknī”) f. “the dark one”, the night asita m. a girl attending in the women’s apartments asita m. N. of a wife of Daksha asita m. N. of the river Akesines (afterwards called Candra-bhāgā) in the Paṇjāb (“asiknī”) x, 75, 5. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 asita a. (1) Unbound(Ved). (2) [na sitaḥ śubhraḥ] Not white, black, dark-blue, dark-coloured; asitā moharajanī Śānti. 3. 4; Y. 3. 166; -locanā, -nayanā &c. –taḥ (1) The dark or blue colour. (2) The dark fortnight of a lunar month. (3) N. of the planet Saturn. (4) A black snake. (5) N. of the sage devala. (6) N. of a being presiding over darkness and magic. –tā (1) The Indigo plant. (2) A girl attending upon the harem (whose hair is not whitened by age); see asiknī. (3) The river Yamunā. (4) N. of a daughter of Vīraṇa and wife of Daksha. (5) N. of the river A kesines in the Punjab. — Comp. –aṁbujaṁ, –utpalaṁ the blue lotus. –aciṁs m. fire. –aśman, m. –upalaḥ a dark-blue stone; lapis lazuli. –keśā a woman having black hair. –keśāṁta a. having black locks of hair. –giriḥ, –nagaḥ ‘the blue mountain’; N. of a mountain. –grīva a. having a black neck. ( –vaḥ) fire. –ju a. (for -jānu) having black knees. –nayanaṁ a. black-eyed; Me. 112. –pakṣaḥ the dark fortnight; Pt. 1. 173. –phalaṁ the sweet cocoanut. –bhrū a. having black eye-lids. –mṛgaḥ the black antelope. –yavana = kālayavana q. v.; Śi. 15. 56. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch asita (3. a + sita von si) adj. “ungebunden” ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 9, 28. 11, 6. 7, 2, 27 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 26. 4, 2, 4. 4, 21. asita 1) adj. f. asitā, ved. asiknī P. 4, 1, 39, Vārtt. 1. 2. dieselbe Form auch klass. KĀŚ. “dunkelfarbig, schwarz” (als m. “Schwärze”) NIR. 9, 26. AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 17. 1397. vasma ṚV. 4, 13, 4. (uṣasaḥ) gūhantīrabhvamasitaṁ ruśadbhiḥ 51, 9. 1, 46, 10. tvacamasiknīm 9, 73, 5. viśa asiknīḥ (“das dunkle Volk” heissen “die Geister des Dunkels”) 7, 5, 3. naktaṁjātāsyoṣadhe rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 5, 13, 8. 8, 7, 1. avyāmasiknyām 12, 2, 20. 1, 23, 3. 11, 2, 18. svasitāyatalocanā N. 12, 46. MEGH. 111. asitakeśāntā N. 16, 17. niśāsitā R. 2, 96, 19. ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 4. anantā raśmayastasya – sitāsitāḥ karbunīlāḥ kapilāḥ pītalohitāḥ YĀJÑ. 3, 166. pakṣa “die dunkle, abnehmende Hälfte des Mondes” H. 147. — 2) m. a) “der Planet Saturn” H. 120. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. HORĀŚ. in Z. f. d. K. d. M. 4, 318. — b) N. pr. eines Herrschers des “Dunkels” und Zauberers: asitasya te brahmaṇā kaśyapasya gayasya ca AV. 1, 14, 4. tāṁ (keśavardhanīṁ) vītahavya ābharadasitasya gṛhebhyaḥ 6, 137, 1. asito dhānvo rājetyāha tasyāsurā viśaḥ ŚĀT. BR. 13, 4, 3, 11. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 7. — ein Kāśyapa, nach ṚV. ANUKR. neben Devala Verfasser der Lieder 9, 5– 24 (daher ein Asita Devala MBH. 1, 106. 2048. 2, 441. 1917 (debalaṁ cāsitam). 2038. 3, 510. 8263. 9, 2854. BHAG. 10, 13. HARIV. 951). steht im Geschlechte der Kāśyapa ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. — ein Vārṣagaṇa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. — ein Nachkomme Ikṣvāku’s, ein Sohn Bharata’s R. 1, 70, 27. 2, 110, 15. — Auch die Buddhisten erwähnen einen Ṛṣi Asita LALIT. 103. 110. 246. BURN. Intr. 141. 384. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 248 (18). — c) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 3, 8364. — 3) f. asitā. a) = asiknī “b.” (s. unten) BHARATA zu AK. 2, 6, 1, 18 im ŚKDR. — b) “die Indigo-Pflanze” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu H. 183. MBH. 1, 4819. HARIV. 12472. — 4) f. asiknī. a) “die Dunkle, Nacht” NAIGH. 1, 7. asiknīmeti ruśatīmapājan ṚV. 10, 3, 1. asiknyāṁ yajamāno na hotā 4, 17, 15. — b) “eine weibliche Dienerin von mittleren Jahren (noch schwarz, noch nicht grau) im Harem” AK. 2, 6, 1, 18. H. 521. MED. n. 33. — c) N. pr. eine Tochter Vīraṇa’s und Gemahlin Daksha’s HARIV. 120. fgg. VP. 117. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses im Pendshab, Akesines (später candrabhāgā), MED. n. 33. (bheṣajaṁ) yatsindhau yadasiknyām ṚV. 8, 20, 25. anders betont 10, 75, 5: asiknyā marudvṛdhe vitastayā (śṛṇuhi). VP. 183. Vgl. ROTH, Zur L. u. G. d. W. 138. fg. — Angeblich zusammeng. aus 3. a + sita “weiss”, aber dieses letztere Wort ist für die ältere Zeit nicht zu belegen und verdankt seinen Ursprung wohl dem missverstandenen asita, wie man auch aus asura ein sura gebildet hat. asita m. “eine schwarze Schlange” AV. 3, 27, 1. 5, 13, 5. 6. 6, 56, 2. 72, 1. 7, 56, 1. 10, 4, 5. 13. 12, 3, 55. vielleicht VS. 24, 37. In AV. 6, 137, 2: keśā naḍā iva vardhantāṁ śīrṣṇaste asitāḥ pari könnte eher asitāḥ die richtige Betonung sein. asita TS. 7, 4, 22, 1. asita 1) asitekṣaṇā R. 3, 52, 40. -pakṣe Spr. 1191, v. l. — 2) a) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 17, 25. BṚH. 2, 7. 11, 18. — b) N. pr. eines alten Weisen Verz. d. Oxf. H. 310,a,24. Sohnes des Kaśyapa 56,b,38. PAÑCAV. BR. 14,11,18. KĀṬH. 22,11. — c) KATHĀS. 111, 93. 95. 106. — d) “ein best. zu den Mäusen gerechnetes giftiges Thier” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19. asita m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2188. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 asita 1 I One of the Ṛṭviks of the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 asita [1] a. unbound. asita [2] (f. asitā & asiknī) a. dark-coloured, black. m. N. of a cert. myth. being & of sev. men; f. asiknī or asiknī N. of a river. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 asita 2. as-ita, a. (ā or -iknī) dark-coloured, black; m. N.; -pakṣa, m. dark half of a month; -pītaka, a. (ikā dark yellow; -aś-man, m. sapphire; -īkṣaṇa, a. black-eyed; -utpala, n. blue lotus. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 asita pu° sitaḥ śubhraḥ virodhe na° ta° . 1 śubhravarṇabhinne tadviruddhe kṛṣṇavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . 3 kṛṣṇapakṣe pu° . 4 nīloṣadhau antaḥpuracāriṇyāmavṛddhāyāṁ 5 preṣyāyāñca strī ṅīp kṛṣṇavarṇaparatayā knaśca asiknītyeva . asitagirinibhaṁ syāt kajjvalaṁ sindhupātram puṣpadantaḥ tantumavavyayannasi tam ṛ° 4, 13, 4, 5 yamunāyāṁ tasyāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam strī sitāsite yatra saridvare śubhe kāśī° . asyāḥ strītve’pi chandasītyukteḥ na knaḥ tena ṅībapi na . 6 devale ṛṣibhedepu° . asitodevalovyāsaḥ svayañcaiva bravīṣi me gītā . asitamuniśca himavataḥ ekaparṇāṁ nāma sutāmupayeme yathāha hari° 18 a° . tisraḥ kanyāstu menāyāṁ janayāmāsa śailarāṭ . aparṇāmekaparṇāñca tṛtīyāmekapāṭalām . tapaścarantyaḥ sumahadduścaraṁ devadānavaiḥ . lokān santāpayāmāsustāstisraḥ sthāṇujaṅgamān . āhāramekaparṇena ekaparṇā samācarat . pāṭalāpuṣpamekañca ādadhāvekapāṭalā . ekā tatra nirāhārā tāṁ mātā pratyaṣedhayat . umā iti niṣedhantī mātṛsnehena duḥkhitā . sā tathoktā tadāmātrā devī duścaracāriṇī . umetyevābhavat khyātā triṣu lokeṣu sundarī tathaiva nāmnā teneha viśrutā yogadharmiṇī . evaṁ trisraḥkumārīrvarṇayitvā . sarvāśca brahmavādinyaḥ sarvāścaivoddhvairetasaḥ . umā tāsāṁ variṣṭhā ca jyeṣṭhā ca varavarṇinī . mahāyogabalopetā mahādeva mupasthitā . asitasyaikaparṇā tu devalasya mahātmanaḥ . patnī dattā tathā brahman! yogācāryāya dhīmate . jaijīṣavyāya tu tathā viddhi tāmekapāṭalām . ete kanye mahābhāge yogācāryamupasthite . 7 śanoca 8 apsarobhede strī asitā ca subāhuśca suvṛttā mṛdukā tathā . hari° va° . |
इंद्रः – iṁdraḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
iṁdraḥ [iṁd-ran; iṁdatīti iṁdraḥ; idi aiśvarye Malli.] (1) The lord of gods. (2) The god of rain, rain; cloud. (3) A lord or ruler (as of men &c.); first or best (of any class of objects), always as the last member of comp.; nareṁdraḥ a lord of men i. e. a king; so mṛgeṁdraḥ a lion; gajeṁdraḥ the lord or chief of elephants; so yogīṁdraḥ, kapīṁdraḥ. (4) A prince, king. (5) The pupil of the right eye. (6) N. of the plant kuṭaja. (7) Night. (8) One of the divisions of bhāratavarṣa. (9) N. of the 26th Yoga. (10) The human or animal soul. (11) A vegetable poison. (12) The Yoga star in the 26th Nakshatra. (13) Greatness. –drā The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī. [Indra, the god of the firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭaka, and in Rv. 10. 90. 13 he is said to have sprung from the mouth of Purusha. He is of a ruddy or golden colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the demous of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi, Vṛtra, Śambara, Namuchi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles, and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain, and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achievements (cf. Rv. 10. 119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother; a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the deliverer and comforter of his servants. He is a wall of defence; his friend is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts of temporal blessings, as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence, prosperous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra’s wife is Indrani, who is invoked among the goddesses. Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and Dākṣāyaṇi or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa (though in some places Viṣṇu is regarded as his younger brother, cf. R. 14. 59, 15. 40), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is commonly styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of which is his seduction of Ahalya, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage impressed upon him a 1000 marks resembling the female organ, and he was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the Rāmāyaṇa Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off to Laṅkā by Rāvaṇa’s son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received the title of ‘Indrajit.’ It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a punishment for his seduction of Ahalya. He is also represented as being in constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending down nymphs to beguile their minds (see. Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, grandson of Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that he and Kṛṣṇa were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in spite of Indra’s resistance. His wife is Indrani, the daughter of the demon Puloman, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his achievements, e. g. vṛtrahan, balabhid, pākaśāsana, gotrabhid, puraṁdara, śatakratu, jiṣṇu, namucisūdana &c. (see Ak. I. 1. 44-47). The Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvati; his garden, Nandana; his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow, and his sword, Paranja]. — Comp. –agniḥ the fire produced from the contact of clouds; -dhūmaḥ frost, snow; -devatā the 16th lunarmansion. –anujaḥ, –avarajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Narayaṇa. –ariḥ an Asura or demon. –avasānaḥ a desert. –aśanaḥ 1. hemp (dried and chewed). –2. the shrub which bears the seed used in jeweller’s weight, (guṁjāvṛkṣa) –āyudhaṁ Indra’s weapon, the rainbow; iṁdrāyudhadyotitatoraṇāṁkaṁ R. 7. 4, 12. 79; K. 127. ( –dhaḥ) 1. N. of horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapinjala changed into a horse). –2. a horse marked with black about the eyes. ( –dhā) a kind of leech. –āsanaṁ 1. the throne of Indra. –2. a throne in general. –3. a foot of five short syllables. –ijyaḥ N. of bṛhaspati the preceptor of gods. –īśvaraḥ one of the forms of Śiva-linga. –utsavaḥ a festival honouring Indra. –ṛṣabha a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an epithet of the earth. –karman m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra’s deeds). –kīlaḥ 1. N. of the mountain maṁdara. –2. a rock. ( –laṁ) the banner of Indra. –kuṁjaraḥ Indra’s elephant, Airāvata. –kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain. –kṛṣṭa a. ‘ploughed by Indra,’ growing exuberantly or in a wild state. ( –ṣṭaḥ) a kind of corn produced by rain-water. –ketuḥ Indra’s banner. –kośaḥ –ṣaḥ, –ṣakaḥ 1. a couch, sofa. –2. a plat-form. –3. a projection of the roof of a house. –4. a pin or bracket projecting from the wall (nāgadaṁta). –giriḥ the maheṁdra mountain. –guruḥ, ācāryaḥ the teacher of Indra; i. e. bṛhaspati. –gopaḥ, — gopakaḥ [iṁdro gopo rakṣako’sya, varṣābhavatvāttasya] a kind of insect of red or white colour; K. 100. –caṁdanaṁ the white sandal wood. –cāpaṁ, –dhanus n. 1. a rainbow; vidyutvaṁtaṁlalitavanitāḥ seṁdracāpaṁ sacitrāḥ Me. 64; Śi. 7. 4. –2. the bow of Indra. –chaṁdas n. [iṁdra iva sahasranetreṇa sahasragucchena chādyate] a necklace consisting of 1000 strings. –jananaṁ Indra’s birth. –jananīya a. treating of Indra’s birth (as a work). –jā a. Ved. born or arising from Indra. –jālaṁ [iṁdrasya parameśvarasya jālaṁ māyeva] 1. the net of Indra. –2. a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war. –3. deception, cheating. –4. conjur ing, jugglery, magical tricks; svapneṁdrajālasadṛśaḥ khalu jīvalokaḥ Śānti. 2. 2; K. 105. –jālika a. [iṁdrajāla-ṭhan] deceptive, unreal, delusive. ( –kaḥ) a juggler, conjurer. –jit m. ‘conqueror of Indra’, N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda, a son Rāvaṇa. When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat, Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to Lanka. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release, and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, ‘conqueror of Indra’; but the victor refused to release his prisoner unless he were promised immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is represented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was engaged in a sacrifice]. -haṁtṛ or vijayin m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa. –jyeṣṭha a. Ved. led by Indra. –tāpanaḥ the thundering of clouds. –tūlaṁ, tūlakaṁ a flock of cotton. –damanaḥ the son of Bāṇāsura. –dāruḥ the tree Pinus Devadāru. –druḥ, drumaḥ 1 the plant Terminalia Arjuna (arjuna). –2. the plant kuṭaja. –dvīpaḥ –paṁ one of the 9 Dvīpas or divisions of the continent (of India). –dhvajaḥ a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra. –nakṣatraṁ Indra’s lunar mansion phalgunī. –netraṁ 1. the eye of Indra. –2. the number one thousand. –nīlaḥ [iṁdra iva nīlaḥ śyāmaḥ] a sapphire; R. 13. 54; 16. 69; Me. 46, 77. –nīlakaḥ an emerald. –patnī Indra’s wife, śacī. –parṇī, –puṣpā N. of a medicinal plant. –parvataḥ 1. the maheṁdra mountain. –2. a blue mountain. –putrā N. of aditi. –purogama, –puraḥsara, –śreṣṭa a. led or preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head. –purohitaḥ N. of bṛhaspati. (–tā) the asterism Pushya. –prasthaṁ N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the Pāṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi); iṁdraprasthagamastāvatkāri mā saṁtu cedayaḥ Śi. 2. 63. –praharaṇaṁ Indra’s weapon, the thunderbolt. –bheṣajaṁ dried ginger. –makhaḥ a sacrifice in honour of Indra. –mahaḥ 1. a festival in honour of Indra. –2. the rainy season; – kāmukaḥ a dog. –mādana a. animating or delighting Indra. –medin a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra. –yavaḥ, –vaṁ seed of the Kutaja tree. –luptaḥ, –ptaṁ, –luptakaṁ 1. excessive baldness of the head. –2. loss of beard. –lokaḥ Indra’s world, Svarga or Paradise. –lokeśaḥ 1. lord of the Indra’s world, i. e. Indra. –2. a guest (who, if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host). –vaṁśā, –vajrā N. of two metres, see Appendix. –vallarī, –vallī N. of a plant (pārijāta) or of iṁdravāruṇī. –vastiḥ [iṁdrasya ātmanaḥ vastiriva] the calf (of the leg). –vātatama a. Ved. desired by Indra. –vāyū (du) Indra and Vayu. –vāruṇī, –vāruṇikā Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd (Mar. moṭhī kaṁvaḍaLa). –vāh a. carrying Indra. –vṛkṣaḥ the Devadaru tree. –vṛddhā a kind of abscess. –vaiḍūryaṁ a kind of precious stone. –vrataṁ Indra’s rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who is said to follow iṁdravrata when he distributes benefits as Indra pours down rain); vārṣikāṁścaturo māsān yarthedropyabhivarṣati . tathābhivarṣetsvaṁ rāṣṭraṁ kāmairiṁdravrataṁ caran … –śaktiḥ f. Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified. –śatruḥ 1. an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on the last syllable), an epithet of prahlāda; R. 7. 35. –2. [iṁdraḥ śatruḥ yasya] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of vṛtra (when the accent is on the first syllable). (This refers to a. legend in the Śat. Br., where it is said that Vṛtra’s father intended his son to become the destroyer of Indra, and asked him to say iṁdraśatrurvadhasva &c., but who, through mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra; cf. Śik. 52: –maṁtro hīnaḥ svarato varṇato vā mithyāprayukto na tamarthamāha . sa vāgvajro yajamānaṁ hināsti yatheṁdraśatruḥ svaratoparādhāt … –śalabhaḥ a kind of insect. –saṁdhā connection or alliance with Indra. –sārathiḥ. 1. N of Mātalī. –2. an epithet of Vāyu, driving in the same carriage with Indra. –sutaḥ, –sūnuḥ 1. N. of (a) Jayanta; (b) Arjuna; (c) Vāli, the king of monkeys. –2. N. of the arjuna tree. –surasaḥ, –surā a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications (nirguṁḍī). –senā Indra’s missile or host. –senānīḥ the leader of Indra’s armies, epithet of Kārtikeya. –stut m., –stomaḥ 1. praise of Indra, N. of a particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies. –2. a sacrifice in honour of Indra. –havaḥ invocation of Indra. –hastaḥ a kind of medicament. |
ईषत् – īṣat | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899īṣat mfn. (pres. p.) attacking, hurting.
īṣat ind. (gana “svar-ādi” ; for the use of “īṣat” see little, a little, slightly Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 īṣat ind. [īs-ati] Slightly, to some extent, a little; īṣat cuṁbitāni S. 1. 3; īṣacca kurute sevāṁ Pt. 1. 141. — Comp. –uṣṇa a. tepid, slightly warm. –ūna a. not quite complete, a little less than; īṣadūnārthe kalyab. –kara a. 1. doing little. –2. easy to be accomplished; Mv. 4. ( –raṁ) very little. –guṇa a. of little merit. –jalaṁ shallow water, a little water. –darśanaṁ a glance, sight, view, glimpse. –nāda a. slightly sounding (a term applied to unaspirated soft consonants). –nimaya a. exchanged for a little. –pāṁḍu a. a little white or pale, whitish. ( –ḍuḥ) a pale or light-brown colour. –pāna a. that of which a little is drunk. ( –naṁ) a small draught. –paruṣaḥ a mean or contemptible person. –rakta a. pale red. ( –ktaḥ) 1. pale-red colour. –2. undistinguishable colour. –labha, –pralaṁbha a. to be got for little. –vivṛta a. slightly open. –śvāsa a. slightly resounding). –spṛṣṭa a. slightly touched (applied to the semi-vowels). –hāsaḥ slight laughter, a smile. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch īṣat gaṇa svarādi zu P. 1, 1, 37. adv. “wenig, leicht, etwas” AK. 3, 5, 8. H. 1536. tānīṣadivopatapya ŚAT. BR. 2, 5, 2, 14. (yaḥ) īṣacca kurute sevām PAÑCAT. I, 157. Meist am Anfange von compp. P. 2, 2, 7. NIR. 3, 18. – stabdha SUŚR. 1, 20, 15. īṣadamlairanamlairvā 47, 4. 129, 6. 151, 6. 165, 19. 179, 19. īṣanmīlitalocana VET. 13, 7. īṣatsahāsa DEV. 4, 11. īṣaddhāsā 7, 2. īṣatspṛṣṭa AV. PRĀT. 1, 30. P. 1, 1, 9, Sch. sapuṣpamīṣatparṇāḍhyam R. 4, 7, 12. 15. -piṅgala Ind. St. 2, 287, 4. – pāṇḍu AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1393. īṣaduṣṇa 1386. īṣatpakva 399. īṣatkārya “mit geringer Arbeit verbunden”: eṣā (guhā) lakṣmaṇavāṇānāmīṣatkāryā vidāraṇe “diese kann durch” L. “Pfeile leicht gesprengt werden” R. 4, 54, 12. īṣatkara “leicht zu vollbringen”: tvayā saha dharmacāriṇyā mātṛpitṛvadho mameṣatkara eva PRAB. 36, 6. 8, 15. īṣatkaraḥ kaṭo bhavatā Sch. zu P. 3, 3, 126. 2, 3, 69. 6, 2, 139. īṣatkara “klein wenig” TRIK. 3, 2, 8. īṣatpānaḥ somo bhavatā P. 3, 3, 128, Sch. īṣannimaya, īṣatpramaya, īṣadvilaya P. 6, 1, 50, Vārtt., Sch. īṣallabha, īṣatpralambha P. 7, 1, 67, Sch. īṣanmarṣa, īṣanmarṣaṇa VOP. 26, 199. īṣadāḍhyaṁbhavaṁ bhavatā “du kannst leicht reich werden”, īṣadāḍhyaṁkaro devadatto bhavatā D. “kann leicht durch dich reich gemacht werden” P. 3, 3, 127, Sch. Ueber diese Art compp., wo īṣat ganz wie su gebraucht wird, s. P. 3, 3, 126. VOP. 26, 197. fgg. īṣat , nicht im comp.: unnatamīṣat VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 8. 32, 5. 81, 19. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 īṣat īṣat (probably ntr. of the ptcple. of the present of īkṣ, with ṣ for kṣ), adv. 1. A little, Daśak. in Chr. 198, 18. 2. When the former part of a comp., especially when followed by a word denoting the partic. of the fut. pass.: Easily, e. g. īṣat-kārya (vb. kṛ), Easy to be made, Rām. 4, 54, 12 (vidāraṇe, easy to be cleft). īṣat- kara (vb. kṛ), Easy to be performed, Prab. 36, 6. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 īṣat adv. nearly, slightly, easily, a little. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 īṣat īṣ-at, [n. pr. pt.] ad. slightly, a little, somewhat; easily (often °-); -kara, a. easily performed; -kārya, fp. easy to (lc.); -pāna, a. easy to drink. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 īṣat vya (īṣaṇamiti . īṣ + at .) alpam . kiñcit . manāk . ityamaraḥ .. (taṁ dṛṣṭvā kupitaṁ putramīṣatprasphuritādharaṁ . iti viṣṇupurāṇe .. 1 . 11 . 12 . īṣat sahāsamamalaṁ paripūrṇacandravimbānukāri kanakottamakāntikāntaṁ . iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe, śakrādimāhātmyam .. hṛdi tiṣṭhati yacchuddhaṁ raktamīṣat sapītakam . iti carake sūtrasthāne saptadaśādhyāyaḥ ..) Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 īṣat avya° īṣa–ati . 1 alpe, 2 kiñcidarthe ca . īṣatsahāsamamalaṁ paripūrṇacandravimbānukāri devīmā° īṣadīṣadanavotavidya yā tātamātṛmudamāvivardhayan kusumā° . īṣadakṛtā prā° samā° . īṣaduṣṇaḥ īṣatpāṇḍu . 3 sūkṣmārthe ca īṣaddhautaṁ navaṁ śuklaṁ sadaśaṁ yanna dhāritam vaśiṣṭhaḥ . īṣat sūkṣmatantukamiti raghunandanaḥ etadupapade dhātoḥ khal īṣatkaraḥ īṣaddamaḥ . dṛśādestu yuc vā . īṣaddarśaḥ īṣaddarśanaḥ . etatpūrbe āḍhye upapade khal īṣadāḍhyaṅkaraḥ īṣadāḍhyaṅkaro’pyeṣaḥ bhaṭṭiḥ īṣadāḍhyambhavam . |
ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र – ūrdhvapuṇḍra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ūrdhvapuṇḍra “ūrdhva-puṇḍra” n. = “-tilaka” above.
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch ūrdhvapuṇḍra (ū- + pu-) m. “eine auf der Stirn eines Brahmanen mit Sandel u.s.w. senkrecht gezogene Linie” BRAHMĀṆḌA-P. im ĀHNIKAT. ŚKDR. -puṇḍraka dass. DHŪRTAS. 70, 11. ūrdhvapuṇḍra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,46. 248,a,26. 258,b,9. 267,b,10. 19. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 ūrdhvapuṇḍra A mark worn on the forehead with yellow ochre. This mark should be made by earth or ochre, which should be taken from the top of a mountain peak, banks of rivers, seashore, Śaivite temple serpent-hill or from under a holy basil. The fruits of wearing the mark will vary according to the colour of the ochre. Black ochre will afford peace, red soil will procure docility, yellow soil will get prosperity, and white ochre will give duty or righteousness. As the fruits vary according to the colour, so also it will vary according to the finger used to put the sign. If the mark is made with the thumb the man will become stout. If it is done with the middle finger he will have long life. If it is done with the fourth finger (anāmikā), he will get food and if it is made with the index finger (tarjanī) he will get salvation. The form of the mark also could be changed. The mark may be made in the form of a flame, the leaf of bamboo reed, a lotus-bud, a fish, a turtle or a conch. If the mark is as large as ten fingerbreadths it is superfine. If of nine finger-breadths, it is medium super-fine; and if it is eight and a half fingerbreadths, it is lower superfine. In the same way if the finger-breadth of the mark is seven, six or five they will be super medium, medium medium and lower medium. If it is four, three and two they will be of the low, medium low and lowest. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 ūrdhvapuṇḍra m. the perpendicular line on the forehead of a Brahman. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 ūrdhvapuṇḍra pu° ūrdhva ūrdhvamukhaḥ puṇḍraḥ ikṣuyaṣṭiriva . lalāṭasthe ūrdhvamukhe puṇḍrekṣavat rekhātmake tilakabhede . taddhāraṇe vidhiniṣedhādikaṁ nirūpyate . ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ mṛdā kṛryāt tripuṇḍraṁ bhasmanā sadā . tilakaṁ vai dvijaḥ kuryāccandanena yaddṛcchayā śrā° ta° pu° . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ dvijaḥ kuryāt kṣatriyastu tripuṇḍrakam . ardhacandrantu vaiśyaśca vartulaṁ śudrayonijaḥ ā° ta° brahmā° pu° . aśucirvāpya nācāro manasā pāpamācaran . śucireva bhavennityamūrdhapuṇḍrāṅkitonaraḥ ūrdhapuṇḍradharo martyomriyate yatra kutracit . śvapāko’pi vimānastho mama loke mahīyate iti brahmapu° . taddhāraṇe vaidikadvijātiriktasyaivādhikāraḥ yathoktaṁ devībhāgavate śrīnārāyaṇena ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ triśūlañca vartulaṁ caturasrakam . ardhacandrādi vā liṅgaṁ vedaniṣṭho na dhārayet! janmanā labdhajātistu vedapanthānamāśritaḥ . puṇḍrāntaraṁ bhramādvāpi lalāṭe naiva dhārayet . khyātikāntyādisiddhyarthamapi viṣṇvāvagamādiṣu . sthitaṁ puṇḍrāntaraṁ naiva ghārayedvaidikojanaḥ . ni° si° sūtasaṁ° viṣṇvāgamāditantreṣu dīkṣitānāṁ vidhīyate . śaṅkhacakragadāpadmairaṅkanaṁ nānyadehinām . vedamārgaikaniṣṭhastu mohenāpyaṅkitoyadi . patatyeva na sandeha stathā puṇḍrāntarādapi . śaṅkhacakrādyaṅkanaṁ ca gītanṛtyādikaṁ tathā . ekajāterayaṁ gharmo naṁ jātu syāt dvijanmanaḥ . śaṅkhacakramṛdā yastu kuryāt taptāyasena vā . sa śūdravadbahiḥ kāryaḥ sarvasmāddvijacarmaṇaḥ yathā śmaśānajaṁ kāṣṭhamanarhaṁ sarvakarmasu . dvijastu taptaśaṅkhādiliṅgāṅkitatanustathā . saṁbhāṣya kauravaṁ yāti yāvadindrāścaturdaśa vṛhannā° . śivakeśavayoraṅkān śūlacakrādikān dvijaḥ . na dhārayeta matimān vaidike vartmani sthitaḥ tataśca tripuṇḍrādidhāraṇavidhāyakavākyaṁ vaidiketaradvijaviṣayam śūdraviṣayañca . yadapi brāhmaṇasya taddhāraṇavidhānam agnihotraṁ yathā nityaṁ vedasyādhyayanaṁ yathā . brāhmaṇasya tatheveha taptamudrādidhāraṇam padmapu° . brāhmaṇaḥ kṣatriyo vaiśyaḥ śūdro vā yadi vetaraḥ . śaṅkhacakrāṅkitatanustulasīmañjarīdharaḥ . gopīcandanaliptāṅgodṛṣṭaścettadaghaṁ kutaḥ kāśī° . tadapi vaidiketavavipraparam sarvasāmañjasyāt evaṁ śastrārthesthite’pi kulācārāt tasyasarvaiḥ kartavyatā . tathaiva bhārataṭīkāyāṁ nīlakaṇṭhena nirṇītam yathā śroṇāmeka udakaṁ gāmavājati māṁsamekaḥ piṁśati sūnayā bhṛtam ā nimrucaḥ śakṛdeko apābharat kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ pitarāvupāvatuḥ śrutiḥ . asyārthaḥhe ṛbhavaḥ! bhavatāṁ madhve ekaḥ śroṇāṁ ślakṣṇāṁ gāṁ mṛdaṁ gopīcandranādirūpāṁ tīrtha nikaṭasthāṁ mukhyakarmabhūtāṁ prati udakaṁ jalaṁ gauṇakarma avājati avagamayati antarbhāvitaṇyartho’jatiḥ . śrīṇāṁ gām udakena miśrayatītyarthaḥ śroṇāṁ gāṁ raktacandanādirūpāṁ vā tathā . ekaḥ sūnayā hiṁsayā tatkartrā ābhṛtaṁ āhṛtaṁ māṁsaṁ gorocanākhyaṁ piṁśati pinaṣṭi udakena saha iti śeṣaḥ nimrucaḥ nitarāmastaṁ gacchato dagdhendhanasyāgneḥ sambandhi śakṛt gomayaṁ śuṣkagomayotthaṁ bhasmeti yāvat apābharat apāhṛtavān atrāpyudakena saheti śeṣaḥ vyavahitāścetichandasi vyavahitenāpyupasargeṇa kriyāyāḥ sambandha . hṛgraho rbhaśchandasīti hasyabha . etāni mantrapadāni asaṁpūrṇārthatvāt svārthalābhāya brāhmaṇamapekṣante iṣe tvorje tvetyādimantravat tatra yathā iṣe tveti śākhāṁ chinatti ūrje tvetyanumārṣṭīti brāhmaṇānusārāt he śākhe tvā tvām iṣe annāya chinadmīti ūrje paśubhyaḥ anumājrmīti vyākhyātam evamihāpi vāsudevopaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusārāt ūrdhapuṇḍrārthaṁ ślakṣṇāṁ mṛdaṁ jalena miśrayediti vyākhyeyaṁ tathā kālāgnirudravṛhajjābālādyupaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusā rāt tripuṇḍrakartuḥ nimrucaḥ śakṛdapābharaditi ca vyākhyeyam evamitarasyāpi padasya brāhmaṇamantraliṅgādyupavṛṁhaṇe smṛtibhyaścāṣṭakāprapā vidhivadanumeyaṁ tathāca śroṇāmiti padasya raktāmiti vyākhyāne sauraśāktagāṇeśānāṁ raktameva pārthivaṁ dravya puṇḍrārthe tattattantre vidhīyate vaiṣṇavānāṁ pītaṁ śaivānāṁ bhasmeti anena tattatpuṇḍraviśeṣopalakṣitatattaddevatā bhajanenāpi devatābhāvaṁ prāpnuvantīti vighīyate . kevalavaidikānāṁ tu śroṇāṁ ślakṣṇāmiti vyākhyānena tritayasyāpi samuccayaḥ snātvā puṇḍraṁ mṛdā kuryāt dhutvā caiba tu bhasmanā . devān viprān samabhyarcya candanena samācarediti smṛtibhyaḥ atra gorocanāgrahaṇaṁ candanādyaṣṭagandhopalakṣaṇārtham eteṣāṁ vikalpasamuccayapakṣāṇāṁ pitṛpaitāha paraṁparākrameṇa vyavasthāmāha kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ pitarā vupāvaturiti putrahitārthe yatkiñcidvrataṁ pitarau mātā pitarau pitṛpitāmahau vā upetya svīkṛtya avatuḥ vrataṁ samyak paripālayāmāsatuḥ tadeva tasya śreyaḥ sādhanati tyarthaḥ evaṁ sati tīrthāni yajñādayastantramārgeṇa sūryādyanyatamopāstiḥ kevalavaidikatā ceti devatābhāvaprāptisādhanāni ityantena . śrāddhakarmaṇi tu tripuṇḍrādau vidhiniṣedhayorvyavasthā ni° si° uktā yathā . jape home tathā dāne svādhyāye pitṛkarmaṇi . tatsarvaṁ naśyati kṣipramūrdhvapuṇḍrabinākṛtamiti hemādrāvukteḥ . yajñodānaṁ japo homaḥ svādhyāyaḥ pitṛkarma ca . vṛthā bhavati viprendrā! ūrdhvapuṇḍravinākṛtamiti vṛhannāradīyāt ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryāddaive pitnye ca karmaṇīti vṛddhaparāśarokteśca ūrdhapuṇḍradhāraṇaṁ paitre vihitam . anye tu ūrdhvapuṇḍrodvijātīnāmagnihotrasamovidhiḥ . śrāddhakāle ca saṁprāpte kartā bhoktā ca varjayediti vāmahaste ca ye darbhā gṛhe raṅgabalintathā . lalāṭe tilakaṁ dṛṣṭvā nirāśāḥ pitaro gatāḥ iti saṁgrahokteḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ tripuṇḍraṁvā candrākāramathāpi vā . śrāddhakartā na kurvīta yāvat piṇḍānna nirvapet iti viśvaprakāśe vacanācca na dhāryamityāhuḥ . atra kulācārādeva vyavasthā . ata eva vṛhannāradoyeḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍrañca tulasīṁ śrāddhe necchanti kecana ityatrṛkecanetyuktam ūrdhvapuṇḍravidhiḥ śrāddhabhoktṛparaḥ, niṣedhaḥ kartṛparaḥ iti pṛthvīcandraḥ . yattu hemādrau devalaḥ lalāṭe puṇḍrakaṁ vṛṣṭvā skandhe mālyaṁ tathaiva ca . nirāśā pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā ca vṛṣalīpatimiti . tadgandhatripuṇḍraviṣayam . prākipaṇḍadānāt gandhādyairnālaṅkuryātsvavigraham ityāśvalāyanokteḥ puṇḍraṁ vartulamityaparārke madanaratne ca . pṛthvīcandrastu puṇḍraṁ tripuṇḍram ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryānna kuryādvai tripuṇḍrakam . nirāśāḥ pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā caiva tripuṇḍrakamiti vṛddhaparāśarokteḥ . bhoktustiryaglapo bhavatyeva . varjayettilakaṁ bhāle śrāddhakāle ca sarvadā . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁtripuṇḍraṁ vā dhārayettu prayatnataḥ iti vyāsokterityāha . pṛthvīcandrodaye brāhme sahadarbheṇa hastena yaḥ kuryāttilakaṁ budhaḥ . ācamya sa viśudhyeta darbhatyāgena caiva hi . |
ऋक्षदेव – ṛkṣadeva | Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975ṛkṣadeva Son of Śikhaṇḍī. Mahābhārata, Droṇa Parva, Chapter 23 refers
to his horse with white and red colour. |
ऋश्यक – ṛśyaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ṛśyaka mfn. ifc. having the colour of or looking like the white-footed
antelope Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch ṛśyaka von ṛśya (caturṣvartheṣu) P. 4, 2, 80. |
कदम्ब – kadamba | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kadamba m. ( iv, 82) Nauclea Cadamba (a tree with orange-coloured
fragrant blossoms) &c. m. white mustard m. Andropogon Serratus m. turmeric m. a particular mineral substance m. a particular position of the hand kadamba m. (in astron.) the pole of the ecliptic on m. an arrow (cf. “kādamba”) m. N. of a dynasty kadamba n. a multitude, assemblage, collection, troop, herd kadamba see under 1. “kad”. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kadamba 1) m. a) “Nauclea Cadamba Roxb.”, ein Baum mit orangefarbener duftender Blüthe, Uṇ. 4, 83. AK. 2, 4, 2, 22. TRIK. 3, 3, 281. H. 1138. an. 3, 447. MED. b. 9. MBH. 3, 14494. 13, 635. N. 12, 3. DRAUP. 2, 1. R. 3, 79, 38. SUŚR. 1, 138, 9. 141, 14. 259, 1. 263, 1. BHARTṚ. 1, 42. MṚCCH. 91, 17. VIKR. 124. MEGH. 26. RAGH. 15, 99. VP. 168. 571. kadambānilāḥ SĀH. D. 5, 1. Neben nīpa MBH. 3, 935. R. 5, 74, 4. MṚCCH. 86, 18. — b) “weisser Senf” (siddhārtha, sarṣapa) H. an. und MED. — c) “Andropogon serratus Retz.” (devatāḍaka) RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — d) “eine best. mineralische Substanz” (mākṣika) H. 1054. — 2) f. ī N. einer Pflanze (devadālīlatā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 3) n. “Menge” TRIK. H. an. MED. abjādikadambe ṣaṇḍam AK. 1, 2, 3, 41. — Vgl. kadambaka. kadamba 1) a) KIR. 5, 9. -korakanyāyāt BHĀṢĀP. 165. yadvatkadambapuṣpagranthiḥ pracitaḥ samantataḥ kusumaiḥ. tadvatsarvaiḥ satvairjalajaiḥ sthalajaiśca bhūgolaḥ.. ĀRYABH. SIDDH. 3, 7. “The” Kadamba “flower when full blown is invested with projecting antherae like the erect bristles of a hedge-hog”, WILSON in HINDU. Th. II, 80, N. — e) “eine best. Stellung der Hand” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 86,a,30. 202,a,4. — f) “der Pol der Ekliptik” Schol. zu SŪRYAS. 5, 1. — 3) gopa- GĪT. 2, 4. phena- 11, 25. kadambānāṁ kadambeṣu KĀŚĪKH. 32, 94 bei AUFRECHT, HALĀY. Ind. rolamba- “Bienenschwarm” Spr. 2668. kadamba 1) f) GOLĀDHY. 8, 42. fgg. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kadamba kadamba, I. m. A tree, Nauclea cadamba (its flower, when fullblown, is covered with projecting anthers), Rām. 5, 74, 4; Kir. 5, 9. II. n. Plenty, Śāk. 87, 15 (Prākṛ.). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kadamba m. the Kadamba tree (has orange-coloured fragrant blossoms). m. multitude, group. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kadamba kadamba, -ka -ka, m. a tree bearing orange-coloured blossoms; n. multitude, plenty; swarm. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kadamba pu° kada–karaṇe amvac . darśanena virahivaiklavyasādhane (kadama) vṛkṣe amaraḥ . ekadvāre catuścakraṁ vanamālāvimūṣitam . kadambakusumākāraṁ lakṣmīnārāyaṇaṁ viduḥ śālagrāmalakṣaṇe purā° . kadamvamukulasthūlairabhivṛṣṭāṁ prajāśrubhiḥ raghuḥ kadambamukale dvaṣṭiḥ samāropitā udbhaṭaḥ . kadambomadhuraḥ śītaḥ kaṣāyo lavaṇo guruḥ . saroviṣṭambhakṛdrūkṣaḥ kaphastanyānilapradaḥ māvapra° tadguṇā uktāḥ . tasyabhedāstatraiva . nīpomahākadambaḥ syāt dhārā kadamba ityapi . dvitīyo’lpaprasāraśca vṛttapuṣpaḥ kadambakaḥ . hāridrasturajovalaḥ . dhūlīkadambakoṁdhārākadambaḥ ṣaṭpadapriyaḥ . vṛttapuṣpaḥ keśarāḍhyaḥ prāvṛṣeṇyaḥ kadambakaḥ . nīpo mahākadambo’pi tathā bahuphalomataḥ iti bharataḥ . atra prāvṛṣeṇya ityuktirgauḍādideśābhiṣrāyeṇa mathurādaucaitre’pi tatpuṣpāṇādāmasmābhiḥpratyakṣatī bahuśo dṛṣṭatvāt ata eva yaḥ kaumāraharaḥ sa eva hi varastā eva caitrakṣapāste conmīlitamālatīsurabhayaḥ prauḍhāḥ kadambānilā kāvyapra° caitramāse tatpuṣpavarṇanamupapadyate . etena kadambapadaṁ kelikadambaparamiti sā° da° rāmacaraṇavyākhyānaṁ mathurādideśānabhigamanasūcakam . tena deśabhedāttasya vasantaprāvṛḍubhayabhavatvamiti jyāyaḥ . kavibhistu varghākāle eva tadvarṇanaṁ kriyate yathā māghe raivatakaparvatavarṇane . varṣartuvarṇanamadhikṛtya vihagāḥ kadambasurabhāviha gāḥ kalathantyanukṣaṇamanekalayam . bhramayannupaiti muhurabbhramayaṁ pavanaśca dhūtanavanīpavanaḥ . varṣāvarṇane ca tatnaiba anavanī navanīpavanīrabhiḥ tasya ca prāvṛṇyātvādevaḥ kadamba śūraṇaṁ tathaityādinā hariśayane bhojananiṣedhaḥ . iti tvatsamparkāt pulakitami° prauḍhapuṣpaiḥ kadambaiḥ meghadra° āṣāḍha madhikṛtyaiva tadgranthapraṇayanāt . iti tasya prāveṇyatvamapi . kadambavṛkṣaśca meruviṣkambhaparvatarūpamandaramya viśeṣacihnavṛkṣaviṣkambhaśailāḥ khalu mandaro’sya sugandhaśailo vipulaḥ supārśvaḥ . teṣu kramāt santi ca ketuvṛkṣāḥ kadambajambūvaṭapippalakākhyāḥ . si° śi° . asya sumeroḥ . |
कपोतः – kapotaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
kapotaḥ [ko vāyuḥ pota iva yasya Tv.] (1) A dove, pigeon. (2) A bird in general. (3) A particular position of the hands. (4) The grey colour of a pigeon. — Comp. –aṁghriḥ f. a sort of perfume. –aṁjanaṁ antimony. –ariḥ a hawk, falcon. –ābha a. of the colour of a pigeon. ( –bhaḥ) a pale or dirty white colour. –caraṇā a sort of perfume. –pālikā,–pālī f. an aviary, a pigeon-house, dove-cot. –rājaḥ the king of pigeons. –varṇī small cardamoms. –vāṇā a kind of perfume. –sāraṁ antimony. –hastaḥ a mode of folding the hands in supplication, fear &c.; kapotahastakaṁ kṛtvā S. 6. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 kapotaḥ puṁ, (ko vāyuḥ potaḥ naurivāsya . yadvā kavṛ varṇe + kaverotac paśca . uṇāṁ . 1 . 63 . iti otac + vasya paśca .) gṛhakapotaḥ . pāyarā iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . kalaravaḥ 2 pārāvataḥ 3 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 5 . 14 .. pārāpataḥ 4 chedyaḥ 5 raktalocanaḥ 6 . iti rabhasaḥ .. gṛhakukkuṭaḥ 7 . yathā — mārjārarakṣite duḥkhaṁ yādṛśaṁ gṛhakukkuṭe . iti prayogāt iti sārasundarī .. (yathā, rāmāyaṇe . 5 . 91 . 4 . śrūyate hi kapotena śatruḥ śaraṇamāgataḥ . arcitaśca yathānyāyaṁ svaiśca māṁsairnimantritaḥ ..) vanakapotaḥ . ghughu iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . citrakaṇṭhaḥ 2 . iti medinī .. kokadevaḥ 3 dhūsaraḥ 4 dhūmralocanaḥ 5 dahanaḥ 6 agnisahāyaḥ 7 bhīṣaṇaḥ 8 gṛhanāśanaḥ 9 . tanmāṁsaguṇāḥ . vīryabalavṛddhikāritvam . svādutvam . kaphapittāsranāśitvañca . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. madhuratvam . śītatvam . kaṣāyatvam . vātapittanāśitvam . sārṣapatailabharjanena viruddhatvañca . iti rājavallabhaḥ .. (asya guṇāntaraṁ yathā — pārāvato guruḥ snigdho raktapittānilāpahaḥ . saṁgrāhī śītalastajjñaiḥ kathito vīryavardhanaḥ .. iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. kapoto vṛṁhaṇo balyo vātapittavināśanaḥ . tarpaṇaḥ śukrajanano hito nṝṇā rucidaḥ .. iti hārītaḥ .. kapotaviśeṣasya guṇāḥ .. yathā — guruḥ salavaṇaḥ kāṇakapotaḥ sarvadoṣakṛt .. iti vābhaṭaḥ .. kaṣāyamadhurāḥ śītā raktapittanivarhaṇāḥ . vipāke madhurāścaiva kapotā gṛhavāsinaḥ .. 1 .. tebhyo laghutarāḥ kiñcit kapotā vanavāsinaḥ . śītāḥ saṁgrāhiṇaścaiva svalpaṁ mṛdutarāśca te .. 2 .. iti carakaḥ .. sarvadoṣaharasteṣāṁ bhedāśī maladūṣakaḥ . kaṣāyasvādulavaṇo guruḥ kāṇakapotakaḥ .. iti suśrutaḥ ..) |
कपोताभ – kapotābha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kapotābha mfn. pigeon-coloured, lead-grey
kapotābha m. a pale or dirty white colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kapotābha (ka- + ābhā) adj. = kapotavarṇa H. 1394. SUŚR. 2, 278, 6. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kapotābha pu° kapotasyābhevābhā’sya . 1 kapotavarṇe hema° tasya nānāvarṇatve’pi kapotāñjanādau kṛṣṇavarṇo gṛhyate kvacit karvuravarṇo’pi tadidaṁ bhasma kapotakarvuramiti kumāraprayogāt karvuravarṇasya kṛṣṇādhikyāt kapātavarṇatvam . suśrutokte 2 mūṣikabhede . pūrbamuktāḥ śukraviṣā mūṣikā ye samāsataḥ . nāmalakṣaṇabhaiṣajyairaṣṭādaśa nibodha tān ivyupakramya lālana ityādīn sūṣikaśca kapotāmastathaivāṣṭādaśa smṛtāḥ iti vibhyajya aruṇenānilaṁ kruddhovātajān kurute gadān . mahākṛṣṇen pittañca śvetena kaphameva ca . mahatā kapilenāsṛk kvapotena catuṣṭayam . mavanti caiṣā ṭaṁśeṣu granthimaṇḍalakarṇikāḥ . piḍakopacayāścogrāḥ śothaśca bhṛśadāruṇaḥ ityuktam . rūpacatuṣṭayaṁ vātapittakapharaktajavikārarūpam . |
कल्माष – kalmāṣa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kalmāṣa mf (“ī”) n. ( 4-1, 40 g. “gaurādi” variegated, spotted, speckled
with black mf (“ī”) n. black kalmāṣa m. a variegated colour (partly black, partly white) kalmāṣa m. a Rakshas kalmāṣa m. a species of fragrant rice kalmāṣa m. N. of a Nāga kalmāṣa m. a form of Agni kalmāṣa m. N. of an attendant on the Sun (identified with Yama) kalmāṣa m. a kind of deer kalmāṣa m. N. of śākya-muni in a former birth kalmāṣa mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. the speckled cow (of Jamad-agni, granting all desires) kalmāṣa m. N. of a river (the Yamunā) kalmāṣa n. a stain kalmāṣa n. N. of a Sāman. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kalmāṣa a. (ṣī f.) (1) Variegated, spotted. (2) Black and white. –ṣaḥ (1) The variegated colour. (2) A mixture of black and white. (3) A demon, goblin. (4) The black colour. (5) A form of Agni. (6) A kind of fragrant rice. –ṣī N. of the river Yamunā (2) The spotted cow of Jamadagni. –ṣaṁ Stain. — Comp. –kaṁṭhaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –pādaḥ N. of a king (saudāsa). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kalmāṣa 1) adj. f. kalmāṣī P. 4, 1, 40, Sch. gaṇa gaurādi zu 41. “bunt, gesprenkelt” (als m. “die Farbe selbst”) AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. H. 1398. an. 3, 732. VS. 24, 7. 29, 58. 59. TS. 5, 6, 22, 1. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 9. ŚAT. BR. 6, 3, 1, 32. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 2, 5. purastādagneḥ kalmāṣaṁ daṇḍaṁ nihatya KAUŚ. 10. kāṇḍa 86. tittirikalmāṣāḥ (aśvāḥ) MBH. 2, 1043. 1824. 2083. 3, 4015. kalmāṣagoyuga 13, 4389. -kuṇḍalāḥ (nāgāḥ) 1, 798. dhenuṁ kalmāṣīm VIŚV. 2, 20. “schwarz” H. an. MED. sh. 33. “schwarz-weiss” MED. — 2) m. a) “ein” Rakshas H. an. MED.; vgl. u. kalmāṣatā und kalmāṣapāda. — b) “eine wohlriechende Reisart” (gandhaśāli) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. eines Nāga: kalmāṣaśavalau MBH. 1, 1552. — d) “eine Form des Feuers” HARIV. 10465. — e) N. pr. eines Dieners der Sonne, der mit Jama identificirt wird, VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — f) Śākyamuni in einer früheren Geburt VYĀḌI zu H. 233. — 3) f. kalmāṣī a) “eine gesprenkelte Kuh”: (śālām) citrāṁ puṣpopahāreṇa kalmāṣīmiva suprabhām R. 5, 13, 16. abhitaḥ so ‘tha kalmāṣīṁ gaṅgākūle paribhraman MBH. 1, 6360. — b) N. pr. eines Flusses MBH. 2, 2575. — 4) n. “Fleck” ŚAT. BR. 6, 3, 1, 31. — Vgl. akalmāṣa. kalmāṣa 1) = kṛṣṇapāṇḍura HALĀY. 4, 51. = citra 56. — 5) n. N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,242,b. — Vgl. kulmāṣa. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kalmāṣa kalmāṣa (cf. the last), I. adj., f. ṣī, Of a mixed or variegated colour, spotted, MBh. 2, 1043; Rām. 1, 52, 20. II. m. The name of a Nāga, MBh. 1, 1552. III. f. ṣī, 1. A cow of variegated colour, Rām. 5, 13, 16. 2. The name of a river, MBh. 2, 2575. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kalmāṣa f. ī black spotted. m. N. of a serpent demon; f. kalmāṣī a spotted cow; n. spot, stain. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kalmāṣa kalmāṣa, a. (ī) having black spots (-tā, f. abst. N.); m. N. of a Nāga; n. spot. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kalmāṣa pu° kalayati kala–kvip kal māṣayati hinasti anyavarṇam svabhāsā cu° maṣa–hiṁsāyām ac karma° . 1 citravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ aśvāṁstittirikalmāṣān bhā° ā° 9 a° . tittirivaccitravarṇān ityarthaḥ . kalmāṣā āgnimārutāḥ yaju° 24, 7 . kalmāṣāḥ karvurāstrayaḥ paśavaḥ āgnimārutāḥ ṣaṣṭhe yape vedadī° kalamāṣa aindrāgnyaḥ yaja° 29, 58 . mārutaḥ kal māṣa āgneyaḥ kṛṣṇa yaju° 29, 59 . 3 kṛṣṇavarṇe 4 kṛṣṇapāṇḍaravarṇe pu° 5 tadvati tri° . 6 rākṣase ca puṁstrī striyāṁ jātitvāt ṅīṣ medi° . varṇavācitve gaurā° pāṭhāt striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 gandhaśālau pu° rājani° . 8 agnibhede bhāratam . agnīnāṁ vāsudevena saṁsaktānāṁ mahāmṛdhe! . te jātavedasaḥ sarve kalmāṣaḥ kusumastathā . dūhanaḥ śoṣaṇaścaiva tapanaśca mahālayaḥ harivaṁ° 180 a° . 9 nāgabhede nīlānīlau tathānāgau kalmāṣaśavalau tathā bhā° ā° 35 nāganāmoktau . 10 kṛṣṇavinda, cite ca . kalmāṣamityeke āśva° gṛ° 4, 9, 5 . kalmāṣo nāma kṛṣṇavinducitaḥ nārā° . |
कापोत – kāpota | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kāpota mf (“ī”) n. (fr. “kapota” , belonging to or coming from a pigeon
mf (“ī”) n. of the colour of a pigeon, of a dull white colour, grey kāpota m. natron, fossil alkali kāpota m. antimony, a collyrium or application for the eyes kāpota mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of plant kāpota n. a flock of pigeons on kāpota n. antimony kāpota n. N. of two Sāmans Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kāpota a. (tī f.) [kapota-aṇ] Grey, of a dirty white colour. –taṁ (1) A flock of pigeons. (2) Antimony. (3) Natron. (4) Fossil. –taḥ The grey colour. — Comp. –aṁjanaṁ antimony applied to the eyes as collyrium. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kāpota (von kapota) P. 4, 3, 135, Sch. 154, Sch. 1) adj. f. ī a) “der Taube eigenthümlich”: kāpotīṁ vṛttimāsthitaḥ MBH. 3, 15408. BHĀG. P. 9, 18, 25. — b) “von der Farbe der Taube, grau” (als m. “die graue Farbe”) H. 1394. — 2) m. “Natrum” AK. 2, 9, 109. H. 945. MED. t. 104 (lies: kāpoto rucake). — 3) f. ī N. einer Pflanze SUŚR. 2, 173, 12. Vgl. kṛṣṇakāpotī, śveta-. — 4) n. a) “Taubenschwarm” P. 4, 2, 44, Sch. AK. 2, 5, 43. MED. — b) “Spiessglas” H. 1051. MED. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. kapota. kāpota 1) b) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 56. 34, 2. 54, 22. — 4) c) vasurociṣaḥ kāpotam N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,233,b. kāpota 1) a) “von der Taube kommend”: rasa “Taubenbrühe” ebend. 4,87,b. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 kāpota A sage. Citrāṅgadā, the daughter of Kakutstha and Urvaśī, was his wife. She had two sons named Tumburu and Suvarcas. Kāpota received much wealth from Kubera and gave it to his sons. Once Kāpota cursed Tārāvatī, the queen of Candraśekhara, that she would bring forth two sons with monkey-faces. (Kālikā Purāṇa, Chapter 56). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kāpota kāpota, i. e. kapota + a, I. adj., f. tī, peculiar to pigeons, MBh. 3, 15408. II. f. tī, The name of a plant, Suśr. 2, 173, 12. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kāpota f. ī peculiar to or coming from a pigeon; pigeon-coloured, grey. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kāpota kāpota, a. (ī) peculiar to pigeons. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kāpota na° kapotānāṁ samūhaḥ aṇ . 1 kapotasamūhe kapotasyedam . anudāttādeḥ pā° añ . 2 kapotasambandhini tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . atithivratī kriyāvāṁśca kāpotīṁ vṛttimāsthitaḥ bhā° va° 259 a° . kāpotīṁ dṛttiṁsvalpasaṁgraharūpām nīlakaṇṭhaḥ stuvan vṛttiṁsa kāpotī duhitrā sa yayau purāt bhāga° 9, 18, 15, kāpotī muñchavṛttim śrīdharaḥ . kapotasya yathā uñchavṛttitvamalpasaṁgrahatvañca tathā kapotalubdhakīyaśabde 1670 pṛ° darśitam . kāpotavarṇo’styasya arśa° ac . 3 sauvīrāñjane 4 rucake (sarñikākṣāre) na° medi° . 5 kapotābhavarṇe pu° 6 tadvati tri° hema° . 7 oṣadhibhede strī gau° ṅīṣ . tallakṣmasthānamuktaṁ suśrute kauśikīṁ saritaṁ tīrtvā sañjayantyāstu pūrvataḥ . kṣitipradeśovalmīkairācitoyojanatrayam . vijñeyā tatra kāpotī śvetā valmīkamūrdhasu suśru° . oṣadhilakṣaṇādikathane . |
कृ – kṛ | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛ “to treat by force”, commit a rape, violate (a female)
kṛ Ved. (I) cl.2.P. 2. sg. “karṣi” du. “kṛthas” pl. “kṛtha”; ā. 2. sg. “kṛṣe”; impf. 2. and 3. sg. “akar”, 3. sg. rarely “akat” ( iii, xi); “mithyā k-“, he pronounces wrongly ; “kaikeyīm anu rājānaṁ kāraya”, treat or deal with Kaikeyī as the king does Desid. “cikīrṣati” (aor. 2. sg. “acikīrṣīs” iii), ep. also “-te”, to wish to make or do, intend to do, design, intend, begin, strive after &c.; to wish to sacrifice or worship Intens. 3. pl. “karikrati” (pr. p. “karikrat” see , to do repeatedly ; Class. “carkarti” or “carikarti” or “carīkarti” ([ 7-4, 92 “carkarīti” or “carikarīti” or “carīkarīti” or “cekrīyate” ([ib. ; ([cf. Hib. ‘caraim’, “I perform, execute”; ‘ceard’, “an art, trade, business, function”; ‘sucridh’, “easy”; Old Germ. ‘karawan’, “to prepare”; Mod. Germ. ‘gar’, “prepared (as food)”; Lat. ‘creo’, ‘ceremonia’; [characters].]) kṛ cl.3.P. p. “cakrat” (Pot. 2. sg. “cakriyās”; aor. 1. sg. “akārṣam” [ vii, 7, 1] or “akāriṣam” [ iv, 39, 6]), to make mention of, praise, speak highly of (gen.) Intens. (1. sg. “carkarmi”, 1. pl. “carkirāma”, 3. pl. “carkiran”; Impv. 2. sg. “carkṛtāt” and “carkṛdhi”; aor. 3. sg. ā. “carkṛṣe”) id. (cf. “kāru, kīri, kīrti”.) kṛ to injure, &c. see 2. “kṝ”. kṛ P. “-karoti”, to make straight Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kṛ I. 5 U. (kṛṇoti-kṛṇute) To hurt, injure, kill. –II. 8 U. (karoti-kurute, cakāra-cakre, akārṣīt-akṛta, kartuṁ, kariṣyati-te, kṛta) (1) To do (in general); tāta kiṁkaravāṇyahaṁ. (2) To make; gaṇikāmavarodhamakarot Dk; nṛpeṇa cakre yuvarājaśabdabhāk R. 3. 35; yuvarājaḥ kṛtaḥ &c. (3) To manufacture, shape, prepare; kuṁbhakāro ghaṭaṁ karoti; kaṭaṁ karoti &c. (4) To build, create; gṛhaṁ kuru; sabhāṁ kuru madarthe bhoḥ (5) To produce, cause, engender; ratimubhayaprārthanā kurute S. 2. 1. (6) To form, arrange; aṁjaliṁ karoti; kapotahastakaṁ kṛtvā. (7) To write, compose; cakāra sumanoharaṁ śāstraṁ Pt. 1. (8) To perform, be engaged in; pūjāṁ karoti. (9) To tell, narrate; iti bahuvidhāḥ kathāḥ kurvan &c. (10) To carry out, execute, obey; evaṁ kriyate yuṣmadādeśaḥ Mal. 1; or kariṣyāmi vacastava or śāsanaṁ me kuruṣva &c. (11) To bring about, accomplish, effect; satsaṁgatiḥ kathaya kiṁ na karoti pusāṁ Bh. 2. 23. –12. To throw or let out, discharge, emit; mūtraṁ kṛ to discharge urine, make water; so purīṣaṁ kṛ to void excrement. (13) To assume, put on, take; strīrūpaṁ kṛtvā; nānārūpāṇi kurvāṇaḥ Y. 3. 162. (14) To send forth, utter; mānuṣīṁ giraṁ kṛtvā, kalaravaṁ kṛtvā &c. (15) To place or put on (with loc.); kaṁṭhe hāramakaret K. 212; pāṇimurasi kṛtvā &c. (16) To entrust (with some duty), appoint; adhyakṣān vividhānkuryāttatra tatra vipaścitaḥ Ms. 7. 81. (17) To cook (as food) as in kṛtānnaṁ. (18) To think, regard, consider; dṛṣṭistṛṇīkṛtajagattrayasattvasārā U. 6. 19. (19) To take (as in the hand); kuru kare gurumekamayoghanaṁ N. 4. 59. (20) To make a sound, as in khātkṛtya, phūtkṛtya bhuṁkte; so vaṣaṭakṛ, svāhākṛ &c. (21) To pass, spend (time); varṣāṇi daśa cakruḥ spent; kṣaṇaṁ kuru wait a moment. (22) To direct towards, turn the attention to, resolve on; (with loc. or dat.); nādharme kurute manaḥ Ms. 12. 118; nagaragamanāya matiṁ na karoti S. 2. (23) To do a thing for another (either for his advantage or injury; prāptāgninirvāpaṇagarvamaṁbu ratnāṁkurajyotiṣi kiṁ karoti Vikr. 1. 18; yadanena kṛtaṁ mayi, asau kiṁ me kariṣyati &c. (24) To use, employ, make use of; kiṁ tayā kriyate dhenvā Pt. 1. (25) To divide, break into parts (with adverbs ending in dhā); dvidhā kṛ to divide into two parts; śatadhā kṛ, sahasradhā kṛ &c. (26) To cause to become subject to, reduce completely to (a particular condition, with adverbs ending in sāt); ātmasāt kṛ to subject or appropriate to oneself; R. 8. 2; bhasmasāt kṛ to reduce to ashes. (27) To appropriate, secure for oneself. (28) To help, give aid. (29) To make liable. (30) To violate or outrage (as a girl). (31) To begin. (32) To order. (33) To free from. (34) To proceed with, put in practice. (35) To worship, sacrifice. (36) To make like, consider equal to, cf. tṛṇīkṛ (said to be Atm. only in the last 10 senses). This root is often used with nouns, adjectives, and indeclinables to form verbs from them, somewhat like the English affixes ‘en’ or ‘(i) fy’, in the sense of ‘making a person or thing to be what it previously is not’; e. g. kṛṣṇīkṛ to make that which is not already black, black, i. e. blacken; so śvetīkṛ to whiten; ghanīkṛ to solidify; viralīkṛ to rarefy &c. &c. Sometimes these formations take place in other senses also; e. g. kroḍīkṛ ‘to clasp to the bosom’, embrace bhasmīkṛ to reduce to ashes; pravaṇīkṛ to incline, bend; tṛṇīkṛ to value as little as straw; maṁdīkṛ to slacken, make slow; so śūlākṛ to roast on the end of pointed lances; sukhākṛ to please; samayākṛ to spend time &c. N. B. This root by itself admits of either Pada; but it is Atm. generally with prepositions in the following senses: (1) doing injury to; (2) censure, blame; (3) serving; (4) outraging, acting violently or rashly; (5) preparing, changing the condition of, turning into; (6) reciting. (7) employing, using; see P. 1. 3. 32 and “Student’s Guide to Sanskrit Composition” Par. 338. Note. The root kṛ is of the most frequent application in Sanskrit literature, and its senses are variously modified, or almost infinitely extended, according to the noun with which the root is connected; e. g. padaṁ kṛ to set foot (fig. also); āśrame padaṁ kariṣyasi S. 4. 19; krameṇa kṛtaṁ mama vapuṣi navayauvanena padaṁ K. 141; manasā kṛ to think of, meditate; manasi kṛ to think; dṛṣṭvā manasyevamakarot K. 136; or to resolve or determine; sakhyaṁ, maitrīṁ kṛ to form friendship with; astrāṇi kṛ to practise the use of weapons; daṁḍaṁ kṛ to inflict punishment; hṛdaye kṛ to pay heed to; kālaṁ kṛ to die; matiṁ duddhiṁ-kṛ to think of, intend, mean; udakaṁ kṛ to offer libations of water to the Manes; ciraṁ kṛ to delay; darduraṁ kṛ to play on the lute; nakhāni kṛ to clean the nails; kanyāṁ kṛ to outrage or violate a maiden; vinā kṛ to separate from, to be abandoned by, as in madanena vinākṛtā ratiḥ Ku. 4. 21; madhye kṛ to place in the middle, to have reference to; madhyekṛtya sthitaṁ krathakaiśikān M. 5. 2; vaśe kṛ to win over, place in subjection, subdue; camatkṛ to cause surprise; make an exhibition or a show; satkṛ to honour, treat with respect; tiryakkṛ to place aside. –Caus. (kārayati-te) To cause to do, perform, make, execute &c.; ājñāṁ kāraya rakṣebhiḥ Bk. 8. 84; bhṛtyaṁ bhṛtyena vā kaṭaṁ kārayati Sk. –Desid. (cikīrṣīti -te) To wish to do &c.; Śi. 14. 41. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kṛ 1. kṛ (originally skṛ; cf. ava-, upa-, pari-, sam-, abhi-sam-, upa-sam-, prati-sam-, and kośaskṛt), ii. 8, Par., Ātm., karomi (in epic poetry also kurmi, MBh. 3, 10943); ved. ii. 5, kṛṇomi; ii. 2, e. g. karṣi; i. 1, karasi. 1. To make, Chr. 293, 3 = Rigv. i. 88, 3 (kṛṇavante, ved. conjunct.); Pañc. i. d. 436; Man. 2, 154; Rām. 1, 1, 59. 2. To do, Rām. 1, 9, 10. 3. To perform, Chr. 293, 4 = Rigv. i. 88, 4 (kṛṇvantaḥ); Man. 1, 55 (one’s natural functions); Rām. 3, 53, 11 (an order); 1, 2, 2 (to show respect); Pañc. 82, 14 (to show pride). 4. To tell, Rām. 1, 2, 34. 5. To compose, Rām. 1, 3, 38. 6. To appoint, Man. 7, 78; 9, 127. 7. To sacrifice, Man. 3, 210. 8. To act for or against a person; with the gen. of the person, MBh. 3, 2160; with the loc., Rām. 2, 64, 61. 9. To assume, Man. 7, 10. 10. To prepare, MBh. 13, 2794; to cook, Man. 9, 219. 11. To cultivate, Yājñ. 2, 158; to till, Man. 10, 114. 12. With nouns designing sounds, speech, To utter, MBh. 3, 11718. 13. With nouns designing time, To pass, MBh. 15, 6; to wait, 1. 2294; with ciram, To delay, Hiḍ. 4, 13. 14. With nouns denoting mind, To give one’s heart to, Man. 12, 118; to resolve, Chr. 11, 11; Rām. 1, 9, 55. 15. With astrāṇi, To practise, MBh. 3, 11824; with udakam or salilam, To make the oblation of water to a deceased one, Man. 5. 188; Rām. 1, 44, 49; with kanyām, To contaminate, Man. 8, 367; with kāryam, To put up with, Pañc. iv. 28; with daṇḍam, To inflict a punishment, Lass. 14, 14; with dārān, To give a wife in marriage, Rām. 1, 77, 26; with nāma, To give a name, Man. 5, 70; with paścāt, To surpass, Ragh. 17, 18; with punar, To undo, Man. 8, 154; with bhaṅgam, To break, Pañc. 8, 17; with bhiyam, To fear, Rām. 1, 22, 14 Gorr.; with vasuṁdharām, To wander over, Rām. 4, 46, 14; with vahis, To exclude, Man. 2, 103; to expel; with vinā, To deprive, Nal. 13, 25; with śramam, To apply diligence, Man. 2, 168; with sneham, To think of the love, Rām. 1, 21, 14. 16. With the instr., To do with, kiṁ kariṣyati saṁsargaiḥ, Of what use will be conjunction, Cāṇ. 106, in Monatsb. d. Berl. Ak. d. Wiss., 1864, 413; To use, Man. 10, 91; with manasā, To mind, MBh. 1, 7051; with hṛdayena, To love, Mṛcch. 73, 7. 17. To be of use, with gen., Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2436. 18. With the loc., To put on, MBh. 1, 1883; with manasi; To mind, Rām. 2, 64, 8; with hṛdaye, To mind, Cāṇ. 92, in Monatsber. d. Berl. Ak. d. Wiss. 1864, 413; with hṛdi, To remember, Rājat. 5, 313; with vaśe, To subdue, Man. 2, 100. 19. With the infin., To begin, Rām. 2, 6, 10. — Ptcple. of the pf. pass. kṛta, I. very often as former part of comp. words, and as n. 1. Well done, MBh. 1, 1615. 2. Well, Rām. 3, 3, 16. 3. Away with, with instr., or saha and instr., Mṛcch. 108, 5. II. n. 1. Doing, Man. 7, 197. 2. A benefit, Pañc. i. d. 427. 3. The name of one of the dice, MBh. 4, 1578. 4. The name of the first age of the world, Man. 1, 69. III. m. A proper name, MBh. 13, 4356. IV. Instr. kṛtena, and loc. kṛte, On account of, Rām. 1, 76, 6; 1, 45, 45. — Comp. akṛta see separately. duṣkṛta, i. e. dus-, I. adj. 1. wicked. Man. 11, 229. 2. unreasonable, MBh. 2, 1400. II. n. sin, Man. 3, 191. brahmāñjalikṛta, i. e. brahman-añjali-kṛta, adj., an anomalous comp., having made scriptural homage, Man. 2, 70. viśva-, adj. made by Viśvakarman (?), Chr. 38, 12. saha-, adj. assisted, Bhāṣāp. 65. su-, I. adj. 1. done well. 2. treated with kindness. 3. virtuous, pious. 4. fortunate. II. n. 1. a virtuous act, Man. 3, 37. 2. kindness. 3. virtue. 4. fortune. svayam-, adj. 1. self-formed. 2. Done by, to, or for one’s self. hāhā-, adj. filled with the uproar of a battle, Chr. 32, 25. — Ptcple. of the fut. pass., kartavya, n. A work, Rām. 1, 34, 32. Comp. tad-, n. suitable action, Rājat. 6, 269. kārya and kṛtya see separately. — Causal, kāraya, 1. To cause to be performed, Man. 2, 30; to cause to be cultivated, Yājñ. 2, 158; to cause to be put, Man. 8, 251; to cause to be treated, Rām. 2, 58, 16. 2. To order to make, Man. 7, 16; to order to prepare, Pañc. 129, 9; to order to practise, Man. 8, 410. 3. To make, Hit. d. 71. kārita, Caused, Man. 4, 118. kāritā vṛddhiḥ, An exacted interest, caused by risk, Man. 8, 153. kārayitavya, 1. To be caused to perform, Rām. 2, 14, 16. 2. To be procured, Pañc. 24, 21. — Desiderative, cikīrṣa (in epic poetry Ātm., Nal. 3, 14), 1. To desire to do, Rām. 2, 35, 11; to desire to perform, Man. 11, 192. 2. To desire to establish, Rājat. 5, 461. cikīrṣita, 1. Desired to be performed, Man. 4, 254. 2. n. Intention, Man. 7, 202. — kṛ, combined and compounded: With the adv. agnisāt agni + sāt, To burn, Rājat. 5, 226. — With aṅga, which becomes aṅgī aṅgī, 1. To put up with, Pañc. i. d. 192; to submit, Rājat. 5, 177. 2. To subdue, Amar. 52. 3. To take to heart, Pañc. 236, 4. 4. To promise, Bhartṛ. 2, 69. — With the prepos. ati ati, ati- kṛta, Excessive, MBh. 3, 10064; n. Excess, Rām. 5, 25, 21. — With the noun adhara, which becomes adharī adharī, To overcome, Śāk. d. 16, v. r. — With the prep. adhi adhi, 1. To put at the head, Bhāg. P. 1, 9, 37. 2. To appoint, Yājñ. 2, 30. 3. Pass. To get entitled, Bhāg. P. 5, 10, 16. 4. With loc., To be at the head, to inspect, MBh. 4, 241. adhikṛta, Best, Pañc. iii. d. 67. Comp. dharma-, m. a judge, Pañc. 41, 16. — Absolutive, adhikṛtya, Referring to, Śāk. 4, 5. — With anu anu, 1. To do afterward, Amar. 50. 2. To back, Pañc. iii. d. 270. 3. To imitate, Man. 2, 199. 4. To repay, with the acc., Bhāg. P. 3, 14, 20. 5. To bring in harmony, Bhāg. P. 7, 7, 36. Caus. To cause to imitate, Bhāg. P. 4, 29, 17. — With apa apa, 1. To remove, MBh. 3, 10492. 2. To injure, Rām. 4, 16, 19; with the gen. of the person, Rām. 2, 38, 5; with the acc., MBh. 3, 14835. apakṛta, n. Injury, Pañc. i. d. 317. — With abhi abhi, To make (nivāsam, to settle), Sund. 2, 26. Desider. raṇam, To desire to fight, MBh. 4, 1660. — With the noun abhyantara, which becomes abhyantarī abhyantarī, 1. To initiate, Rām. 6, 40, 14. 2. To make intimate, Pañc. i. d. 290. — With alam alam, To adorn, Rām. 1, 73, 19. — With abhyalam abhi-alam, To adorn, Rām. 3, 53, 36. — With upālam upa-alam, To adorn, Pañc. 159, 19. — With samalam sam-alam, 1. To adorn, MBh, 1, 4941. 2. To violate, with gen., Man. 8, 16. — With svalam su-alam, To adorn beautifully, Chr. 60, 35. — With the prep. ava ava, the initial is kept in niravaskṛta, i. e. nis-, Pure, MBh. 12, 13201. — With the prep. ā ā, Caus. 1. To ask, Rām. 2, 13, 2. 2. To call, Pañc. 24, 13; ākāraṇīya, To be called. 3. To produce, Vedāntas. in Chr. 215, 6. Desider. To desire to perform, Daśak. in Chr. 200, 24. — With the prepositions apā apa-ā, To remove, MBh. 1, 5680. ṛṇam, To pay, Man. 6, 35. — With upā upa-ā, 1. To bring near, MBh. 3, 3098. 2. To deliver, Nal. 25, 16. 3. To grant, MBh. 3, 15965. 4. To gain, MBh. 3, 10278. 5. To describe, Bhāg. P. 3, 6, 35. 6. To perform a preparation for a sacred work, Man. 4, 95. an-upākṛta, adj. Not hallowed by holy texts, Man. 5, 7. — With samupā sam-upa-ā, To satisfy(?), MBh. 1, 7765. — With nirā nis-ā, 1. To remove, Rām. 5, 13, 31. 2. To disown, Chr. 8, 27; MBh. 13, 4753. 3. To disapprove, Vedāntas. in Chr. 215, 17. 4. To undo, MBh. 1, 7666. — With vyā vi-ā, To explain, Rām. 5, 56, 5. a-vyākṛta, adj. Undivided, Bhāg. P. 3, 11, 37. — With the noun ākula, which becomes ākulī ākulī, To trouble, Pañc. v. d. 25; Rām. 4, 41, 29. — With the adv. ātmasāt ātmasāt, i. e. ātman + sāt, 1. To put in one’s self, Yājñ. 3, 54; cf. Man. 6, 25. 2. To subdue, Bhartṛ. 3, 34. — With the adv. āvis āvis, To make manifest, Sāh. D. 15, 20; to show, 60, 17. āviṣkṛta, Publicly known, Man. 11, 226. an-āviṣkṛta, adj. Not public, ib. — With the noun āharaṇa, which becomes āharaṇī āharaṇī, To make a present, Ragh. 7, 29. — With the noun unmanas, which becomes unmanī unmanī, To agitate, Prab. 62, 3. — With the prep. upa upa, 1. To confer, Man. 2, 149. 2. To offer, Man. 2, 245. 3. To serve, Pañc. i. d. 95; with the gen. of the person, Pañc. i. d. 398. 4. To confer a benefit, Man. 8, 394; with the gen. of the person, Rām. 4, 38, 47. 5. To honour, Rājat. 5, 311. 6. To set out on, with the dat., Rām. 1, 37, 5 Schl. (Gorr. v. r.). The initial is kept in upaskṛta, 1. Possessed of, having, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 28. 2. Prepared, MBh. 1, 778. 3. Adorned, Bhartṛ. 2, 12. 4. Benefitted, MBh. 13, 5893. Comp. an-upaskṛta, adj. 1. uncultivated, MBh. 13, 3335. 2. not ornamented, Man. 5, 112. 3. untainted, Man. 3, 257. 4. blameless, Man. 7, 98. nirupaskṛta, i. e. nis-, adj. 1. unaccomplished, MBh. 12, 9768. 2. plain, 12, 9079. — With the prepositions pratyupa prati-upa, To repay, Pañc. i. d. 95 v. r. — With the noun upahāra, which becomes upahārī upahārī, To offer, with gen., Kathās. 10, 141. — With the noun uras, which becomes urī urī, To promise, to offer, Ragh. 15, 70. — With the noun uṣna, which becomes uṣṇī uṣṇī, To warm, Mṛcch. 50, 1. — With ūrī ūrī, To grant, Hit. iii. d. 96. — With the numeral eka, which becomes ekī ekī, To join, Rām. 5, 13, 58. — With the noun auṣadha, which becomes auṣadhī auṣadhī, To change into a medicine, Mṛcch. 121, 13. — With the noun kad-arth + a, which becomes kadarthī kadarthī, To contemn, MBh. 3, 11381. — With the noun kapila, which becomes kapilī kapilī, To make tawny, MBh. 3, 16351. — With the noun karada, which becomes karadī karadī, To make tributary, MBh. 1, 4462. — With the noun kara, which becomes karī karī, To offer as tribute, Kathās. 19, 114. — With the noun kaluṣa, which becomes kaluṣī kaluṣī, To trouble, Rām. 3, 22, 14; 5, 57, 5. — With the noun kaṣāya, which becomes kaṣāyī kaṣāyī, To redden, Rām. 6, 33, 17. — With kāt kāt, an old abl. sing. of kim, To contemn, Bhāg. P. 5, 7, 11. — With the noun kuṇḍala, which becomes kuṇḍalī kuṇḍalī in kuṇḍalīkṛta, adj. 1. Ring-streaked, Nal. 14, 3. 2. Moving circularly, Suśr. 2, 523, 16. — With the comp. kṛta-artha, which becomes kṛtārthī kṛtārthī, To satisfy, Lass. 83, 13. — With the noun kṛśa, becoming kṛśī kṛśī, To make poor, Mṛcch. 19, 13. — With the noun koṣṭhaka, which becomes koṣṭhakī koṣṭhakī, To surround, MBh. 14, 2230. — With the noun khaṇḍa, which becomes khaṇḍī khaṇḍī, To cut to pieces, Pañc. 262, 16. — With the noun khala, which becomes khalī khalī, To abuse, Mṛcch. 33, 24. — With the noun khila, becoming khilī khilī, 1. To lay waste, Ragh. 11, 14. 2. To deprive of any strength, Mārk. P. 9, 8. — With gaṇḍūṣa, becoming gaṇḍūṣī gaṇḍūṣī, to use as water for rinsing the mouth, Bhāg. P. 9, 15, 3. — With goṣpada, becoming goṣpadī goṣpadī, To change into a pool, Rām. 5, 31, 62. — With grāsa, becoming grāsī grāsī, To devour, Kathās. 9, 57. — With cakra, becoming cakrī cakrī, To make circular, Kumāras. 3, 70. — With caṇḍa, becoming caṇḍī caṇḍī, To provoke, Mālav. 44, 5. — With camat camat, Caus. To cause to be surprised, Kathās. 25, 225. — With citta, becoming cittī cittī, To make something the object of thinking, Bhāg. P. 4, 1, 28. — With citra, becoming citrī citrī, To change into a picture, Śāk. d. 148. — With cihna, becoming cihnī cihnī, To mark, MBh. 13, 826. — With cūrṇa, becoming cūrṇī cūrṇī, To crush, Rām. 5, 54, 7. — With jaṭila, becoming jaṭilī jaṭilī, To interweave, Pañc. 223, 2. — With jaṭhara, becoming jaṭharī jaṭharī, To shut in one’s self, Bhāg. P. 3, 9, 20. — With jaḍa, becoming jaḍī jaḍī, 1. To stiffen, Rām. 6, 6, 1. 2. To benumb, Rām. 5, 33, 5. 3. To make stupid, Bhāg. P. 6, 3, 25. — With jarjara, becoming jarjarī jarjarī, To beat to pieces, Rām. 6, 83, 54. — With tanu, becoming tanū tanū, To diminish, to abandon, Ragh. 6, 80. — With tāmra, becoming tāmrī tāmrī, To redden, MBh. 7, 8458. — With the adv. tiras tiras, 1. To remove, Bhāg. P. 3, 2, 18. 2. To cover, Man. 4, 49. 3. To surpass, Pañc. 118, 13. 4. To conquer, Hit. iii. d. 8. 5. To contemn, Bhāg. P. 1, 18, 48. a-tiraskrita, adj. Greatest, Pañc. 7, 10. — With the noun tīrtha, which becomes tīrthī tīrthī, To hallow, Bhāg. P. 1, 13, 9. — With tuccha, becoming tucchī tucchī, To despise, Bhāg. P. 5, 10, 25. — With tṛṇa, becoming tṛṇī tṛṇī, To value like a grass-blade, MBh. 1, 7062. — With the pron. tvam tvam (see yuṣmad), To thou somebody, as an insult, Yājñ. 3, 292. — With the noun dakṣiṇa, which becomes dakṣiṇī dakṣiṇī, To walk around somebody keeping the right side towards him, Bhāg. P. 3, 24, 41. — With dāsa, becoming dāsī dāsī, To enslave somebody, Kathās. 22, 84. To subdue, Chr. 94, 30. — With divasa, becoming divasī divasī, To turn into day, Mṛcch. 59, 5. — With dīrgha, becoming dīrghī dīrghī. 1. To extend, Kumāras. 3, 26. 2. To carry far, Megh. 32. — With duḥka, becoming duḥkhā duḥkhā, To afflict, Śiś. 2, 11. — With dūra, becoming dūrī dūrī, 1. To remove, Prab. 2. To surpass, Śāk. d. 16. — With dṛḍha, becoming dṛḍhī driḍhī, To fasten, Prab. 43, 14. — With dvi-guṇa, becoming dviguṇī dviguṇī, To double, Śiś. 1, 63. — With the adv. dvijātisāt dvi-jāti + sāt, To offer to Brāhmaṇas, Rājat. 5, 120. — With the interj. dhik dhik, 1. To reproach, MBh. 12, 1422. 2. To show contempt, Rām. 4, 9, 8. — With the noun dhvaja, becoming dhvajī dhvajī, To use as a means of protection, Hit. ii. d. 95. — With nagna, becoming nagnī nagnī, To make somebody a naked mendicant, Bhartṛ. 1, 64. — With namas namas, namas-kṛ, 1. To salute, Man. 11, 110. 2. To adore, MBh. 3, 2160; with dat. and acc. — With nava, becoming navī navī, To renew, Ragh. 16, 38. 2. To refresh, Śāk. 62, 12. — With the prep. ni ni, nikṛta, 1. Humbled, Rām. 1, 56, 22. 2. Dejected, Nal. 14, 15. 3. Base, Rām. 5, 23, 6; n. Mortification, Bhartṛ. 2, 30, v. r. nikartavya in tair asmākam nikartavyam, We must be treated ill by them, MBh. 3, 1406. — With vini vi-ni, 1. To injure, MBh. 3, 14036. 2. To defraud, Man. 9, 213. — With the noun nimitta, becoming nimittī nimittī, 1. To point out as cause, Rājat. 3, 89. 2. To use as means, Daśak. in Chr. 184, 14. — With nis-dhana, becoming nirdhanī nirdhanī, To make poor, Daśak. in Chr. 194, 7. — With the prep. nis nis, 1. To remove, Dev. 1, 31. 2. To prepare, Chr. 294, 1 = Rigv. i. 92, 1. niṣkrita, n. Expiation, Bhāg. P. 1, 19, 2. a-niṣkṛta, adj. Not expiated, Man. 11, 53. — With the noun nis-pattra, which becomes niṣpattrā niṣpattrā, To wound, e. g. a deer, with an arrow in such a manner that its feathered part juts out on the other side, Daśak. 196, 1. — With nis-spand + a, becoming niṣpandī niṣpandī, To render motionless, Mṛcch. 85, 1. — With nyak nyak, acc. sing. n. of nyañc, To insult, Rājat. 5, 436. — With nyāsa, becoming nyāsī To deliver in trust, Rājat. 5, 182. — With pañcan-śikhā, becoming pañcaśikhī pañcaśikhī, To make somebody an ascetic, Bhartṛ. 1, 64. — With pañcan, becoming pañcī pañcī, To make fivefold, so as to contain the five elements, Vedāntas. in Chr. 206, 19. — With the adv. parasāt para + sāt, To give in marriage, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 931. — With parāñc-mukha, becoming parāṅmukhī parāṅmukhī, To put to flight, MBh. 6, 5500. — With the prep. pari pari, To surround, MBh. 13, 5044. The initial s changed to ṣ is preserved in pariṣkṛta. 1. Adorned, Rām. 3, 11, 4. 2. Prepared; su-par°, Well prepared, 4, 437; kāla-par°, Seasonable, Rām. 5, 25, 35. — With the noun parunha, becoming paruṣī paruṣī, 1. To soil. 2. To use roughly. — With the compound noun para-upakaraṇa, becoming paropakaraṇī paropakaraṇī, To make somebody the instrument of another, Hit. ii. d. 23. — With parvata, becoming parvatī parvatī, To exalt, Bhartṛ. 2, 71. — With pavitra, becoming pavitrī pavitrī, To purify. — With paśu, becoming paśū paśū, 1. To change into a beast. 2. To destine for immolation. — With pātra, becoming pātrī pātrī, 1. To make something an object worthy of (e. g. interest), Megh. 48. 2. To honour, Śāk. d. 116. — With the adv. puras puras, puras-kṛ, 1. To place in front, Rājat. 5, 327. 2. To lead, Chr. 20, 24. 3. To appoint, MBh. 4, 242. 4. To show, Rājat. 5, 328. 5. To regard, Rām. 5, 90, 30. 6. To prefer, Kathās. 29, 105. 7. To honour, Śāk. 18, 18. 8. To use as pretext, Daśak. in Chr. 189, 2. puraskṛta, 1. Attended by. 2. Provided with. — With the noun pulaka, becoming pulakī pulakī, pulakī-kṛ10ta, Having the hairs of the body erect, Bhāg. P. 3, 15, 25. — With the imitative sound pūt pūt, To blow, Pañc. 93, 4. — With peśī peśī, and peṣī peṣī, To cut to pieces, Rām. 2, 105, 33 Gorr. — With the prep. pra pra, 1. To make, Man. 8, 239. 2. To cause, Pañc. i. d. 276; with infin., Chr. 296, 8 = Rigv. i. 112, 8. 3. To do, Pañc. 4, 37. 4. To perform. MBh. 3, 12142. 5. To appoint, Man. 7, 60. 6. With kanyām, To pollute, Man. 8, 370; with dārān, To marry, MBh. 1, 1844; with buddhim, To resolve, Nal. 3, 25; with manas, To apply one’s heart to, Man. 7, 12. prakṛta, 1. Accomplished, Kathās. 4, 1. 2. Mentioned, Yājñ. 1, 243. — With vipra vi-pra, To injure, Rām. 3, 1, 20. — With saṁpra sam-pra, To make, Rām. 6, 82, 182; to perform, MBh. 1, 2387. — With the noun prakaṭa, which becomes prakaṭī prakaṭī, To make manifest, Bhartṛ. 2, 64. — With praguna which becomes pranuṇī praguṇī, To put up, Pañc. 157, 23; to array, 218, 7; to lay (as traps), 114, 6. — With the prep. prati prati, 1. To repay, Rām. 3, 38, 22; with the person in the gen., Rām. 3, 65, 14; in the dat., MBh. 1, 840; loc., MBh. 13, 4764. 2. To resist, with the acc. of an object, MBh. 1, 5656; gen. of a person, Rām. 6, 33, 34. 3. To cure, MBh. 1, 4027. 4. To repair, Man. 9, 285. pratikṛta, n. 1. Requital, Rām. 6, 91, 10. 2. Resistance, Ragh. 12, 94. Comp. kṛta-pratikṛta, n. 1. assault and resistance, MBh. 4, 351. 2. requital for an assault, Rām. 6, 91, 10. Desider. To desire to repay, MBh. 3, 1282. — With the noun prativacana, which becomes prativacanī prativacanī, To answer, Śāk. d. 85. — With pradakṣiṇa, which becomes pradakṣiṇī pradakṣiṇī, To walk round some one, keeping the right side towards him, Śāk. p. 51, 17. — With pramāṇa, becoming pramāṇī pramāṇī, 1. To mete out to, Bhartṛ. 2, 90. 2. To obey, Śāk. 78, 19. 3. To prove. — With the adv. prādus prādus, To make visible, to show, Chr. 34, 12. agnim, To kindle, Man. 4, 104. — With the imitative sound phut phut, or phūt phūt, To boil, to show indignation, to foam, Pañc. 237, 14. — With the noun bhasman, becoming bhasmī bhasmī, To reduce to ashes. — With manda, becoming mandī mandī, To diminish, Śāk. 5, 13. — With malina, becoming malinī malinī, To soil. malinī-karaṇīya, n. An action which causes defilement, Mān. 11, 125. — With mekhalā, which becomes mekhalī mekhalī, To put on the sacrificial string, MBh. 13, 973. — With rakta-paṭa (vb. rañj), becoming raktapaṭī raktapaṭī, To change into one who wears a red cloth, i. e. into an ascetic, Pañc. iv. d. 36. — With rikta, ptcple. pf. pass. of ric, becoming riktī riktī, To steal, Pañc. 89, 2. — With lakṣa, becoming lakṣī lakṣī, To aim at, Śāk. 104, 21. — With vandī, becoming vandī vandī, To take prisoner, Vikr. d. 3. — With vaśa, becoming vaśī vaśī, To subdue, Pañc, 13, 3. — With vaśe vaśe, loc. of vaśa, To subdue, Rām. 3, 55, 7. — With vaṣaṭ vaṣaṭ, To accompany with the exclamation raṣaṭ, Man. 2, 106. — With the prep. vi vi, 1. To change, MBh. 13, 1513; Man. 1, 76. 2. To disfigure, Man. 9, 288. 3. To blind, MBh. 3, 8881. 4. To develop, Man. 1, 75. 5. To create, MBh. 14, 1487. 6. To adorn, MBh. 1, 1429. 7. To move to and fro, Rām. 3, 74, 18. 8. To destroy, MBh. 3, 1150. 9. To become alienated, Man. 9, 15. 10. To infest each other, MBh. 1, 7670. Caus. To cause to change, Hit. 75, 11. — With the noun vikaca, becoming vikacī vikacī, To open, Bhartṛ. 2, 65. — With vi-nigaḍa, becoming vinigaḍī vinigaḍī, To unfetter, Daśak. in Chr. 198, 8. — With vi-manas, becoming vimanī vi- manī in vimanī-kṛta, 1. Sad. 2. Offended. 3. Altered in mind. — With vi-varṇa-maṇi, becoming vivarṇamaṇī vivarṇamaṇī, To make jewels discoloured, Śāk. d. 61. — With vi-rajas, becoming virajī virajī in virajī-kṛta, 1. Freed from dust. 2. Freed from passion. — With viṣaya, becoming viṣayī viṣayī, To make something the object of thought, Vedāntas. in Chr. 215, 23. — With vyākula, becoming vyākulī vyākulī, To trouble, Pañc. 63, 8. — With śithila, becoming śithilī śithilī. To make languid, Ṛt. 6, 24. — With śīrṣan-avaśeṣa, becoming śīrṣāvaśeṣī śīrṣāvaśeṣī, To leave only the head undestroyed, Bhartṛ. 2, 27. — With śūnya, becoming śūnyī śūnyī, To make empty, to leave, Pañc. 23, 18. — With saṁkrama, becoming saṁkramī saṁkramī, To use as means, Daśak. in Chr. 196, 17 (by means of her). — With sajja, becoming sajjī sajjī, To prepare, Pañc. 62, 25. — With sat sat, acc. n. s. of sant, ptcple. pres. of as, 1. To adorn. Man. 3, 96. 2. To welcome, to receive hospitably, Rām. 3, 53, 25. 3. To honour, Pañc. 26, 21. satkṛta, 1. Done rightly. 2. Worshipped. 3. Respected. 4. Welcomed. n. 1. Virtue. 2. Hospitality. 3. Food, Man. 3, 264. — Comp. a-satkṛta, adj. wicked, Nal. 24, 31. su-, n. Excellent hospitality, Chr. 59, 18. — With sa-nātha, becoming sanāthī sanāthī, To make possessed of a protector, Śāk. 28, 14. — With sa-patra, which becomes sapatrā sapatrā, To wound, e. g. a deer, with an arrow in such a manner that the feathered part enters in its body, Daśak. 196, 1. — With the prep. sam sam, becoming saṁkṛ, and, by keeping the initial s, saṁskṛ, 1. To unite, Mṛcch. 137, 20. 2. To prepare, Rām. 3, 53, 5. 3. To hallow; a-saṁskṛta, Not hallowed, Man. 5, 56. 4. To hallow by the investment of the sacrificial cord, to invest, Ragh. 15, 31; Man. 8, 412; a-saṁskṛta, Not invested, Man. 2, 39; to hallow by giving in marriage, Man. 9, 173; a-saṁskṛta, Unmarried, Pañc. iii. d. 218; to hallow by solemn obsequies, MBh. 13, 7777. 5. To adorn, Śiś. 9, 25. — Causal, 1. To cause to perform, MBh. 1, 4379. 2. To cause to be invested, MBh. 2, 1594. 3. To cause to be solemnly buried, MBh. 1, 4936 4. To make, MBh. 4, 2281. — With abhisam abhi-sam, abhisaṁskṛ, To hallow, MBh. 3, 8224. — With upasam upa-sam, upasaṁskṛ, 1. To prepare, MBh. 1, 7203. 2. To adorn, Suśr. 2, 76, 9. — With pratisam prati-sam, pratisaṁskṛ, 1. To repair, Man. 9, 279. 2. To unite, Suśr. 2, 77, 2. — With the noun sam-ṛddha (vb. ṛdh), becoming samṛddhī samṛddhī, To make wealthy, Daśak. in Chr. 194, 2. — With sāci, becoming sācī sācī, To turn aside, Mālav. d. 73. — With sāra, becoming sārī sārī, To make hard, Śāk. d. 54. — With su-gupta, becoming sunuptī suguptī, To guard well, Pañc. 208, 21. — With sthira, becoming sthirī sthirī, To strengthen, Śāk. 53, 23. — With sphīta, becoming sphītī sphītī, To augment, Rām. 2, 65, 26. — With sva, becoming svī svī, 1. To appropriate, Daśak. in Chr. 186, 4. 2. To win, 180, 19. 3. To assent to, Rājat. 5, 436. svīkṛta, 1. Agreed. 2. Promised. — Cf. Lat. creare with the causal kārayāmi, whose first a originally was also short, as may be inferred from the comparison of the kindred languages. kṛ 2. kṛ; see 2. kṛ10. kṛ 1. kṛ10, i. 6, kira, Par. 1. To pour out, Amar. 11. 2. To cast, MBh. 14, 1898. 3. To cover, Rām. 5, 42, 10. kīrṇa, 1. Scattered, Rām. 5, 16, 17. 2. Dishevelled, Daśak. in Chr. 179, 15. 3. Covered, Pañc. i. d. 239. — With the prepositions vyati vi-ati, To scatter, MBh. 4, 830. — With anu anu, To cover, MBh. 1, 4340. — With apa apa, which forms also apaskira, Ātm. To rake (as a bird for pleasure), Uttararāmac. p. 31, 1. — With abhi abhi, To cover, MBh. 13, 2655. — With ava ava, 1. To diffuse, Man. 6, 48. 2. To cast off, MBh. 2, 2289. 3. To leave, MBh. 1, 3057. 4. To cover, Rām. 2, 43, 13. Ātm. and reflect. pass., 1. To spread, MBh. 3, 12306. 2. To vanish, Bhāg. P. 7, 15, 19. — With anvava anu-ava, To scatter about, Yājñ. 1, 230. Caus. To cause to be scattered about, MBh. 13, 4291 (read kārayet). — With abhyava abhi-ava, To cover, Rām. 2, 33, 19. — With paryava pari-ava, To cover round about, MBh. 3, 13596. — With samava sam-ava, To cover, Bhāg. P. 8, 18, 10. — With ā ā, ākīrṇa, 1. Crowded, Arj. 6, 7. 2. Frequented, Man. 6, 51. 3. Confused, Rājat. 5, 321. — With apā apa-ā, To repudiate, MBh. 1, 2851. — With avā ava-ā, To cover, Rām. 2, 42, 14 Gorr. (Schl. v.r.). — With vyā vi-ā, vyākīrṇa, Dishevelled, Pañc. i. d. 207. — With samā sam-ā, To cover, Rām. 1, 6, 24. — With ud ud, 1. To throw up, Rām. 6, 90, 26. 2. To dig up, MBh. 1, 5813. 3. To engrave, Vikr. d. 43. — With samud sam-ud, To pierce, Ragh. 1, 4. — With upa upa, To cover, MBh. 3, 11886. — With vini vi-ni, 1. To cast down, Rām. 6, 8, 19. 2. To leave, Kumāras. 4, 6. 3. vinikīrṇa, Crowded, Rām. 4, 41, 33. — With saṁni sam-ni, saṁnikirṇa, Stretehed out, Megh. 87. — With parā parā, To leave, Rām. 4, 1369. — With pari pari, 1. To surround, MBh. 4, 585. 2. To deliver, Ragh. 18. 32. — With pra pra, To scatter, Rām. 2, 76, 15. 2. To spring up, Rām. 1, 9, 19. 3. Pass. (anom. kīryet, with the termination of the Par.), To vanish, MBh. 3, 14767. prakīrṇa, 1. Dishevelled, MBh. 3, 11755. 2. Squandered, Lass. 74, 17. 3. Public, MBh. 13, 6735. — With vipra vi-pra, viprakīrṇa, 1. Scattered, Rām. 5, 14, 53. 2. Dishevelled, MBh. 3, 401. 3. Extended, MBh. 3, 730. — With pratis pratis, instead of prati prati, To injure (cf. 2. kṛ10), Śiś. 1, 47. — With vi vi, 1. To scatter, Hit. 9, 14. 2. To cover, Man. 3, 234. 3. To blame, Rām. 2, 12, 73. vikīrṇa, 1. Dishevelled, Kumāras. 4, 4. 2. Split, Rām. 3, 34, 25. — With pravi pra-vi, To scatter, MBh. 4, 298. — With sam sam, 1. To mix, MBh. 13, 6232. 2. To confound, MBh. 3, 13736. saṁkīrṇa, 1. Crowded, MBh. 1, 7675. 2. Mixed, Man. 1, 116. 3. Impure, Yājñ. 3, 310. — Cf. kal, śakṛt; and Lat. cribrum, cerno, procerus; [greek] kṛ † 2. kṛ10, also kṛ kṛ, ii. 5 and 9, Par., Ātm. To injure, to kill. — Cf. 1. kṛ10 with pratis. kṛ † 3. kṛ10, i. 10, Ātm. To know (? v. r.). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kṛ [1] (skṛ), kṛṇoti kṛṇute karoti kurute (karati & karti), pp. kṛta (q.v.) make, do, cause or produce anything in or on one’s self or others; absol. act, work; bring or help to (dat.); get or procure for (gen.), M. for one’s self; make or begin something (acc., esp. kim) with something (instr.); make something (acc.) of something (instr. or abl.); make (into), render 2 acc. or acc. & adj. or adv. in ī ū — With the acc. of an abstr. kṛ answers to a verb of kindred mng, e.g. w. praveśam = enter, w. maraṇam die, w. rājyam reign; esp. in the periphr. perf., e.g. vidāṁ cakāra he knew. We often use a more special verb, e.g. perform or offer (yajñam), prepare or till (kṣetram), fix (samayam), wait (kṣaṇam), utter (vācam or śabdam), exert (vīryam), show, betray, feel (kṛpām bhāvam sneham), enjoy (sukham), marry (dārān), violate, dishonour (kanyām) etc.; put, set in or on (pāṇau skandhe), take to (hṛdi); ponder, deliberate (cetasi manasi hṛdaye), turn, direct (manas, w. loc.), call, name (nāmnā) etc. Note also dvidhā kṛ divide into two, bhasmasāt° reduce to ashes, tṛṇavat° value like straw. For other phrases cf. the corr. adj. or adv. C. kārayati kṛṇoti kṛṇute karoti kurute (karati & karti), pp. kṛta (q.v.) make, do, cause or produce anything in or on one’s self or others; absol. act, work; bring or help to (dat.); get or procure for (gen.), M. for one’s self; make or begin something (acc., esp. kim) with something (instr.); make something (acc.) of something (instr. or abl.); make (into), render 2 acc. or acc. & adj. or adv. in ī ū — With the acc. of an abstr. kṛ answers to a verb of kindred mng, e.g. w. praveśam = enter, w. maraṇam die, w. rājyam reign; esp. in the periphr. perf., e.g. vidāṁ cakāra he knew. We often use a more special verb, e.g. perform or offer (yajñam), prepare or till (kṣetram), fix (samayam), wait (kṣaṇam), utter (vācam or śabdam), exert (vīryam), show, betray, feel (kṛpām bhāvam sneham), enjoy (sukham), marry (dārān), violate, dishonour (kanyām) etc.; put, set in or on (pāṇau skandhe), take to (hṛdi); ponder, deliberate (cetasi manasi hṛdaye), turn, direct (manas, w. loc.), call, name (nāmnā) etc. Note also dvidhā kṛ divide into two, bhasmasāt° reduce to ashes, tṛṇavat° value like straw. For other phrases cf. the corr. adj. or adv. C. kārayate cause to act or do (2 acc. or acc. of th. & instr. of pers.), have something put in (loc.), also = S. D. cikīrṣati te wish to act or do. I. karikrati (3 pl.) do repeatedly. — adhi put before or over, place at the head, appoint to (loc.); make a thing the chief matter or main point; be entitled to (A. w. loc., M. w. acc. or inf.). anu do afterwards, imitate, equal (acc. or gen.). apa put off, remove; injure, offend, do wrong (acc., loc. or gen.). abhi do in behalf of (acc.); effect, make. ā bring or call near; bring about, perform, prepare; serve a god (gen.), sacrifice. C. call near; ask for (2 acc.). apā keep off, remove, pay (a debt); reject, desist. udā expel, select. upā bring near, fetch; grant, present; acquire, get; invite, prepare, undertake, begin (r.). nirā separate, select; push, away, keep off, reject, destroy; refuse, contradict. vyā divide, separate from (instr.), analyse, explain. samā bring together, collect, unite; make ready, prepare. is ( = nis) arrange, make ready, prepare. upa bring near, impart, grant, offer, render a service (gen. or loc. of pers.); further, support; w. skṛ M. prepare, cultivate (land), adorn. enchase; think of, care for (acc. or *gen.); deform, corrupt. pratyupa return a service. tiras put aside, remove, cover, conceal; cut out, supplant, surpass; contemn, despise, blame, abuse. ni bring down, humiliate. vini wrong, injure, offend. nis bring forth from (abl.); drive away (also w. skṛ), dispel, exclude; accomplish, arrange, settle, prepare, bring together; restore, requite. pari prepare (food); w. skṛ make ready, fit out, adorn. puras put before or at the head, place in front, introduce, appoint to (loc.); show, betray. pra perform, effect, cause, make, render (2 acc.); take, marry; appoint to (loc.); undo, destroy, kill; violate, deflower; M. induce, move, cause to do; direct or turn (manasṁ buddhim) upon (dat. loc.). resolve; gain, acquire, effect; put before, mention. pipra hurt, wrong, injure, disappoint (Caus. the same*). prati do against, return, repay, revenge (acc. of th., gen., dat., loc. of pers.); counteract, withstand (act. of th. and gen. of pers.); restore, requite, repay. D. wish to requite or revenge (acc. of th., acc. or loc. of pers.). vi make different, change, alter, divide. detail, specify; deform, spoil, destroy; develop, produce; M. (P.) become different, alter, become hostile, unkind, or faithless (w. gen. or loc.); contend, fight. sam (kṛ & skṛ) put together, join, compose, prepare, arrange; consecrate, invest, initiate, marry; refine, embellish, adorn. abhisam (skṛ) arrange, perform. M. render (2 acc.); consecrate, dedicate. upasam (skṛ) prepare, adorn. pratisam restore, repair. — Cf. adhikṛta adhikṛtya upaskṛta nikṛta pariśkṇta puraskṇta puraskṇtya prakṇta vikṇta saṁskṇta. kṛ [2] I.-st. carkṛ (3 sgl. M. carkṛṣe w. act. & pass. mg.) commemorate, mention, extol (gen.). kṛ [3] (skṛ), kirati kirate, pp. kīrṇa pour out, cast forth, scatter, strew, cover, fill. — anu scatter, strew; cover, fill. abhi sprinkle, cover, fill. ava pour down, scatter, spread, spend (semen); cast off, reject; sprinkle, bestrew, cover, fill. samava bestrew, cover entirely. ā scatter or bestow abundantly, cover over, fill. samā scatter over, cover. ud whirl up (dust); excavate, engrave. upa scatter or throw down, besprinkle, bestrew. vini scatter, disperse; throw away, abandon. pari scatter or strew about, surround. pra scatter forth, throw down; spring forth, issue, rise. vi throw asunder or about, cast, hurl, scatter, disperse, dissolve, split, rend. sam pour out, bestow richly, cover, fill; mix together, confound. — Cf. avakīrna ākīrṇa utkīrṇa prakīrṇa vikīrṇa viprakīrṇa vyākīrṇa saṁkīrṇa. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kṛ 1. KṚ (skṛ after upa, pari, sam), VIII. karo strong, kuru weak; V. + I. kara, II. kar, V. kṛṇo; make, do; fashion, build; perform, fulfil; produce; execute; effect; conclude (friendship), display, show, exercise; prepare, cook; compose; cultivate; make anything out of (in., ab.); do anything to or for (g., lc.); make any one anything 2 ac.; do violence to (ac.); perform the usual action with (ac.); used thus with great latitude, e. g. udakaṁkṛ, offer the usual oblation of water (allied with this is the use of kri in the periphr. pf. with an abst. N. in ā); utter, pronounce, use; describe; fix, determine; pass (time); await (a moment); procure for (g., lc.); assume (shape, voice: Ā,); place or in, direct to (in., lc.), turn, the mind or thoughts, give the heart (manas, buddhim, matim, bhāvam) to, resolve on (d., lc., inf. or oratio racta with iti); appoint to (lc.); commission; act, fare; sacrifice; do anything with, make use of (in. and kim?); avail, be of use (with kim?); with adverbs in ī (e. g. atithī-), ū (e. g. mṛdū-), make turn into; with -sāt, reduce to, turn into; vaśe kṛ, subdue; -hṛdi –, take to heart, remember; hṛdayena-, love; evaṁ kṛtvā, for this reason; tathā-, yathā+uktam-, do so, consent; cs. kāraya, cause to make (2 ac.), cause to be made by (in.); cause to be prepared; cause to be made (2) ac.); cause to be placed in (lc.); cause to be performed; cause to be cultivated; — to be put or buried; order to make, — to prepare, — to practise: often = simple verb; des. cikīṣa, wish to do, — perform, — establish; intend; strive after. ati, transgress. adhi, place the head of, appoit to (lc.); put forward, make a subject of discussion: pp. entrusted with, appointed to (lc., -°); concerned in (lc.). anu, imitate (ac.); equal, rival (ac., g.), equal (ac.) in (in.). apu, take away, remove; injure (ac., g., lc.); cs. id. pra-ti+pa, take vengeance on (g.). abhi, do, make; des. wish to do, undertake. aram, prepare; serve, satisfy (d.). alam, prepare, produce; adorn (Ā. adorn oneself); do violence to (g.). abhi-, upa-, adorn, sam-alam, id.; violate. ava, direct downwards. ā, bring hither; produce; appropriate (g.); cs. call; ask for (2 ac.); des. intend to perform. apa+ā, remove, drive away, dispel, counteract, repel; give up, desist from; pay. upa+ā, bring near, fetch; deliver; grant; prepare for a sacred rite; consecrate. ni+ā, keep back. nir-ā, set apart; put away, remove; drive away; reject, repel; deny. vi+ā, separate, distinguish; explain. sam-ā, unite, keep together. upa, confer; offer, present; serve, do a service to, oblige (g., lc.); Ā. cherish. upa-skṛ, prepare, compose; equip, adorn; care for (ac.): pp. furnished with (in.). prati+upa, repay; do a service in return. ni, bring down, humble, overcome: pp. humbled; dejected; mortified. vi-ni, mortify; injure; defraud. nis, remove; prepare; deck out; cure; expiate. pari-ṣkṛ, prepare; adorn, deck, furnish with (in.). puras, place in front; show, display; appoint to (lc.); choose, prefer; honour; gd. -kṛtya, regarding, about, on account of (ac.): pp. accompanied by, furnished with (-°): -m, ad. accompanied with (-°). pra, do; fashion, make; perform; show, cause; make into (2 ac.); marry (a wife, a girl); violate, pollute (a girl); appoint to (lc.); put forward; make the subject of discussion; buddhim or manas-, apply one’s heart to, make up one’s mind to (d., lc.), resolve: pp. begun; accomplished; mentioned, under discussion; in question; cs. cause to prepare. vi-pra, injure; harass; obstruct. prati, make (ac.) out of (ac.) in opposition; repay (good and evil) with ac. of thing and d., g., lc. of person; resist; make good, repair; pay; des. wish to take revenge on (ac., lc.) for (ac.). vi, make different, change, alter; compare; disfigure, destroy, mutilate; develop; be hostile to (g., lc.); become unfaithful to (lc.); Ā, ps. be changed or modified; become alienated or disloyal: pp. changed, altered, qualified; mutilated, deformed, disfigured; unnatural, repulsive: cs. cause to change one’s sentiments. pra-vi (for vi-pra): pp. sinned. sam (generally -skṛ), put together, unite; accumulate; prepare; invest (with the sacred thread); hallow (a girl at a wedding or the dead with sacred fires); adorn, polish, form grammatically: pp. saṁ skṛta, hallowed, invested; adorned, polished, elaborate, refined, Sanskrit. prati-sam, repair. kṛ 2. KṚ, pt. cakrat, intv. car-kṛ, remember, mention with praise (g.). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 kṛ ña kṛtau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvāṁ-ubhaṁ-sakaṁaniṭ .) ña, karati karate . ayaṁ kaiścit na manyate . iti durgādāsaḥ .. kṛ ña na vadhe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (svāṁ–ubhaṁ–sakaṁ– aniṭ .) ña na, kṛṇoti kṛṇute . iti durgādāsaḥ .. kṛ ña da ḍu kṛtau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (tanāṁ–ubhaṁ –sakaṁ–aniṭ .) ña da, karoti kurute . ḍu, kṛtrimam . asmādguṇī makāro’pyaguṇī vā vaktavya iti vararuciḥ .. tena kiṁ karomi kathaṁ kurmi kvānu gacchāmi mādhava ! . duryodhanavihīnantu śūnyaṁ sarvamidaṁ jagat .. iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kṛ kṛtau bhvā° ubha° saka° aniṭ kavikalpa° . karati te akārṣīt akṛta . cakāra . bhauvādikasyāsyāpāṇinīyatā kṛ kṛtau tanā° ubha° saka° aniṭ . karoti kurute kuryāt . karotu kuru akarot akārṣīt akṛta . cakāra kartā kariṣyatite kriyāt kṛṣīṣṭa . karmaṇi kriyate akāriakāriṣātāmkārayiṣātām . kāraka kartā kārī kurvan kurṣvāṇaḥ cakrivān cakrāṇaḥ . ḍu–kṛtrimaḥ kṛtaḥ kṛtavān karaṇaṁ kṛtiḥ kriyā kṛtyā kṛtvā prakṛtya . kṛtyaṁ kāryaḥ kartavyaḥ karaṇīyaḥ . ṇici kārayati te acīkarattasani cikīrṣati te yaṅi cekriyate yaṅ luki cari(rī)karīti cari(rī) karti carkarīti carkarti kṛño hetutācchīlyānulomyeṣu pā° eṣu dyotyeṣu karoteṣṭaḥ syāt . ataḥ kūkamīti saḥ . yaśaskarī vidyā . śrāddhakaraḥ vacanakaraḥ si° kau0 divāvibhāniśāprabhābhāskārāntānantādibahunāndīkimlipilibibalibhaktikartṛ citrakṣetrasaṁkhyājaṅghābāhvaharyattaddhanuraruṣṣu pā° . eṣu kṛñaṣṭaḥ syāt . ahetvādāvapi . divākaraḥ vibhākaraḥ niśākaraḥ kaskāditvāsaḥ . bhāskaraḥ bahukaraḥ bahuśabdasya vaipulyārthe saṁkhyāpekṣayā pṛthaggrahaṇam lipilibiśabdau paryāyau . saṁkhyā– ekakaraḥ . dvikaraḥ . kaskāditvātsaḥ . ahaskaraḥ . nityam samāme’nuttarapadasthasyeti ṣatvam . dhanuṣkaraḥ . aruṣkaraḥ . kiṁyattadbahuṣu kṛño’jvidhānamiti vārtikam kiṅkarā . tatkarā . hetvādau ṭambādhitvā paratvādac . puṁyoge ṅīp . kiṅkarī . karmaṇi bhṛtau pā0 karmaśabde upapade karoteṣṭaḥ syāt bhṛtau . karmakaro bhṛtakaḥ . karmakāro’nyaḥ si° kau0 na śabdaślokakalahagāthāvairacāṭusūtramantrapadeṣu pā° . eṣu kuñaṣṭo na . hetvādiṣu prāptaḥ pratipidhyate . śabdakāra ityādi . stambaśakṛtorin pā° vrīhivatsayoriti vaktavyam vārti° . strambakarivrīhiḥ . śakṛtkarirṣvatsaḥ . vīhivatsayo kim stambhakāraḥ . śakṛtkāraḥ . si° kau0 sukarmapāpamantrapuṇyeṣu kṛñaḥ pā° sau karmādiṣu ca kṛñaḥ kvipsyāt . trividho’tra niyama iti kāśikā . sakṛt karmakṛt pāpakṛt mantrakṛt puṇyakṛt . kvibeveti niyamātkarma kṛtavāni tiniṣṭhā na . kṛña eveti niyamānmantramadhītavānmantrādhyāyaḥ atra na kvip . bhūta eveti niyamāt mantraṅkaroti kariṣyati veti vivakṣāyānna kvip . svādiṣveveti niyamābhāvādanyasminnapyupapade kvip . śāstrakṛt . bhāṣyakṛt . si° kau0 adhi + adhikāre ārambhe saka° adhikaroti adhikṛtya anu + sadṛśīkaraṇe anukaroti . śailādhipasyānucakāra lakṣmīm apa + apakāre aniṣṭācaraṇe apakaroti ripau sāntvamapakriyā māghaḥ apa + ā nivārakhe saka° . apākaroti . ayaṁ praśnaḥ prādhānyenāvākriyate vṛ° u° bhā0 ā + ākāre avayavasaṁsthāne ākṛtiḥ ākāraḥ ud + ā + utkālane saka° udākaroti utkālayati yājñakalakyaḥ svameva brahmacāriṇamuvācaitāḥ saumyodaja somaśravāḥ! iti tāhodācakāra vṛ° u° . tāgāḥ ha udācakāra utkālitavānācāryagṛham bhā° . upa + upakāre saka° upakaroti upakṛtaṁ bahu tatra kimucyate sā° da° . saṁskāre saka° suṭ ca . upaskaroti upa + ā + ārambhe upākaroti upākṛtya śrāvaṇyāṁ proṣṭha pardyā vā upākṛtya yathāvidhi manuḥ paśvādisaṁskāre ca upākarmaśabde udā° . dur–duṣṭācaraṇe duṣkṛtaṁ duṣkṛtiḥ . ni + parābhave saka° nikaroti (parābhavati) nīkaraḥ nis + nira + śuddhau aka° niṣkaroti niṣkṛtiḥ (śuddhiḥ) nir ā + nivāraṇe saka° nirākaroti nirākariṣṇū vardhiṣṇū vartiṣṇū paritoraṇam bhaṭṭiḥ! nirākariṣṇorvṛjinādṛte’pi raghuḥ parā + nirākaraṇe saka° . parākaroti pari + pariṣkāre satoguṇāntarādhāne bhūṣaṇe ca saka° suṭ ca pariṣkaroti pra + prastāve saka° prakaroti prakṛtya . ārambhe ca prakṛta japavidhīnāmāsyamudraśmidantam māghaḥ . prati + pratikāre atiṣṭanivāraṇe pratikūlācaraṇe ca saka° pratikaroti pratīkāraḥ pratikriyā . vi + vibhāge vikaroti sa tredhātmānaṁ vyakuruta chā° u° . vyakuruta vyabhajad bhā° . vikāre (atyathāsthitasya vastuno’nyathābhāke) aka° ā° vāyurvikurute si° kau° . vi + ā + prakāśane vyākaroti anena jīvenātmanānupraviśya nāmarūpe vyakaravāṇi śrutiḥ . vyākhyāne vyākṛtam pāṇinyādyuktaśabdasādhutvādhāyakasaṁskārabhede ca śikṣā kalpovyākaraṇaṁ niruktaṁ chandasāṁ citiḥ vedāṅgoktau vyākriyāvyañjanīyā vā jātiḥ kāpīha sā dhutā bhartṛ hariḥ . vi + pra + upadrave saka° viprakaroti tasmin viprakṛtāḥ kāle kumā° . kamaparamavaśaṁ na viprakuryuḥ kumā° . sam + saṁskāre satoguṇāntarādhāne saka° suṭ ca . saṁskaroti pātram . sam + pari upa + bhūṣaṇe arthe suṭ . saṁskaroti pariṣkaroti upaskaroti alaṅkarotītyarthaḥ . tatpūrvakāḥ samavāye’rtheca aka° suṭ saṁskaroti upaskaroti pariskaroti saṁghībhavatītyarthaḥ upa + satoguṇāntarādhāne vikāre ākāṅkṣitavākyasya pūraṇe ca suṭ . upaskṛtaṁ bhuṅktevikṛtaṁ bhuṅkte . upaskṛtaṁ brūte vākyamadhyāhṛtya brūte si° kau0 atha matabhedena kṛño’rthonirūpyate tatra vaiyākaraṇāḥ tasya yatnārthakatānirākaraṇena vyāpārārthakatāmāhuḥ yathā vai° bhū° sāre vyāpārobhāvanā saivotpādanā saiva ca kriyā . kṛño’karmakatāpatterna hi yatno’rtha iṣyate mū° . pacati pākamutpādayati pākānukūlā bhāvanā tādṛśyutpādanetyādiviraṇādvivriyamāṇasyāpi tadvācakateti bhāvaḥ . vyāpārapadaṁ phūkārādīnāmayatnānāmapi phūtkāratvādirūpeṇa vācyatāṁ dhvanathitumuktam . ataeva pacatītyatrāghaḥsantāpanatvaphūtkāratvacūllyuparidhāraṇatvayatnatvādi bhirbodhaḥ sarvasiddhaḥ . nacaibameṣāṁ śakyatāvacchedakatve gauravāpattyā kṛtitvameva tadavacchedakaṁ vācyam ratho gacchati jānātītyādau ca vyāpāratvādiprakārakabodholakṣaṇayeti naiyāyikarītiḥ sādhvī, śakyatāvacchedakatvasyāpi lakṣyatāvacchedakatvavadguruṇi sambhavāt tayorvaiṣamye vījābhāvāt . naca pacati pākaṁ karotīti yatnārthakarotinā vivaraṇādyatnaevākhyātārtha iti vācyam . rathogamanaṁ karoti vījādinā aṅkuraḥ kṛta iti darśanāt kṛñoyatnārthakatāyā asidveḥ . kiñca bhāvanāyā avācyatve ghaṭaṁ bhāvayatī yatreva ghaṭobhavatītyatrāpi dvitīyā syāt nacātra ghaṭasya kartṛtvena tatsaṁjñayā karmāsaṁjñāyātādhānna dvitīyeti vācyam anugatakartṛtvasya tvanmate durvacatvena ghaṭasyākartṛtvāt . kṛtyāśrayatvasya kārakacakraprayoktṛtvasya vā ghaṭādāvabhāvāt . dhātvarthānukūnavyāpārāśrayatvasya ca kārakamātrātivyāpakatvāt . api ca bhāvanāyā avācyatve dhātūnā sakarmakatvākarmakatvavibhāga ucchinnaḥ syāt . svārthaphalavyadhikaraṇavyāpāravācitvaṁ svārthavyāpāravyadhikaraṇaphalavācakatvaṁ vā sakarmakatvaṁ bhāniyivācyatvamantareṇāsambhavi . anyatamatvaṁ tattvamiti cenna ekasyaivārthabhedenākarmakatvasakarmakatvadarśanāt tadetadabhisandhāyāha kṛña iti . ayaṁ bhāvaḥ vyāpārāvācyatvapakṣe phalamātra marthaiti phalitam . tathā ca karotītyādau yatnapratītestanmātraṁ vācyamabhyupeyam . tathā ca yatī prayatnaitivat phalasthānīyayatnavācakatvāviśeṣādakarmakatāpattiḥ uktarītyā durvāreti . tathā ca nahi yatnaḥ ityatra phalasthānīyatveneti śeṣaḥ kṛñaḥ iti dhātumātropalakṣaṇaṁ sarveṣāmapyakarmakatā sakarmakatā vā na syāditi bhāvaḥ . atha vā vyāpārobhāvanā ityardhena vyāpārasya bācyatvaṁ prasādhya phalāṁśasyāpi tatsādhayan naiyāyikābhyupagata jānātikṛñādeḥ kevalajñānayatnādikriyāṇātravācitvaṁ dūṣayati kuñaḥ iti . ayaṁ bhāvaḥ phalāṁśasyāvācyatve vyāpāraeva dhātvarthaḥ syāt . tathā ca svārthaphalavyadhikaraṇavyāpāravācitvādirūpasakarmakatvocchedāpattiḥ . naca kṛñādau sakarmakatvavyavahārobhāktaiti naiyāyikoktaṁ yuktam vyavahārasya bhāktatve’pi karmaṇi lakārāsambhavāt . na hi tīre gaṅgāpadasya bhāktatve’pi tena snānādikāryaṁ kartuṁ śakyam . evañca nahi yatna ityatra yatnamātramityarthaḥ . ataevāha . kintūtpādanamevātaḥ karmavatsyāt yagādyapi . karmakartaryanyathā tu na bhavet taddṛśeriva mū° utpādanam utpatirūpaphalasahitaṁ yatnādikṛñarthaityarthaḥ . phalasya vācyatve yuktyantaramāha ataityādi . yataḥ kṛñoyatnamātrārthoneṣyate ataḥ karmavat syāditi padena karmavatkarmaṇā tulyakriyaḥ iti(pā0)sūtraṁ lakṣyate . avamarthaḥ yataevāsyotpādanārthakatā ataḥ pacyate odanaḥ ṇayanevetivat kriyate ghaṭaḥ svayameveti yagādayo’pyupapadyante . anyathā yatnasya karmaniṣṭhatvābhāvāttanna syāt dṛśivat . yathā dṛśyate ghaṭaḥ svayameveti na, darśanasya ghaṭāvṛttitvāttathā yatnasthāpīti, tathā prayogāmupapatteriti . naiyāyikāstu vyāpārārthakatānirākaraṇena yatnārthakatāmāhuḥ thathā śabdacintāmaṇau ākhyātasya yatnavācakatvādacetane rathogacchatītyādau cākhyāte vyāpāralakṣaṇā tathāhyākhyātasya pacatītyādau yatnovācyaḥ pacati pākaṁ karotītyādiyatnārthakakarotinā sarvākhyātavivaraṇādvṛddhavyavahārādiva bādhakaṁ vinā vivarāṇādapi vyutpatteḥ . dvandvādisamāsasya vigraheṇa vivaraṇādapi vigrahārthe na śaktigrahaḥ anyalabhyatvāt kiṁkarītīti yatnapraśne pacatītyuttarasya yatnārthatvaṁ vinānupapatterityācāryāḥ . atra vadanti–ākhyātasya karoteśca na yatnārthakatvaṁ rathogacchati jānāti yatate nidrātītyatra dhātvarthānukūlayatnābhāve’pyākhyātapadaprayogāt gamanaṁ karotīti karotinā tatrākhyātavivaraṇācca atra vyāpārasya karotyarthatve cetane’pi tathā . na ca tatrākhyātakarotyorgauṇatvaṁ mukhye bādhakābhāvāt . ataeva praśnottarayorna yatnārthatvaṁ kintu kriyāvācakatvameva kṛñaḥ, tena kiṁ karotīti kriyāmātrapraśne pacati gacchatīti kriyāviśeṣeṇottaramapi samañjasambhavati . tataḥ parogranthaḥ kartṛśabde 1717 darśitodṛśyaḥ . tatparastunanu prakṛtestadarthatve’pi pratyayasya na tadarthatvaṁ doṣaḥ ekodvaubahavaḥeṣiṣatītyatreva tatsambhavāt . yattu tatra dvitīyasaṁkhyecchādikalpanāvadihāpi dvitīyayatnakalpanamiti tanna dvitīyayatnecchādā vicchāyatnā’bhāvāt . vastutastu pratyekasāmarthyāvadhṛtau sambhede ubhayopasthiterāvaśyekatvena kasyāpyananvaye’pyadoṣāt pākāya yateta pākaṁ kuryādityatra kṛtyarthakākhyāte’pi tathaivānvayāditi cet na eko dvau bahava ityatra nāmārthasya vibhaktyupanītasaṁkhyānvayāvagamāyogyatvāt laḍāderyatnasāmarthyānavadhāraṇāt liṅaḥ pacetetyatra kṛtau sāmarthyāvadhāraṇācca . athāyatnārthakadhātuparākhyātasya yatnārthatvaṁ tena yatata iti nānanvayaḥ acetane cākhyātaprayogo gauṇaeva . na ca vṛttyantareṇāpi prayogasambhave śaktikalpanā yuktā . yadvā’nukūlayatne pravṛttaṁ padaṁ tadekadeśe’nukūlamātre pravartate viśuddhimātraṁ puraskṛtya vrāhmaṇe śrotriyapadavat . acetane tu madhyamottama puruṣau na bhavataeva upapadayoryuṣmadasmadoścetanārthatvāt . bhavatu vā gauṇa eva lokasyāparyanuyojyatvāditi cet na acetane ākhyātasya mukhyatve bādhakābhāvena gauṇa tvābhāvāt tasmādākhyātamyānukūlatvena vyāpāro vācyaḥ iti māṭṭāḥ . tena cetanācetanayordhātvarthānukūlavyāpārasya sattvādākhyātaprayogomukhyaeva . pathi śramaśayāne’pi pacatīti syāt śramaśāntidvārā śayanasya pākānukūlavyāpāratvāt tava yatnaviśeṣasyevānukūlavyāpāraviśeṣasya vācyatvāt anyathā yatnavācyatve’pi taṇḍulānukūlayatnavati pacatīti syāt evamacetane’pi karotinākhyātavivaraṇāt karotyartho’pi vyāpāraviśeṣaḥ . kathantarhi caitraḥpacatītyatra pākānukūlatāpratītiḥ ākṣepāditi cenna ākhyātārthena vyāpāreṇa saṁkhyayā vā yatnānapekṣaṇāt tayoḥ prayatnaṁ vināpi sattvāt nāpi kartrā, dravyamātrasya kartṛtvāt yatnavataśca kartṛtve ākhyātena tadabhidhāne yatnasyāpyabhidhānāt . nāpi dhātvarthamātreṇa, tasya yatnaṁ vināpi sattvāt nāpi yatnodhātvarthaḥ kriyāyāstatphalasya vā dhātuvācyatvāt anyathā pāka ityatrāpi yatnānubhavaprasaṅgā diti cet na dhātvarthaviśeṣeṇa pākādinā yatnākṣepāt tasya yatnaṁ vinānupapatteḥ . atha pacatītyatra pākayatnavāniti vivaraṇāt yatnārthateti cet tarhi kartrarthatāpi syāt na hi pākayatnaityeva vivaraṇaṁ pacatītyasya, tatpāryavivaraṇantat taccākṣepeṇāpi nirvahatīti cet tulyaṁ yatne’pi kathantarhi rathogacchati, vidyate vyometi bhāvanānubhavaiti cet na kathañcit, bhāvanāyādhātvarthānvayāyogyatvena tvayāpi tatra gauṇatvābhyupagamāditi . ucyate . caitraḥ pacatītyatra pākānukūlayatnānubhavāvādyatna evākhyātārtholāghavāt natvanukūlo vyāpāraḥ yatnatvāpekṣayā vyāpāratvasyopādhitvena gurutvāt nacācetana ākhyātārthe musyatvārthamanuguṇovyāpāra evākhyātavācyaḥ mukhyatvasambhave tyāgāyogāditi vācyaṁ śaktigrāhakeṇa laghuni śakti paricchedāt acetane prayogasya ghṛttyantareṇāpi sambhavāt . mukhyatvārthaṁ śaktikalpane ca vṛttyantarocchedaḥ . etana vyāpāravācakasyākhyātasya yatnasādhyārtharūpapacyādidhātūpasandhānena vyāpāraviśeṣayatnopasthāpanamiti nirastaṁ lāghavena yatnasyaiva śakyatvāt nanu yatnonākhyātārthaḥ pākatvena pākasya yatnasādhyatvānumityā yatnalābhādityuktamiti cenna caitro yatnaṁ katītyataḥ pākānukūlavartamānayatnavān pratīyate . naca pākasya vartamānayatnena vyāptirasti atītānāgatayorvyabhicārāt . na ca dhātvarthenānumite yatne ākhyātena vartamānatānvayaḥ sambhavati yatnasyāpadārthatvāt svārthavyāpārasya vartamānatvabodhanenākhyātasya paryavasitatvācca . atha caitraḥ pākānukūlavartamānavyāpāravāniti śābdabodhānantaraṁ caitraḥ pākānukūlavartamānayatnavān cetanatve sati pākānukūlavartamānavyāpāravattvāt maitravat . anumānaṁ vinā ca pākayatne vartamānatābhānamākhyātasya yatne śaktibhramāditi cenna yatnābhāvakāle’pi tajjanya vyāpārasya vartamānatayā vyabhicārāt kiñca . vyāpārasya vācyatvaṁ talliṅgakañca vartamānayatnānumānamiti kalpa nādvayamapekṣya yatna vācyatve lāghavāt . nacācetane ākhyā tasya vyāpāravācakatvābadhāraṇādeva kalpaneti yuktaṁ gauṇatayā śaktibhrameṇa vā tatrākhyātādvyāpārāvagamopa patteḥ . yatnavigamadaśāyāṁ tajjanyavyāpārakāle pacatī tyatra vartamānavyāpārābhidhānamākhyātena lakṣaṇayā . yathā rathogacchatītyatra, ato’nyalabhyatvānna tadanurodhena vyāpāre śaktiḥ . anyathā tavāpi yatnakāle pacatīti nasyāt tasmānna laḍākhyātaṁ yatnāvācakaṁ ākhyātatvāt liṅākhyātavat tarkaścokta eva . etena phalānukūlovyāpā rodhātvarthaḥ ākhyātavācyā saṁkhyaiva tena caitraḥ pacati ratho gacchatītyatra caitrarathayordhātvarthānukūlavyāpāravattva pratīte rmukhya eva prayogaḥ . pacatītyatra yatnalābhodhārtvenā kṣepāt vikḷttyanakūlavyāpārasya yatnaṁ vinānupapatte riti gurumatamapāstaṁ pacatītyatra pākānukūlayatnavartamāna tvasyākṣepādalābhenākhyātārthatvāt . ratnakoṣakṛtastu dhātvartho vyāpāraḥ ākhyātārtha utpādanā sā cotpādakatā saiva bhāvanā pacatītyādāvākhyātasya pākamutpādayatīti vivaraṇāt dhātvarthotpādakatā ca cetanācetanayoriti sarvatrākhyātaprayogo mukhyaeva . yatate jānātītyādāvapi yatnaṁ jñānamutpādayatītyarthāt natu vyāpāro yatnovākhyātārthaḥ yatata ityādau mukhyatve sati gauṇatvasyānyāyyatvāt ākhyātārthavivaraṇakarotyartho’pyutpādakataiva pākaṁ karotītyādau karotītyasyotpādayatīti vivaraṇāt ghaṭaṁ karotītyādau kṛñartha utpattireva gamyate . ataeva kiṁ karotītiṁ sāmānyotpādanāprāśne pacatīti pākotpādanāviśeṣeṇottaramātramapi samañjasam . caitra utpādayatītyatra dhātvartha evotpādanā caitreṇānveti ākhyātārthotpādanā tvananvitaiva utpatterutpattyabhāvāt . vastutastūtpādayatītyatra dhātvartha evotpādanā ato’nutpādanārthadhātūttaravartina ākhyātasyānanyalabhyatayotpādanā vācyā tanmatañca śabdaci° dūṣitaṁ vistarabhayānnoddhṛtam . evaṁ darśiteṣu mateṣu yuktāyuktatvaṁ sughībhirbhāvyam . tataḥ svārthe–ṇic kārayati karotītyarthaḥ . daśa varṣasahasrāṇi rāmo rājyamakārayadityādi rāmā0 kṛ badhe svādi ubha° saka° seṭ . kṛṇoti kṛṇute akārṣīt akṛta . cakāra . asya na suṭ suḍvidhau tānādikasyaiva grahaṇāt . |
कृष्ण – kṛṣṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. black, dark, dark-blue (opposed to “śveta, śukla,
rohita”, and “aruṇa”) &c. mf (“ā”) n. wicked, evil kṛṣṇa m. (with or without “pakṣa”) the dark half of the lunar month from full to new moon kṛṣṇa m. the fourth or Kali-yuga kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“kṛṣṇas”) m. black (the colour) or dark-blue (which is often confounded with black by the Hindūs) kṛṣṇa m. the antelope kṛṣṇa m. a kind of animal feeding on carrion (“kṛṣṇa”) kṛṣṇa m. the Indian cuckoo or Kokila (cf. kṛṣṇa m. a crow kṛṣṇa m. Carissa Carandas kṛṣṇa m. N. of one of the poets of the (descended from Aṅgiras) kṛṣṇa m. (a son of Devakī and pupil of Ghora āṅgirasa) kṛṣṇa m. N. of a celebrated Avatār of the god Viṣṇu, or sometimes identified with Viṣṇu himself ([ v, 2563; xiv, 1589 ff. 2359 &c.]) as distinct from his ten Avatārs or incarnations (in the earlier legends he appears as a great hero and teacher [; in the more recent he is deified, and is often represented as a young and amorous shepherd with flowing hair and a flute in his hand; the following are a few particulars of his birth and history as related in 3304 ff. and in the Purāṇas &c.: Vasu-deva, who was a descendant of Yadu and Yayāti, had two wives, Rohiṇī and Devakī; the latter had eight sons of whom the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa; Kaṁsa, king of Mathurā and cousin of Devakī, was informed by a prediction that one of these sons would kill him; he therefore kept Vasu-deva and his wife in confinement, and slew their first six children; the seventh was Balarāma who was saved by being abstracted from the womb of Devakī and transferred to that of Rohiṇī; the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa who was born with black skin and a peculiar mark on his breast; his father Vasu-deva managed to escape from Mathurā with the child, and favoured by the gods found a herdsman named Nanda whose wife Yaśo-dā had just been delivered of a son which Vasu-deva conveyed to Devakī after substituting his own in its place. Nanda with his wife Yaśo-dā took the infant Kṛiṣṇa and settled first in Gokula or Vraja, and afterwards in Vṛindāvana, where Kṛiṣṇa and Bala-rāma grew up together, roaming in the woods and joining in the sports of the herdsmen’s sons; Kṛiṣṇa as a youth contested the sovereignty of Indra, and was victorious over that god, who descended from heaven to praise Kṛiṣṇa, and made him lord over the cattle [ 3787 ff.; 7456 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa is described as sporting constantly with the Gopīs or shepherdesses [ 4078 ff.; 8301 ff. of whom a thousand became his wives, though only eight are specified, Rādhā being the favourite [ 6694 ff.; 9177 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa built and fortified a city called Dvārakā in Gujarāt, and thither transported the inhabitants of Mathurā after killing Kaṁsa; Kṛiṣṇa had various wives besides the Gopīs, and by Rukmiṇī had a son Pradyumna who is usually identified with Kāma-deva; with Jains, Kṛiṣṇa is one of the nine black Vasu-devas; with Buddhists he is the chief of the black demons, who are the enemies of Buddha and the white demons) kṛṣṇa m. N. of an attendant in Skanda’s retinue kṛṣṇa m. of an Asura 12936 on kṛṣṇa m. of a king of the Nāgas kṛṣṇa m. of Arjuna (the most renowned of the Pāṇḍu princes, so named apparently from his colour as a child) kṛṣṇa m. of Vyāsa 11089 kṛṣṇa m. of Hārita see “-hārita” kṛṣṇa m. of a son of śuka by Pīvarī (teacher of the Yoga) 980 ff. kṛṣṇa m. of a pupil of Bharad-vāja kṛṣṇa m. of Havir-dhāna 83 kṛṣṇa m. of a son of Arjuna 1892 kṛṣṇa m. of an adopted son of A-samaṇjas, 2039 kṛṣṇa m. of a chief of the Andhras kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the kṛṣṇa m. of a poet kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the Dayā-bhāga kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Keśavārka and grandson of Jayāditya kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Tāna-bhaṭṭa and uncle of Raṅga-nātha kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Dāmodara and uncle of Malhaṇa kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Prabhūjika and uncle of Vidyā-dhara kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Madana kṛṣṇa m. of the grammarian Rāma-candra kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Vāruṇendra and father of Lakṣmaṇa kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Hīra-bhaṭṭa (author of the called Carakabhāṣya, and of the work Sāhitya-sudhā-samudra) kṛṣṇa m. N. of a hell kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“au”) m. du. Kṛiṣṇa and Arjuna kṛṣṇa m. pl. N. of the śūdras in śālmala-dvīpa kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a kind of leech kṛṣṇa m. a kind of venomous insect kṛṣṇa m. N. of several plants (Piper longum ; the Indigo plant ; a grape ; a Punar-navā with dark blossoms ; Gmelina arborea ; Nigella indica ; Sinapis ramosa ; Vernonia anthelminthica ; = “kākolī” ; a sort of Sārivā kṛṣṇa m. a kind of perfume (= “parpaṭī”) kṛṣṇa m. N. of Draupadī kṛṣṇa m. of Durgā kṛṣṇa m. of one of the seven tongues of fire kṛṣṇa m. of one of the mothers in Skanda’s retinue kṛṣṇa m. of a Yoginī kṛṣṇa m. (with or without “gaṅgā”) N. of the river Kistna kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. night kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) n. blackness, darkness, i, 123, 1 and 9 kṛṣṇa m. the black part of the eye kṛṣṇa m. the black spots in the moon kṛṣṇa m. a kind of demon or spirit of darkness kṛṣṇa m. black pepper kṛṣṇa m. black Agallochum kṛṣṇa m. iron kṛṣṇa m. lead kṛṣṇa m. antimony kṛṣṇa m. blue vitriol kṛṣṇa m. ([cf. “kārṣṇa”, &c.; cf. also Russ. ‘cernyi’, “black.”]) kṛṣṇa Nom. P. “-ṣṇati”, to behave or act like Kṛiṣṇa Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kṛṣṇa a. [kṛṣ-nak] (1) Black, dark, dark-blue. (2) Wicked, evil. –ṣṇaḥ (1) The black colour. (2) The black antelope. (3) A crow. (4) The (Indian) cuckoo. (5) The dark half of a lunar month (from full to new moon). (6) The Kali age. (7) Viṣṇu in his eighth incarnation, born as the son of Vasudeva and Devakī. [Kṛṣṇa is the most celebrated hero of Indian mythology and the most popular of all the deities. Though the real son of Vasudeva and Devakī and thus a cousin of Kamsa, he was, for all practical purposes, the son of Nanda and Yaśodā by whom he was brought up and in whose house he spent his childhood. It was here that his divine character began to be gradually discovered, when he easily crushed the most redoubtable demons, such as Baka, Pūtanā &c., that were sent to kill him by Kamsa, and performed many other feats of surprising strength. The chief companions of his youth were the Gopis or wives of the cowherds of Gokula, among whom Rādhā was his special favourite; (cf. Jayadeva’s Gitagovinda). He killed Kamsa, Naraka, Keśin, Ariṣṭa and a host of other powerful demons. He was a particular friend of Arjuna, to whom he acted as charioteer in the great war, and his staunch support of the cause of the Pāṇḍavas was the main cause of the overthrow of the Kauravas. On several critical occasions, it was Kṛṣṇa’s assistance and inventive mind that stood the Pāṇḍavas in good stead. After the general destruction of the Yādavas at Prabhāsa, he was killed unintentionally by a hunter named Jaras who shot him with an arrow mistaking him at a distance for a deer. He had more than 16000 wives, but Rukmiṇi and Satyabhāma, (as also Rādhā) were his favourites. He is said to have been of dark-blue or cloud-like colour; cf. bahiriva malinataraṁ tava kṛṣṇa manopi bhaviṣyati nūna Gīt. 8. His son was Pradyumna]. (8) N. of Vyāsa, the reputed author of the Mahābhārata. (9) N. of Arjuna. (10) Aloe wood. (11) The Supreme spirit. (12) Black pepper. (13) Iron. –ṣṇā (1) N. of Draupadī, wife of the Pāṇḍavas; Ki. 1. 26. (2) N. of a river in the Deccan that joins the sea at Masulipattam. (3) A kind of poisonous insect. (4) N. of several plants. (5) A grape. (6) A kind of perfume. (7) An epithet of Durgā. (8) One of the 7 tongues of fire. –ṣṇī A dark night. –ṣṇaṁ (1) Blackness, darkness (moral also). (2) Iron. (3) Antimony. (4) The black part of the eye. (5) Black pepper. (6) Lead. (7) An inauspicious act. (8) Money acquired by gambling. — Comp. –aguru n. a kind of sandal-wood. –acalaḥ an epithet of the mountain Raivataka. –ajinaṁ the skin of the black antelope. –adhvan, –arcis m. an epithet of fire; cf. kṛṣṇavartman. –ayas n., –ayasaṁ, –āmiṣaṁ iron, crude or black iron. –aṣṭamī, janmāṣṭamī the 8th day of the dark half of Śrāvaṇa when Kṛṣṇa was born; also called gokulāṣṭamī. –āvāsaḥ the holy fig-tree. –udaraḥ a kind of snake. –kaṁdaṁ a red lotus. –karman a. of black deeds, criminal, wicked, depraved, guilty, sinful. –kākaḥ a raven. –kāyaḥ a buffalo. –kāṣṭhaṁ a kind of sandal-wood, agallochum. –kohalaḥ a gambler. –gaṁgā the river kṛṣṇaveṇī. –gati fire: āyodhate kṛṣṇagatiṁ sahāyaṁ R. 6. 42. –garbhāḥ (f. pl.) 1. the pregnant wives of the demon Kṛṣṇa. –2. waters in the interiors of the clouds. –godhā a kind of poisonous insect. –grīvaḥ N. of Śiva. –caṁcukaḥ a kind of pea. –caṁdraḥ N. of Vasndeva. –cara a. what formerly belonged to Kṛṣṇa. –cūrṇaṁ rust of iron. –tāmraṁ a kind of sandal wood. –tāraḥ 1. a species of antelope. –2. an antelope (in general). –dehaḥ a bee. –dhanaṁ money got by foul means. –dvaipāyanaḥ N. of Vyāsa: tamahamarāgamakṛṣṇa kṛṣṇadvaipāyanaṁ vaṁde Ve. 1. 4. –pakṣaḥ the dark half of a lunar month. –2. an epithet of Arjuna. –padī a female with black feet. –paviḥ an epithet of Agni. –piṁgala a. dark-brown. ( –lā) N. of Durgā. –mṛgaḥ the black antelope; śṛṁge kṛṣṇamṛgasya vāmanayanaṁ kaṁḍūyamānāṁ mṛgīṁ S. 6. 16. –mukhaḥ, –vaktraḥ, –vadanaḥ the blackfaced monkey. –yajurvedaḥ the Taittirīya or black Yajurveda. –yāmaḥ an epithet of Agni. –raktaḥ dark-red colour. –rūpya= -cara q. v. –lavaṇaṁ 1. a kind of black salt. –2. a factitious salt. –lohaḥ the loadstone. –varṇaḥ 1. black colour. –2. N. of Rahu. –3. a Śūdra. –vartman m. 1. fire; R. 11. 42; Ms. 2. 94. –2. N. of Rāhu. –3. a low man, profligate, black-guard. –viṣāṇā Ved. the horns of the black antelope. –veṇī N. of a river. –śakuniḥ a crow. –śāraḥ, –sāraḥ, –sāraṁgaḥ the spotted antelope; kṛṣṇasāre dadaccakṣustvayi cādhijyakārmuke S. 1. 6, V. 4. 31. –śṛṁgaḥ a buffalo. –sakhaḥ, –sārathiḥ an epithet of Arjuna. ( –khī) cummin seed. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kṛṣṇa 1) adj. f. ā oxyt. Uṇ. 3, 4. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. “schwarz, dunkel” (Gegens. śveta, śukla; rohita, aruṇa) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. 1397. 17. an. 2, 136. MED. ṇ. 8. nabhaḥ ṚV. 8, 85, 14. tamaḥ AV. 5, 3, 11. rātriḥ 13, 3, 26. rajaḥ ṚV. 1, 35, 2. 4. 9. ema 58, 4. tvak 130, 8. 9, 41, 1. abhvam 1, 140, 5. 92, 5. lomāni ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. śakuna 14, 1, 1, 31. ṚV. 10, 16, 6. AV. 7, 64, 1. Kuh ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 4, 15. 9, 2, 3, 30. Pferd LĀṬY. 3, 1. Kleid ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 5, 17. Schuhe KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 4, 21. anyadrocate kṛṣṇamanyat ṚV. 3, 55, 11. (oṣadhe) rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 8, 7, 1. ṚV. 8, 41, 10. 82, 13. VS. 24, 1. 10. 40. AV. 5, 23, 4. TS. 5, 2, 4, 2. 3, 1, 4. 4, 9, 3. kṛṣṇā asedhadapa sadmano jāḥ ṚV. 6, 47, 21. 8, 62, 18. yasyāṁ kṛṣṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁhite ahorātre vihite bhūmyāmadhi AV. 12, 1, 52. kṛṣṇaṁ ca varṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁ dhuḥ ṚV. 1, 73, 7. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 3, 23. puruṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ piṅgākṣaḥ ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 1, 7. 13. (ṛtvik) anatikṛṣṇo ‘natiśvetaḥ (Sch.: = nātibālo nātivṛddhaḥ) LĀṬY. in Ind. St. 1, 51. lohitakṛṣṇavarṇā (v. l. lohitaśuklakṛṣṇā) ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 5. tila SUŚR. 1, 377, 13. asau sukṛṣṇo vihagaḥ kokilaḥ R. 2, 52, 2. VET. 4, 8. H. 49. kṛṣṇanetra “schwarzäugig”, ein Beiw. Śiva’s MBH. 14, 200. kṛṣṇavāsa 13,882. kṛṣṇavāsas R. 2, 69, 14. kṛṣṇa mit und ohne pakṣa “die dunkle Monatshälfte, die Zeit vom Vollmond bis zum Neumond” AK. 1, 1, 3, 12. M. 1, 66. 6, 20. 11, 216. YĀJÑ. 3, 324. BHAG. 8, 25. SUŚR. 1, 19, 6. kṛṣṇacaturdaśī “der 14te Tag der dunklen Monatshälfte” TRIK. 1, 1, 107. KATHĀS. 25, 180. VET. 3, 15. “schwarz” in moralischem Sinne so v. a. “böse” (s. kṛṣṇakarman). kṛṣṇīkaroti, kṛṣṇībhavati, kṛṣṇīsyāt VOP. 7, 82. — 2) m. a) “die schwarze Farbe” AK. TRIK. H. H. an. — b) parox. “die schwarze Antilope” (in einigen Veda – Stellen ist ein anderes, aasfressendes Thier gemeint): kṛṣṇo mṛgasaṁyoge (ādyudātto bhavati) VS. PRĀT. 2, 25. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. ākhare kṛṣṇā iṣirā anartiṣuḥ ṚV. 10, 94, 5. VS. 2, 1. 24, 36. TS. 5, 2, 6, 5. 6, 1, 3, 1. śune kroṣṭre mā śarīrāṇi kartamaliklavebhyo gṛdhrebhyo ye ca kṛṣṇā (die Betonung wird wohl zu ändern sein) aviṣyavaḥ AV. 11, 2, 2. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 1. 3, 2, 1, 28. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 20. 8, 2, 20. Vgl. kṛṣṇamṛga, kṛṣṇaviṣāṇā, kṛṣṇājina. — c) “Krähe” H. an. MED. — d) “der indische Kuckuck” H. an. VIŚVA im ŚKDR. Vgl. R. 2, 52, 2. — e) N. eines Strauchs, “Carissa Carandas Lin.” (karamardaka), ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — f) “die dunkle Monatshälfte” (s. u. 1.) am Ende. — g) “das vierte” Juga (kali) H. an. — h) N. pr. oxyt. oder parox. ŚĀNT. 2, 13. parox. ṚV. 8, 74, 3. 4 (nach der ANUKR. ein Āñgirasa). KAUṢ. BR. 30, 9 in Ind. St. 1, 190. 3, 214 (Kāṇva und Āñgirasa). kṛṣṇo devakīputraḥ ein Schüler des ghora āṅgirasaḥ CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 6. Der im MBH. verherrlichte Held und treue Bundesgenosse der Pāṇḍava, der Yādava Kṛṣṇa, ist gleichfalls ein Sohn der Devakī von Vasudeva. Er verbringt seine Jugend, um den Nachstellungen Kaṁsa’s zu entgehen, beim Hirten Nanda und dessen Frau Yaśodā und gilt für deren Sohn. Hieraus hat man schliessen wollen, dass Kṛṣṇa in der älteren Sage der wirkliche Sohn des Kuhhirten und seiner Frau gewesen sei, wogegen aber zu bemerken ist, dass eine spätere Anknüpfung an die in einer älteren Schrift auftretende Devakī Kṛṣṇa keinen besondern Glanz verliehen hätte, und dass hierdurch die natürliche Verbindung mit dem in der CHĀND. UP. erwähnten Lehrer Kṛṣṇa ohne Noth zerrissen würde. Kṛṣṇa ist in der älteren Sage ein vergötterter Held und Lehrer (vgl. die BHAGAVADGĪTĀ), in der jüngeren tritt neben dem siegreichen Helden auch der dem Liebesgenuss überaus ergebene junge Hirt hervor. Schon im MBH. wird Kṛṣṇa als Gottheit betrachtet und mit Viṣṇu identificirt, so z. B. 14, 1589. 1591. kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdo ṇaśca nirvṛttivācakaḥ. viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca kṛṣṇo bhavati sāttvataḥ.. 5, 2563. HARIV. 2359. fgg. Vgl. hierüber LIA. I, 488. Seine Geburt wird erzählt HARIV. 3304. fgg. VP. 502. fgg. hat Tausende von Frauen, unter denen acht besonders hervorgehoben werden, HARIV. 6694. fgg. 9177. fgg. VP. 427. fg. 573. fg. 578. 590. seine Liebesspiele mit den Hirtinnen HARIV. 4078. fgg. 8301. fgg. VP. 531. GĪT. sein Kampf mit Indra HARIV. 3787. fgg. 7456. fgg. VP. 522. fgg. 584. fgg. Indra von Kṛṣṇa besiegt, weiht seinen Nebenbuhler zum König der Kühe: ahaṁ kilendro devānāṁ tvaṁ gavāmindratāṁ gataḥ.. govinda iti lokāstvāṁ stoṣyanti bhuvi śāśvatam. mamopari yathendrastvaṁ sthāpito gobhirīśvaraḥ.. upendra iti kṛṣṇa tvāṁ gāsyanti divi devatāḥ. HARIV. 4004. fgg. Kṛṣṇa ist der Vater Pradjumna’s oder des Liebesgottes; dieser heisst daher: kṛṣṇaja 9322. kṛṣṇanandana 9331. kṛṣṇasūnu 9324. WEBER hat die Ansicht ausgesprochen, dass eine Bekanntschaft mit Christus und dem Christenthum stark auf die Entwickelung der Sage von Kṛṣṇa eingewirkt habe, eine Ansicht, die an LASSEN einen entschiedenen Gegner gefunden hat. Ind. St. 1, 400. 2, 398. fgg. 409. fg. ZdmG.VI, 92. fgg. LIA. II, 1106. fgg. Die Lexicographen führen kṛṣṇa als Beinamen von viṣṇu auf, AK. 1, 1, 1, 13. TRIK. 1, 1, 31. 3, 3, 123. H. 215. H. an. MED. Im System der Jaina ist Kṛṣṇa einer der neun “schwarzen” Vāsudeva H. 697. Bei den Buddhisten erscheint Kṛṣṇa als Haupt der “schwarzen” Dämonen, welche als Gegner von Buddha und der “weissen” Dämonen auftreten, LALIT. 147. 287. 289. 325. Einen andern Charakter trägt Kṛṣṇa ebend. 127. 166. — Den Namen Kṛṣṇa führen ferner: ein König der Nāga MBH. 2, 360. BURN. Intr. 269. — ein Asura HARIV. 12936. SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 101, 1. — Arjuna, der Sohn Pāṇḍu’s, H. an. MED. kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama. kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ priyatvādbālakasya vai.. MBH. 4, 1389. Der du. kṛṣṇau bezeichnet den Gott Kṛṣṇa und Arjuna 1, 8287. 3, 8279. — Vyāsa TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 60. dvaipāyanena kṛṣṇena (vgl. kṛṣṇadvaiyāyana) 2, 2573. yo vyasya vedāṁścaturo bhagavānṛṣiḥ. loke vyāsatvamāpede kārṣṇyātkṛṣṇatvameva ca.. 1, 4236. HARIV. 11089. — Kṛṣṇa Hārīta Ind. St. 1, 391, N. — ein Sohn Śuka’s von der Pīvarī, ein Lehrer des Joga, HARIV. 980. fg. — ein Schüler Bharadvāja’s KATHĀS. 7, 15. — Kṛṣṇa Dāśārha LIA. I, Anh. XXVIII. — ein Sohn Havirdhāna’s HARIV. 83. VP. 106. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 8. — ein Sohn Arjuna’s HARIV. 1892. — ein Adoptivsohn von Asamañjas 2039. — ein Fürst der Andhra VP. 472. — verschiedene Autoren, namentlich Scholiasten COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 452. fg. Verz. d. B. H. No. 109 u.s.w. — śrīkṛṣṇa ebend. No. 739 u.s.w. — i) Name einer Hölle VP. 207. 209. — 3) f. kṛṣṇā a) (sc. śatapadī) “ein best. giftiges Insect” SUŚR. 2, 290, 3. — b) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Piper longum Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 124. H. 421. H. an. MED. HĀR. 261 (masc.); “die Indigopflanze; der Weinstock mit dunklen Trauben” H. an. MED. = nīlapunarnavā; gambhārī; kṛṣṇajīraka; sārivāviśeṣa; rājasarṣapa RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = somarājī; kākolī JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. – SUŚR. 1, 162, 16. 2, 88, 1. 206, 5. 222, 12. 322, 12. 439, 19. 504, 5. 506, 7. kṛṣṇāvījam 330, 16. — c) “ein best. Parfum” (s. parpaṭī) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. — d) ein Bein. der Draupadi TRIK. 2, 8, 18. 3, 3, 124. H. 710. H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 10. DRAUP. 3, 5. ARJ. 3, 1. LIA. I, 641. fg. — e) ein Bein. der Durgā H. ś. 47. MBH. 4, 184. Vgl. kālī. — f) N. einer der sieben Zungen des Feuers H. 1099, Sch. Vgl. kālī. — g) N. pr. eines Flusses, = kṛṣṇasamudbhavā, kṛṣṇagaṅgā, kṛṣṇaveṇyā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. VP. 184. kṛṣṇā gaṅgā MBH. 13, 4888. Vgl. LIA. I, 167 und kṛṣṇagaṅgā. — 4) f. kṛṣṇī “die Nacht”: riṇakti kṛṣṇīraruṣāya panthām ṚV. 7, 71, 1. — 5) n. a) “Schwärze, Dunkelheit”: śukrā kṛṣṇādajaniṣṭa ṚV. 1, 123, 9. 1. 10, 127, 7. — b) “das Schwarze im Auge” ŚAT. BR. 10, 5, 2, 7. 12, 8, 2, 26. 13, 4, 2, 3. 14, 5, 2, 3. SUŚR. 1, 10, 18. 2, 303, 13. 311, 12. — c) “Dunkelwesen” (von Dämonen): pañcāśatkṛṣṇā ni vapaḥ sahasrā ṚV. 4, 16, 13. — d) “schwarzer Pfeffer” AK. 2, 9, 36. TRIK. H. 419. H. an. MED. — e) “schwarzes Aloeholz” RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — f) “Eisen” TRIK. H. an. MED. — g) “Blei” H. ś. 159. — h) “Spiessglanz” H. 1051. — i) “blauer Vitriol” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. kārṣṇa, kārṣṇāyana, kārṣṇi, kārṣṇya. kṛṣṇa 2) h) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2559. — 3) f) HALĀY. 1, 68. — g) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 10,a, N. 1. 16,b,16. 102,a, No. 158. -revāsaṁgama 65,b,42. HALL 75. — h) N. pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2640. — 5) b) “das Schwarze im Monde” TBR. 1, 2, 1, 2. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 kṛṣṇa (ŚRĪ KṚṢṆA). Born in the Yādava dynasty as the son of Vasudeva and Devakī, Śrī Kṛṣṇa was the ninth of the ten incarnations of Mahāviṣṇu. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa, i. e. kṛṣ + na (the origin of the signification is dubious). I. adj., f. ṇā. 1. Black, or dark blue, Rām. 3, 55, 5. 2. With or without pakṣa, m. The dark half of a month, from the full moon to that of the new moon, Man. 1, 66; 6, 20. II. m. 1. kṛṣṇa, The most celebrated incarnation of Viṣṇu, MBh. 14, 1589. 2. The black antelope, Bhāg. P. 3, 10, 20. III. f. ṇā. 1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 184. 2. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 162, 16. — Comp. ati-, adj. very black, Pañc. 104, 15. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kṛṣṇa a. black, dark. –m. (±pakṣa) the dark half month, the black antelope (mostly kṛṣṇa); N. of an ancient hero and teacher, later as the god Kṛṣṇa identified with Viṣṇu; du. kṛṣṇau = Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna. f. kṛṣṇā a. black kind of leech. N. of sev. plants, E. of Durgā and Draupadī; f. kṛṣṇī night. n. blackness, darkness. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kṛṣṇa kṛṣ-ṇa, n. black; dark; w. pakṣa, dark half of the month (from full new moon); m. (kṛṣṇa) black antelope; N. of a god (incarnation of Viṣṇu): du. Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna; ā, f. kind of leech; N. of several plants; ep. of Draupadī, and of Durgā; n. blackness, darkness. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kṛṣṇa pu° kṛṣa–nak . bhagavato’vatārabhede vāsudeve 1 devakīnandane . kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdaḥ ṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . tayoraikyaṁ paraṁ brahma kṛṣṇaityabhidhīyate ityukte 2 parabrahmaṇi, 3 vedavyāse, 4 arjune madhyamapāṇḍave ca . kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt 5 kokile, viśvaḥ 6 kāke, medi° karamardake (karamacā) 7 vṛkṣe, śabdara° 8 nīle, varṇe 9 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 10 kālāguruṇi rājani° . 11 aśubhakarmaṇi ca na° . kṛṣṇakarmā amaraḥ 12 draupadyāṁ, 13 nīlīvṛkṣe, 14 pippalyāṁ, 15 drākṣāyāṁ, strī medi° 16 nīlapunarnavāyām, 17 kṛṣṇajīrake, 18 gāmmāryā 19 kaṭukāyām, 20 sāvirābhede 21 rājasarṣape, rājani° 22 parpaṭyāṁ, bhāvapra° . 23 kākolyāṁ, 24 somarājyāñca strī ṭāp jaṭā° kṛṣṇavarṇatvācca tāsāṁ tathātvam 25 dhanamede na° kṛṣṇadhanaśabdī vivṛtiḥ . 26 nīlāñjane, 27 lauhe, 28 marice ca pu° jaṭādharaḥ . tatra bhagavadavatāraviśeṣaḥ atha bhādrapade māsi kṛṣṇāṣṭamyāṁ kalau yuge . aṣṭāviṁśatime jātaḥ kṛṣṇo’sau devakīsutaḥ brahmapu° . vasudevadevakyau ca kaśyapāditī . tau ca varuṇasya goharaṇāt brahmaṇaḥ śāpena gopālatvamāpatuḥ . yathāha harivaṁ° 56 a° ityambupatinā prokto varuṇenāhamacyuta! . gavāṁ kāraṇatattvajñaḥ kaśyape śāpamutsṛjam . yenāṁśena hṛtā gāvaḥ kaśyapena mahātmanā . sa tenāṁśena jagatīṁ gatvā gopatvameṣyati . yā ca sā surabhirnāma aditiśca surāraṇī . ubhe te tasya vai bhārye saha tenaiva yāsyataḥ . tābhyāṁ saha sa gopatve kaśyapo bhuvi raṁsyate . tadasya kaśyapasyāṁśastejasā kaśyapopamaḥ vasudeva iti khyāto goṣu tiṣṭhati bhūtale . girirgovardhano nāma mathurāyāstvadūrataḥ . tatrāsau goṣvabhirataḥ kaṁsasya karadāyakaḥ . tasyabhāryādvayañcaiva aditiḥ surabhistathā . devakī rohiṇī caiva vasudevasya dhīmataḥ . tatrāvatara lokānāṁ bhavāya madhusūdana! . jayāśīrvacanaistvete vardhayanti divaukasaḥ . ātmānamātmanā hi tvamavatārya mahītale . devakīṁ rohiṇīñcaiva garbhābhyāṁ paritoṣaya . tatratvaṁ śiśurevādau gopālakṛtalakṣaṇaḥ . vardhayasva mahābāho! purā traivikrame yathā .. chādayitvātmanātmānaṁ māyayā goparūpayā . gopakanyāsahasrāṇi ramayaṁścara medinīm . gāśca te rakṣitā viṣṇo! vanāni paridhāvataḥ . vanamālāparikṣiptaṁ dhanyā drakṣyanti te vapuḥ . viṣṇo! padmapalāśākṣa! gopālavasatiṅgate . bāle tvayi mahābāho . loko bālatvameṣyati . tvadbhaktāḥ puṇḍarīkākṣa! tava cittavaśānugāḥ . goṣu gopā bhaviṣyanti sahāyāḥ satatantava . vane cārayato gāstu goṣṭheṣu paridhāvataḥ . majjato yamunāyāntu ratimāpsyanti te bhṛśam . jīvitaṁ vasudevasya bhaviṣyati sujīvitam . yastvayā tāta ityuktaḥ sa putra iti vakṣyati . atha vā kasyaṁ putratvaṁ gacchethāḥ kaśyapādṛte . kā vā dhārayituṁ śaktā viṣṇo! tvāmaditiṁ vinā . yogenātmasamutthena gacchatva vijayāya vai iti viṣṇuṁ prati brahmoktiḥ . tābhyāṁ tasyotpattikathā ca tatra 60 a° yathā yadarthaṁ sapta te garbhāḥ kaṁsena vinipātitāḥ . tantu garbhaṁ prayatnena rarakṣustasya rakṣiṇaḥ . sa tatra garbhavasatau vasatyātmecchayā hariḥ . samadhatta yaśodā’pi garbhaṁ tadahareva tu . viṣṇoḥ śarīrajāṁ nidrāṁ viṣṇornirdeśakāriṇīm garbhakāle tvasaṁpūrṇe aṣṭame māsi te striyau . devakī ca yaśodā ca suṣuvāte samaṁ tadā . yāmeva rajanīṁ viṣṇurjajñe vṛṣṇikulaṁ prabhuḥ . tāmeva rajanīṁ kanyā yaśodāto vyajāyata . nandagopasya bhāryaikā vasudevasya cāparā . tulyakālaṁ hi garbhiṇyau yaśodā devakī tathā . devakyajanayadviṣṇuṁ yaśodā tāntu kanyakām . muhūrte’bhijite prāpte sārdharātre vibhūṣite . sāgarāḥ samakampanta celuśca dharaṇīdharāḥ . jajvaluścāgnayaḥ śāntā jāyamāne janārdane . śivāḥ saṁpravavurvātāḥ praśāntamabhavadrajaḥ . jyotīṁṣi vyatyakāśanta jāyamāne janārdane . abhijinnāma nakṣatraṁ jayantī nāma śarvarī . muhūrto vijayo nāma yatra jāto janārdanaḥ . avyaktaḥ śāśvataḥ kṛṣṇo harirnārāyaṇaḥ prabhuḥ . jāyate bhagavāṁstatra nayanairmohayan jagat . tato’natidūre vasudevastu taṁ rātrau jātaṁ puttramadhokṣajam . śrīvatsalakṣaṇaṁ dṛṣṭvā yutaṁ divyaiśca lakṣaṇaiḥ . uvāca vasudevastaṁ rūpaṁ saṁhara vai prabho! . bhīto’haṁ deva! kaṁsasya tasmādevaṁ vadāmyaham . mama puttrā hatāstena tava jyeṣṭhā’mbujekṣaṇa! . vaiśampāyana upāca . vasudevavacaḥ śrutvā rūpaṁ saṁharadacyutaḥ . anujñāpya pitṛtvena nandagopagṛhaṁ naya . vasudevastu saṁgṛhya dārakaṁ kṣiprameva ca . yaśodāyā gṛhaṁ rātrau viveśa sutavatsalaḥ . yaśodāyāstvavijñātastatra nikṣipya dārakam . gṛhītvā dārikāṁ tāñca devakīśayane nyasat . parivarte kṛte tābhyāṁ garbhābhyāṁ bhayaviklavaḥ . vasudevaḥ kṛtārtho vai nirjagāma niveśanāt . yathā rūpeṇa tasyāvirbhāvastathā rūpaṁ bhāga° 103 a° vaṇṇitam devakyāṁ devarūpiṇyāṁ viṣṇuḥ sarvaguhāśayaḥ . āvirāsīdyathā prācyāṁ diśīnduriva puṣkalaḥ . tamadbhutaṁ bālakamambujekṣaṇaṁ caturbhujaṁ śaṅkhagadādyudāyudham . śrīvatsalakṣmaṁgalaśobhikaustubhaṁ pītāmbaraṁ sāndrapayodasaubhagam . mahārghavaidūryakirīṭakuṇḍalatviṣā pariṣvaktasahasrakuntalam . uhṛāmakāñcyaṅgadakaṅkaṇādibhirvirocamānaṁ vasudeva aikṣata . savismayītphullavilocano hariṁ sutaṁ vilokyānakadundubhistadā . kṛṣṇāvatārotsavasambhramo’spṛśanmudā dvijebhyo’yutamāplutogavām . ityāvirbhārva varṇayitvā janma te mayyasau pāpomā vidyānmadhusūdana! . samudvije bhavaddhetoḥ kaṁsādahamadhīradhīḥ . upasaṁhara viśvātma nnadorūpamalaukikam . śaṅkhacakragadāpadmaśriyā juṣṭaṁ caturbhujam . viśvaṁ yadetat svatanau niśānte yathāvakāśaṁ puruṣaḥ paro bhavān . vibharti, so’yaṁ mama garbhajo’bhū daho nṛlokasya viḍambanaṁ tat . itthaṁ devakyāḥ prārthane tāṁ sāntvayitvā tasya prākṛtarūpadhāraṇaṁ tatraivoktaṁ yathā ityuktvā tāṁ haristūṣṇṇīṁ bhagavānātmamāyayā . pitroḥ saṁpaśyatoreva babhūva prākṛtaḥ śiśuḥ . evañca caturbhujarūpeṇotpattāvapi prākṛtarūpatvoktyā tasmādanantaraṁ dvibhujatvamiti vaiṣṇavā manyante . gītāyāntu tenaiva rūpeṇa caturbhujena sahasrabāho! bhava viśvamūrte! iti bhāratayuddhakāle tasya caturbhujatvakīrtanāt caturbhujatva mevāsīt śaṅkhacakrādyāyudhaśūnyatvena prākṛtatvamiti tu yuktamutpaśyāmaḥ . tasyedānīṁ janmasamayonirūpyate prāguktabrahmapu° kalau jātatvābhidhānāt kaliyugaevāsya prādurbhāvaḥ . yadi ca ekaikamanvantare bahavaḥ kalayaḥ sambhavanti tathāpi vartamānavaivasvatamanvantare aṣṭāviṁśatime mahāyuge yaḥ kalistatraivābhirmūtaḥ . tatrāpi jyotirnibandhe uccasthāḥ śaśibhaumacāndriśanayo lagnaṁ vṛṣolābhago jīvaḥ siṁhatulāliṣu kramavaśāt pūṣośanorāhavaḥ . naiśīthaḥ samayā’ṣṭamī budhadinaṁ bāhmarkṣamatra kṣaṇe śrīkṛṣṇābhidhamambujekṣaṇamabhūdāviḥ paraṁ brahma tat grahāṇāṁ viśeṣarāśyavasthānakāle tasyāvirbhāvokteḥ tādṛśasamayasya ca kaleḥ 647 varṣeṣu gataṣu sambhavaḥ kalau tataḥ pūrvaṁ tādṛśasamayāsambhavāt . rājataraṁṅgiṇyāṁ ca śateṣu ṣaṭsu sārdheṣu tryadhikeṣu ca bhūtale . kalergateṣu varṣāṇāma bhayan kurupāṇḍavāḥ ityanena kaleḥ 653 varṣeṣu gateṣu tatsamakālīnayoḥ kurupāṇḍavayorutpattiruktā atastasyāpi tatkālotpattikatvam . tadavatāracaritaṁ ca harivaṁ° 42 a° varṇitaṁ yathā aparaḥ keśavasyāyaṁ prādurbhāvo mahātmanaḥ . vikhyāto māthure kalpe sarvalokahitāya vai . yatra śālvañca maindañca kaṁsaṁ dvividameva ca . ariṣṭaṁ vṛṣabhaṁ keśiṁ pūtanāṁ daityadārikām . nāgaṁ kubalayāpīḍaṁ cānūraṁ muṣṭikaṁ tathā . daityānmānuṣadehasthān sūdayāmāma vīryavān . chinnaṁ bāhusahasrañca vāṇasyādbhutakarmaṇaḥ . narakaśca hataḥ saṅkhye yavanaśca sahābalaḥ . hṛtāni ca mahīpānāṁ sarvaratnāni tejasā . durāccārāśca nihatāḥ pārthivā ye mahītale . tasya ca kṛṣṇanāmatā gargeṇa tathā nāmakaraṇāt yathāha bhāga° 10 . 8 . 9 āsan vaṇṇāstrayohyasya grahṇato’nuyugaṁ tanūḥ . śukloraktastathā’pīta idānīṁ kṛṣṇatāṁ gataḥ iti apītaḥ śyāma ityarthaḥ bhāga° 11 a° yugāvatāre dvāpare śyāmamūrtitvokteḥ yathā kṛte śuklaścaturbāhurjaṭilo balkalāmbaraḥ . kṛṣṇājinopavītākṣān bibhraddaṇḍakamaṇḍalū . tretāyāṁ raktavarṇo’sau caturbāhustrimekhalaḥ . hiraṇyakeśastrayyātmā sruksruvādyu palakṣaṇaḥ . dvāpare bhagavān śyāmaḥ pītavāsā nijāyudhaḥ . śrīvatsādibhiraṅkaiśca lakṣaṇairupalakṣitaḥ . nānātantravidhānena kalāvapi yathā śṛṇu . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ tviṣā’kṛṣṇaṁ sāṅgopāṅgāstrapārṣadaḥ . yajñai saṁkīrtanaprāyairyajantīha sumedhasaḥ . asya tannāmanirbacanaṁ ca bhā° u° 69 a° kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdoṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca kṛṣṇobhavati sātvataḥ kalpabhede’pi vaivasvatamanoraṣṭāviṁśatime yuge yuge tasyābhi bhāṁvaḥ ataeva chā° u° kalpabhedādiprāyeṇaiva taddhaitat ghora āṅgirasaḥ kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāyoktvovāca ityuktam . vastutastasya bhagavadavatārāt bhinnatvameva tasya ghorāṅgirasaśiṣyatvokteḥ . parameśvarasya tathātvāsambhavāt . atastannāmni 29 aparasninneva kṛṣṇaśabdasya vṛttiḥ . kṛṣṇeti maṅgalaṁ nāma yasya vāci pravartate . masmībhavanti rājendra! mahāpātakakoṭayaḥ purā° . arjunasya tannāmanirvacanaṁ bhā° vi° 44 a° . kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama . kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ priyatvāt bālakasya ca . vyāsasya kārṣṇyāttathātvam yovyasya vedāṁścaturastapasā bhagavānṛṣiḥ . loke vyāsatvamāpade kārṣṇyāt kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . kṛṣṇasyedam aṇ kārṣṇa tatsambandhini tri° kārṣṇaṁ vedamimaṁ vidvān śrāvayitvārthamaśnute bhā° ā° 1 a° ukte . apatye tu iñ . kārṣṇi tadapatye puṁstrī . candrahrāsakaraprathamādipañcadaśakalākriyārūpe pratipadādidarśāntātmakapañcadaśatithyātmake 30 kālabhede ardhamāse candravṛddhikaraḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaścandrakṣayātmakaḥ ti° ta° ṣaṭtri° . indukalākṣayaprakāraḥ induśabde 611 pṛ° uktaḥ . tadupalakṣite 31 pitṛyāne śuklakṛṣṇe gatī hyete jagatāṁ śāśvate mate . ekayā yātyanāvṛttimanyayā vartate punaḥ gītā . pitṛyāne ca yathā kṛṣṇapakṣasaṁbandhastathā ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° darśitam . dhūmorātristathā kṛṣṇaḥ ṣaṇmāsā dakṣiṇāyanam gītā . kṛṣṇapakṣābhimānini pitṛyānasthe karmiṇāmativāhake īśvaraniyojite 32 devabhede ātivāhikaśabda vivṛtiḥ . 33 dyūtādyupārjite dhane na° kṛṣṇadhanaśabde arthaśabde ca vivṛtiḥ . kṛṣṇasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ . kārṣṇya tadbhāve na° kārṣṇyāt kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . imanic . kṛṣṇiman tadbhāve pu° kṛṣṇimānaṁ dadhānena . tal, kṛṣṇatā strī, tva kṛṣṇala, na0, kṛṣṇavarṇe . kṛṣṇā’pi śuddheradhikaṁ vidhātṛbhiḥ māvaḥ . abhivṛṣya marucchasyān kṛṣṇameghastirodadhe raghuḥ . 34 netragate’śabhede akṣiśabde vivṛtiḥ . 35 kṛṣṇasāramṛge puṁstrī° eṇaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ sa kīrtitaḥ chando° pa° . kṛṣṇājinam |
कृष्णवर्ण – kṛṣṇavarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇavarṇa “kṛṣṇa-varṇa” mfn. of a black colour, dark-blue
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kṛṣṇavarṇa (kṛṣṇa + varṇa) adj. “von schwarzer Farbe, schwarz” H. 1238. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kṛṣṇavarṇa a. black-coloured. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kṛṣṇavarṇa kṛṣṇa-varṇa, a. black-coloured; -vartman, m. fire (black-tracked): (a) -vāla, a. black-tailed; -śakti, m. N.; -sarpa, m. kind of black snake; -sāra, a. chiefly black, spotted black and white; m. spotted antelope; (a) -sāraṅga, a.; m. f.; id.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kṛṣṇavarṇa pu° kṛṣṇo varṇo’sya . 1 rāhau grahe . rāhoḥ chāyārūpatvena tamorūpatyāt tathātvāropāt tathātvam kṛṣṇaḥ aśuddhī varṇaḥ . 2 śūdre pu° . karma° . kāle varṇe pu° kṛṣṇavarṇavati tri° . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ tvipā’kṛṣṇam bhāgava° 11 ska° . |
खरु – kharu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kharu mfn. white
mfn. foolish, idiotic mfn. harsh, cruel mfn. desirous of improper or prohibited things kharu m. a tooth mfn. a horse mfn. pride mfn. love or Kāma (the god of love) mfn. N. of śiva kharu f. ( 4-1, 44 a girl who chooses her own husband Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kharu a. [khan-ku raścāṁtādeśaḥ] (1) White. (2) Foolish, stupid. (3) Cruel. (4) Desirous of prohibited things. –ruḥ (1) A horse. (2) A tooth. (3) Pride. (4) Cupid, the god of love. (5) Śiva. (6) Likeness for prohibited things. (7) The white colour. –ruḥ f. A girl who chooses her own husband (patiṁvarā kanyā Sk.). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kharu 1) adj. f. kharu P. 4, 1, 44, Vārtt. VOP. 4, 16. a) “weiss” TRIK. 3, 3, 343. H. an. 2, 408. MED. r. 21. 22. — b) “einfältig.” — c) “grausam” (krūra) Uṇ. 1, 36. = tīkṣṇa UṆĀDIVṚ. im SAṁKṢIPTAS. ŚKDR. — d) “nur nach verbotenen Dingen trachtend” H. 859. — 2) m. a) “Zahn” TRIK. 2, 6, 29. 3, 3, 343. H. an. MED. — b) “Pferd” Uṇ. TRIK. 3, 3, 343. H. an. MED. — c) “Hochmuth” TRIK. H. an. MED. — d) “Liebe” oder “der Liebesgott” Uṇ. — e) ein Bein. Śiva’s TRIK. H. ś. 41. H. an. MED. — 3) f. kharu “ein Mädchen, welches sich selbst den Gatten sucht”, SIDDH.K.33,a,2. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kharu pu° khana–ku raścāntādeśaḥ . 1 śive 2 darpe, 3 aśve, 4 datte, medi° 5 kāmadeve uṇā° . 6 śvetavarṇe 7 śvetavarṇavati, 8 niṣiddhaikarucau, hema° . 9 nirbodhe, 10 krūre tri° uṇā° vṛ° 11 patiṁ varāyāṁ kanyāyāṁ strī . hema° guṇavācitve’pi paryudāsānna ṅīṣ . 12 tīkṣṇe tri° saṁkṣiptasāraḥ . |
गंधः – gaṁdhaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
gaṁdhaḥ [gaṁdh-pacādyac] (1) Smell, odour; gaṁdhamāghrāya corvyāḥ Me. 21; apaghnaṁto duritaṁ havyagaṁdhaiḥ S. 4. 7; R. 12. 27. (gaṁdha is changed to gaṁdhi when as the last member of a Bah. comp. it is preceded by ud, pūti, su, surabhi, or when the compound implies comparison; sugāṁdhi, surabhigaṁdhi, kamalagaṁdhi mukhaṁ; śāliniryāsagaṁdhibhiḥ R. 1. 38; āhuti- 1. 53; also when gaṁdha is used in the sense of ‘a little’). (2) Smell considered as one of the 24 properties or guṇas of the Vaiśeṣikas; it is a property characteristic of pṛthivī or earth which is defined as gaṁdhavatī pṛthvī T. S. (3) The mere smell of anything, a little, a very small quantity; ghṛtagaṁdhi bhojanaṁ Sk. (4) A perfume, any fragrant substance; eṣā mayā sevitā gaṁdhayuktiḥ Mk. 8; Y. 1. 231; Mu. 1. 4. (5) Sulphur. (6) Pounded sandal wood. (7) Connection, relationship. (8) A neighbour. (9) Pride, arrogance; as in āttagaṁdha humbled or mortified. (10) An epithet of Śiva. –dhaṁ (1) Smell. (2) Black aloewood. — Comp. –adhikaṁ a kind of perfume. –apakarṣaṇaṁ removing smells. –aṁbu n. fragrant water. –amlā the wild lemon tree. –aśman m. sulphur. –aṣṭakaṁ a mixture of 8 fragrant substances offered to deities, varying in kind according to the nature of the deity to whom they are offered. –ākhuḥ the musk-rat. –ājīvaḥ a vendor of perfumes. –āḍhya a. rich in odour, very fragrant; srajaścottamagaṁdhāḍhyāḥ Mb. ( –ḍhyaḥ) the orange tree. ( –ḍhyaṁ) sandal-wood. –iṁdriyaṁ the organ of smell. –ibhaḥ, –gajaḥ, dvipaḥ, –hastin m. ‘the scentelephant’, an elephant of the best kind; (yasya gaṁdhaṁ samāghrāya na tiṣṭhaṁti pratidvipāḥ . sa vai gaṁdhagajo nāma nṛpatorvījayāvahaḥ ..); Mu. 2. 6; śamayati gajānanyāngaṁdhadvipaḥ kalabho’pi san V. 5. 18; R. 6. 7; 17. 70; Ki. 17. 17. –uttamā spirituous liquor. –udaṁ scented water. –upajīvin m. one who lives by perfumes, a perfumer. –otuḥ (forming gaṁdhotu or gaṁdhautu) the civet-cat. –kārikā 1. a female servant whose business is to prepare perfumes. –2. a female artisan living in the house of another, but not altogether subject to another’s control. –kālikā, –kālī f. N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa. –kāṣṭhaṁ aloewood. –kuṭī a kind of perfume. –kelikā, –celikā musk. –ga a. 1. taking a scent, smelling. –2. redolent. –gajaḥ see gaṁdhebha. –guṇa a. having the property of odour. –ghrāṇaṁ the smelling of any odour. –jalaṁ fragrant water. –jñā the nose. –tūryaṁ a musical instrument of a loud sound used in battle (as a drum or trumpet). –tailaṁ a fragrant oil, a kind of oil prepared with fragrant substances. –dāru n. aloe-wood. –dravyaṁ a fragrant substance. –dhārin a. bearing fragrance. (–m.) an epithet of Śiva. –dhūliḥ f. musk. –nakulaḥ the muskrat. –nālikā, –nālī the nose. –nilayā a kind of jasmine. –paḥ N. of a class of manes. –patrā, –palāśī a species of zedoary. –palāśikā turmeric. –pālin m. an epithet of Śiva. –pāṣāṇaḥ sulphur. –piśācikā the smoke of burnt fragrant resin (so called from its dark colour or cloudy nature, or perhaps from its attracting demons by fragrance). –puṣpaḥ 1. the Vetasa plant. –2. the Ketaka plant. ( –ṣpaṁ) 1. a fragrant flower. –2. flowers and sandal offered to deities at the time of worship. –puṣpā an indigo plant. –pūtanā a kind of imp or goblin. –phalī 1. the Priyangu creeper. –2. a bud of the Champaka tree. –baṁdhuḥ the mango tree. –mātṛ f. the earth. –mādana a. intoxicating with fragrance. ( –naḥ) 1. a large black bee. –2. sulphur. –3. an epithet of Rāvaṇa. ( –naḥ –naṁ) N. of a particular mountain to the east of Meru, renowned for its fragrant forests. ( –naṁ) the forest on this mountain. –mādanī spirituous liquor. –madinī lac. –mārjāraḥ the civet-cat. –mukhā, –mūṣikaḥ –mūṣī f. the musk rat. –mṛgaḥ 1. the civet cat. –2. the muskdeer. –maithunaḥ a bull. –modanaḥ sulphur. –mohinī a bud of the Champaka tree. –yuktiḥ f. preparation of perfumes. –rasaḥ myrrh. -aṁgakaḥ turpentine. –rājaḥ a kind of jasmine. ( –jaṁ) 1. a sort of perfume. –2. sandal-wood. –latā the Priyangu creeper. –lolupā 1. a bee. –2. a fly or gnat. –vahaḥ the wind; rātriṁdivaṁ gaṁdhavahaḥ prayāti S. 5. 4; digdakṣiṇā gaṁdhavahaṁ mukhena Ku. 3. 25. –vahā the nose. –vāhaḥ 1. the wind; Bv. 1. 104. –2. the musk-deer. –vāhī the nose. –vihvalaḥ wheat. –vṛkṣakaḥ –vṛkṣaḥ the Śala tree. –vyākulaṁ a kind of fragrant berry (kakkola. –śuṁḍinī the musk- rat. –śekharaḥ musk. –sāraḥ 1. sandal –2. a kind of jasmine. –sukhī sūyī the musk shrew. –somaṁ the white water-lily. –hārikā a female servant whose business is to prepare perfumes; cf gaṁdhakārikā. |
गरुडः – garuḍaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
garuḍaḥ [garudbhyāṁ ḍayate, ḍī-ḍa pṛṣo- talopaḥ; gṝ-uḍac Uṇ. 4. 166.] (1) N. of the king of birds. [He is a son of Kaśyapa by his wife Vinata. He is the chief of the feathered race, an implacable enemy of serpents, and elder brother of Aruṇa. In a dispute between his mother and Kadru, her rival, about the colour of uccaiḥśravas Kadrū defeated Vinata, and, in accordance with the conditions of the wager, made her her slave. Garuḍa brought down the heavenly beverage (Amṛta) to purchase her freedom, not, however, without a hard struggle with Indra for the same. Vinatā was then released; but the Amṛta was taken away by Indra from the serpents. Garuḍa is represented as the vehicle of Viṣṇu, and as having a white face, an aquiline nose, red wings and a golden body]. (2) A building shaped like Garuḍa. (3) N. of a particular military array. — Comp. –agrajaḥ an epithet of Aruṇa, the charioteer of the sun. –aṁkaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu. –aṁkitaṁ, –aśman m. –uttīrṇaṁ an emerald. –dhvajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu. –vyūhaḥ a particular military array. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 garuḍaḥ puṁ, (garudbhyāṁ pakṣābhyāṁ ḍayate uḍḍayate . iti garut + ḍī + ḍaḥ . pṛṣodarāt talope sādhuḥ . yadvā, gira uḍac . uṇāṁ 4 . 155 . iti uḍac .) svanāmakhyātapakṣī . tatparyāyaḥ . garutmān 2 tārkṣyaḥ 3 vainateyaḥ 4 khageśvaraḥ 5 nāgāntakaḥ 6 viṣṇu rathaḥ 7 suparṇaḥ 8 pannagāśanaḥ 9 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 2 . 32 .. mahāvīraḥ 10 pakṣisiṁhaḥ 11 uragāśanaḥ 12 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. śālmalī 13 harivāhanaḥ 14 amṛtāharaṇaḥ 15 nāgāśanaḥ 16 . iti hārāvalī .. śālmalisthaḥ 17 khagendraḥ 18 bhujagāntakaḥ 19 tarasvī 20 tārkṣyanāyakaḥ 21 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. * .. tasyotpattikāraṇaṁ yathā — yajataḥ puttrakāmasya kaśyapasya prajāpateḥ . sāhāyyamṛṣayo devā gandharvāśca daduḥ kila .. tatredhmānayane śakro niyuktaḥ kaśyapena ha . munayo vālikhilyāśca ye cānye devatāgaṇāḥ .. śakrastu vīryasadṛśamiṣmabhāraṁ giriprabham . samutkṣipyānayāmāsa nātikṛcchrādiva prabhuḥ .. athāpaśyadṛṣīn hrasvānaṅguṣṭhodaravarṣmaṇaḥ . palāśavṛntikāmekāṁ sahitān vahataḥ pathi .. tān sarvān vismayāviṣṭo vīryonmattaḥ purandaraḥ . avahasyābhyayācchīghraṁ laṅghayitvāvamanya ca .. te’tha roṣasamāviṣṭāḥ subhṛśaṁ jātamanyavaḥ . ārebhire mahat karma tadā śatrubhayaṅkaram .. kāmavīryaḥ kāmagamo devarājabhayapradaḥ . indro’nyo sarvadevānāṁ bhavediti yatavratāḥ .. tadbuddhvā bhṛśasantapto devarājaḥ śatakratuḥ . jagāma śaraṇaṁ tatra kaśyapaṁ śaṁsitavratam .. tacchrutvā devarājasya kaśyapo’tha prajāpatiḥ . bālikhilyānupāgamya karmasiddhimapṛcchata .. atha te taṁ mahātmānaṁ pratyūcuḥ satyavādinaḥ . tān kaśyapa uvācedaṁ sāntvapūrbaṁ prajāpatiḥ .. tasya pakṣīndratvakāraṇaṁ yathā — ayamindrastribhuvane niyogāt brahmaṇaḥ kṛtaḥ indrārthañca bhavanto’pi yatnavantastapodhanāḥ .. na mithyā brahmaṇo vākyaṁ kartumarhatha sattamāḥ . bhavatāṁ hi na mithyāyaṁ saṁkalpo vai cikīrṣitaḥ .. bhavatveṣa patattrīṇāmindro’tibalasatvavān . prasādaḥ kriyatāmasya devarājasya yācataḥ .. bālikhilyā ūcuḥ . apatyārthaṁ samārambho bhavataścāyamīpsitaḥ . tathā caivaṁ vidhatsvātra yathāśreyo’nupaśyasi .. etasminneva kāle tu devī dākṣāyaṇī śubhā . vinatā nāma kalyāṇī puttrakāmā yaśasvinī .. tapastaptā vrataparā snātā puṁsavane śuciḥ . upacakrāma bhartāraṁ tāmuvācātha kaśyapaḥ .. ārambhaḥ saphalo devi ! bhavitāyaṁ tavepsitaḥ . janayiṣyasi puttrau dvau vīrau tribhuvaneśvarau .. tapasā bālikhilyānāṁ mama saṅkalpajau tathā . etau sarvapatattrīṇāmindratvaṁ kārayiṣyataḥ .. vinatā cāpi siddhārthā babhūva muditā tathā . janayāmāsa puttrau dvāvaruṇaṁ garuḍaṁ tathā .. vikalāṅgo’ruṇastatra bhāskarasya puraḥsaraḥ . patattrīṇāntu garuḍa indratvenābhyaṣicyata .. * .. tasya janmakālīnarūpaṁ yathā — etasminnantare cāpi garuḍaḥ kāla āgate . vinā mātrā mahātejā vidāryāṇḍamajāyata .. mahāsatvabalopetaḥ sarvā vidyotayandiśaḥ . kāmarūpī kāmagamaḥ kāmabīryo vihaṅgamaḥ .. agnirāśirivodbhāsan samiddho’tibhayaṅkaraḥ . vidyudvispaṣṭapiṅgākṣo yugāntāgnisamaprabhaḥ .. pravṛddhaḥ sahasā pakṣī mahākāyo nabho gataḥ . ghoro ghorasvano raudro vahniraurva ivāparaḥ .. * .. tasya viṣṇuvāhanatve kāraṇaṁ yathā — apītvā cāmṛtaṁ pakṣī parigṛhyāśu niḥsṛtaḥ . agacchadapariśrānta āvāryārkaprabhāṁ khagaḥ .. viṣṇunā tu tadākāśe vainateyaḥ sameyivān . tasya nārāyaṇastuṣṭastenālaulyena karmaṇā .. tamuvācāvyayo devo varado’smīti khecaram . sa vavre tava tiṣṭheyamuparītyantarīkṣagaḥ .. uvāca cainaṁ bhūyo’pi nārāyaṇamidaṁ vacaḥ . ajaraścāmaraścāsyāmamṛtena vināpyaham . evamastviti taṁ viṣṇuruvāca vinatāsutam .. pratigṛhya varau tau tu garuḍo viṣṇumabravīt . bhavate’pi varaṁ dadmi vṛṇotu bhagavānapi .. taṁ vavre vāhanaṁ kṛṣṇo garutmantaṁ mahābalam . dhvajañca cakre bhagavānupari sthāsyatīti tam .. iti mahābhārate . 1 . 31-33 . adhyāyeṣu .. (vyūhaviśeṣaḥ . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 187 . varāhamakarābhyāṁ vā sūcyā vā garuḍena vā .. sūkṣmamukhapaścādbhāgaḥ pṛthumadhyo varāhavyūhaḥ . eṣa evapṛthutaramadhyo garuḍavyūhaḥ . iti kullūkabhaṭṭaḥ ..) |
गो – go | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899go “gaus” (acc. “gām” instr. “gavā” dat. “gave”, gen. abl. “gos” loc.
“gavi”; du. “gāvā” [Ved.], “gāvau”; pl. nom. “gāvas” acc. “gās” [rarely “gāvas” ii] instr. “gobhis” dat. abl. “gobhyas”, gen. “gavām” [once at the end of a Pāda at the end of Pādas only cf. “gonām” loc. “goṣu”) m. an ox f. a cow, (pl.) cattle, kine, herd of cattle &c. (in comp. before vowels [cf. “gav, gava”, qq. vv.; cf. also “gavām, gavi, gāṁ” ss.vv.; “gavāṁ vrata” N. of a Sāman; “gavāṁ tīrtha” see “go t-; goṣu-gam”, to set out for a battle [to conquer cows] ; “anything coming from or belonging to an ox or cow”, milk (generally pl.), flesh (only pl. ; “fat” ( x, 27, 22 ; = “go-ṣṭoma” (q.v.) (see also “go-āyus”); (pl.) “the herds of the sky”, the stars ; (m. [also f. rays of light (regarded as the herds of the sky, for which Indra fights with Vṛitra) 2943 &c.; m. the sign Taurus xl f. ; the sun (cf. “-putra”) ; the moon ; a kind of medicinal plant (“ṛṣabha”) ; a singer, praiser (fr. “gai”) ; “a goer”, horse (fr. 1. “gā”) on ; N. of two ṛiṣis of the (with the patr. āṅgirasa [ xvi] and Māyūka); N. of a man (who with Pushkara is said to be the “balādhyakṣa” of the sons and grandsons of Varuṇa) (cf. ; m. or f. (?) the sun’s ray called Suṣumṇa ; water f. pl., xi, 7, 50); an organ of sense ; the eye 70; a billion ; mf. the sky ; the thunderbolt on ; the hairs of the body ; f. an offering in the shape of a cow (= “dhenu” q.v.) ; a region of the sky ; ( i, 1) the earth (as the milk-cow of kings) &c.; (hence) the number “nine” ; = “go-vīthī” on ; a mother (cf. ; ( i, 11) speech, Sarasvatī (goddess of speech) ; voice, note (fr. “gai”) ; N. of Gaurī ; of the wife [or of a daughter-in-law of śuka (a daughter of the manes called Sukālas) 986 ; N. of a daughter of Kakut-stha and wife of Yayāti ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘bos’; Old Germ. ‘chuo’; Mod. Germ. ‘Kuh’; Eng. ‘cow’; Lett. ‘gohw’; cf. also [characters]; Goth. ‘gavi’ and Mod. Germ. ‘Gau’.]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 go m. f. (Nom. gauḥ) [gacchatyanena, gam karaṇe ḍo Tv.] (1) Cattle, kine (pl.). (2) Anything coming from a cow; such as milk, flesh, leather &c. (3) The stars. (4) The sky. (5) The thunder-bolt of Indra. (6) A ray of light. (7) A diamond. (8) Heaven. (9) An arrow. –f. (1) A cow; jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvī R. 2. 3; kṣīriṇyaḥ saṁtu gāvaḥ Mk. 10. 60. (2) The earth; dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya R. 1. 26; gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya 5. 26, 11. 36; Bg. 15. 13; seko’nugṛhṇātu gāṁ Mu. 3. 2; Me. 30. (3) Speech, words; raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya R. 5. 12, 2. 59; Ki. 4. 20. (4) The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī. (5) A mother. (6) A quarter of the compass. (7) Water (pl.). (8) The eye. (9) A region of the sky. –m. (1) A bull, an ox; asaṁjātakiṇaskaṁdhaḥ sukhaṁ svapiti gaurgaḍiḥ K. P. 10; Ms. 4. 72; cf. jaradgava. (2) The hair of the body. (3) An organ of sense. (4) The sign Taurus of the zodiac. (5) The sun. (6) The number ‘nine’ (in math.). (7) The moon. (8) A singer. (9) A billion. (10) A cowsacrifice. (11) A house. — Comp. –kaṁṭakaḥ, –kaṁ 1. a road or spot trodden down by oxen and thus made impassable. –2. the cow’s hoof. –3. the print of a cow’s hoof. –karṇa a. having cow’s ears. ( –rṇaḥ) 1. a cow’s ear. –2. a mule. –3. a snake. –4. a span (from the tip of the thumb to that of the ring-finger). –5. N. of a place of pilgrimage in the south, sacred to Śiva; śritagokarṇaniketamīśvaraṁ R. 8. 33. –6. a kind of deer. –7. a kind of arrow. –kirāṭā-kirāṭikā the Sārikā bird. –kilaḥ, –kīlaḥ 1. a plough. –2. a pestle. –kulaṁ 1. a herd of kine; vṛṣṭivyākulagokulāvanarasāduddhṛtya govardhanaṁ Gīt. 4; gākulasya tṛṣārtasya Mb. –2. a cow-house. –3. N. of a village (where Kṛṣṇa was brought up). –kulika a. 1. one who does not help a cow in the mud. –2. squint-eyed. –kulodbhavā an epithet of Durgā. –kṛtaṁ cow-dung. –kṣīraṁ cow’s milk. –kṣuraṁ –rakaṁ a cow’s-hoof. –khā a nail. –gṛṣṭiḥ a young cow which has had only one calf. –goyugaṁ a pair of oxen. –goṣṭhaṁ a cow-pen, cattle-shed. –graṁthiḥ 1. dried cowdung. –2. a cow-house. –grahaḥ capture of cattle. –grāsaḥ the ceremony of offering a morsel (of grass) to a cow when performing an expiatory rite. –ghātaḥ, –ghātakaḥ, –ghātin m. a cow-killer. –ghṛtaṁ 1. rain-water. –2. clarified butter coming from a cow. –ghna a. 1. destructive to cows. –2. one who has killed a cow. — 3. one for whom a cow is killed, a guest. –caṁdanaṁ a kind of sandal-wood. –cara a. 1. grazed over by cattle. –2. frequenting, dwelling, resorting to, haunting; pitṛsadmagocaraḥ Ku. 5. 77. –3. within the scope, power, or range of; avāṅmanasagocaraṁ R. 10. 15; so buddhi-, dṛṣṭi-, śravaṇa- &c. –4. moving on earth. –5. accessible to, attainable. –6. circulating, having a particular meaning, prevalent. ( –raḥ) 1. the range of cattle, pasturage; upāratāḥ paścimarātrigocarāt Ki. 4. 10. –2. (a) a district, department, province, sphere. (b) an abode, dwelling-place. –3. range of the organs of sense, an object of sense; śravaṇagocare tiṣṭha be within ear-shot; nayanagocaraṁ yā to become visible. –4. scope, range, in general; harturyāti na gocaraṁ Bh. 2. 16. –5. (fig.) grip, hold, power, influence, control; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146; gocarībhūtamakṣṇoḥ U. 6. 26; Māl. 5. 24; api nāma manāgavatīrṇo’si ratiramaṇabāṇagocaraṁ Māl. 1. –6. horizon. –7. the range of the planets from the Lagna or from each other. (gocarīkṛ to place within the range (of sight), make current.). –carman n. 1. a cow’s hide. –2. a particular measuse of surface thus defined by Vasiṣṭha: –daśahastena vaṁśena daśavaṁśān samaṁtataḥ . paṁca cābhyadhikān dadyādetadgocarma cocyate … -vasanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –cārakaḥ cowherd. –cāraṇaṁ the tending or feeding of cows. –ja a. born in the earth (rice &c). –jaraḥ an old ox or bull. –jalaṁ the urine of a bull or cow. –jāgarikaṁ auspiciousness, happiness. (–kaḥ) a preparer of food, baker. –jāta a born in the heaven (gods). –tallajaḥ an excellent bull or cow. –tīrthaṁ a cowhouse. –traṁ [gāṁ bhūrmi trāyate trai-ka] 1. a cowpen. –2. a stable in general. –3. a family, race, lineage; gotreṇa māṭharo’smi Sk.; so kauśikagotrāḥ, vasiṣṭhagotrāḥ &c.; Ms. 3. 109, 9. 141. –4. a name, appellation; jagāda gotraskhalite ca kā na taṁ N. 1. 30; S. 6. 4; see -skhalita below; madgotrāṁkaṁ viracitapadaṁ geyamudgātukāmā Me. 86. –5. a multitude. –6. increase. –7. a forest. –8. a field. –9. a road. –10. possessions, wealth. –11. an umbrella, a parasol. –12. knowledge of futurity. –13. a genus, class, species. –14. a caste, tribe, caste according to families. (–traḥ) a mountain. (–trā) 1. a multitude of cows. –2. the earth. -kartṛ, –kārin m. the founder of a family. -kīlā the earth. -ja a. born in the same family, gentile, a relation; Y. 2. 135. -paṭaḥ a genealogical table, pedigree. -pravaraḥ the oldest member or founder of a family. -bhida m. an epithet of Indra; hṛdi kṣato gotrabhidapyamarṣaṇaḥ R. 3. 53, 6. 73; Ku. 2. 52. -skhalanaṁ, -skhalitaṁ blundering or mistaking in calling (one) by his name, calling by a wrong name; smarasi smara mekhalāguṇairuta gātraskhaliteṣu baṁdhanaṁ Ku. 4. 8. –da a. giving cows. (–daḥ) brain. (–dā) N. of the river Godāvarī. — datra a. Ved. giving cows. (–traḥ) an epithet of Indra. (–traṁ) a crown (protecting the head). –daṁta a. armed with a coat of mail. (–taṁ) 1. yellow orpiment. –2. a white fossil substance. –dānaṁ 1. the gift of a cow. –2. the ceremony of tonsure or cutting the hair; athāsya godānavidheranaṁtaraṁ R. 3. 33; (see Mallinātha’s explanation of the word); kṛtagodānamaṁgalāḥ U. 1; (Ram. explains the word differently). –3. the part of the head close to the right ear. –dāya a. intending to give cows. –dāraṇaṁ 1. a plough. –2. a spade, hoe. –dāvarī N. of a river in the south. –duh m., –duhaḥ ‘cow-milker’ a cowherd. –dohaḥ 1. the milking of cows. –2. the milk of cows. –3. the time of milking cows. — dohanaṁ 1. the time of milking cows. –2. the milking of cows. –dohanī a milk-pail. –dravaḥ the urine of a bull or cow. –dhanaṁ 1. a herd or multitude of cows, cattle. –2. possession of cows. (–naḥ) a broadpointed arrow. –dharaḥ a mountain. –dharmaḥ the law of cattle, rules relating to cattle. –dhuptaḥ, –dhūptaḥ 1. wheat. –2. the orange. -cūrṇaṁ wheat- flour; -saṁbhavaṁ a sour paste. –dhūliḥ ‘dust of the cows,’ the time of sunset or evening twilight (so called because cows, which generally return home at about sunset, raise up clouds of dust by their treading on the earth). –dhenuḥ a milch-cow with a calf. –dhraḥ a mountain. — naṁdā an epithet of the wife of Śiva. –naṁdī the female of the Sārasa bird. –nardaḥ 1. the (Indian) crane. –2. an epithet of Śiva (bellowing like a bull). –3. N. of a country. –nardīyaḥ an epithet of Patanjali, author of the Mahābhāṣya. –nasaḥ, –nāsaḥ 1. a kind of snake. –2. a kind of gem. –nasā the mouth of a cow. –nāthaḥ 1. a bull. –2. an owner of land. –3. a herdsman. –4. an owner of kine. –nāyaḥ a cowherd. –nāsā the projecting snout of a cow or ox. –nāsaṁ a kind of gem. –niṣyaṁdaḥ cow’s urine. –paḥ 1. a cowherd (considered as belonging to a mixed tribe); gopaveśasya viṣṇoḥ Me. 15. –2. the chief of a cowpen. –3. the superintendent of a village. –4. a king. –5. a protector, guardian. -anasī the wood of a thatch. -āṭavikā a cowherd. -kanyā 1. the daughter of a cowherd. –2. a nymph of Vṛndāvana. -adhyakṣaḥ, -iṁdraḥ, -īśaḥ the chief of herdsmen, an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dalaḥ the betel-nut tree. -bhadraṁ the fibrous root of a water-lily. -rasaḥ gum myrrh -vadhūḥ f. a cowherd’s wife. -vadhūṭī a young cowherdess, a young wife of a cowherd; gopavadhūṭīdukūlacaurāya Bhāṣā P. 1. (–pakaḥ) 1. the superintendent of a district. –2. myrrh. (–pikā) 1. a cowherdess. –2. protectress. (–pī) a cowherd’s wife (especially applied to the cowherdesses of Vṛndāvana, the companions of Kṛṣṇa in his juvenile sports). –2. a milk-maid. –3. a protectress. –4. Nature, elementary nature. –patiḥ 1. an owner of cows. –2. a bull. –3. a leader, chief. –4. the sun. –5. Indra. –6. N. of Kṛṣṇa –7. N. of Śiva. –8. N. of Varuṇa. –9. a king. –paśuḥ a sacrificial cow. –pāḥ m. Ved. 1. a herdsman. –2. protector, or guardian. 1. –pānasī a curved beam which supports a thatch. –pālaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. a king. –3. an epithet of Śiva. –4. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dhānī a cow-pen, cow-shed, — pālakaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. a king. –3. an epithet of Śiva; also of Kṛṣṇa. –pāliḥ an epithet of Śiva. –pālikā, –pālī the wife of a cowherd. –pittaṁ bile of cows, ox-bile (from which the yellow pigment gorocanā is prepared; Pt. 1. 94.). –pītaḥ a species of wagtail. –pīthaḥ protec tion. (–thaṁ) a holy place, a place of pilgrimage. –pucchaṁ a cow’s tail. (– cchaḥ) 1. a sort of monkey. –2. a sort of necklace consisting of two or four or thirty-four strings. –puṭikaṁ the head of Śiva’s bull –putraḥ 1. a young bull. –2. an epithet of Karṇa. –puraṁ 1. a town-gate; Māl. 9. 1. — 2. a principal gate; Ki. 5. 5. –3. the ornamental gate-way of a temple. — purīṣaṁ cowdung. –prakāḍaṁ an excellent cow or bull. –pracāraḥ pasture-ground, pasturage for cattle; Y. 2. 166. –prata(tā)raḥ 1. a ford for cattle. –2. a place of pilgrimage on the Sarayū. –praveśaḥ the time when cows return home, sunset or evening-twilight. –phaṇā 1. a bandage hollowed out so as to fit the chin or nose &c. –2. a sling. –bālaḥ the hair of cows. –bhuj m. a king. –bhṛt m. a mountain. –makṣikā a gadfly. –magha a. granting cattle or cows. –maṁḍalaṁ 1. the globe. –2. a multitude of cows. –mataṁ = gavyūti q, v. –matallikā a tractable cow, an excellent cow. –mathaḥ a cowherd. –mahiṣadā N. of one of the Mātṛs attending on kārtikeya. –māṁsaṁ beef. –māyu 1. a kind of frog. –2. a jackal anuhuṁkurute ghanadhvaniṁ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25. –3. bile of a cow. –4. N. of a Gandharva. –mukhaḥ, –mukhaṁ [gormukhamiva mukhamasya] a kind of musical instrument; Bg. 1. 13. (–khaḥ) 1. a crocodile, shark. –2. a hole of a particular shape in a wall made by thieves. (–khaṁ) 1. a house built unevenly. –2. spreading unguents, smearing. (–khaṁ, –khī) a cloth-bag of the shape of a gnomon containing a rosary, the beads of which are counted by the hand thrust inside. (–khī) the chasm in the Himālaya mountains through which the Ganges flows. –mūḍha a. stupid as a bull. –mūtraṁ cow’s urine. — mūtrikā 1. an artificial verse, the second of which repeats nearly all the syllables of the first (Malli. thus defines it: –vaṁrṇānāmekarūpatvaṁ yadyekāṁtaramardhayoḥ gomūtriketi tatprāhurduṣkaraṁ tadvido viduḥ .. see Śi. 19. 46). –2. a form of calculation. –mṛgaḥ a kind of ox (gavaya). –medaḥ a gem brought from the Himālaya and Indus, described as of four different colours: –white, paleyellow, red, and dark-blue. –medakaḥ 1. see gomeda. –2. a kind of poison (kākola). –3. smearing the body with unguents. –medhaḥ, –yajñaḥ a cowsacrifice. –yānaṁ a carriage drawn by oxen. –yukta a. drawn by oxen. –yutaṁ a cattle-station. –rakṣaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. keeping or tending cattle. –3. the orange. –4. an epithet of Śiva. -jaṁbū f. wheat. –raṁkuḥ 1. a water-fowl. –2. a prisoner. –3. a naked man, a mendicant wandering about without clothes. –4. a chanter. –ravaṁ saffron. –rasaḥ cow’s milk. –2. curds. –3. buttermilk. –4. the flavour of a sentence, ko raso gorasaṁ vinā Udb. -jaṁ buttermilk. –rājaḥ an excellent bull. –rāṭikā, –rāṭī the Sārikā bird. –rutaṁ a measure of distance equal to two Krośas. –rūpaṁ the form of a cow. (–paḥ) N. of Śiva. –rocaṁ yellow orpiment. –rocanā a bright yellow pigment prepared from the urine or bile of a cow, or found in the head of a cow. –lavaṇaṁ a measure of salt given to a cow. –lāṁgu (gū) laḥ a kind of monkey with a dark body, red cheeks. and a tail like that of a cow; Mal. 9. 30. –lokaḥ a part of heaven, cowworld. –lomī a prostitute. –vatsaḥ a calf. -ādin m. a wolf. –vardhanaḥ a celebrated hill in vṛṁdāvana the country about Mathurā. (This hill was lifted up and supported by Kṛṣṇa upon one finger for seven days to shelter the cowherds from a storm of rain sent by Indra to test Kṛṣṇa’s divinity.’) -dharaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. –vaśā a barren cow. –vāṭaṁ, –vāsaḥ a cow-pen. –vāsana a. covered with an ox-hide. –vikartaḥ, –vikrartṛ m. 1. the killer of a cow. –2. a husbandman. –vitataḥ a horse-sacrifice having many cows. –viṁdaḥ 1. a cowkeeper, a chief herdsman. –2. N. of Kṛṣṇa. –3. Bṛnaspati. -dvādaśī the twelfth day in the light half of the month of phalguna. –viṣ f., –viṣṭhā cowdung. — visargaḥ day-break (when cows are let loose to graze in forests). –vīthiḥ f. N. of that portion of the moon’s path which contains the asterisms bhādrapadā, revatī and aśvinī, or according to some, hasta, citrā and svātī. –vīryaṁ the price received for milk. –vṛṁdaṁ a drove of cattle. — vṛṁdārakaḥ an excellent bull or cow. –vṛṣaḥ, –vṛṣabhaḥ an excellent bull. -dhvajaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –vaidyaḥ a quack doctor. –vrajaḥ 1. a cow- pen. –2. a herd of cows. –3. a place where cattle graze. –vrata, –vratin a. one who imitates a cow in frugality. –śakṛt n. cowdung. –śataṁ a present of a hundred cows to a Brāhmaṇa. –śālaṁ, –lā a cow-stall. — śīrṣaḥ, –rṣaṁ a kind of sandal. –ṣaḍgavaṁ three pairs of kine. –ṣan, –ṣā a. Ved. acquiring or bestowing cows. –ṣā (sā) tiḥ 1. acquiring cattle. –2. giving cattle. –ṣṭomaḥ a kind of sacrificelasting for one day. –saṁkhyaḥ a cowherd. –sadṛkṣaḥ a species of ox (gavaya). –sargaḥ the time at which cows are usually let loose, day-break; see govisarga. –savaḥ a kind of cow-sacrifice (not performed in the Kali age). –sahasraṁ a kind of present (mahādāna). (–srī) N. of two holidays on the fifteenth day of the dark half of kārtika and jyeṣṭha. –sūtrikā a rope fastened at both ends having separate halters for each ox or cow. –stanaḥ 1. the udder of a cow. –2. a cluster of blossoms, nosegay &c. –3. a pearl-necklace of four strings. –stanā, –nī a bunch of grapes. –sthānaṁ, –kaṁ a cow-pen. — svāmin m. 1. an owner of cows. –2. a religious mendicant. –3. an honorary title affixed to proper names; (e. g. vopadevagosvāmin). –hatyā cow-slaughter. –hallaṁ (sometimes written hannaṁ) cowdung. –hita a. cherishing or protecting kine. (–taḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch go m. f. SIDDH.K.251,a,5 v. u. gaus, gām, gavā, gave, gos, gavi; gāvau; gāvas, gās und bisweilen auch gāvas (TBR. 3, 1, 2, 12. TAITT. UP. 1, 4, 2. MBH. 4, 1506. R. 2, 32, 38), gobhis, gobhyas, gavām und gonām (dieses nur am Ende eines Pāda im Veda P. 7, 1, 57; gavām am Pāda- Ende ṚV. 4, 1, 19), goṣu P. 6, 1, 93. 7, 1, 90. VOP. 3, 68. 69. Verhalten des o vor Vocalen im comp. P. 6, 1, 122. fgg. VOP. 2, 18. Am Ende eines comp. zu gu (vgl. 1. gu) geschwächt. 1) “Rind, Stier, Kuh”; pl. “Rinder, Kühe, Rinderheerden” (f. P. 1, 2, 73, Sch.) AK. 2, 9, 60. 66. 3, 4, 3, 26. 25, 167. TRIK. 3, 3, 59. H. 1257. 1265. an. 1, 6. MED. g. 1. HĀR. 79. Uṇ. 2, 66, Sch. gavāṁ gotram ṚV. 2, 23, 18. sākaṁ gāvaḥ suvate pacyate yavaḥ 1, 135, 8. yadi no gāṁ haṁsi yadyaśvaṁ yadi pūruṣam AV. 1, 16, 4. sthirau gāvau bhavatām ṚV. 3, 53, 7. 5, 27, 1. aśvāvati prathamo goṣu gacchati 1, 83, 1. 8, 60, 5. puruṣo ‘jo ‘viko gauraśva iti pañca paśavaḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 9, 23, 4. ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 1, 2, 13. 4, 5, 5, 10. 14, 1, 1, 32. gāva ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 1, 168, 2. VS. 21, 20. AV. 3, 11, 8. gāvo dhenavaḥ ṚV. 1, 173, 1. 6, 45, 28. 10, 95, 6. VS. 21, 19. sarve te goṣu jīvinaḥ R. 1, 9, 61. gavāṁ ca yānaṁ pṛṣṭhena M. 4, 72. anargheyā mahārāja dvijā varṇeṣu cottamāḥ. gāvaśca MBH. 13, 2689. fgg. kaliścaiva vṛṣo bhūtvā gavām N. 7, 6. paṅke gauriva sīdati M. 4, 191. 8, 21. HIT. Pr. 23. gaurandhā M. 3, 141. yathā gaurgavi cāphalā 2, 158. gohiraṇya n. sg. “Kühe und Gold” MBH. 2, 1833. gobrāhmaṇa n. sg. “eine Kuh und ein Brahman” 13, 3350. HARIV. 3157. fg. M. 5, 95. 11, 79. hastigo’śvoṣṭradamaka 3, 162. gavāmayaḥ (MBH. 3, 8176. 13, 5177. 7128) und gavāmayanam (MBH. 3, 8080) N. einer Festfeier; s. u. ayana und ZdmG.IX, LXXII. gavāṁ medhaḥ (vgl. gomedha) MBH. 13, 5378. gavāṁ vratam N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 215. gavāṁ tīrtham BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 22; Vgl. gotīrtha. Eine grosse Anzahl von Zusammensetzungen mit go verlieren mit der Zeit ihre ursprüngliche enge, auf das “Rind” oder, die “Kuh” bezügliche Bedeutung und nehmen eine allgemeine an; so z. B. gaviṣ, gaviṣa, gaviṣṭi, gaveṣ, gaveṣaṇa, gavy, gup, gocara, gotra, gopā, gopītha, gopīthya, goyuga, goṣṭha, ṣaṅgava u. s. w. — 2) m. “das Sternbild des Stiers” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 39 (38), 7. 40 (39), 3. BṚH. 11, 4. 17, 2. 18, 1. L. JĀT. 13, 1. — 3) “was vom Rinde” oder “von der Kuh kommt” (s. NIR. 2, 5), namentlich: a) “Milch”, meist pl.: gobhiḥ śrīṇīta matsaram ṚV. 9, 46, 4. 71, 5. gobhiraktam 4, 27, 5. gorna seke 1, 181, 8. 33, 10. 151, 8. 153, 4. 2, 30, 7. — b) “Fleisch”: agnervarma pari gobhirvyayasva ṚV. 10, 16, 7. — c) “Haut, Rindsleder, daraus geschnittene Riemen u.s.w.”: aṁśuṁ duhanto adhyāsate gavi ṚV. 10, 94, 9. gobhiḥ saṁnaddho asi 6, 47, 26. 75, 11. 8, 48, 5. asmadryakśuśucānasya yamyā āśurna raśmiṁ tuvyojasaṁ goḥ 4, 22, 8. tvamāyasaṁ prati vartayo gordivo aśmānam “du schleudertest aus dem Riemen (funda) das eherne Geschoss” 1, 121. 9. — d) “Sehne”: vṛkṣe vṛkṣe niyatā mīmayadgauḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 22. AV. 1, 2, 3. — 4) go, abgekürzt für goṣṭoma (s. d.), heisst ein Opfertag im Abhiplava: jyotirgaurāyuriti trīṇyahāni gaurāyurjyotiri trīṇi AIT. BR. 4, 15. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 3. goāyuṣī 12, 1, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 1, 26. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 1. 11, 1. LĀṬY. 4, 7, 1. MAŚ. 2, 9. 3, 1 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. go = gomedhayajña BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. m. = kratubheda Uṇ., Sch. — 5) pl. “die Heerde am Himmel, die Gestirne”: tā vāṁ vāstūnyuśmasi gamadhyai yatra gāvo bhūriśṛṅgā ayāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 154, 6. vi raśmibhiḥ sasṛje sūryo gāḥ “mit ihren Strahlen hat die Sonne die Gestirne verscheucht” 7, 36, 1. — 6) “Himmel” NAIGH. 1, 4. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 87. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. (lies: svarga st. sarga). m. f. Uṇ., Sch. Diese Bed. wurde. wenn sie nur sonst nachzuweisen wäre, recht gut passen zur folgenden Stelle: indraḥ pṛthivyai varṣīyāngostu mātrā na vidyate VS. 23, 48. — 7) “die Sonne” NIR. 2, 6. 14. masc. Uṇ., Sch. BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. Vgl. goputra. — 8) m. “der Mond” VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 9) pl. “die Lichtstrahlen (die Rinderheerde des Himmels”, um welche Indra mit Vṛtra kämpft) NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 2, 6. 14, 25. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 99. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. m. = kiraṇa, m. f. = raśmi Uṇ., Sch. gobhirbhāsayase mahīm MBH. 3, 182. tvamevaikastapase jātavedo nānyastaptā vidyate goṣu deva 1, 8414. gavāṁ sūryo guruḥ smṛtaḥ HARIV. 2943. tejomayairgobhirivodito ‘rkaḥ (dīptimavāpa) R. 1, 7, 18. 4, 40, 64. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 21. gogaṇaiḥ 4, 16, 14. sg. “der Strahl” Suṣumṇa NIR. 2, 6. — 10) “Donnerkeil” AK. H. an. SĀY. zu ṚV. 5, 30, 7. masc. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 11) “Weltgegend” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. — 12) “die milchende Kuh der Fürsten, die Erde” NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. H. 936. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. nādharmaścarito loke sadyaḥ phalati gauriva M. 4, 172. khaṁ saṁniveśayetkheṣu ceṣṭanasparśane ‘nilam. paktidṛṣṭyoḥ paraṁ tejaḥ snehe ‘po gāṁ ca mūrtiṣu.. 12. 120. imāṁ sāgarāpāṅgīṁ gām MBH. 1, 2468. 3, 1281. 15828. taṁ janāḥ kathayantīha yāvadbhavati gauriyam 13, 3168. BHAG. 15, 13. R. 1, 41, 18. 44, 19. MṚCCH. 173, 17. MEGH. 31. (rājā) dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divam RAGH. 1, 26; vgl. payodharībhūtacatuḥsamudrāṁ jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvīm 2, 3 und kasmāddadhāra gorūpaṁ dharitrī bahurūpiṇī. yāṁ dudoha pṛthustatra ko vatso dohanaṁ ca kim.. BHĀG. P. 4, 17, 3. – 1, 10, 3. 4, 17, 7. Vgl. auch dhenu. — 13) “Wasser” AK. H. an. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. f. pl. TRIK. MED. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. im ŚKDR. gaviṣṭho gāṁ gatastadā BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 36. — 14) “Pfeil” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 15) “Auge” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 16) “das Haar auf dem Körper”, m. f. Uṇ., Sch. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. Vgl. 2. godāna. — 17) f. “Mutter” EKĀKṢARAK. im ŚKDR. Vgl. prajāpatirditiścaiva gāvo viśvasya mātaraḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 68. — 18) m. “eine best. Arzeneipflanze” (ṛṣabha) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 19) “Rede, die Göttin der Rede” (Sarasvatī) NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 6, 2. AK. H. 241. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. janmaprabhṛti matyāṁ te vedmi gāṁ brahmavādinīm MBH. 1, 72. tasyārdhyamāsanaṁ caiva gāṁ cāvedya 3, 16696. yo ‘satsevī vṛthācāro ca śrotā suhṛdāṁ satām. parānvṛṇīte svāndveṣṭi taṁ gaustyajati bhārata.. 5, 4149. tatheti gāmuktavate RAGH. 2, 59. raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya 5, 12. Diese und die folgende Bed. hat man wohl in Folge der Herleitung von gā “singen” angenommen. — 20) “Lobsänger” NAIGH. 3, 16. — 21) “Gänger, Ross” (von gam oder gā “gehen”) SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 121, 9. 4, 22, 8. — 22) “Billion”: yadā daśabhirakṣitairyajate ‘tha gaurbhavati (akṣita = “100,000 Millionen”) PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 14. — 23) N. pr. a) m. eines Ṛṣi: gorāṅgirasasya sāma LĀṬY. 6, 11, 3. Ind. St. 3, 215. (vāruṇaśca tathā mantrī) putrapautraiḥ parivṛto gonāmnā puṣkareṇa ca MBH. 2, 381. — b) f. der Gemahlin Śuka’s, einer Tochter der Manen Sukāla HARIV. 986. der Schwiegertochter Śuka’s BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. einer Tochter Kakutstha’s und Gemahlin Yayāti’s HARIV. 1601. go 4) WEBER, Nax. 2, 282. — 9) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 1. Spr. 2842 (zugleich “Kuh”). BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 13) f. pl. BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 15) Spr. 2842. “Sinnesorgan” überh. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 30. — 19) Spr. 2373 (zugleich “Kuh”). — 23) a) gorāṅgirasasya sāma PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 7, 7. gormāyūkasya Ind. St. 3, 459. Zu MBH. 2, 381 vgl. R. 7, 23, 28; nach dem Comm. sind Go und Pushkara balādhyakṣau der Söhne und Enkel Varuṇa’s. — b) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,43. — 24) Bez. “der Zahl neun” WEBER, JYOT. 101. Nax. 2, 382. go 24) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 42. 2, 36. 3, 44. wegen “der neun Erden.” Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 go (gau) (GAU) A wife of sage Pulastya. Vaiśravaṇa was born of her. The son left his father and went to Brahmā. (Śloka 12, Chapter 274, Vana Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 go go, I. m. 1. A bull; f. A cow, Man. 3, 141; pl. Bulls and cows, cattle, Man. 4, 72. 2. m. pl. Rays of light, Rājat. 5, 1. II. f. The earth, Rām. 1, 41, 18. III. m. and f. Water, Bhāg. P. 1, 10, 36. IV. f. Speech, Ragh. 5, 12. V. The deity of speech, MBh. 5, 4149. VI. m. The name of a Ṛṣi, MBh. 2, 381. VII. f. A proper name, Bhāg. P. 9, 21, 25. — Cf. [greek] Lat. bos, ceva; OHG. ko; AS. cū; probably also [greek] Goth. gavi, gauja. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 go m. bull, ox, ox-hide, leather, sinew; pl. cattle, herds, the stars or rays of light (as the herds of the sky); pieces of flesh, cow-milk (also sgl.). –f. cow, the earth (as the milch cow of kings); speech and Sarasvati, the goddess of speech. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 go go, ox, bull; cow’s milk (gnly. pl.); ox-hide; thong: pl. host of heaven, stars; rays; f. cow; earth; speech. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 go puṁstrī gacchatyanena gama–karaṇe ḍo . 1 svanāmakhyāte paśubhede vṛṣasya yānasādhanatvāt strīgavyāśca dānadvārā svargagatisādhanatvācca tathātvam . gatisādhanatayā tasya tathārthatvayogena yaugikatve’pi yogarūḍhatvam . etena darṣaṇakṛtā vyutpattilabhyasya mukhyārthatve gauḥ śete ityatrāpi lakṣaṇā syāt gamerḍoḥ iti vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi prayogāt iti yaduktaṁ tat grāmādikameva gamerḍoḥ ityūṇādipratyayasya kartṛvācakatvāniyamāt tābhyāmanyatroṇādayaḥ pā° sūtre ūṇādīnāṁ apādānasaṁpradānabhinnārthatvaniyamāt atra karaṇārthakaḍopratyayena vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi gatisādhanasvarūpayogyavācakatvāt phalopadhāyakatvaniyame yānāsanaśayanādīnāmapi gatiśayanādivigamakāle tacchabdavācyatānupapatteḥ . gamyate jñāyate anena karaṇe, śīghraṁ gacchati kartari vā ḍo . 2 raśmau kiraṇe tasya śīghra gāmitvāt cākṣuṣajñānahetutvācca tathātvam sūryādikiraṇa saṁparkaṁ vinā cākṣuṣajñānāsambhavāt raśmerjñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . 3 vajre 4 hīrake tasyāpi kaṭhinadravye’pi gatimattvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 5 svarge karmibhi rgamyamānatvāt tasya tathātvam medi° . 6 candre viśvaḥ karmibhistallokagamanāttasya tathātvam 7 sūrye 8 gomedhayajñe bhānudīkṣitaḥ . sūryasya śīghragatikatvāt arcirādiṣvadhiṣṭhātṛtayā ātivāhikatvāt tathātvam . saṁvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasam chā° u° . ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° dṛśyam 9 ṛṣabhanāmauṣadhe rājani° . tasya gonāmakatvāt tathātvam . karaṇe ḍo . 10 betre strī tasya cākṣuṣajñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . kartari ḍo . 11 vāṇe strī tasya śīghragtikatvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 12 diśi strī diśāṁ palāyanakāle gamyamānatvāttayātvam . 13 vāci strī tasyāḥ jñānahetutvāt tathātvam . ādhāreḍo . 14 bhuvi strī tasyāḥ gamanādhāratvāt tathātvam 15 jale ca strība° va° kecit tasya nimnagatitvāt 16 paśumātre amaraḥ 17 mātari 18 lomani bhānudīkṣitaḥ . 19 vṛṣarāśau 20 navasaṁkhyāyām gorbhūmernavakhaṇḍātmakatvāt ākāśe sadāgatimadgrahāṇāṁ navatvādvā tatsaṁkhyāsāmyāt tathātvam . 21 pulastyabhāryāyāṁ gavijātaśabde 2566 pṛ° dṛśyam . jñānahetutvāt 22 indriye gocaraḥ . padāntasthitasyopasarjanasya samā° hrasvaḥ śītaguḥ sahasraguḥ . asya uttarapadasthatve tatpuruṣe ṣac samā° . puṁsi paramagavaḥ striyāṁ ṣittvāt ṅīṣ dugdhagavī goḥ purīṣaṁ mayaṭ . gomaya (govara) khyāte padārthe na° gaurvidyate’sya mini gomin . matup . gomat goviśiṣṭe gosvāmini ca tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . goḥsthāne goṣṭhac gogoṣṭha gosthāne na° gomāṁsaguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomāṁsaṁ tu guru snigdhaṁ pittaśleṣmavivardhanam . vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātahṛt balyamapathyaṁ pīnasapraṇut . goridaṁ yat āntoyi pratyaye pā° avādeśaḥ . gavya godugdhādau bhāvapra° tadguṇādyuktaṁ yathā gavyaṁ dugdhaṁ viśeṣeṇa madhuraṁ rasapākayoḥ . śītalaṁ stanyapṛt snigdhaṁ vātapittāsranāśanam . doṣadhātubalasrotaḥkiñcitkledakaraṁ guru . jarāsamastarogāṇāṁ śāntikṛt sevināṁ sadā . kṣīravargaśabde 2377 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ . gavyadadhiguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ davi viśeṣeṇa svādvamlañca rucipradam . pabitraṁ dīpanaṁ hṛdyaṁ puṣṭikṛt pavanāpaham . uktaṁ dadhnāmaśeṣāṇāṁ madhye gavyaṁ guṇādhikam tannavanītaguṇāḥ tatroktā yathā navanītaṁ kṣitaṁ gavyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ varṇabalāgnikṛt . saṁgrāhi vātapittāsṛkkṣayārśo’rditakāsahṛt . taddhitaṁ vālake vṛddhe viśeṣādamṛtaṁ śiśoḥ tadghṛtaguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ ghṛtaṁ viśeṣeṇa cakṣuṣyaṁ vṛṣyamagnikṛt . svādupākakaraṁ śītaṁ vātapittakaphāpaham . medhālāvaṇyakāntyojastejovṛddhikaraṁ param . alakṣmīpāparakṣoghnaṁ vayasaḥ sthāpakaṁ guru . balyaṁ pavitramāyuṣyaṁ sumaṅgalyaṁ rasāyanam . sugandhaṁ rocanaṁ cāru sarvājyeṣu guṇādhikam . tanmūtraguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomūtraṁ kaṭu tīkṣṇoṣṇaṁ kṣāraṁ tiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . laghvagnidīpanaṁ medhyaṁ pittakṛtkaphavātahṛt . śūlagulmodarānāha kaṇḍvakṣimukharogajit . kilāsagadavātāmavastiruk kuṣṭhanāśanam . kāsaśvāsāpahaṁ śothakāmalāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṇḍūkilāsagadaśūlamukhākṣirogān gulmātisāramarudāmayamūtrarodhān . kāsaṁ sakuṣṭhajaṭhara krimipāṇḍurogān gomutramekamapi pītamapākaroti . sarveṣvapi ca mūtreṣu gomūtraṁ guṇato’dhikam . ato’viśeṣāt kathane mūtraṁ gomūtramucyate . plīhodaraśvāsa kāsaśothavarcāgrahāpaham . śūlagulmarujānāhakāmaṁlāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṣāyaṁ tiktatīkṣṇañca pūraṇāt karṇaśūlanut . tatra saurabhyām paṅke gauriva sīdati bhā° vi° 191 . yathā gaurgavi cāphalā manuḥ goghnavat vihitaḥ kalpaḥ prā° ta° viśvā° . vāci pannagagavīgumpheṣu cājāgarīt malli° preyodūtapataṅgapuṅgavagabīhaiyaṅgavīnaṁ rasāt naiṣa° netrādiṣu gomadhyamadhye! mṛgagodhare! he sahasragobhūṣaṇakiṅkarāṇām . nādena gobhṛcchikhareṣu mattā nṛtyanti gokarṇaśarīrabhakṣāḥ cauraḥ . gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya raghuḥ kṣiptāvarodhāṅganamutpathena gām māghaḥ . hitādau yat . gavya gauhitaudau bhuvi padānte gośabdasya atipare pararūpaṁ go’graṁ prakṛtivadbhāvaśca go agraṁ acipare vā avaṅa gavāgram . aśvaśabde pare gavāśvādi° dvandva ekavadbhāvaḥ . gavāśvam . |
गौर – gaura | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gaura mf (“ī”) n. (in comp. or ifc. g. “kaḍārādi”) white, yellowish,
reddish, pale red v &c. mf (“ī”) n. shining, brilliant, clean, beautiful gaura m. white, yellowish (the colour) gaura m. a kind of buffalo (Bos Gaurus, often classed with the Gavaya) &c. gaura m. white mustard (the seed of which is used as a weight, = 3 Rāja-sarshapas) gaura m. Grislea tomentosa (“dhava”) gaura m. a species of rice gaura m. the moon gaura m. the planet Jupiter gaura m. N. of the Nāga śeṣa gaura m. of Caitanya (cf. “-candra”) gaura m. of a Yoga teacher (son of śuka and Pīvarī) 981 gaura pl. N. of a family (cf. “-rātreya”) gaura n. white mustard gaura n. N. of a potherb gaura n. saffron (cf. “kanaka-“) gaura n. the filament of a lotus gaura n. gold gaura n. orpiment gaura mf (“ī”) n. (“ā”) f. = “rī” (cf. “gaulā”) gaura mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. the female of the Bos Gaurus (“Vāc or voice of the middle region of the air”, i, 164, 41 according to gaura n. = “gaurikā” gaura n. the earth gaura n. red chalk gaura n. a yellow pigment or dye (“go-rocanā”, “orpiment” gaura n. turmeric (“rajanī”) gaura n. N. of several other plants (“priyaṁgu, maṇjiṣṭhā, śveta-dūrvā, mallikā, tulasī, suvarṇa-kadalī, ākāśa-māṁsī”) gaura n. N. of several metres (one of 4 x 12 syllables; another of 4 x 13 syllables; another of 4 x 26 long syllables) gaura n. (in music) a kind of measure gaura n. () N. of a Rāgiṇī gaura n. “brilliant Goddess”, śiva’s wife Pārvatī Pariś. gaura n. N. of Varuṇa’s wife gaura n. of a Vidyā-devī, iii, 231, 48 gaura n. of śākya-muni’s mother gaura n. of the wife of Vi-rajas and mother of Su-dhāman gaura n. of several other women gaura n. of several rivers (one originally the wife of Prasena-jit or Yuvanāśva, changed by his curse into the river Bāhu-dā ([cf. Lat. ‘gilvus’?]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 gaura a. (rā or rī f.) (1) White; kailāsagauraṁ vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ R. 2. 35; dviradadaśanacchedagaurasya tasya Me. 59, 52; Rs. 1. 6. (2) Yellowish, pale-red; gorocanākṣepanitāṁtagaure Ku. 7. 17; R. 6. 65; gaurāṁgi garvaṁ na kadāpi kuryāḥ R. G. (3) Reddish. (4) Shining, brilliant. (5) Pure, clean, beautiful. –raḥ 1 The white colour. (2) The yellowish colour. (3) The reddish colour. (4) White mustard. (5) The moon. (6) A kind of buffalo. (7) A kind of deer. (8) The planet Jupiter. (9) N. of Chaitanya. –raṁ (1) The filament of a lotus. (2) Saffron. (3) Gold. — Comp. –aṁgaḥ N. of (1) Viṣṇu. (2) Kṛṣṇa. –āsyaḥ a kind of black monkey, with a white face. –kharaḥ a wild monkey. –sarṣapaḥ white mustard (considered as a kind of weight). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch gaura ved., gaura klass. Uṇ. 2, 29. ŚĀNT. 1, 4. 1) adj. f. ī (auch klass.) P. 4, 1, 41. “weisslich, gelblich, röthlich” (als m. “die weissliche Farbe u.s.w.”) NIR. 11, 39. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 24. 3, 4, 25, 191. H. 1393. 1394. an. 2, 413. MED. r. 27. kann im comp. seinem subst. vorgehen oder nachfolgen gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. gaurasya yaḥ payasaḥ pītimānaśe ṚV. 10, 100, 2. gauralalāma TS. 5, 6, 16, 1. mṛṇāla- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 31. 58, 36. SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. bhūmi 135, 1. sirā 356, 1. (acalam) gauraṁ tuṣāraiḥ MEGH. 53. 60. tuṣāragaura ṚT. l, 6. kailāśagauraṁ vṛṣam RAGH. 2, 35. MBH. 6, 445. -dukūla GĪT. 11, 26. gaurīṁ kanakavarṇābhāmiṣṭāmantaḥpureśvarīm R. 5, 14, 30. jāmbūnadaśuddhagaura DRAUP. 7, 7. MBH. 4, 2301. fg. nārī 8, 2050. – payodhara BHARTṚ. 1, 9. taruṇādityasadṛśaiḥ śaṇagauraiśca vānaraiḥ MBH. 3, 16350. taruṇādityagauraiḥ śaragauraiśca vānaraiḥ R. 4, 39, 14. 11. raśmayo yasya (candrasya) gaurāḥ MṚCCH. 26, 1. rocanā- RAGH. 6, 65. GĪT. 11, 12. CAURAP. 1. “glänzend, rein, schön”, = ujjvala TRIK. 3, 3, 346. = viśuddha H. an. MED. = viśada H. an. -kānti CAURAP. 1 (nach dem Sch.: = manohara). — 2) m. a) “eine Büffelart, Bos Gaurus”, häufig neben dem gavaya genannt. AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 3, 9. ṚV. 4, 21, 8. gauro na tṛṣitaḥ piva 1, 16, 5. 4, 58, 2. 5, 78, 2. 7, 69, 6. 98, 1. 8, 4, 3. 45, 24. 76, 1. 10, 51, 6. gauramāraṇyamanu te diśāmi VS. 13, 48. 24, 28. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 16, 3, 14. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 21. 8, 2, 20. Vgl. gauramṛga. — b) “weisser Senf” MED. n. nach H. an. m. “das Korn”, als “Gewicht” = 3 rājasarṣapa YĀJÑ. 1, 362. Hier eig. adj. mit Ergänzung von sarṣapa aus dem vorhergehenden rājasarṣaya; vgl. gaurasarṣapa. — c) “Grislea tomentosa Roxb.” (dhava) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “der Mond” H. an. MED.; vgl. Ind. St. 2, 262. 286. — e) “der Planet Jupiter” H. ś. 13; vgl. Ind. St. 2, 287. — f) N. pr. eines Joga- Lehrers, eines Sohnes des Śuka von der Pīvarī, HARIV. 981. — g) Bein. des Heiligen Caitanya ANANTASAṁHITĀ im ŚKDR. — 3) f. gaurā = gaurī f. DVIRŪPAK. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī “die Kuh des Bos Gaurus”: somo gaurī adhi śritaḥ (P. 1, 1, 19, Sch.) ṚV. 9, 12, 3. madhvaḥ pibanti gauryaḥ. yā indreṇa sayāvarīrvṛṣṇā madanti 1, 84, 10. yathā ha tyadvasavo gauryaṁ citpadi ṣitāmamuñcata 4, 12, 6. gaurīrmimāya (AV.: gaurinmimāya) salilāni takṣatī 1, 164, 41. Auf der letzten Stelle beruht die Deutung des Wortes als Vāc “des mittleren Gebietes” NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 11, 40. — b) “Gelbwurz”, = rajanī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 2, 39, 11. 101, 8. = piṅgā (wofür ŚKDR. dāruharidrā substituirt) MED. Auch N. einer Menge anderer Pflanzen: = priyaṁgu H. an. MED. = mañjiṣṭhā, śvetadūrvā, mallikā. tulasī, suvarṇakadalī, ākāsamāṁsī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “ein best. gelbes Pigment” (s. gorocanā) H. an. MED. — d) “ein noch nicht menstruirtes (achtjähriges) Mädchen” AK. 2, 6, 1, 8. TRIK. 3, 3, 346. H. 510. H. an. MED. GṚHYASAṁGR. 2, 28. 29. — e) “die Erde” H. an. MED. — f) N. pr. der Tocher des Himālaya u. Gemahlin Śiva’s AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. TRIK. H. 203. H. an. MED. MEGH. 51. 61. gaurī yatra vitastātvaṁ yātā (vgl. u. “k”) RĀJA-TAR. 1, 29. — g) N. pr. der Gemahlin Varuṇa’s H. an. MED. MBH. 5, 3968. 13, 6751. 7637. — h) N. pr. der Mutter Śākyamuni’s (s. māyā) TRIK. 1, 1, 14. — i) N. pr. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 240. — k) N. pr. der Gemahlin Prasenajit’s (oder Yuvanāśva’s), welche durch einen Fluch ihres Gatten in den Fluss Bāhudā (vgl. u. f) verwandelt wurde, HARIV. 710. 1716. VP. 362, N. 18. 448, N. 9. — N. pr. der Gemahlin des Virajas und der Mutter Sudhāman’s 82, N. 2. — l) N. pr. eines Flusses (vgl. u. “f”) und k) H. an. MED. MBH. 6, 333. VP. 183. LIA. I, Anh. XXXVIII. Vgl. gaurīgaṅgā ebend. 55. — m) N. pr. einer Rāgiṇī, der Gemahlin des Rāga Mālava (vgl. gauḍa 2, “a”): ārāmamadhyato kumārikā (zwei Kürzen fehlen) śāradendumukhalakṣmīḥ. rāḍīdāḍimavījaṁ (rāḍī!) dadhatī kīrānane gaurī.. SAṁGĪTADĀM. im ŚKDR. Hierher viell. zu ziehen: gaurī vidyātha gāndhārī keśinī mitrasāhvayā. sāvitryā saha sarvāstāḥ pārvatyā yānti pṛṣṭhataḥ.. MBH. 3, 14562. HARIV. 12036. 12041. Vgl. auch u. gāndhāra. — n) N. verschiedener Metra: a) metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 160 (VII, 10). — b) metrical sequence ebend. 161 (VIII, 4). — g) 4 Mal 26 Längen ebend. 164 (XXI, 3). — 5) n. a) “weisser Senf” H. an. m. nach MED. — b) “die Staubfäden der Lotusblume” H. an. MED. — c) “Safran” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Diese Bed. hat nach VIŚVA beim Sch. zu CAURAP. 10 kanakagaura n.: kanakagaurakṛtāṅgarāga KAURAP. 10. — d) “Gold” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. gaura 1) ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. ŚIŚ. 11, 14. — 4) Z. 1 füge a) nach ī hinzu. — b) VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 66. “Nacht” AUFRECHT. — d) vgl. Spr. 282. — f) Ind. St.5,194.9,58. 106. 108. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 25,a,34. 58,a,10. 71,b,30. 77,b,37. auch mit der Sarasvatī identificirt WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 190. — k) N. pr. verschiedener Frauen Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,a,21. 321,b, No. 763. 364,b, No. 68. — n) d) metrical sequenceInd. St. 8, 385. — Vgl. mahāgaurī. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 gaura(m) A mountain in the Kuśa island. (Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 12, Verse 4). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 gaura gaura, I. adj., f. rī, White, yellow, pale red, Megh. 53; Rām. 5, 14, 30. II. m. 1. A kind of buffalo, Bos gaurus, Bhāg. P. 3, 10. 21. 2. White mustard, as a measure, Yājñ. 1, 362. III. f. rī, 1. Turmeric, Suśr. 1, 59, 11. 2. A young girl prior to menstruation, Pañc. iii. d. 213. 3. The wife of Śiva, Megh. 51. 4. The wife of Varuṇa, MBh. 5, 3968. 5. The name of a river, MBh. 6, 333. IV. n. Saffron, Caur. 10. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 gaura f. ī white, yellowish, reddish; brilliant, beautiful. m. = gauramṛga or = gaurasarṣapa, N. of a teacher; f. ī a female buffalo, a young girl before puberty, E. of the wife of Śiva, N. of sev. women. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 gaura gaura, a. (ī) whitish, yellowish, reddish; m. kind of buffalo; white mustard (a grain of it = a measure); -mukha, m. N.; -mṛga, m. kind of buffalo. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 gaura pu° guṅ–gatau ra ni° vṛddhiḥ gura–ghañ prajñādyaṇ vā . 1 candre 2 śvetasarṣape medi° 3 dhavavṛkṣe rājani° 4 pītavarṇe 5 śvetavarṇe 6 aruṇavarṇe ca pu° 7 tadviśiṣṭe tri° striyāṁ gaurā° ṅīṣ . 8 śrīcaitanyadeve mahāprabhau anantamahitā . 9 padmakeśare na° medi° 10 svarṇe 11 kuṅkume ca na° rājani° . tatra śvetavarṇayukte kailāsagauraṁ vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ raghuḥ pītavarṇādye gorocanopanitānta gaure kumā° aruṇavarṇādye kīrṇaiḥ piṣṭātakoghaiḥ kṛta divasamukhaiḥ kuṅkumakṣodagauraḥ ratnāva° taruṇādityagauraiśca śaragauraiśca vānaraiḥ rāmā° ki° 301 sa° . nitāntagauryo hṛtakuṅkameṣvalam kirā° 12 parimāṇamede yathoktaṁ yājña° jālasūryamarīcisthaṁ trasareṇurajaḥ smṛtam . te ‘ṣṭau likṣā ca tāstisro rājasarṣapa ucyate . gaurastu te trayaḥ ṣaṭ ca yavomadhyastu te trayaḥ iti . 13 mṛgabhede pu° strī gaurajo mahiṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ śūkaro gavayo ruruḥ . dviśaphāḥ paśavaśceme aviruṣṭraśca sattama! . kharo’śvo’śvataro gauraḥ śarabhaścamarī tathā . ete caikaśaphāḥ kṣattaḥ! bhāga° 3 . 10 . 22 . a° . mahoragāśca bhayato vidravanti sagaurakṛṣṇāḥ śarabhāścamaryaḥ bhāga° 8 . 2 . 16 a° . 14 viśuddhe tri° medi° . kaḍārā° karmadhāraye’sya vā pūrvanipātaḥ gaurapaṭaḥ paṭagauraḥ . |
घन – ghana | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ghana mf (“ā”) n. (“han”) a striker, killer, destroyer
mf (“ā”) n. compact, solid, material, hard, firm, dense, i, 8, 3 (“ghanā” for “-nam ā”) &c. mf (“ā”) n. coarse, gross mf (“ā”) n. viscid, thick, inspissated mf (“ā”) n. full of (in comp.), densely filled with (in comp.) mf (“ā”) n. uninterrupted mf (“ā”) n. dark (cf. “-śyāma”) mf (“ā”) n. deep (as sound; colour) xliii, 19 mf (“ā”) n. complete, all mf (“ā”) n. auspicious, fortunate ghana m. (= [characters]) slaying ghana m. an iron club, mace, weapon shaped like a hammer, i, 33, 4; 36, 16; 63, 5; ix, 97, 16 ghana m. any compact mass or substance (generally ifc.) xiv &c. (said of the foetus in the 2nd month ghana ifc. mere, nothing but (e.g. “vijṇāna-ghana”, “nothing but intuition” xiv) 5 viii f. (cf. “ambu-, ayo-“) mf (“ā”) n. a collection, multitude, mass, quantity mf (“ā”) n. vulgar people mf (“ā”) n. a cloud &c. (ifc. f. “ā” 2660) mf (“ā”) n. talc mf (“ā”) n. the bulbous root of Cyperus Hexastachys communis mf (“ā”) n. a peculiar form of a temple mf (“ā”) n. a particular method of reciting the and Yajur-veda (cf. p.409) mf (“ā”) n. the cube (of a number), solid body (in geom.) mf (“ā”) n. phlegm (“kapha”) mf (“ā”) n. the body mf (“ā”) n. extension, diffusion ghana n. any brazen or metallic instrument or plate which is struck (cymbal, bell, gong, &c.) 8688 ghana n. iron ghana n. tin ghana n. a mode of dancing (neither quick nor slow) ghana n. darkness ghana mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. closely iii 9 ghana n. (“dhvan”, to sound) deep ghana n. very much ghana mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of a stringed instrument ghana n. Glycine debilis ghana n. a kind of creeper Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 ghana a. [han mūrtau ap ghanadeśaśca Tv]. (1) Compact, firm, hard, solid: saṁjāta śca ghanāghanaḥ Mal. 9. 39; nāsā ghanāsthikā Y. 3. 89; R. 11. 18. (2) Thick, close, dense; ghanāviralabhāvaḥ U. 2. 27; R. 8. 91; Amaru. 57. (3) Thick-set, full, fully developed (as breasts); ghaṭayati ghasune kucayugagagane mṛgamadarucirūṣite Gīt. 7; agurucatuṣkraṁ bhavati gurū dvau ghanakucayugme śaśivadanā’sau Śrut. 8; Bh. 1. 8; Amaru. 28. (4) Deep (as sound); Mal. 2. 12; Mu. 1. 21. (5) Uninterrupted, permanent. (6) Impenetrable. (7) Great, excessive, violent. (8) Complete. (9) Auspicious, fortunate. (10) Coarse, gross. (11) Engrossed by, full or replete with; Māl. 1. 32; nirvṛti- U. 6. 11. — naḥ A cloud; ghanodayaḥ prāk tadanataraṁ payaḥ S. 7. 30; ghanarucirakalāpo niḥsapatno’sya jātaḥ V. 4. 10. (2) An iron club, a mace. (3) The body. (4) The cube of a number (in math.). (5) Extension, diffusion. (6) A collection, multitude, quantity, mass, assemblage. (7) Talc (8) Phlegm. (9) Any compact mass or substance. (10) Hardness, firmness. (11) A particular manner of reciting Vedic texts; thus the padas namaḥ rudrebhyaḥ ye repeated in this manner would stand thus: –namo rudrebhyo rudrebhyo namo namo rudrebhyo ye ye rudrebhyo namo namo rudrebhyo ye. –naṁ (1) A cymbal, a bell, a gong. (2) Iron. (3) Tin. (4) Skin, rind, bark. (5) A mode of dancing. — Comp. –atyayaḥ, –aṁtaḥ ‘disappearance of the clouds’, the season succeeding the rains, autumn; (śarad); R. 3. 37. –ajñānī N. of Durgā. –aṁbu n. rain. –ākaraḥ the rainy season. –āgamaḥ, –udayaḥ ‘the approach of clouds’, the rainy season; ghanāgamaḥ kāmijanapriyaḥ priye Rs. 2. 1. –āmayaḥ the date-tree. –āśrayaḥ the atmosphere, firmament. –uttamaḥ the face. –upalaḥ hail. –oghaḥ gathering of clouds. –kaphaḥ hail. –kālaḥ the rainy season. –garjitaṁ 1. thunder, peal or thundering noise of clouds, roar of thunder. –2. a deep loud roar. –golakaḥ alloy of gold and silver. –ghataḥ the cube of a cube. –jaṁbāla, thick mire. –jvālā lightning. –tālaḥ a kind of bird (sāraṁga). –tolaḥ the Chataka bird. –dhātuḥ lymph. –dhvani a. roaring. ( –niḥ) 1. a deep or low tone. –2. the muttering of thunder clouds; Śi. 16. 25. –nābhiḥ smoke (being supposed to be a principal ingredient in clouds; Me. 5). –nīhāraḥ thick hoar-frost or mist. –padaṁ the cube root. –padavī ‘the path of clouds’, firmament, sky; krāmadbhirghanapadavīmanekasaṁkhyaiḥ Ki. 5. 34. –pāṣaṁḍaḥ a peacock. –phalaṁ (in geom.) the solid or cubical contents of a body or of an excavation. –mūlaṁ cube root (in math.). –rasaḥ 1. a thick juice. –2. extract, decoction. –3. camphor. –4. water (m. or n.). –varaṁ the face. –vargaḥ the square of a cube, the sixth power (in math.). –vartman n. the sky; ghanavartma sahasradheva kurvan Ki. 5. 17. –vallikā, –vallī lightning. –vātaḥ a thick oppressive breeze or air. –vīthiḥ the sky. –śabdaḥ thunder, peal of thunder. –vāsaḥ a kind of pumpkin gourd. –vāhanaḥ 1. Śiva. –2. Indra. –śyāma a. ‘dark like a cloud’, deep-black, dark. ( –maḥ) an epithet (1) of Rāma, (2) of Kṛṣṇa. –samayaḥ the rainy season. –sāraḥ 1. camphor; ghanasāranīhārahāra &c. Dk. (1) (mentioned among white substances). –2. mercury. –3. water. –svanaḥ, –śabdaḥ, –svaḥ the roaring of clouds. –hastasaṁkhyā the contents of an excavation or of a solid (in math). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch ghana (von han) I) subj. 1) adj. subst. “der welcher erschlägt, Zermalmer”: vṛtrāṇām ṚV. 3, 49, 1. 4, 38, 1. 1, 4, 8. 8, 85, 12. — 2) m. “Knüttel, Keule” AV. 10, 4, 9. vadhīrhi dasyuṁ dhaninaṁ ghanena ṚV. 1, 33, 4. ā vajraṁ ghanā dadīmahi 8, 3. 36, 16. 63, 5. 9, 97, 16. “eine hammerähnliche Waffe” AK. 2, 8, 2, 59. H. 785. an. 2, 262. MED. n. 3. Vgl. ayoghana. — II) obj. 1) adj. f. ā (“fest zusammengeschlagen u.s.w.”), = mūrta, nirantara, sāndra, dṛḍha AK. 3, 2, 15. 3, 4, 18, 113. H. 1447. H. an. MED. = pūrṇa, saṁpuṭa ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. a) “compact”: kavalikā SUŚR. 1, 16, 8. “fest, hart”: granthi 257, 17. śopha 2, 44, 19. vraṇa 2, 7. piṇḍa 1, 322, 7. nāsā ghanāsthikā YĀJÑ. 3, 89. śilāghane tāḍakorasi RAGH. 11, 18. stanau BHARTṚ. 1, 17. CAURAP. 40. ŚRUT. 8. GĪT. 7, 24. jaghana, ūru 10, 6. CAURAP. 15. AMAR. 28. PRAB. 101, 16. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 3. aṅguli 67, 43. “fest”, von Speisen SUŚR. 1, 241, 15. “zäh, dick”, von Flüssigkeiten und dergl. srāva 84, 9. 2, 363, 5. doṣa 345, 15. ghanayāṅgaṁ mṛdālipat KATHĀS. 24, 93. trapsyaṁ dadhi ghanetarat AK. 2, 9, 51. ghanaṁ ghanapaṭalam BHARTṚ. 1, 43. udadhi, vāta (Gegens. tanu) H. 1359. “dicht”, von einem Gewebe SUŚR. 1, 29, 8. 2, 197, 14. vana PAÑCAT. III, 188. 141, 16 (wo sughana für saghana zu lesen ist). vṛkṣaiḥ VET. 6, 8. von Zähnen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 52. atighanatarapatracchanna PAÑCAT. 148, 5. pulaka AMAR. 57. dhārā PAÑCAT. 93, 2. dhūma MBH. 14, 1738. andhakāra R. 6, 19, 60. MṚCCH. 7, 11. PAÑCAT. 129, 18 (comparat.). timira I, 189. ŚIŚ. 4, 67. niśītha AMAR. 69. “dick, voll von Etwas”, am Ende eines comp.: jaladhārāghainarghanaiḥ MBH. 1, 5374. tamoghanāyāṁ niśi 13, 4047. hṛdi śokaghane RAGH. 8, 90. “häufig auf einander folgend, ununterbrochen”: gāṇḍīvasphuragurughanāsphālanakrūrapāṇi (vgl. anavataradhanurjyāsphālana ŚĀK. 37) PAÑCAT. III, 237. — b) “dunkel”, von Farben: ghanaruc “eine dunkle Hautfarbe habend” BHĀG. P. 4, 5, 3; vgl. ghanaśyāma. — c) “tief”, von Tönen: gaurhambhāravaghanasvanā MBH. 1, 6680. paraśorjarjaraśabdo neṣṭaḥ snigdho ghanaśca hitaḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42 (43), 19. ghanam – dhvananti RĀJA-TAR. 5, 377. — d) “zusammengefasst. ganz, all”: dhanam “das ganze Vermögen” UPAK. 24 (KATHĀS. 4, 26 eine ganz andere Lesart). ghanamapaśyataḥ (pāpasya) “des Bösen, der nichts merkte” KATHĀS. 4, 53. — 2) m. a) “eine compacte Masse, Klumpen u.s.w.”: saindhavaghana ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 3, 13. supuṣpite patraghane nilānaḥ R. 5, 16, 55. saṁdhyābhra- 6, 35, 12. MBH. 3, 11555. keśa- HARIV. 4298. vom “Fötus im zweiten Monat” (vgl. SUŚR. 1, 322, 7) NIR. 14, 6. VARĀH. L. JĀT. 3, 4 (nach dem Sch. n.). rasa-, prajñāna-, vijñāna-, prajñā-, jīva- “ganz, nichts als” rasa, “ganz Erkennen” u.s.w. ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 3, 13. 5, 4, 12. MĀṆḌ. UP. 5. PRAŚNOP. 5, 5. BHĀG. P. 8, 3, 12. 9, 8, 23. Vgl. ambughana, ayoghana. Nach den Lexicographen: = mūrtiguṇa, dārḍhya, vistāra, saṁgha, ogha AK. 3, 4, 18, 113. H. an. MED. — b) “Wolke” AK. 1, 1, 2, 9. 3, 4, 18, 113. TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. 164. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 5374. 12, 12405 (unterschieden von jīmūta, ghanāghana, megha, balāhaka). DAŚ. 1, 15. R. 3, 61, 8. 4, 27, 23. SUŚR. 1, 113, 19. MEGH. 20. 104. ŚĀK. 109. prativātaṁ na hi ghanaḥ kadācidupasarpati PAÑCAT. III, 22. HIT. 34, 21. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 93. 6, 11. 21, 20. ghanacchannadṛṣṭirghanacchannamarkaṁ yathā niṣprabhaṁ manyate VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 36. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā HARIV. 2660. — c) “Talk” (wie auch andere Synonyme von “Wolke”; vgl. abhra, abhraka und H. 1051) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “die knollige Wurzel von Cyperus hexastachyus communis Nees.” (wie alle Synonyme von “Wolke”; vgl. AK. 2, 4, 25. H. 1193) TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 2, 421, 11. 431, 16. 485, 13. 515, 1. — e) “Phlegma, Schleim” (s. kapha) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) “Körper” H. 564. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “Kubus” COLEBR. Alg. 10. 11. trighana = 3 x 3 x 3 = 27 VARĀH. L. JĀT. 1, 21. 13, 2. — h) “eine Art den” Veda “zu schreiben” COLEBR. Misc. Ess. I, 21. Verz. d. B. H. No. 368. — 3) f. ghanā N. zweier Pflanzen: a) = māṣaparṇī. — b) = rudrajaṭā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. a) “Schlaginstrument” AK. 1, 1, 7, 4. TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. 286. H. an. MED. HARIV. 8688. — b) “Eisen” H. 1037. — c) “Zinn” H. ś. 160. — d) = tvaca RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Eher “die aromatische Rinde der Laurus Cassia” als “Rinde, Haut” überh., wie WILSON annimmt. — e) “das gemässigte Tempo beim Tanz” AK. 1, 1, 7, 9. H. 292. H. an. MED. — III) nom. act. m. “das Erschlagen”: śreṣṭho ghane vṛtrāṇāṁ sanaye dhanānām ṚV. 6, 26, 8. ghana II) 1) a) sūtra “fest” Spr. 4000. viveka “derb, kräftig” 2971 (Conj.). utsāhaika- (vīrahṛdaya) KATHĀS. 83, 39. Z. 13 lies 129, 8; Z. 14 lies jaladhārāghanairghanaiḥ. — 2) a) mahābhra- R. 7, 6, 61. vom “Fötus” WASSILJEW 236. — f) HALĀY. 2, 355. — g) yugānāṁ trighano (d. i. “siebenundzwanzig” Juga) gataḥ SŪRYAS. 1, 22. 46. 70. — h) vgl. Ind. St. 3, 269. ghana I) 2) “Hammer” Spr. (II) 4074. — II) 2) a) und b) pl. von Menschen so v. a. “Pack” und zugleich “Wolken” Spr. (II) 6919. — h) Ind. Antiq. 1874, S. 133. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 ghana ghana, i. e. han + a, I. adj., f. nā, 1. Firm, hard, Bhartṛ. 1, 17. 2. Without interstices, Suśr. 1, 29, 8. 3. Uninterrupted, Pañc. iii. d. 237. 4. Dense, Pañc. iii. d. 188; 129, 8. 5. As latter part of a compound adj., sometimes Full, Ragh. 8, 90. 6. Dusk, Bhāg. P. 4, 5, 3. 7. Deep (as a sound), MBh. 1, 6680; Rājat. 5, 377. 8. Whole, Upak. 24. II. m. 1. A solid mass, substance, Vedāntas. in Chr. 211, 9. 2. A heap, Rām. 5, 16, 55. 3. A cloud, Megh. 20. — Comp. sa-, adj. dense, Pañc. 141, 16. stamba-, m. 1. a small hoe for weeding. 2. A sickle. 3. A basket for the heads of wild rice. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 ghana a. slaying, striking; compact, solid, firm, tight (n. adv.); dark, deep (sound); uninterrupted, whole, entire; full of (–°). m. slaughter, slayer; mace, club, hammer; compact mass, cloud; nothing but (–°). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 ghana ghan-a, a. striking; slaying; firm, hard; dense, solid, thick; uninterrupted; dark, murky; deep (tone); whole; -°, full of: -m, ad. closely, firmly; m. slaying; slayer; club, hammer; lump, solid mass; -°, nothing but, pure (cognition); cloud: pl. rabble. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 ghana pu° hana–mūrtau ap ghanādeśaśca . 1 meghe 2 mustake 3 samūhe 4 dārdye 5 vistāre ca 6 lauhamudgare medi° 7 śarīre 8 kaphe 9 abhrake rājani° . samatrighātaśca ghanaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ iti 10 sīlāvatyukte samāddhatrayabadhe . 11 niviḍe sāndre tri° amaraḥ 12 vṛḍhe tri° medi° . 13 pūrṇe 14 saspuṭe tri° śabdara° . 15 karatālādikāṁsyavādyamede 16 madhyama nṛtye ca na° amaraḥ . 17 lauhe na° hemaca° 18 tvace na° rājani° . tatra meghasyotpattibhedādikaṁ purāṇamarvasve brahmāṇḍapu° uktaṁ yathā sūryaḥ kiraṇajālena vāyuyuktena sarvataḥ . jagato jalamāṭatte kṛtsnasya dvijasattamāḥ! . ādityabhūtaṁ bhūtebhyaḥ somaṁ saṁkramate jalam . nāḍībhirvāyuyuktābhirlokādhāraḥ pravartate . yat somāccyavate sūkṣmaṁ tadabbhreṣvavatiṣṭhate . meghāvāvvabhivātena visṛjanti jalaṁ bhuvi . evaṁ prakaraṇenaiva patate cāsakṛjjalam . na nāśamudakasyāsti tadeva parivartate . mandhāraṇārthaṁ bhūtānāṁ māyaiṣā viṣṇunirmitā . anayā māyayā vyāptaṁ trailokyaṁ sacarācaram . viśraśo lokakṛddevaḥ sahabhrāṁśuḥ prajāpatiḥ . dhātā kṛtsnasya lokasya prabhaviṣṇurdivākaraḥ . sārvalaukikamambhoya ttat somo nabhasorasaḥ . evaṁ bhūtaṁ jagat sarvametattathyaṁ prakīrtitam . sūryāduṣṇaṁ nisravati somācchītaṁ pravartate . śītoṣṇavīryau dvāvetau yuktyā pālayato jagat . somāmṛtodbhavā gaṅgā pavitrā vimalodakā . bhadrāsomapurogāśca mahānadyo dvijottamāḥ! . sarvabhūtaśarīreṣu yāstvāpo’pasṛtābhuvi . teṣu sandahyamāmeṣu jaṅgamasthāvareṣu ca . pūryante sarvabhūtebhyo niṣkrāmantīha sarvaśaḥ . tena cābbhrāṇi jāyante sthānamabbhramayaṁ smṛtam . tejo’rkaḥ sarvabhūtebhya ādatte raśmibhirjalam . samudrādvāyusaṁyogādraśmayaḥ pravahantyapaḥ . tatastvṛtugate kāle parivṛtto divākaraḥ . niyacchatyapomeghebhyaḥ śuklakṛṣṇairgabhastibhiḥ . abbhrasthāḥ prapatantyāpo vāyunā samudīritāḥ . sarvabhūtahitārthāya rasyabhūtāḥ samantataḥ . tato varṣati ṣaṇmāsān sarvabhūta vivṛddhaye . vāyavyaṁ stanitañcaiva vidyudagnisamudbharvā . mehanācca miherdhātormeghatvaṁ vyañjayantyuta . na bhraśyanti yataścāpastadabhraṁ kavayo viduḥ . meghānāṁ punarutpattau trividhā yonirucyate . agnijā brahmajā caiva pakṣajā ca pṛthagvidhāḥ . tridhā ghanāḥ samākhyātāsteṣāṁ vakṣyāmi sambhavam . āgneyāḥ sūkṣmajāḥ proktāsteṣāṁ dhūmāt pravartanam . śītadurdinavātā ye svaguṇāste vyavasthitāḥ . mahipāśca varāhāśca mattamātaṅgarūpiṇaḥ . bhūtvā dharaṇi mabhyetya ramanti vicaranti ca . jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye tebhyo vījasambhavāḥ . vidyadguṇavihīnāśca jaladhārāvalamvinaḥ . sakā meghā mahākāyā āvahasya vaśānugāḥ . krośamātrācca varṣanti krośārdhādapi vā punaḥ . parvatāgra nitatveṣu varṣanti gahvareṣu ca . valākāgarbhadāścaiva vālākā garbhadhāriṇaḥ . brahmajāścaiva ye meghā brahmaniśvāsasambhavāḥ . te ha vidyudgaṇāpetāḥ stanayitnupriyasvanāḥ . teṣu śabdapraṇādena bhūmeḥsvāṅgaruhodbhavaiḥ . vāyuvāhyābhiṣikteṣu vāyuryauvanamaśnute . teṣviya prāvṛḍāsaktā bhūtānāṁ jīvitodbhavā . jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye tebhyo jīvasambhavāḥ . dvitīyaṁ pravahaṁ vāyuṁ meghāste tu samāśritāḥ . ito yojanamātrācca sārdhārdhādapi vā ca te . vṛṣṭidharmo dvadhā teṣāṁ dhārā”sāraḥ prakīrtitaḥ . puṣkarāvartakā nāma ye mevāḥ pakṣamambhatāḥ . saṁyogādvāyunocchinnāḥ parvatānāṁ mahaujasām . kāmagānāṁ ca lokānāṁ sarvepāṁ śitamicchatām . puskarā nāma te meghā vṛhatto ḥsamatsarāḥ . puṣkarāvartakāstena kāraṇeneha śabditāḥ . nānārūpadharāṁścaiva mahāghorasvanāśca ye . kalpāntavṛṣṭeḥ sraṣṭāraḥ saṁvartāgnerniyāmakāḥ . varṣanti te yugānteṣu tutīyāste prakīrtitāḥ . anekarūpasaṁsthānāḥ pūrayanto mahītalam . vāyuṁ parivahaṁ te syuḥ śritāḥ kalpāntasādhakāḥ . yo’ṇḍasya ca vibhinnasya prākṛtasyābhavattadā . yasmāt brahmā samutpannaścaturvaktraḥ svayambhuvaḥ . tasyaivāṇḍakapālāni sarvameghāḥ pravartitāḥ . teṣāmāpyāyanaṁ dhūmaḥ sarveṣāmaviśeṣataḥ . teṣāṁ śreṣṭhastu parjanya ścattvāraścaiva diggajāḥ . gajānāṁ parvatānāñca meghānāṁ bhogibhiḥ saha . kulamekaṁ pṛthak bhūtaṁ yonistvekaṁ jalaṁ smṛtam . parjanyo diggajāścaiva hemante śītasambhavāḥ . tuṣāravṛṣṭiṁ varṣanti himaṁ sasyavivṛddhaye . vāyuviśeṣakṛtaeva ghanabhedo bhā° śā° 330 a° darśito yathā prerayatyabhrasaṁghātān dhūmajāṁścoṣmajāṁśca yaḥ . prathamaḥ prathame mārge pravaho nāma yo’nilaḥ . ambare snehamabhyetya taḍidbhyaścotamadyutiḥ . āvaho nāma saṁbhāti dvitīyaḥ śvasanonadan . udayaṁ jyotiṣāṁ śaśvat somādonāṁ karoti yaḥ . antardeheṣu codānaṁ yaṁ vadanti manīṣiṇaḥ . yaścaturbhyaḥ samudrebhyo vāyurdhārayate jalam . uddhṛtyādadate cāpo jīmūtebhyo’mbare’nilaḥ . yo’dbhiḥ saṁyojya jīmūtān parjanyāya prayacchati . udvaho nāma vaṁhiṣṭha stṛtīyaḥ sa sadāgatiḥ . samuhyamānā bahudhā yena nītāḥ pṛthagghanāḥ . varṣamokṣakṛtārambhāste bhavanti ghanāghanāḥ . saṁhatā yena cāviddhā bhavanti nadatā nadāḥ . rakṣaṇārthāya sambhūtāḥ meghatvamupayānti ca . yo’sau vahati bhūtānāṁ vimānāni vihāyasā . caturthaḥ saṁvaho nāma vāyuḥ sa girimardanaḥ . yena vegavatā rugaṇā rūkṣeṇārujatā nagān . vāyunā sahitā meghā ste bhavanti valāhakāḥ . ṣṭāruṇotpātasañcāro nabhasaḥ stanayitnumān . pañcamaḥ sa mahāvego vivaho nāma mārutaḥ . yasmin pāriplavā divyā vahantyāpovihāyasā . puṇyañcākāśagaṅgāyā stoyaṁ viṣṭabhya tiṣṭhati . samatrighātaścetyāderayamayaḥ samasaṁkhyānāṁ trayāṇāṁ ghātaḥ yadyapyatra samayordvayorghātena vargarūpeṇa tanmūlasya samatvaṁ nāsti tathāpi samaśabdena sadṛśaghātadvithātatvena samatvaṁ todhyaṁ yathā 1 ghanaḥ? . dvābhyo dvayorguṇane 4 catvāraḥ teṣāṁ dvābhyāṁ guṇane 8 . evaṁ trayāṇāṁ tribhirguṇane 9 nava teṣāṁ punastribhirguṇane 27 . evaṁ krameṇa vāradvayaṁ samasamadvighātarūpavargaguṇanāt ghanarūpatvaṁ jāyate tatraikādīnāṁ daśaparyuntānāṁ ghanasaṁkhyāḥ suvodhāya pradarśyante yathā 1 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9 . 10 1 . 8 . 27 . 64 . 125 . 216 . 343 . 512 729 . 1000 asya prakārāntaraṁ sthāpyoghanotyasyetyādi līlāvatyāṁ dṛśyaṁ vistarabhayānnoktam . jaṭāmuktāṁ viparyasya ghanamāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ ityukte 19 vedapāṭhabhede ṛgvedaśabde 1409 . 11 . 12 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ tatra sāndre pracaṇḍaghanagarjitapratirutānukārī (ravaḥ) muhuḥ veṇī° . jaghanena ghanena sā lauhodghanaghanaskandhāḥ bhaṭṭiḥ . lauhamudgare pratijaghāna ghanairiva muṣṭibhiḥ kirā° . meghe prāvṛṣamiva ghanakeśajālām kāda° . rajanītimirāvaguṇṭhite puramārge ghanaśabdavihvalāḥ kumā° asambhavadghanarasā śatālīpariṣevitā udbhaṭaḥ . ghanaśyamaḥ . mūrtau–kāṭhinthe dvāraṁ tamoghanaprakhyam bhaṭṭiḥ . tamasoghano mūrtiḥ kāṭhinyam tena mūrtimattamaḥsamam jayama° . |
चर्मानुरण्जन – carmānuraṇjana | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899carmānuraṇjana n. “skin-colouring”, white cinnabar |
चित्र – citra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899citra mf (“ā”) n. conspicuous, excellent, distinguished
mf (“ā”) n. bright, clear, bright-coloured mf (“ā”) n. clear (a sound) mf (“ā”) n. variegated, spotted, speckled (with instr. or in comp.) mf (“ā”) n. agitated (as the sea, opposed to “sama”) mf (“ā”) n. various, different, manifold &c. citra mf (“ā”) n. (execution) having different varieties (of tortures) mf (“ā”) n. strange, wonderful mf (“ā”) n. containing the word “citra” citra mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. so as to be bright mf (“ā”) n. in different ways citra mf (“ā”) n. (to execute) with different tortures citra mf (“ā”) n. (“as”) m. variety of colour mf (“ā”) n. Plumbago zeylanica mf (“ā”) n. Ricinus communis mf (“ā”) n. Jonesia Aśoka mf (“ā”) n. a form of Yama mf (“ā”) n. N. of a king (“citra”) mf (“ā”) n. of a Jābāla-gṛihapati (with the patr. Gauśrāyaṇi), mf (“ā”) n. of a king (with the patr. Gāṅgyāyani) mf (“ā”) n. of a son of Dhritarāṣṭra mf (“ā”) n. of a Draviḍa king, Padma P.v, 20, 1 (v.l. “-trākṣa”) mf (“ā”) n. of a Gandharva citra f. pl. the asterism Citrā citra mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) n. anything bright or coloured which strikes the eyes citra f. a brilliant ornament, ornament citra f. a bright or extraordinary appearance, wonder, ii &c. citra f. (with “yadi” [ iii, 9/10] or “yad” [ 9062 fut. [ 3-3, 150 f. ]) strange, curious (e.g. “citraṁ badhiro vyākaraṇam adhyeṣyate” “it would be strange if a deaf man should learn grammar” citra f. strange! 15652 citra f. the ether, sky citra f. a spot citra f. a sectarial mark on the forehead citra f. = “kuṣṭha” citra f. a picture, sketch, delineation 4532 (“sa-” mfn. = “-ga”) &c. (ifc. f. “ā” 64) citra f. variety of colour citra f. a forest (“vana” for “dhana”?) of variegated appearance on citra f. various modes of writing or arranging verses in the shape of mathematical or other fanciful figures (syllables which occur repeatedly being left out or words being represented in a shortened form) citra f. punning in the form of question and answer, facetious conversation, riddle, iv, 14/v citra f. cf. a- and, “su-citra, dānu-, vi-” citra f. “caitra”. citra “-traka, -traṭa”, &c. see 4. “cit”. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 citra a. [citr-bhāve ac; ci-ṣṭran vā Uṇ. 4. 163] (1) Bright, clear. (2) Variegated, spotted, diversified. (3) Amusing, interesting, agreeable; Māl. 1. 4. (4) Various, different, manifold; Pt. 1. 136; Ms. 9. 248; Y. 1. 288. (5) Surprising, wonderful, strange; kimatra citraṁ R. 5. 33; S. 2. 15. (6) Perceptible, visible. (7) Conspicuous, excellent, dstinguished. (8) Rough, agitated (as the sea, opp. sama). (9) Clear, loud, perceptible (as a sound). –traḥ (1) The variegated colour. (2) A form of Yama. (3) The Aśoka tree. (4) = citragupta q. v. below. –traṁ (1) A picture, painting, delineation; citre niveśya parikalpitasattvayogā S. 2. 9; punarapi citrīkṛtā kāṁtā S. 6. 20, 13, 21 &c. (2) A brilliant ornament or ornament. (3) An extraordinary appearance, wonder. (4) A sectarial mark on the forehead. (5) Heaven, sky. (6) A spot. (7) The white or spotted leprosy. (8) (In Rhet.) The last of the three main divisions of Kavya (poetry). (It is of two kinds śabdacitra and artha-vācyacitra, and the poetical charm lies mainly in the use of figures of speech dependent on the sound or sense of words. Mammaṭa thus defines it: –śabdacitraṁ vācyacitramavyaṁgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtaṁ K. P. 1. As an instance of śabdacitra may be cited the following verse from R. G. mitrātriputranetrāya trayīśātravaśatrave . gotrārigotrajaitrāya gotrātre te namo namaḥ … (9) Anything bright which strikes the eye. (10) Playing upon words, punning, using conundrums, riddles &c. –traṁ ind. Oh!, how strange!, what a wonder! citraṁ badhiro nāma vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate Sk. — Comp. –akṣī, –netrā, –locanā a kind of bird commonly called Sārikā. –aṁga a. striped, having a spotted body. ( –gaḥ) 1. a kind of snake. –2. N. of Arjuna. ( –gaṁ) 1. vermilion. –2. yellow orpiment. –aṁgada a. decked with brilliant bracelets. ( –dā) N. of a wife of Arjuna and mother of Babhruvāhana. –aṁgadasūḥ f. an epithet of Satvavatī, mother of Vyāsa. –annaṁ rice dressed with coloured condiments; Y. 1. 304. –apūpaḥ a kind of cake. –arpita a. committed to a picture, painted. -āraṁbha a. painted; R. 2. 31; Ku. 3. 42. –ākṛtiḥ f. a painted resemblance, portrait. –āyasaṁ steel. –āraṁbhaḥ a painted scene, outline of a picture; V. 1. 4. v. l. –uktiḥ f. 1. agreeable or eloquent discourse; jayaṁti te paṁcamanādamitracitroktisaṁdarbhavibhūṣaṇeṣu Vikr. 1. 10. –2. a voice from heaven. –3. a surprising tale. –odanaḥ boiled rice coloured with turmeric &c. –kaṁṭhaḥ a pigeon. –kathālāpaḥ telling agreeable or charming stories. –kaṁbalaḥ 1. painted cloth used as an elephant’s housing. –2. a variegated carpet. –kara. 1. a painter. –2. an actor. –karman n. 1. an extraordinary act. –2. ornamenting, decorating. –3. a picture; Mu. 2. 4. –4. magic. (–m.). 1. a magician, one who works wonders. –2. a painter. -vid m. 1. a painter. –2. a magician. –kāyaḥ 1. a tiger in general. –2. a leopard or panther. –kāraḥ 1. a painter. –2. N. of a mixed tribe; (sthapaterapi gāṁdhikyāṁ citrakāro vyajāyata Parāśara). –kūṭaḥ N. of a hill and district near Prayāga; R. 12. 15, 13. 47, U. 1. –kṛt a. astonishing, surprising. (–m) a painter. –kolaḥ a kind of lizard. –kriyā painting. –kṣatra a. Ved. having manifold power, or one whose wealth is visible. –ga, –gata a. 1. painted, drawn in a picture. –2. coloured, variegated. –gaṁdhaṁ yellow orpiment. –guptaḥ one of the beings in Yama’s world recording the vices and virtues of mankind; Mu. 1. 20. –gṛhaṁ a painted room. –jalpaḥ a random or incoherent talk, talk on various subjects. –taṁḍuṁla a medicinal plant said to possess anthelmintic virtues. –tvac m. the Bhūrja tree. –daṁḍakaḥ the cotton-plant. –nyasta a. painted, drawn in a picture; Ku. 2. 24. –pakṣaḥ the francoline partridge. –paṭaḥ, –ṭṭaḥ 1. a painting, a picture. –2. a coloured or chequered cloth. –pada a. 1. divided into various parts. –2. full of graceful expressions. –pādā the bird called Sārikā. –picchakaḥ a peacock. –puṁkhaḥ a kind of arrow. –pṛṣṭhaḥ a sparrow. –pratikṛtiḥ f. representation in colours, a painting, picture. –phalakaṁ a tablet for painting, a pictureboard. –barhaḥ a peacock. –bhānu a. of a variegated colour, shining with light. ( –nuḥ) 1. fire. –2. the sun; (citrabhānurvibhātīti dine ravau rātrau vahnau K. P. 2 given as an instance of one of the modes of aṁjana). –3. N. of Bhairava. –4. the Arka plant. –5. Śiva. –6. an epithet of the Aśvins. –7. the first year of the first cycle of Jupiter. –bhūta a. painted. –maṁḍalaḥ a kind of snake. –mṛgaḥ the spotted antelope. –mekhalaḥ a peacock. –yodhin a. fighting in a wonderful manner. (–m.) an epithet of Arjuna. –rathaḥ 1. the sun. –2. N. of a king of the Gandharvas, one of the sixteen sons of Kaśyapa by his wife Muni; atra munestanayaścitrasenādīnāṁ paṁcadaśānāṁ bhrātṝṇāmadhiko guṇaiḥ ṣoḍaśaścitraratho nāma samutpannaḥ K. 136; V. 1. –likhanaṁ painting. –likhita a. 1. painted. –2. dumb, motionless (as in a picture). –lekha a. of beautiful outlines, highly arched; rucistava kalāvatī ruciracitralekhe bhruvau Gīt. 10. ( –khā) 1. a portrait, picture. –2. N. of a friend and companion of Uṣā, daughter of Bāṇa. [When Uṣā related to her her dream, she suggested the idea of taking the portraits of all young princes in the neighbourhood; and on Uṣā’s recognising Aniruddha, Chitralekha, by means of her magical power, conveyed him to her palace]. –lekhakaḥ a painter. –lekhanikā a painter’s brush. –vadālaḥ the sheat-fish. –vanaṁ N. of a forest near the Gaṇḍakī. –vājaḥ a cock. –vicitra a. 1. variously coloured, variegated. –2. multiform. –vidyā the art of painting. –śālā a painter’s studio. –śikhaṁḍin m. an epithet of the seven sages: marīci, aṁgiras, atri, pulastya, pulaha, kratu and vasiṣṭha. -jaḥ an epithet of Bṛhaspati. –śiras m., –śīrṣakaḥ a kind of venomous insect. –śrīḥ great or wonderful beauty. –saṁstha a. painted. –hastaḥ a particular position of the hands in fighting. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch citra (von 4. cit) Uṇ. 4, 165. 1) adj. f. ā a) “augenfällig; sichtbar, ausgezeichnet”: ūti ṚV. 2, 17, 8. 4, 32, 5. 5, 40, 3. abhiṣṭi 1, 119, 8. 8, 3, 2. sa ciketa sahīyasāgniścitreṇa karmaṇā 39, 5. varūtha 56, 3. grābha 70, 1. vakṣatha 10, 115, 1. vasu 9, 19, 1. rādhas 1, 22, 7. 44, 1 u.s.w. draviṇa 2, 23, 15. 10, 36, 13. uṣo vājaṁ hi vaṁsva yaścitro mānuṣe jane 1, 48, 11. 4, 22, 10. 36, 9. sa citra citraṁ citayantamasme citrakṣatra citratamaṁ vayodhām. candraṁ rayiṁ gṛṇate yuvasva 6, 6, 7. citraṁ ketuṁ kṛṇute cekitānā 1, 93, 15. 94, 5. 113, 1. ā citra citriṇīṣvā. citraṁ kṛṇoṣyūtaye 4, 32, 2. — b) “hell, licht; hellfarbig”: uṣasaḥ ṚV. 7, 75, 3. 6, 60, 2. agni 1, 71, 1. 4, 7, 1. jyotis 5, 63, 4. sūro na citraḥ 9, 86, 34. sa citreṇa cikite bhāsā 2, 3, 5. ā yaḥ svārṇa bhānunā citro vibhātyarciṣā 8, 4. raśmi 9, 100, 8. nakṣatra TBR. 3, 1, 2, 1. Indra ṚV. 1, 142, 4. 2, 13, 13 u.s.w. die Marut 1, 165, 13. 8, 7, 7. abhra 5, 63, 3. ratha 3, 2, 15. aśvā 1, 30, 21. 10, 75, 7. vastra 1, 134, 4. rūpa 5, 52, 11. — c) “verschiedenfarbig, bunt, scheckig” AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H. 1398. an. 2, 418. MED. r. 34. srajaḥ N. 4, 8. puṣpavatīṁ citrāṁ vanamālām R. 5, 4, 2. MṚCCH. 92, 7. In Verb. mit einem instr. oder nach einem im instr. zu fassenden Worte im comp.: sauvarṇastvaṁ mṛgo bhūtvā citro rajatavindubhiḥ R. 3, 44, 16. kāñcanacitrakārmuka 8, 25. vaidūryamaṇicitre – aṅgade 6, 112, 88. ratnacitra (ratha) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42 (43), 6. mukuṭāṅgadacitrāṅgī R. 1, 45, 41. — d) “bewegt” (vom Meere), Gegens. sama R. 3, 39, 12. — e) “hell, vernehmlich” (von Tönen): vācaṁ parjanyaścitrāṁ vadati tviṣīmatīm ṚV. 5, 63, 6. arka 6, 66, 9. 10, 112, 9. pavamāno ajījanaddivaścitraṁ na tanyatum 9, 61, 16. — f) “mannichfaltig, verschieden, allerlei”: vanarājayaḥ R. 6, 15, 6. kathāḥ MBH. 1, 3. R. 1, 3, 10. -bhāṣya MBH. 5, 1240. vadhopāyaiḥ M. 9, 248. YĀJÑ. 1, 287. ARJ. 7, 14. SUŚR. 1, 237, 17. 241, 14. 2, 93, 6. PAÑCAT. I, 196. 429. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 12. 13. 3, 19, 6. adv.: citraṁ saṁkrīḍamānāstāḥ krīḍanairvividhaiḥ R. 1, 9, 14. vajracitrapariṣkṛte (aṅgade) R. 6, 112, 88. — g) “wunderbar” MED.; vgl. 4,b. — h) “das Wort” citra “enthaltend”: citre gāyati ŚAT. BR. 7, 4, 1, 24. KĀTY. ŚR.17, 4, 4. — 2) m. a) “Buntheit” BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. — b) N. verschied. Pflanzen: a) “Plumbago zeylanica Lin.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. MED. l. 11. — b) “Ricinus communis.” — g) “Jonesia Asoka” (aśoka) “Roxb.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “eine Form des” Jama TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Königs (parox.) ṚV. 8, 21, 18. eines Gāñgyāyani Ind. St. 1, 395. Gauśrāyaṇi ebend. eines Sohnes des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 2730. 4543. 7, 5594. eines Königs von Draviḍa PADMA-P. in Verz. d. B. H. No. 457. — 3) f. ā a) “Spica virginis”, in der alten Reihe das 12te, in der neuen das 14te Mondhaus, COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 337. 425. 463. 481. Ind. St. 1, 99. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H. 112. H. an. MED. AV. 19, 7, 3. TS. 2, 4, 6, 1. citrā nakṣatraṁ mitro devatā 4, 4, 10, 2. TBR. 1, 1, 2, 5. ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 13. 17. KAUŚ. 75. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 7, 4. MBH. 5, 4842. 6, 79. 13, 3268. 4261. HARIV. 4257. R. 3, 23, 11. 5, 18, 14. RAGH. 1, 46. LALIT. 117. pl. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 58. citrāsvātī gaṇa rājadantādi zu P. 2, 2, 31. — b) “eine Schlangenart” H. an. MED. — c) N. verschied. Pflanzen: a) “Anthericum tuberosum Roxb.” oder “Salvinia cucullata Roxb.” = mūṣikaparṇī AK. 2, 4, 3, 6. = ākhuparṇī H. an. MED. — b) “Cucumis maderaspatanus” AK. 2, 4, 5, 22. H. an. MED. “Koloquinthe” RATNAM. 15. — g) = dantī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 34. — d) “Ricinus communis” RATNAM. 3. — e) “Myrobalanenbaum” (āmalakī) RATNAM. 90. — z) = mṛgervāru. — h) gaṇḍadūrvā. — J) “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā) “Roxb.” RĀJAN. – SUŚR. 1, 144, 14. 2, 21, 15. 23, 2, wahrscheinlich in der Bed. greek — d) N. verschiedener Metra: a) “eine Art” Mātrāsamaka (“4 Mal 16 Moren”) COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 155 (2, 4). 86. — b) metrical sequence ebend. 161 (X, 11). — g) metrical sequence ebend. 162 (XI, 3); hier bei COLEBR. citra. — e) “Schein, Täuschung” (māyā) MED. — f) N. pr. = citrāyāṁ jātā P. 4, 3, 34, Vārtt. 1. a) einer Apsaras H. an. — b) einer Schwester Kṛṣṇa’s und Gemahlin Arjuna’s, = subhadrā TRIK. H. an. MED. HARIV. 1952. — g) einer Tochter Gada’s (v. l. Kṛṣṇa’s) HARIV. 9194. — d) eines Flusses MED. — 4) n. SIDDH.K.249,b,2. a) “eine helle, glänzende” oder “farbige Erscheinung; ein in die Augen fallender Gegenstand”, daher auch “funkelndes Geschmeide, Schmuck”: ā revatī rodasī citramasthāt ṚV. 3, 61, 6. kadasya citraṁ cikite 4, 23, 2. sarvāṇi hi citrāṇyagniḥ (hierher oder zu b) ŚAT. BR.6,1,3,20.7,4,1,24. na yāsu citraṁ dadṛśe na yakṣam ṚV. 7, 61, 5. ā vaścitramā vo vratamā vo ‘haṁ samitiṁ dade 10, 166, 4. nakṣatravihitāsau (der Himmel) citravihiteyam (die Erde) TS. 2, 5, 2, 5. citrāṇyaṅgairnakṣatrāṇi rūpeṇa (prīṇāmi) VS. 25, 9. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9. dakṣiṇāvatāmidimāni citrā dakṣiṇāvatāṁ divi sūryāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 125, 6. uṣastaccitramā bharāsmabhyam. yena tokaṁ ca tanayaṁ ca dhāmahe “bring uns den Schmuck, dass wir Kind und Enkel besitzen” 92, 13. sā hīyaṁ (rātriḥ) saṁgṛhyeva citrāṇi vasati die “Sterne” als “Edelsteine” gedacht ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 4, 22. citraṁ paścātsyātprajā vai citraṁ citraṁ hyasya prajā bhavati 13, 8, 1, 13; nach dem Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 21, 3, 23 und ṢAḌV. BR. 2, 10 soll es hier = anekaprakāraṁ vanam “verschiedenfarbiges” oder — “gestaltetes Gehölz” sein. — b) “eine ungewöhnliche Erscheinung, Wunder” AK. 1, 1, 7, 19. 3, 4, 25, 180. H. 303. H. an. MED. citraṁ vā abhūma ya iyataḥ sapatnānabadhiṣma ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 17. taccitramiva me pratibhāti ŚĀK. 110, 17. BHARTṚ. 3, 39. PAÑCAT. 256, 12. ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 36. vākyamapratirūpaṁ hi na citraṁ strīṣu R. 3,51, 32. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 20. kimatra citraṁ yadi… ŚĀK. 35, 21. naitaccitraṁ yadayam .. 48. KATHĀS. 18, 359. fg. naitaccitraṁ – tvayi – yat HARIV. 9062. citraṁ badhiro nāma vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate “es wäre ein Wunder, wenn” P. 3, 3, 151, Sch. citraṁ drakṣyati nāmāndhaḥ kṛṣṇaṁ paśyedyadīśvaram VOP. 25, 15; vgl. 14 und P. 3, 3, 150. fg. yādavā iti citraṁ naḥ śaktāḥ sthātuṁ raṇe “es wäre ein Wunder, wenn die J. vermöchten” HARIV. 15652. kṣipto ‘pi nāpataccitram “o Wunder!” KATHĀS. 5, 86. citraṁ kathaṁ tvayā jñātā sā saṁjñā 7, 73. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 85 (mitten in den Satz eingeschoben). 4, 586. — c) “Luftraum, Himmel” H. an. — d) “Fleck”: yathaiva sadṛśo rūpe mātāpitrorhi jāyate. vyāghraścitraiḥ MBH. 13, 2605. — e) “Sectenzeichen auf der Stirn” TRIK. H. 653. H. an. MED. lalitavanitāḥ – sacitrāḥ MEGH. 65. — f) “weisser Aussatz” H. 466, falsche Lesart für śvitra; vgl. übrigens carmacitraka. — g) “Bild, Gemälde; Malerei” AK. 3, 4, 25, 180. H. 922. H. an. MED. paṭe citramivārpitam MBH. 13, 7692. citre ‘pi cālikhatyaśvān SĀV. 2, 13. citre niveśya ŚĀK. 42. 141. 89, 2. citrairivārpitam (vgl. citrārpita) “gemalt” MBH. 13, 2660. citraṁ yathāśrayamṛte SĀṁKHYAK. 41. ye ca citraṁ bhajanti vai “und die sich mit der Malerei abgeben” R. GORR. 2, 90, 23. sacitra “bemalt” HARIV. 4532. — h) “Buntheit” AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. TRIK. H. 1398. H. an. MED. — i) Bez. “verschiedener Arten, künstliche Verse u.s.w. in Form von allerlei Figuren durch Nichtwiederholung wiederkehrender Silben oder Wörter in abgekürzter Weise künstlich für das Auge darzustellen”: padmādyākārahetutve varṇānāṁ citramucyate SĀH. D. 645; vgl. HAEB. Anth. 291. fgg., wo verschiedene solcher Figuren mitgetheilt werden. — k) “ein Wortspiel in Form von Frage und Antwort”: praśnottarāntarābhinnamuttaraṁ citramucyate KUVALAJ. 145, “b”, mit dem Beispiele: ke dārapoṣaṇaratāḥ (dāra = kṣetra, als Antwort gilt kedāra-) ke kheṭāḥ (khe’ṭāḥ) kiṁ calaṁ vayaḥ (“Vögel” und “Alter”). — Vgl. acitra, dānu-, vi-, su-, caitra. citra 1) f) -ratāni Verz. d. Oxf. H. 215,b,29. citrā yogāḥ unter den 64 Kalā 217,a,4. 216,a,11. -vadha “eine qualificirte Todesstrafe” DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 193, 4. citramenaṁ ghātayiṣyasi “unter verschiedenen Martern” 198, 3. — g) namo ‘stu citraprabhāvāya dhanāya tasmai Spr. 4777. — 2) d) Gārgyāyaṇi Verz. d. Oxf. H. 276,a,30. — 3) a) TS. 7, 4, 8, 2. PAÑCAV. BR. 5, 9, 1. SŪRYAS. 8, 21. 9, 12. — d) vgl. Ind. St. 8, 315. fg. — f) e) eines Felsens BHĀG. P. 12, 8, 17. — 4) f) vgl. citrakuṣṭha. — g) (tām) citre likhitvā KATHĀS. 51, 126. -rodanāntardhāna Verz. d. Oxf. H. 322,b,4. fg. — i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 208,a,5 v. u. — k) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 211,b,9. — i) k) “Wort- und Lautspiel”: keciccitrākhyaṁ tṛtīyaṁ kāvyabhedamicchanti tadāhuḥ. śabdacitraṁ vācyacitramavyaṅgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtam SĀH. D. 116, 19. fg. śabdacitra, arthacitra, ubhayacitra PRATĀPAR. 12,b. 13,a. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 citra 1 I A son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra killed in war by Bhīmasona. (M.B. Droṇa Parva, Chapter 136, Verse 20). citra 2 II A gajarāja (king elephant) with whom Subrahmaṇya, as a child, used to play. (M.B. Vana Parva, Chapter 225, Verse 23). citra 3 III A hero who fought on the Kaurava side against the Pāṇḍavas. He was killed by Prativindhya. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 14, Verse 32). citra 4 IV A hero from the Cedi Kingdom who fought on the Pāṇḍava side against the Kauravas. Karṇa killed him. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 56, Verse 46). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 citra 1. cit + ra, I. adj. 1. Visible (ved.). 2. Clear, shining, Chr. 293, 2 = Rigv. i. 88, 2. 3. Variegated, Chr. 2, 21. 4. Spotted, Rām. 3, 48, 12. 5. Various, Man. 9, 248. 6. Fluctuating, Rām. 3, 52, 15. 7. Wonderful, Rām. 3, 35, 4. 8. Surprised, Rājat. 5, 2. 9. Uncommon, rigorous, Daśak. in Chr. 193, 4; adv. in a rigorous manner, ib. 198, 3. II. f. trā, The name of a lunar mansion, Spica virginis, Rām. 3, 23, 11. III. n. 1. A surprising appearance, Śāk. 110, 17; wonder, Rām. 3, 51, 26. 2. A spot, MBh. 13, 2605. 3. A picture, MBh. 13, 7692. 4. Painting, Rām. 2, 90, 23 Gorr. — Comp. vi-, I. adj. 1. variegated, spotted. 2. painted. 3. handsome. 4. surprising. II. n. 1. variegated (the colour). 2. surprise. 3. speech implying apparently the reverse of the intended object. sa-, adj. 1. painted, Hariv. 4532. 2. containing pictures, Megh. 65. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 citra a. conspicuous, visible, bright, clear, loud, variegated, manifold, various, excellent, extraordinary, strange, wonderful. f. ā N. of a lunar mansion. n. anything bright or shining, esp. jewel, ornament, picture; extraordinary appearance, wonder (often as exclamation). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 citra cit-ra, a. manifest, visible, distinguished, clear, bright; distinct, audible (sound); variegated, speckled, dappled; various, manifold; qualified with torture (punishment); wonderful; n. bright-coloured object, glittering ornament; jewel; picture; surpring phenomenon, wonder. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 citra t ka kṣaṇikekṣaṇe . lekhye’dbhute . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adantacurāṁ-paraṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ .) kṣaṇikekṣaṇaṁ kadāciddarśanam . citrayati citrāpayati rāhuṁ lokaḥ kadācit paśyatītyarthaḥ . citrayati pratimāṁ lokaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 citra kṣaṇike–lekhye adbhute ca ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . citrayati te acicitrat ta . citritaḥ citraḥ . citra na° citra–bhāve ac ci–ṣṭran vā . 1 tilake . 2 ālekhye 3 adbhute 4 karvūravarṇe 5 tadyukte tri° medi° . 6 ākāśe 7 kuṣṭhabhede hema° . 8 yamabhede pu° vṛkodarāya citrāya yamatarpaṇamantraḥ . 9 eraṇḍaṁvṛkṣe 10 aśokavṛkṣe 11 citrakavṛkṣe rājani° 12 citragupte citraguptaśabde dṛśyam 13 śabdālaṅkārabhede na° alaṅkāraśabde 390 pṛ° dṛśyam . citrasaṁjñamīritaṁ pramāṇikāpadadvayam vṛ° ra° ukte 15 ṣoḍaśākṣarapādake chandobhede . nisargacitrojjvalasūkṣmapakṣmaṇā citraṁ cakāra padamardhapulāyitena ruciracitratanūruhaśālibhiḥ iti ca māghaḥ . |
जरठ – jaraṭha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899jaraṭha mfn. old (śāntiś. iv, 17)
mfn. bent, drooping mfn. for “jaṭhara”, hard, solid mfn. harsh, cruel mfn. strong, violent xi f. mfn. yellowish (old leaves’ colour) jaraṭha m. old age Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 jaraṭha a. [jṝ bā -aṭha] (1) Hard, solid. (2) Old, aged; ayamatijaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ pariṇatadikkarikāstaṭīrbibharti Śi. 4. 29 (where jaraṭha means ‘hard’ also). (3) Decayed, decrepit, infirm. (4) Bent, bowed down, drooping. (5) Pale, yellowish-white. (6) Full-grown, ripe, matured; jaraṭhakamala Śi. 11. 14. (7) Hard-hearted, cruel. –ṭhaḥ (1) N. of Paṇdu, father of the five Pāṇḍavas. (2) Old age. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch jaraṭha (wie eben) Uṇ. 1, 100, Sch. 1) adj. a) “hinfällig, alt, bejahrt” H. an. 3, 175. BHĀG. P. 6, 1, 25. 9, 6, 41. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 170. ati- SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 125, 1. — b) “hart” H. 1387. H. an. = karkaśa und kaṭhina MED. ṭh. 13. — c) “gelblich” (die Farbe der “alten” Blätter) MED. — 2) m. “Alter” VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — Vgl. jaṭhara. jaraṭha 1) a) Spr. 808. BHĀG. P. 11, 23, 25. — b) fehlerhaft für jaṭhara SĀH. D. 103, 22. Spr. 814, v. l. (Th. 2, S. 330). VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 102. — c) VIŚVA a. a. O. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 jaraṭha jaraṭha (vb. jṛ10), adj. Old, Bhāg. P. 6, 1, 25. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 jaraṭha a. old, aged; hard, solid, strong. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 jaraṭha tri° jṝ–bā° aṭha . 1 karkaśe kaṭhine 2 pāṇḍunṛpe pu° medi° . 3 jīrṇe tri° hema° 4 jarāyāṁ viśvaḥ . nīrandhrāstanumālikhantu jaraṭhacchedānalagranthayaḥ sā° da° . ayamati jaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ māghaḥ . 5 pariṇate ca . jaraṭhakamalakandacchedagaurairmayūkhaiḥ māghaḥ . |
तमाल – tamāla | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899tamāla m. “dark-barked (but white-blossomed)” Xanthochymus Pictorius
12837 &c. m. a sort of black Khadira tree m. Crataeva Roxburghii m. tobacco, Sikṣāp. m. sectarial mark on the forehead (made with the juice of the Tamāla fruit) m. a sword tamāla m. n. (g. “ardharcādi”) the bark of the bamboo tamāla n. = “-patra” tamāla n. Crataeva Roxburghii tamāla n. = “tāmra-vallī” tamāla &c., Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch tamāla Uṇ. 1, 117. m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. AK. 3, 6, 4, 33. 1) m. N. eines Baumes mit überaus “dunkler Rinde, Xanthochymus pictorius Roxb.” (die Blüthe ist weisslich) AK. 2, 4, 2, 48. TRIK. 3,3, 395. H. 1146. an. 3, 653. MED. l. 96. MBH. 1, 7585. 3, 935. 11574. 13, 6369. HARIV. 12837. R. 3, 21, 14. 18. 39, 22. -phalabhakṣiṇaḥ 4, 37, 28. SUŚR. 1, 145, 7. 2, 485, 13. RAGH. 13, 15. 49. PAÑCAT. 80, 5. BHĀG. P. 1, 9, 33. 4, 6, 14. 8, 2, 11. haragalagaralatamālasamaprabha (sattva) PAÑCAT. 63, 7. tamālanīla BHĀG. P. 3, 13, 32. tamālabhāsurabhīṣaṇe – naktaṁcarīmukhe KATHĀS. 25, 238. khacaddantāvalīḍhatamālaṁ mṛtyorivānanam 26, 142. tamālālinīlaiḥ — abdanāgaiḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 17. tamāladalanīlatamaṁ tamisram GĪT. 11, 12. BURN. Intr. 178. piṣṭatamālavarṇakanibha MṚCCH. 91, 10. Nach den Lexicographen auch N. anderer Pflanzen: = varuṇa TRIK. H. an. MED. = kṛṣṇakhadira ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — 2) m. n. “Bambusrinde” BHAR. zu AK. 3, 6, 4, 33. ŚKDR. — 3) n. = pattraka = tamālapattra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) m. “Sectenzeichen auf der Stirn” (wohl daher, weil hierzu unter Anderm auch der Saft der “Tamāla-Frucht” verwendet wurde) TRIK. H. an. MED. — 5) m. “Schwert” TRIK. MED. — 6) f. ī N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = tāmravallī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. NIGH. PR. — b) “Phyllanthus emblica” NIGH. PR. — c) = varuṇa RĀJAN. — Das Wort steht mit tamas in etym. Zusammenhange. — Vgl. khatamāla. tamāla Sp. 254, Z. 6 ist das Beispiel KATHĀS. 26, 142 zu streichen; vgl. unter 1. lih mit ava am Ende. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 tamāla tamāla, i. e. tam + a + āla, m. The name of a dark-coloured tree, Xanthochymus pictorius Roxb., Rām. 3, 21, 14. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 tamāla m. N. of a tree. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 tamāla tam-āla, m. N. of a dark-coloured tree: -pattra, n. leaf of the Tamāla tree. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 tamāla pu° tama–kālan . svanāmakhyāte vṛkṣabhede amaraḥ . tamālo madhuro balyo vṛṣyaśca śiśiro guruḥ . kaphapittatṛṣādāhaśramaśrāntiharaśca saḥ rājani° . tatpatrākṛtitvāt 2 tilake 3 khaḍgabhede 4 varuṇavṛkṣe ca medi° . 5 kṛṣṇakhadire śabdaca° 6 vaṁśatvaci bharataḥ . 7 patrake (tejapāta) rājani° . yattattālatamālaśālasaralavyālolavallīlatā gaṅgāstavaḥ anantatānekatamālatālam tenopamīyeta tamālanīlam māghaḥ . ekākinyapi yāmi satvaramataḥ srotastamālā kulam sā° da° . tamāladale tu paryuṣitatvadoṣo nāsti yathoktaṁ ā° ta° yoginītantre vilvapatraṁ ca māghyañca tamālāmalakīdalam . kahlāraṁ tulasī caiva padmakaṁ munipuṣpakam . etat paryuṣitaṁ na syāt yaccānyat kalikātmakam . svārthe ka . tamālaka tatrārthe vaṁśatvaci ca tamālavṛkṣe pu° na° śabdaratnā° . |
दर्शन – darśana | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899darśana mf (“ī”) n. showing.
darśana ifc. seeing, looking at (see “tulya-, deva-, sama-“.) mf (“ī”) n. “knowing”, see “dharma-” mf (“ī”) n. exhibiting, teaching darśana n. seeing, observing, looking, noticing, observation, perception &c. darśana n. ocular perception darśana n. the eye-sight, vi, 17 darśana n. inspection, examination 1, 328 5460 darśana n. visiting darśana n. audience, meeting (with gen. ; instr. with or without “saha” ; in comp. ) darśana n. experiencing darśana n. foreseeing darśana n. contemplating darśana n. apprehension, judgement &c. darśana n. opinion darśana n. intention (cf. “pāpa-“) darśana n. view, doctrine, philosophical system (6 in number, viz. [Pūrva-] Mīmāṁsā by by ; Nyāya by Gotama by Kaṇāda Sāṁkhya by ; Yoga by &c. darśana n. the eye darśana n. the becoming visible or known, presence darśana n. iv &c. darśana n. appearance (before the judge) darśana n. the being mentioned (in any authoritative text) śr. i, xxvi darśana n. a vision, dream 1285 darśana ifc. appearance, aspect, semblance ( ii, 3; xii, 18 and 44) mf (“ī”) n. colour mf (“ī”) n. showing (cf. “danta-“) mf (“ī”) n. a sacrifice darśana mf (“ī”) n. = “dharma” darśana mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. Durgā 10238 mf (“ī”) n. N. of an insect darśana mf (“ī”) n. cf. “a-, su-“. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 darśana a. [dṛś-lyuṭ] (1) Seeing, looking at, (at the end of comp.); deva-, dharma-, &c. (2) Showing, exhibiting. (3) Demonstrating, teaching. –naṁ (1) Looking at, seeing, observing; R. 3. 41. (2) Knowing, understanding, perceiving, foreseeing; R. 8. 72. (3) Sight, vision; ciṁtājaḍaṁ darśanaṁ S. 4. 5. (4) The eye. (5) Inspection, examination. (6) Showing, displaying, exhibition. (7) Becoming visible. (8) Visiting, paying a visit, a visit; devadarśanaṁ. (9) (Hence) Going into the presence of, audience; mārīcaste darśanaṁ vitarati S. 7; rājadarśanaṁ me kāraya &c. (10) Colour, aspect, appearance, semblance; Bg. 11. 10; R. 3. 57. (11) Appearance, producing (in court); Ms. 8. 158, 160. (12) A vision, dream. (13) Discernment, understanding, intellect. (14) Judgment, apprehension. (15) Religious knowledge. (16) A doctrine or theory prescribed in a system. (17) A system of philosophy; as in sarvadarśanasaṁgraha. (18) A mirror. (19) Virtue, moral merit. (20) Opinion. (21) Intention. (22) Demonstration. (23) A sacrifice. — Comp. –īpsu a. anxious to see. –ujjvalā the great white jasmine. –pathaḥ the range of sight or vision, horizon; mama darśanapathamavatīrṇaḥ S. 3 ‘crossed my sight’. –pratibhūḥ, –prātibhāvyaṁ a bail or surety for appearance. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch darśana (von darś) 1) adj. “sehend, blickend” P. 5, 2, 6. Am Ende eines comp.: tulya-, sama- s. u. dd. Ww. deva- “die Götter sehend” so v. a. “besuchend, mit ihnen verkehrend”, Beiw. Nārada’s MBH. 13, 3203. 3254. BHĀG. P. 2, 8, 1 (BURN.: “doue de la vue divine).” maithilīdarśanīnām (v. l. -darśinīnām) – aṅganānām “hinschauend nach” RAGH. 11, 93. dharma- “sehend, kennend” MBH. 13, 3254. bhāgavatadharma- BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11 (BURN.: “lehrend).” Mit caus. Bed. “zeigend, angebend, lehrend”: hetubhirmokṣadarśanaiḥ MBH. 1, 583 (vgl. mokṣadarśibhiḥ 522). (śāstram) parokṣārthasya darśanam (v. l. darśakam) HIT. Pr. 9. darśanī als Beiw. der Durgā HARIV. 10238 viell. “Wegweiserin, Führerin” (vgl. darśayitar). — 2) n. proparox. a) “das Sehen, Erblicken, Wahrnehmen; das Sichtbarwerden oder -sein, zum-Vorschein Kommen”: paśuṁ na naṣṭamiva darśanāya viṣṇāpvaṁ dadathurviśvakāya ṚV. 1, 116, 23. darśanena śravaṇena matyā vijñānenedaṁ sarvaṁ viditam ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 4, 5. dūrācchravaṇāni darśanāni cāsya bhavanti “Wahrnehmungen durch das Auge” SUŚR. 2, 158, 10. yantreṇotpīḍito doṣo nihanyādāśu darśanam “Sehkraft” 343, 4. etacchrutvā vacastasya pratyakṣamiva darśanam MBH. 13, 961. adya taṁ draṣṭumicchāvaḥ putraṁ paścimadarśanam DAŚ. 2, 25. na tvekaḥ ko ‘pi tāvatkṛtakanakapurīdarśano labhyate sma “der die goldene Stadt gesehen hätte” KATHĀS. 24, 232. durlabhadarśanā “die man schwer zu Gesicht bekommt” R. 1, 17, 23. darśanenaiva bhavatīnām (obj.) puraskṛto ‘smi ŚĀK. 18, 18. mṛgasya (subj.) prathamadarśanadine HIT. 20, 18. pravṛttāvupalabdhāyāṁ tasyāḥ saṁpātidarśanāt “durch das Erblicken, das Zusammentreffen mit” S. RAGH. 12, 60. tapasvidarśanocite pradeśe “zum Empfange der Einsiedler” ŚĀK. 61, 13. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 43. samājotsava- “das Sehen, Besuchen von Gesellschaften und Festen” YĀJÑ. 1, 84. puṇya- “das Besuchen heiliger Orte” ŚKDR. yayuḥ svāmikumārasya darśane dakṣiṇāpatham “zu sehen” so v. a. “zu verehren” KATHĀS. 3, 8. — duḥsvapna- ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 5, 5. R. 5, 27, 8. MĀRK. P. 31, 22. ā nakṣatradarśanāt ĀŚV. GṚHY. 3, 7. ārkadarśanāt M. 2, 101. ārtavadarśane 4, 40. abhradarśane 104. ā pūyadarśanāt SUŚR. 1, 15, 9. vyādhi- 82, 14. sirāṇāṁ darśanaṁ lalāṭe 118, 3. aniṣṭadarśanaṁ jātam HIT. 9, 7. bhāryādarśane “wenn die Frau sichtbar ist, in Gegenwart der Frau” YĀJÑ. 1, 131. vikreturdarśanāt “dadurch, dass der Verkäufer zum Vorschein kommt, offenbar wird” 2, 170. nityādityadarśanodakasecanena dūṣiteyaṁ bhūmiḥ “durch das beständige Sichtbarsein, Daraufscheinen der Sonne” MṚCCH. 47, 5. brahma- MBH. 13, 4104. BHĀG. P. 1, 2, 24. 3, 33. ko ‘yaṁ mama darśane sthitaḥ MBH. 4, 235. tatsarvathā dūre pariharaṇīyamasya darśanam PRAB. 46, 6. DHŪRTAS. 70, 13. saṁprāpto darśanaṁ me R. 1, 47, 22. punarna darśanamupaiti puruṣasya SĀṁKHYAK. 61. darśanamāyāti VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 12. yadā vrajeddarśanamastameti vā 9, 36. āhūta iva me śīghraṁ darśanaṁ yāti cetasi BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 34. dehi sundari darśanaṁ mama “zeige dich mir” GĪT. 3, 9. tato ‘ntaḥ prabhuṇā tena skandena mama darśanam. dattam KATHĀS. 7, 9. anyedyuratha bhūpena sa bahirdattadarśanaḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 63. mārīcaste darśanaṁ vitarati “gewährt dir seinen Anblick, ist bereit dich zu empfangen” ŚĀK. 108, 18. dakṣiṇādhipatinā saha darśanaṁ saṁjātam “fand eine Zusammenkunft statt” VET. 35, 11. 28, 15. tasya rājakumārasya padmāvatyā (ohne saha!) darśanaṁ saṁjātam 10, 20. pratyahaṁ darśanaṁ karoti “sieht ihn, besucht ihn jeden Tag” 2, 8. tataḥ saṁdhivigrahakeṇa sahānusarai rājño darśanaṁ kāritam “wurde eine Zusammenkunft mit – veranstaltet” 20, 6. “das Erscheinen vor Gericht”: yo yasya pratibhūstiṣṭheddarśanāyeha mānavaḥ M. 8, 158. darśanaprātibhāvya 160. -pratibhū YĀJÑ. 2, 54. 53. rājā rahasi dūṣyaṁ hi darśanāyopamantrayet KĀM. NĪTIS. 6, 11. “das Vorkommen” (in einem System oder Buch), “das Erwahntsein”, namentl. in kanonischen Büchern: tathā hi darśanam VEDĀNTASŪTRA 1, 25. KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 1, 8. 19. 2, 9. 15. svādhyāyadarśanāt 26, 7, 58. LĀṬY. 6, 1, 4. 11. 14. 9, 6, 19. śāstradarśanāt “nach der Art, wie in den Ś. davon gesprochen wird, den heiligen Vorschriften gemäss” MBH. 14, 2700; vgl. śāstrato dṛṣṭvā R. 1, 13, 7. śāstradṛṣṭamāha MĀLAV. 9, 13. — “das Besehen, Besichtigen, in- Augenschein-Nehmen”: balānāṁ darśanaṁ kṛtvā YĀJÑ. 1, 328. HARIV. 5460. “das Sehen” so v. a. “Erfahren, Theilhaftwerden”: apunarbhava- BHĀG. P. 1, 8, 25. “das Sehen im Geiste, Voraussehen”: vācyadarśanāt RAGH. 8, 71. “das Beschauen mit dem Geiste, Prüfen, Untersuchen”: kārya- M. 8, 9. 23. “das Auffassen einer Sache, Urtheilen”: na hi svābhiprāyeṇa me darśanam ŚĀK. 34, 8. “das Einsehen, Erkennen, Verstehen, Einsicht, Erkenntniss, Verständniss”: atīndriyeṣvapyupapannadarśano babhūva bhāveṣu RAGH. 3, 41. samyagdarśanasaṁpannaḥ karmabhirna nibadhyate. darśanena vihīnastu saṁsāraṁ pratipadyate M. 6, 74. tattvajñānārtha- BHAG. 13, 11. yogenātmadarśanam YĀJÑ. 1, 8. ayuktibuddhirguṇadoṣadarśane R. 3, 37, 23. na hi buddhiguṇenaiva suhṛdāmarthadarśanam MĀLAV. 64. parārthanyāyavādeṣu kāṇo ‘pyamlānadarśanaḥ VID. 65. alpa- adj. “wenig Einsicht habend” HIḌ. 1, 45. “das Einsehen” so v. a. “Anerkennen”: pravṛttiṣvaghadarśanam YĀJÑ. 3, 158. vedaprāmāṇya- MĀRK. P. 15, 43. “Ansicht, Meinung”: mantripariṣado ‘pyetadeva darśanam MĀLAV. 70, 7. vidyāścatasra evaitā iti no gurudarśanam KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 6. “Absicht”: saśarīro divaṁ yāyāmiti me darśanam R. 1, 58, 18. pāpadarśanā “Böses beabsichtigend” R. GORR. 2, 9, 38; vgl. pāpadarśinī R. Schl. 2, 35, 25. 73, 5. R. GORR. 2, 6, 13. 8, 37. Nach den Lexicogrr. darśana = īkṣaṇa AK. 3, 3, 31. H. 577. = upalabdhi TRIK. 3, 3, 243. H. an. 3, 382. MED. n. 73. = buddhi H. an. MED. — b) am Ende eines adj. comp. (f. ā) “Aussehen, Schein”: divyakānana- N. 12, 44. vimānopama- MBH. 7, 6440. caṇḍāla- R. 1, 58, 16. 4, 2, 8. anartho ‘rthadarśanaḥ MBH. 10, 554. saumya- M. 2, 47. anekādbhuta- BHAG. 11, 10. adbhuta- KATHĀS. 14, 76. cāru- MBH. 3, 2707. R. 5, 14, 65. cārusarvāṅga- N. 12, 18. valgu- AK. 3, 4, 33. unmatta- N. 2, 3. ugra- SUND. 2, 24. vikṛta- HIḌ. 3, 3. rudra- R. 2, 31, 29. ghora- 1, 1, 54. HIḌ. 2, 5. bhīma- RAGH. 3, 57. Viell. hierher zu ziehen darśana = varṇa “Farbe” TRIK. — c) “Erscheinung im Schlafe, Traumgesicht”, = svapna H. an. MED. dadarśa darśane rājā devaṁ nārāyaṇam HARIV. 1285. — d) “Anschauungsweise, Lehre, Doctrin”, = śāstra TRIK. H. an. MED. vratānāṁ dhāraṇaṁ tulyaṁ darśanaṁ na samaṁ tayoḥ (yogasāṁkhyayoḥ) MBH. 12, 11045. fg. yenaivāsau (bhagavān) na tuṣyeta manye taddarśanaṁ khilam BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 8. nānādarśanaiḥ 8, 14, 10. PRAB. 61, 11. sugata- 52, 14. naiyāyika- 85, 8. “sechs philosophische Systeme” (s. u. tarka, tārkika) VET. 29,7. KULĀRṆAVAT. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 91,a,1. — e) = dharma H. an. MED. “virtue, moral merite” WILS. — f) “Auge” TRIK. H. 575. H. an. MED. kupitasya munestasya lalāṭātsvedavindavaḥ. apatandarśanādevamadhastāttīkṣṇavarcasaḥ.. SUŚR. 2, 296, 4. cintājaḍaṁ darśanam ŚĀK. 81. paśyāmi yogāñjanaśuddhadarśanaḥ PRAB. 53, 9. — g) “Spiegel” (vgl. ādarśa) TRIK. H. an. MED. MEGH. 59, v. l. für darpaṇa. — h) “Opfer” AJAYAP. im ŚKDR. — i) (vom caus.) “das Zeigen” DHŪRTAS. 87, 3; vgl. danta-. — 3) f. ī “ein best. Insect” (tailakīṭa) NIGH. PR. — Vgl. a-, tulya-, sama-, su-. darśana 2) a) sādhūnāṁ darśanam so v. a. “das Zusammenkommen mit Guten” Spr. 5220. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 darśana darśana, i. e. dṛś + ana, I. adj. 1. Looking on, Ragh. 11, 93, v. r. 2. Knowing, MBh. 13, 3254. 3. Teaching, MBh. 1, 583. II. n. 1. Seeing, Suśr. 2, 158, 10. āditya-, Exposure to the sun, Mṛcch. 47, 5. 2. Sight, MBh. 13, 961; Śāk. 18, 18; a vision, Rām. 5, 27, 8; a dream, Hariv. 1285. 3. Adoration, Kathās. 3, 8. 4. Appearance, Man. 2, 101; with the vbs. i and yā, To become visible, Bhāg. P. 1, 6, 34; with dā, To show one’s self, Gīt. 3, 9. 5. Review, Yājñ. 1, 328; inspection, Man. 8, 9. 6. Knowledge, Man. 6, 74. 7. Opinion, Kām. Nītis. 2, 6. 8. Precept, MBh. 14, 2700. 9. Doctrine, Bhāg. P. 1, 5, 8. 10. A philosophical system, Lass. 29, 7. 11. Intention, Rām. 1, 58, 18. 12. An eye, Śāk. d. 81. 13. A mirror, Megh. 59, v. r. 14. Showing, Lass. 87, 3. 15. Producing, Yājñ. 2, 170. 16. abl. darśanāt, From, Ragh. 12, 60. III. f. nī, Epithet of Durgā, Hariv. 10238. — Comp. a-, I. n. 1. not seeing, Rām. 5, 53, 6. 2. neglect, Man. 10, 43. 3. disappearance, Rām. 3, 50, 11; with gam, to disappear, Pañc. 137, 21; with nī, to cause to disappear, Rām. 5, 22, 2. II. adj. invisible, Arj. 8, 28. acchidra-, i. e. a-chidra-, adj., f. nā, faultless, MBh. 6, 384. adbhuta-, adj. wonderfully handsome, Nal. 12, 6. an-ati-. n. not seeing too often, Daśak. in Chr. 180, 5. ātmadarśana, i. e. ātman-, n. seeing one’s self, Yājñ. 3, 157. tulya-, adj. indifferent, Bhāg. P. 1, 5, 24. dāra-, n. interview with a woman, Cāṇ. 22, in Berl. Monatsb. dus-, adj. 1. difficult to be seen, Bhāg. P. 3, 13, 34. 2. disgusting, Suśr. 1, 260, 1. dūra-, adj. hardly to be seen, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 8. pāra-, adj. seeing the opposite bank or shore, Bhāg. P. 9, 4, 58. puṇya-, adj. f. nā, of beautiful aspect, beautiful. bhāla-, n. red lead. su-, I. adj. handsome. II. m. 1. The discus of Viṣṇu. 2. a vulture. 3. Mount Meru. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 darśana f. ī (–°) = darśaka; n. seeing, looking, observing; sight, view, vision; appearance, (also in court), occurrence; apparition, dream; visit, meeting with (gen., instr. ±saha or –°); trying, examining, understanding; judgment, opinion, knowledge, doctrine; showing, eye. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 darśana darśana, a. (ī) -°, seeing, looking at; knowing; showing, teaching; n. 1. with active meaning: seeing, looking at, beholding; sight of meeting with, visiting, attendance at (-° or g.); adoration (of g.); eyesight; review of (g.); inspection, investigation of (-°); foreseeing (-°); perception, understanding, insight; recognition of (-°); opinion, intention; doctrine, philosophical system; 2. with ps. meaning: becoming or being visible, appearance, mention (esp. in a standard work); apparition, vision; 3. with cs. meaning: showing; with concrete meaning: showing; with concrete meaning: eye; it is often -° a. having a — appearance, looking –; -ṁ dā, show oneself. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 darśana na° dṛśa–bhāvakaraṇādau lyuṭ . 1 netre 2 svapne 3 buddhau 4 dharme 5 darpaṇe 6 śāstre medini° 7 ijyāyām ajayapā° 8 varṇe trikāṇḍa° 9 nibhālane jaṭādha° . dṛśyate yathārthatayā jñāyate padārthonena karaṇe lyuṭ . adhyātmāvedake 10 śāstrabhede tāni ca nāstikavauddhajainavaiṣṇavāstikādimatabhedena nānāvidhāni . tāni ca sarvadarśanasaṁgrahe tattanmatapradarśanāvasare darśitāni . tatrāstikadarśanāni ṣaṭ tatra gautamena nyāyadarśanaṁ, kaṇādena vaiśeṣikaṁ, kapilena sāṅkhyaṁ, patañjalinā yogadarśanaṁ, jaimininā pūrvamīmāṁsāvyāsena vedāntadarśanam praṇītam . tacca vedāntadarśanaṁ vyāsapraṇītamekamapi bahubhirvidvadbhiḥ dvaitādvaitaviśiṣṭādvaitaśuddhādvaitaprabhedena nānāvidhaṁ yathā buddhasyaikasyopadeśakatve’pi vineyānāṁ buddhivaicitryāt svasvabuddhyanumāripadārthakalpanayā yogācāramā dhyamikādibhedā upaja tāḥ . evaṁ vedāntasyāpi ṣaḍdarśanāni me’ṅgāni pādau kukṣiḥ karau śiraḥ . teṣu bhedantu yaḥ kuryānmadaṅgacchedako hi saḥ . etānyeva kulasyāpi ṣaḍa ṅgāni bhavanti hi . tasmānmadātmakaṁ kaulamahaṁ kaulātmakaḥ piye! tantraśāstram . padārthabhedadarśane phalabhedo yathā nanda uvāca . yeṣāñca darśane! puṇyaṁ pāpañca yasya darśane . tatsarvaṁ vada sarveśa! śretuṁ kautūhalaṁ hi me . śrī bhagavān uvāca . subrāhmaṇānāṁ tīrthānāṁ vaiṣṇavānāñca darśane . devatāpratimādarśāt tīrthasvāyī bhavennaraḥ . sūryasya darśane bhaktyā satīnāṁ darśane tathā . sannyāsināṁ yatī nāñca tathaiva brahmacāriṇām . bhaktyā gavāñca vahnīnāṁ gurūṇāñca viśeṣataḥ . gajendrāṇāñca siṁhānāṁ śvetāśvānāṁ tathaiva ca . śūkānāñca pikānāñca khañjanānāṁ tathaitra ca . haṁsānāñca mayūrāṇāṁ cāsānāṁ śaṅkhapakṣiṇām . vatsaprayuktadhenūnāmaśvatthānāṁ tathaiva ca . patiputravatīmāñca narāṇāṁ tīrthayāyinām . pradīpānāṁ suvarṇānāṁ maṇīnāñca viśeṣataḥ . muktānāṁ hīrakāṇāñca māṇikyānāṁ mahāśaya! . tulasīśuklapuṣpāṇāṁ darśanaṁ pāpanāśanam . phalāni śukladhānyāni ghṛtaṁ dadhi madhūni ca . pūrṇakumbhañca lājāṁśca rājendraṁ darpaṇaṁ jalam . mālāñca śuklapuṣpāṇāṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . gorocanāñca karpūraṁ rajatañca sarovaram . puṣpodyānaṁ puṣpitañca dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . devāśritaṁ devadhaṭaṁ sugandhipavanaṁ tathā . śaṅkhañca dundubhiṁ dṛṣṭvā sadyaḥ puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . śuklapakṣasya candrasya pīyūṣaṁ candanaṁ tathā . kastūrīṁ kuṅkumaṁ dṛṣṭvā nanda . puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . patākāmakṣayavaṭa taruṁ devotthitaṁ śubham . devālayaṁ devakhātaṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . śuktiṁ prabālaṁ rajataṁ sphāṭikaṁ kuśamlakabh . gaṅgāmṛdaṁ kuśaṁ tāmraṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . purāṇa pustakaṁ śuddhaṁ savījaṁ viṣṇuyantrakam . snigdhadūrvākṣataṁ ratnaṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . tapasvinaṁ siddhamantraṁ samudraṁ kṛṣṇamārakam . yajñaṁ mahotsavaṁ dṛṣṭvā supuṇyaṁ labhate naraḥ . gobhūtraṁ gemayaṁ dugdhaṁ godhūliṁ goṣṭha gospadam . pakvaśasyānvitaṁ kṣetraṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . rucirāṁ padminīṁ śyāmāṁ nyagrovaparimaṇḍalām . suveśikāṁ suvasanāṁ divyabhūṣaṇabhūṣitām . veśyāṁ kṣemaṅkarīṁ gandhaṁ sadūrvākṣatataṇḍulam . siddhānnaṁ paramānnañca dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labheddhruvam . kārtikyāṁ pūrṇimāyāñca ṇadhikāpratimāṁ śubhām . saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . hiṅgulāyāṁ tathāṣṭamyāmiṣe māsi site śubhe . śrīdurgāpra tamāṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . śivarātrau ca kāśyāñca viśvanāthasya darśanam . kṛtvopavāsaṁ pūjāñca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . janmāṣṭamīdine bhakto dṛṣṭvā māṁ vindhyamādhayam . praṇamya pūjāṁ kṛtvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam upovya vrajabhūmau . ca bhāṇḍīre mālatīvane . saṁpūjya rādhāṁ māṁ caiva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . pauṣe māsi śuklarātrau yatra tatra sthale naraḥ . padmāyāḥ pratimāṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . saptajanma bhavettasya putraḥ pautro dhaneśvaraḥ . upoṣyaikādaśīṁ srātvā prabhāte dvādaśīdine . dvaṣṭvā kāśyāmannapūrṇākaroti janmakhaṇḍanam . dattvā viṣṇupade piṇḍaṁ viṣṇuṁ yaśca vilokayet . pitṝṇāṁ svātmanaścaiva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . prayāge muṇḍanaṁ kṛtvā yaśca pitṝn pratarvayet . upovya naimipāraṇye karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . ṣṭapoṣapra puṣkare snātvā kiṁ vā vadarikāśrame . saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā māmeva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . siddhāṁ kṛtvā ca vadarīṁ bhuṅkte vadarikāśrame . dṛṣṭvā matpratiṣāṁ nanda! karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . dolāyamānaṁ govindaṁ dṛṣṭvā vṛndāvane ca mām . dṛṣṭvā sapūjya natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . bhādre dṛṣṭvā ca mañcasthaṁ māmeva madhusūdanam . saṁpūjya natvā bhaktaśca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . rathasthañca jagannāthaṁ yo drakṣyati kalau naraḥ . saṁpūjya bhaktyā natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . uttarāyaṇasaṁkrāntyāṁ prayāge snānamācaret . saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā māmeva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . kārtikyāṁ pūrṇimāyāñca dṛṣṭvā matpratimāṁ śubhām . upoṣya pūjāṁ kṛtvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . candrabhāgāsamīpe ca mādhyāñca māṁ namet śanaiḥ . rādhayā saha māṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . rāmeśvaraṁ setubandhe āṣāḍhapūrṇimādine . upoṣya dṛṣṭvā saṁpūjya karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . dīnanāthaṁ dinakaraṁ lolārke cottarāyaṇe . upoṣya dṛṣṭvā maṁpūjya karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . ṛṣikoṣṭhe suvasane kalaviṅke sugahvare . visyandake rājakoṣṭhe nandake puṣpabhadrake . pārvatīpratimāṁ dṛṣṭvā kārtikeyaṁ gaṇeśvaram . nandinaṁ śaṅkaraṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . trikūṭe maṇibhadre ca paścimodadhisannidhau . samupoṣya dadhi prāśya māṁ dṛṣṭvā muktimāpnuyāt brahma° ve° janma° kha° . śakunabhedadarśane phalabhedaḥ śakunaśabde dṛśyam . |
दुर् – dur | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dur f. (only “duras” acc. nom., and “duras”. pl.) = “dvār”, a door (cf. 2.
“dura”). dur in comp. for “dus” (p.488), denoting “bad” or “difficult” &c.; “duriṣṭha”, (superl.) very bad or difficult or wicked; n. great crime or wickedness Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 dur ind. (A prefix substituted for dus before words beginning with vowels or soft consonants in the sense of ‘bad’, ‘hard or difficult to do a certain thing’; for compounds with dus as first member see dus s. v.). — Comp. –akṣa a. 1. weak-eyed. –2. evil-eyed. ( –kṣaḥ) 1. a loaded or false die. –2. dishonest gambling. –atikrama a. 1. difficult to be overcome or conquered, unconquerable; sbabhāvo duratikramaḥ ‘nature cannot be changed’; svajātirduratikramā Pt. 1. –2. insurmountable. –3. inevitable. ( –maḥ) an epithet of Viṣṇu. –atyaya a. 1. difficult to be overcome; R. 11. 88. –2. hard to be attained or fathomed. –adṛṣṭaṁ illluck, misfortune. –adhiga, –adhigama a. 1. hard to reach or attain, unattainable; Pt. 1. 330. –2. insurmountable. –3. hard to be studied or understood; Ki. 5. 18. –adhiṣṭhita a. badly performed, managed, or executed. ( –taṁ) improper stay at a place. –adhīta a. badly learnt or read. –adhyaya a. 1. difficult of attainment. –2. hard to be studied. –adhyavasāyaḥ a foolish undertaking. –adhvaḥ a bad road. –aṁta a. 1. whose end is difficult to be reached, endless, infinite; saṁkarṣaṇāya sūkṣmāya duraṁtāyāṁtakāya ca Bhāg. –2. ending ill or in misery, unhappy; aho duraṁtā balavadvirodhitā Ki. 1. 23; nṛtyati yuvatijanena samaṁ sakhi virahijanasya duraṁte (vasaṁte) Gīt. 1. –3. hard to be understood or known. –4. insurmountable. –aṁtaka a. = duraṁta q. v. ( –kaḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –anvaya a. 1. difficult to be passed along. –2. hard to be carried out or followed. –3. difficult to be attained or understood. ( –yaḥ) 1. a wrong conclusion, one wrongly inferred from given premisses. –2. (in gram.) a false agreement. –abhigraha a. difficult to be caught. –abhimānin a. vain-glorious, disagreeably proud. –avagama a. incomprehensible. –avagraha a. 1. difficult to be restrained or subjugated. –2. disagreeable. –avabodha a. unintelligible. –avastha a. ill off, badly or poorly circumstanced. –avasthā a wretched or miserable state. –vāpa a. difficult to be gained or fulfilled; S. 1. –avekṣitaṁ an improper look. –ākṛti a. ugly, misshaped. –ākraṁda a. crying bitterly or miserably; Pt. 4. 29. –ākrama a. 1. invincible, unconquerable. –2. difficult to be passed, –ākramaṇaṁ 1. unfair attack. –2. difficult approach. –āgamaḥ improper or illegal acquisition. –āgrahaḥ foolish obstinacy, headstrongness, pertinacity. –ācara a. 1. hard to be performed. –2. incurable (as a disease). –ācāra a. 1. ill-conducted, badly behaved. –2. following bad practices, wicked, depraved; Bg. 9. 30. ( –raḥ) bad practice, ill-conduct, wickedness. –ātmatā vileness, baseness, wickedness. –ātman a. evil-natured, low, wicked, vile, base, mean; Pt. 1. 39. (–m.) a rascal, villain, scoundrel. –ādhara a. difficult to be withstood or overpowered, riresistible, –ādharṣa a. 1. hard to be approached or assailed, unassailable. — 2. not to be attacked with impunity. (3) haughty. (–rṣaḥ) white mustard. –ādhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva. — ādhī a Ved. malignant, thinking ill of –ānama a. difficult to bend or draw; R. 11. 38. –āpa a. 1. difficult to be obtained; śriyā durāpaḥ kathamīpsito bhavet S. 3. 14; R. 1. 72; 6. 62. –2. difficult to be approached; Pt. 1. 67. –3. hard to be overcome. –ābādha a. hard to be molested. (–dhaḥ) N. of Śiva. –ārādhya a. difficult to be propitiated, hard to be won over or conciliated; Pt. 1. 38. –āruha a. difficult to be mounted. (–haḥ) 1. the Bilva tree. –2. the cocoa-nut tree. –3. the date tree. –āroha a. difficult of ascent. (–haḥ) 1. the cocoa-nut tree. –2. the palm tree. –3. the date tree. –ālāpaḥ 1. a curse, imprecation. –2. foul or abusive language. — āloka a. 1. difficult to be seen or perceived. –2. painfully bright, dazzling; durālokaḥ sa samare nidāghāṁvararatnavat K. P. 10. (–kaḥ) dazzling splendour. –āvāra a 1. difficult to be covered. –2. difficult to be restrained, shut in, kept back or stopped. –āśaya a. 1. evil-minded, wicked, malicious. –2. having a bad place of rest. –āśā 1. a bad or wicked desire. –2. hoping against hope. –āsada a. 1. difficult to be approached or overtaken, unassailable, unconquerable; R. 3. 66, 8. 4; Mv. 2. 5, 4. 15. –2. difficult to be found or met with. –3. unequalled, unparalleled. –4. hard to be borne, insupportable. (–daḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –ita a. 1. difficult. (2) sinful. (–taṁ) 1. a bad course, evil, sin; daridrāṇāṁ dainyaṁ duritamatha durvāsanahṛdāṁ drutaṁ dūrīkurvana G. L. 2; R. 8. 2; Amaru. 2; Mv. 3. 43. –2. a difficulty, danger. –3. a calamity, evil; U. 4. 3. –itiḥ f. Ved. 1. a bad course. –2. difficulty. –iṣṭaṁ 1. a curse, imprecation. –2. a spell or sacrificial rite performed to injure another person. –īśaḥ a bad lord or master. –īṣaṇā, –eṣaṇā 1. a curse, an imprecation. –2. an evil eye. –ukta a. harshly uttered; Pt. 1. 89. –uktaṁ, –uktiḥ f. offensive speech, reproach, abuse, censure. –uccheda a. difficult to be destroyed. –uttara a. unanswerable. –udāhara a. difficult to be pronounced or composed; anujjhitārthasaṁbaṁdhaḥ prabaṁdho durudāharaḥ Śi. 2. 73. –udvaha a. burdensome, unbearable. –ūha a. abstruse. –eva a. Ved. 1. having evil ways. –2. irresistible, unassailable. (–vaḥ) a wicked person. –oṣas a. Ved. slow, lazy. –ga a. 1. difficult of access, inaccessible, impervious, impassable. –2. unattainable. –3. incomprehensible. (–gaḥ, –gaṁ) 1. a difficult or narrow passage through a wood or over a stream, mountain &c., a defile, narrow pass. –2. a citadel, fortress, castle. –3. rough ground. –4. difficulty, adversity, calamity, distress, danger; nistārayati durgācca Ms. 3. 98, 11. 43; Bg. 18. 58. (–gaḥ) 1. bdellium. — 2. the Supreme Being. –3. N. of an Asura slain by Durgā (thus receiving her name from him). -adhyakṣaḥ, -patiḥ, -pālaḥ the commandant or governor of a castle. -karman n. fortification. -kāraka a. making difficult. (–kaḥ) the birch tree. -ghnī N. of Durgā. -taraṇī an epithet of Sāvitrī. – mārgaḥ a defile, gorge. -laṁghanaṁ surmounting difficulties. (–naḥ) a camel. -saṁcaraḥ 1. a difficult passage as to a fort &c., a bridge &c. over a defile. -vyasanaṁ a defect or weak point in a fortress. (–rgā) an epithet of Pārvatī, wife of Śiva. –gata a. 1. unfortunate, in bad circumstances; Bk, 18. 10. –2. indigent, poor. –3. distressed, in trouble. –gatatā illluck, poverty, misery; Pt. 1. 265. –gatiḥ f. 1. misfortune, poverty, want, trouble, indigence; Bg. 6. 40. –2. a difficult situation or path. –3. hell. –gaṁdha a. ill-smelling. (–dhaḥ) 1. bad odour, stink. –2. any ill-smelling substance. –3. an onion. –4. the mango tree. (–dhaṁ) sochal salt. –gaṁdhi, –gaṁdhin a. ill-smelling. –gama a. 1. impassable, inaccessible, impervious; kāminīkāyakāṁtāre kucaparvatadurgame Bh. 1. 86; Śi. 12. 49. –2. unattainable, difficult of attainment. –3. hard to be understood. –gāḍha, –gādha, –gāhya a. difficult to be fathomed or investigated, unfathomable. –graha a. 1. difficult to be gained or accomplished. –2. difficult to be conquered or subjugated; R. 17. 52. –3. hard to be understood. (–haḥ) a cramp, spasm. –ghaṭa a. 1. difficult. –2. impossible. –ghaṇa a. closely packed together, very compact. –ghoṣaḥ 1. a harsh cry. –2. a bear. –jana a. 1. wicked, bad, vile. –2. slanderous, malicious, mischievous; U. 1. 6. (–naḥ) a bad or wicked person, a malicious or mischievous man, villain; durjanaḥ priyavādī ca naitadviśvāsakāraṇaṁ Chāṇ. 24, 25; śāmyetpratyapakāreṇa nopakāreṇa durjanaḥ Ku. 2. 40. (durjanāyate Den. A. to become wicked; Pt. 1. 5.). — jaya a. invincible. (–yaḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. –jara a. 1. ever youthful. –2. hard (as food), indigestible. –3. difficult to be enjoyed. –jāta a. 1. unhappy, wretched. –2. badtempered, bad, wicked. –3. false, not genuine. (–taṁ) 1. a misfortune, calamity, difficulty; tvaṁ tāvaddurjāte metyaṁtasāhāyyakāriṇī bhava M. 3; durjātabaṁdhuḥ R. 13. 72 ‘a friend in need or adversity.’ –2. impropriety. –jāti a. 1. bad-natured, vile, wicked; Amaru. 96. –2. outcast. (–tiḥ f.) misfortune, ill-condition. –jñāna, –jñeya a. difficult to be known, incomprebensible. (–yaḥ) N. of Śiva. –ṇayaḥ, — nayaḥ, –nītiḥ 1. bad conduct. –2. impropriety. –3. injustice. –ṇāman, — nāman a. having a bad name. –ṇīta a. 1. ill-behaved. –2. impolitic. –3. forward. (–taṁ) misconduct. –dama, –damana, –damya a. difficult to be subdued, untamable, indomitable. –darśa a. 1. difficult to be seen. –2. dazzling; Bg. 11. 52. –darśana a. ugly, ill-looking; Māl. 2. 8. –daśā a misfortune, calamity. –dāṁta a. 1. hard to be tamed or subdued, untamable; Śi. 12. 22. –2. intractable, proud, insolent; durdāṁtānāṁ damanavidhayaḥ kṣatriyeṣvāyataṁte Mv. 3. 34. (–taḥ) 1. a calf. –2. a strife, quarrel. –3. N. of Śiva. –dina a. cloudy, rainy. (–naṁ) 1. a bad day in general. –2. a rainy or cloudy day, stormy or rainy weather; unnamatyakāladurdinaṁ Mk. 5; Ku. 6. 43; Mv. 4. 57. –3. a shower (of any. thing); R. 4. 41, 82, 5. 47; U. 5. 5. –4. thick darkness. (durdināyate Den. A to become cloudy.) –divasaḥ a dark or rainy day; Pt. 1. 173. — durūṭaḥ an unbeliever. –dṛśa a. disagreeable to the sight, disgusting. — dṛṣṭa a. ill-judged or seen, wrongly decided. –daivaṁ ill-luck, misfortune. –dyūta an unfair game. –drumaḥ onion. –dhara a. 1. irresistible, difficult to be stopped. –2. difficult to be borne or suffered; durdhareṇa madanena sādyate Ghaṭ. 11; Ms. 7. 28. –3. difficult to be accomplished. (–raḥ) quicksilver. –dharṣa a. 1. inviolable, unassailable. –2. inaccessible; H. Pr. 5. –3. fearful, dreadful. –4. haughty. –dhī a. stupid, silly. –nāmakaḥ piles. –nāman m. f. a cockle. (–n.) piles. –nigraha a. irrepressible, unruly; mano durnigrahaṁ calaṁ Bg. 6. 35. –nimita a. carelessly put or placed on the ground; pade pade durnimite galaṁtī R. 7. 10. –nimittaṁ 1. a badomen; R. 14. 50. –2. a bad pretext. –nivāra, — nivārya a. difficult to be checked or warded off, irresistible, invincible. — nītaṁ misconduct, bad policy, demerit, misbehaviour; Pt. 2. 20; H. 1. 39. –2. ill-luck. –nītiḥ f. mal-administration; Bv. 4. 36. –bala a. 1. weak, feeble. –2. enfeebled, spiritless; U. 1. 24. –3. thin, lean, emaciated; U. 3. –4. small, scanty, little; R. 5. 12. –bāla a. baldheaded. –2. void of prepuce. –3. having crooked hair. –buddhi a. 1. silly, foolish, stupid. –2. perverse, evilminded, wicked; Bg. 1. 23. –bodha a. unintelligible, unfathomable, inscrutable; nisargadurbodhamabodhaviklavāḥ kva bhūpatīnāṁ caritaṁ kva jaṁtavaḥ Ki. 1. 6. –bhaga a. 1. unfortunate, unlucky; Pt. 1. 415. –2. not possessed of good features, ill-looking. — bhagā 1. a wife disliked by her husband. –2. an ill-tempered woman, a shrew. –bhara a. insupportable, burdensome. –bhāgya a. unfortunate, unlucky. (–gyaṁ) ill-luck. –bhāvanā 1. an evil thought. –2. a bad tendency. –bhikṣaṁ 1. scarcity of provisions, dearth, famine; Y. 2. 147; Ms. 8. 22; H. 1. 73; Pt. 2. –2. want in general. –bhida, –bheda, –bhedya a. firm. –bhṛtyaḥ a bad servant. –bhrātṛ m. a bad brother. –mati a. 1. silly, stupid, foolish, ignorant. –2. wicked, evilminded; Ms. 11. 30. –mada a. drunken, ferocious, maddened, infatuated. –manas a. troubled in mind, discouraged, disspirited, sad, melancholy. [durmanāyate Den. A. to be troubled in mind, be sad, meditate sorrowfully, to be disconsolate, become vexed or fretted; Māl. 3]. –manuṣyaḥ a bad or wicked man. — maṁtraḥ, –maṁtritaṁ, –maṁtraṇā evil advice, bad counsel; Pt. 1. 169. –maraṁ a hard or difficult death. –maraṇaṁ violent or unnatural death. –marṣa a. 1. unbearable. –2. obstinate, hostile. –marṣaṇaḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –maryāda a. immodest, wicked. –mallikā, –mallī a minor drama, comedy, farce; S. D. 553. –mitraḥ 1. a bad friend. –2. an enemy. — mukha a. 1. having a bad face, hideous, ugly; Bh. 1. 90. –2. foul- mouthed, abusive, scurrilous; Bh. 2. 69. (–khaḥ) 1. a horse. –2. N. of Śiva. –mūlya a. highly priced, dear. –medhas a. silly, foolish, dull-headed, dull; Pt. 1. (–m.) a dunce, dull-headed man, blockhead; graṁthānadhītya vyākartumiti durmedhaso’pyalaṁ Śi. 2. 26. –yaśas n. ill-repute, dishonour. –yogaḥ 1. a bad or clumsy contrivance. –2. a bad combination. –yodha, –yodhana a. invincible, unconquerable. (–naḥ) the eldest of the 101 sons of Dhṛtarāṣṭra and Gāndhārī [From his early years he conceived a deep hatred for his cousins the Pāṇḍavas, but particularly Bhīma, and made every effort he could to compass their destruction. When his father proposed to make Yudhiṣṭhira heirapparent, Duryodhana did not like the idea, as his father was the reigning sovereign, and prevailed upon his blind father to send the Pāṇḍavas away into exile. Vāraṇavata was fixed upon as their abode, and under pretext of constructing a palatial building for their residence, Duryodhana caused a palace to be built mostly of lac, resin and other combustible materials, thereby hoping to see them alldestroyed when they should enter it. But the Pāṇḍavas were forewarned and they safely escaped. They then lived at Indraprastha, and Yudhiṣṭhira performed the Rājasūya sacrifice with great pomp and splendour. This event further excited the anger and jealousy of Duryodhana who was already vexed to find that his plot for burning them up had signally failed, and he induced his father to invite the Pāṇḍavas to Hastināpura to play with dice (of which Yudhiṣṭhira was particularly fond). In that gambling-match, Duryodhana, who was ably assisted by his maternal uncle Śakuni, won from Yudhiṣṭhira everything that he staked, till the infatuated gambler staked himself, his brothers, and Draupadī herself, all of whom shared the same fate. Yudhiṣṭhira, as a condition of the wager, was forced to go to the forest with his wife and brothers, and to remain there for twelve years and to pass one additional year incognito. But even this period, long as it was, expired, and after their return from exile both the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas made great preparations for the inevitable struggle and the great Bhāratī war commenced. It lasted for eighteen days during which all the Kauravas, with most of their allies, were slain. It was on the last day of the war that Bhīma fought a duel with Duryodhana and smashed his thigh with his club.]. –yoni a. of a low birth. –lakṣya a. difficult to be seen or perceived, hardly visible. –labha a. 1. difficult to be attained, or accomplished; R. 1. 67, 17. 70; Ku. 4. 40, 5. 46, 61. –2. difficult to be found or met with, scarce, rare; śuddhāṁtadurlabhaṁ S. 1. 16. –3. best, excellent, eminent. –4. dear, beloved. –5. costly. –lalita a. 1. spoilt by fondling, fondled too much, hard to please; hā madaṁkadurlalita Ve. 4; V. 2. 8; Māl. 9. –2. (hence) wayward, naughty, illbred, unruly; spṛhayāmi khalu durlalitāyāsmai S. 7 (–taṁ) waywardness, rudeness. –lekhyaṁ a forged document. –vaca a. 1. difficult to be described, indescribable. –2. not to be talked about. –3. speaking improperly, abusing. (–caṁ) abuse, censure, foul language. –vacas n. abuse, censure. –varṇa a. bad- coloured. (–rṇaṁ) 1. silver. –2. a kind of leprosy. –vasa a. difficult to be resided in. –vasatiḥ f. painful residence; R. 8. 94. –vaha a. heavy, difficult to be borne; U. 2. 10; Ku. 1. 11. –vāc a. speaking ill. (–f.) 1. evil words, abuse. –2. inelegant language or speech. –vācya a. 1. difficult to be spoken or uttered. –2. abusive, scurrilous. –3. harsh, cruel (as words). (–cyaṁ) 1. censure, abuse. –2. scandal, ill-repute. –vādaḥ slander, defamation, calumny. –vāra, –vāraṇa a. irresistible, unbearable; R. 14. 87; Ku. 2. 21. –vāsanā 1. evil propensity, wicked desire; Bv. 1. 86. –2. a chimera. –vāsas a. 1. ill-dressed. –2. naked. (–m.) N. of a very irascible saint or Ṛṣi, son of Atri and Anasūyā. (He was very hard to please, and he cursed many a male and female to suffer misery and degradation. His anger, like that of Jamadagni, has become almost proverbial). –vāhitaṁ a heavy burden. –vigāha, –vigāhya a. difficult to be penetrated or fathomed, unfathomable. –viciṁtya inconceivable, inscrutable –vidagdha 1. unskilled, raw, foolish, stupid, silly. –2. wholly ignorant. –3. foolishly puffed up, elated, vainly proud; vṛthāśastragrahaṇadurvidagdha Ve. 3; jñānalavadurvidagdhaṁ brahmāpi naraṁ na raṁjayati Bh. 2. 3. –vidya a. uneducated. –vidha a. 1. mean, base, low. –2. wicked, vile. –3. poor, indigent; vidadhāte rucigarvadurvidhaṁ N. 2. 23. –4. stupid, foolish, silly. –vinayaḥ misconduct, imprudence. –vinīta a. 1. (a) badly educated, ill-mannered, ill-behaved, wicked; śāsitari durvinītānāṁ S. 1. 25. (b) rude, naughty, mischievous. –2. stubborn, obstinate. (–taḥ) 1. a restive or untrained horse. –2. a wayward person, reprobate. –vipāka a. producing bad fruit; U. 1. 46. (–kaḥ) 1. bad result or consequence; U. 1. 40; Mv. 6. 7. –2. evil consequences of acts done either in this or in a former birth. –vibhāvya a. inconceivable. –vilasitaṁ a wayward act, rudeness, naughtiness. –vilāsaḥ a bad or evil turn of fate; U. 1. –viṣa a. illnatured, malignant. (–ṣaḥ) N. of Śiva. –viṣaha a. unbearable, intolerable, irresistible. (–haḥ) N. of Śiva –vṛtta a. 1. vile, wicked, ill- behaved. –2. roguish. (–ttaṁ) misconduct, illbehaviour. –vṛttiḥ f. 1. misconduct. –2. misery, want, distress. –3. fraud –vṛṣṭiḥ f. insufficient rain, drought. –veda a. difficult to be known or ascertained. –vyasanaṁ a fond pursuit or resolve; Mu. 3. –vyavahāraḥ a wrong judgment in law. — vrata a. not conforming to rules, disobedient. –hutaṁ a badly offered sacrifice. –hṛd a. wicked-hearted, ill-disposed, inimical. (–m.) an enemy. –hṛdaya a. evil-minded, evil-intentioned, wicked. –hṛṣīka a. having defective organs of sense. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch dur (= dvār) f. nur im acc. pl. duras (ein Mal duras) und an einer Stelle im nom. pl. erhaiten; “Thür”: duro ghṛtānyakṣaran ṚV. 1, 188, 5. vi duro mānuṣīrdeva āvaḥ 5, 45, 1. vrajasya 6, 62, 11. adreḥ 7, 79, 4. rāyaḥ 1, 68, 10 (5). avannavantārupa no duraścara 7, 46, 2. 1, 113, 4. 121, 4. 3, 21, 21. duro na vājaṁ śrutyā apā vṛdhi 2, 2, 7. Am Ende eines comp. dura in śatadura n. “ein mit hundert Thüren versehener” oder “verschlossener Ort”: atraye śatadureṣu gātuvid ṚV. 1, 51, 3. anarvā yacchatadurasya vedo ghnaṁ chiśnadevāṁ abhi varpasā bhūt 10, 99, 3. dur euphonische Veränderung von 2. duṣ am Anfange von compp. vor Vocalen und tönenden Consonanten. Wenn durasy hierher gehören sollte, dann wäre diese Form aus einem irregeleiteten Sprachgefühl entstanden. dur auch ṚV. 4, 4, 6. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 dur [1] f. door (only duras & duras). dur [2] (°–) = dus. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 dur dur, f. door. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 dur(s) avya° du–ruk suk vā . 1 duṣṭe 2 nindāyāṁ 3 niṣedhe 4 duḥkhe ca puruṣottamaḥ 5 īṣadarthe 6 kṛcchrārthe 7 kṛśe 8 asampattau 9 saṅkaṭe ca gaṇara° durjīvanaḥ durbalaḥ durdinam suduroradhikaraṇe pā° duṣkṛtam . kriyāyoge’syopasargatā upasargaśabde 1335 pṛ° dṛśyam . dur strī dṝ–kvip . dvāre durodyūtānyakṣaram ṛ° 1 . 188 . 5 yā duraḥ yajñagṛhadvāraḥ bhā° duro mānuṣī deva ā ca ṛ05 . 45 . 1 mānuṣīrmanuṣya sambandhinīrduraḥ dvāraḥ bhā0 |
धवल – dhavala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhavala mf (“ā”) n. (fr. 2. “dhāv”? cf. white, dazzling white &c.
mf (“ā”) n. handsome, beautiful dhavala m. white (the colour) dhavala m. a kind of dove dhavala m. an old or excellent bull dhavala m. a kind of camphor dhavala m. Anogeissus Latifolia dhavala m. (in music) N. of a Rāga dhavala m. N. of a man dhavala m. of one of the elephants of the quarters dhavala m. of a dog dhavala m. (“ā” and “ī”) f. a white cow dhavala mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. white hair (as a kind of disease) dhavala m. N. of a river dhavala n. white pepper dhavala n. a kind of metre (= “-lāṅka”) dhavala n. N. of a town Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 dhavala a. [dhavaṁ kaṁpaṁ lāti lā-ka; Tv.] (1) White; dhavalātapatra, dhavalagṛhaṁ, dhavalavastraṁ &c. (2) Handsome. (3) Clear, pure. –laḥ (1) The white colour. (2) An excellent bull. (3) China camphor (cīnakarpūra). (4) N. of a tree (dhava). –laṁ Whitepepper. –lā A woman with a white complexion. –lī A white cow; (dhavalā also). — Comp. –utpalaṁ the white water-lily (said to open at moonrise). –giriḥ N. of the highest peak of the Himālaya mountain. –gṛhaṁ a house whitened with chunam, a palace. –pakṣaḥ 1. a goose. –2. the bright half of a lunar month. –mṛttikā chalk. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch dhavala UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 108. 1) adj. f. ā a) “glänzend weiss” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 14, 85. TRIK. 3, 3, 396. H. 1393. an. 3, 656. MED. l. 99. sudhāśaṅkha- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 27,c,15. vasudhā kandaladhavalā BHARTṚ. 1, 43. kapāla 3, 61. ātapatra PAÑCAT. I, 48. mṛṇālanāladhavalā 52, 8. BHĀG. P. 1, 17, 2. 11, 2. 5, 25, 5. gokṣīradhārā- H. 57. jarādhavalakarṇa KATHĀS. 25, 15. harmyāgre – jyotsnayā dhavale 21, 6. PRAB. 73, 7. apāṅga RĀJA-TAR. 1, 208. 6, 302. sarṣapa AK. 2, 9, 18. – gṛha, -veśman “ein weiss angestrichenes Haus, eine fürstliche Wohnung, Palast” (vgl. saudha) PAÑCAT. 128, 18. 24. VET. 19, 13. CAURAP. 18. Statt dhavalāgṛhe VET. 17, 3 ist wohl dhavale gṛhe zu lesen. dhavalīkṛta CAUBAP. 23. Hängt wohl mit dhāv “abreiben, reinigen” zusammen. — b) “hübsch”, = sundara TRIK. H. an. MED. = sindura VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. a. a. O. — 2) m. a) “die weisse Farbe” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1393. — b) “ein alter Stier”, = mahokṣa H. an. = vṛṣaśreṣṭha MED. = śaṇṭha TRIK. — c) “eine Art Kampfer” (cīnakarpūra). — d) = dhava “Grislea tomentosa Roxb.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) N. pr. eines Diggaja R. 5, 3, 13. — f) N. eines Rāga, nach BHARATA des 8ten Sohnes des Hindolarāga, ŚKDR. nach dem SAṁGĪTAŚĀSTRA. — 3) f. “eine weisse Kuh”, dhavalā AK. 2, 9, 68. TRIK. H. 1266, Sch. MED. dhavalī H. an. — 4) f. ī a) “eine best. Krankheit” oder viell. einfach “das Weisswerden der Haare”: – vyādhivārddhakyahantā Verz. d. B. H. No. 1001. — b) N. pr. eines Flusses LIA. I, 49. 56, N. 1. — 5) n. a) “weisser Pfeffer” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) = dhavalāṅka “ein best. Metrum (4 Mal 18 Kürzen + 1 Länge”) COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 163 (XIV, 12). — Vgl. udayadhavala. dhavala 1) a) Z. 9 VET. 17, 3 die neuere Ausg. (13, 17) richtig dhavale gṛhe. — 2) g) N. pr. eines Mannes KATHĀS. 80, 7. WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 201 wohl fehlerhaft für devala. — 5) c) N. pr. einer Stadt KATHĀS. 56, 141. dhavala 1) -gṛha nach BÜHLER zu PAÑCAT. ed. Bomb. II & III, 27, 13 the upper story of a house, called so because it is painted white. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 dhavala dhav + ala (cf. 2. dhāv), adj., f. lā. 1. Dazzling white, Kathās. 25, 15. — Comp. ati-, adj. very white, Daśak. in Chr. 199, 6. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 dhavala (f. ā & ī) white; abstr. -tā f., -tva n. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 dhavala dhava-la, a. dazzling white; m. N.; n. N. of a city: -giri, m. Dolaghir, N. of a mountain (White Mountain); -gṛha, n. upper storey (so called because painted white); -tā, f., -tva, n. whiteness; -pakṣa, m. (white-winged) goose: -vihaṁgama, m. swan; -mu-kha, m. N.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 dhavala pu° dhāva–vṛṣā° kala bā° hrasvaḥ dhavaṁ kampaṁ lāti lāka vā . dhavalaḥ 1 sindūre 2 site . 3 mahokṣe cātha dhavalī 4 saurabhyāṁ samudāhṛtā viśvaḥ . saurabhyāmeva gaurā° ṅīṣ . śvetabarṇayukte tri° amaraḥ atrārthe striyāṁ ṭāp . nītā yena niśā śaśāṅkadhavalā ujjalada° . 5 nirmale tri° trikā° . kriyate dhavalaḥ khalūccakairdhavalaireva sitetarairadhaḥ māghaḥ . 6 cavavṛkṣe 7 cīnakarpūre strī . 8 śvetamarice na° rājani° . 9 rāgabhede sa ca bharatamate hindolarāgasya aṣṭamaḥ putraḥ saṅgītaśāstraṇ . 10 svagabhede dhavalaḥ pāṇḍuruddiṣṭo raktapittaharo himaḥ . rase pāke ca madhuraḥ saṁgrāhī vātaśāntikṛt bhāvapra° . 11 chandobhede tallakṣaṇaṁ yathā dvijavara! gaṇayugasanagaṇana gaṇayugalakaṁ vimalabalayamapi ca kalaya sakalajanasukham . phaṇipativaramaṇitamamalasiṁha hitaṁ vimalakavisuhṛdiva lalitamiti bhuvi viditam . |
धवलिमन् – dhavaliman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhavaliman m. white colour, whiteness
Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 dhavaliman m. (1) Whiteness, white colour. (2) Paleness; iyaṁ bhūtirnāṁge priyavirahajanmā dhavalimā Subhāṣ. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch dhavaliman (wie eben) m. “die weisse Farbe” ŚIŚ. 4, 65. dhavaliman KUVALAJ. 35,b. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 dhavaliman dhavaliman, i. e. dhavala + iman, m. White (the colour), Śiś. 4, 65. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 dhavaliman m. whiteness, white colour. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 dhavaliman dhaval-i-man, m. whiteness; brilliance; pureness. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 dhavaliman pu° dhavalasya bhāvaḥ imanic . śvetatve adhigavadhavali śūlapāṇerabhikhyām māghaḥ . |
धावल्य – dhāvalya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhāvalya n. (fr. “dhavala”) whiteness
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch dhāvalya (von dhavala) n. “die weisse Farbe” Schol. zu ŚIŚ. 4, 65. keśa- KULL. zu M. 6, 2. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 dhāvalya n. the white colour. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 dhāvalya dhāval-ya, n. whiteness. |
धूसर – dhūsara | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhūsara mf (“ā”) n. ( “dhvaṁs”, or “dhvas”; cf. “dhvasira”) dust-
coloured, grey &c. (“-tva”, n. dhūsara m. grey (the colour) dhūsara m. an ass dhūsara m. an oilman dhūsara m. a pigeon dhūsara m. a partic. plant (sweet vetch dhūsara mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a kind of shrub dhūsara mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a Kiṁ-narī. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 dhūsara a. [dhū-sara kicca na ṣatvam Tv.] Of a dusty, greyish, or dusky-white colour, grey; śaśī divasadhūsaraḥ Bh. 2. 56; Ku. 4. 4, 46; R. 5. 42; 16. 17; Śi. 17. 41. –raḥ (1) The grey colour. (2) A donkey. (3) A camel. (4) A pigeon. (5) An oilman. (6) Anything of a grey colour. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch dhūsara (von dhvas; vgl. dhvasira) UṆĀDIS. 3, 73. P. 8, 3, 59, Vārtt. 1. 1) adj. f. ā (“bestaubt) staubfarbig, grau” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1393. an. 3, 566. MED. r. 171. SUŚR. 2, 335, 20. śaśī divasadhūsaraḥ BHARTṚ. 2, 46. rajo- RAGH. 5, 42. 16, 17. KUMĀRAS. 4, 4. 46. 5, 55. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 13. 44. Ind. St. 2, 258. -kṣāmavapus KATHĀS. 2, 51. dhūsarāṅga 14, 39. 21, 40. 73. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 88. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 9, 6. 19, 3, 2. fälschlich dhūṣara HIT. 81, 15. atidhūsara H. 1327. pari- RAGH. 11, 60. dūrādhva- KATHĀS. 2, 33. nom. abstr. dhūṣaratva n. DHŪRTAS. 72, 11. AUFRECHT betont das Wort auf der letzten Silbe; das Suffix heisst aber saran und ist in diesem Falle kit, so dass der Ton auf die erste Silbe zu setzen wäre, wenn nicht eben aus dem Vorangehendem auch noch cit zu ergänzen ist. Im Vārtt. zu P. 8,3, 59 wird das Suffix sarak genannt (also mit nicht mehr wirkendem na), wonach das Wort zu paroxytoniren wäre. — 2) m. a) “Esel” H. an. MED. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “Kameel.” — c) “Taube” RĀJAN. — d) “Oelmüller” H. 917. — 3) f. ā N. einer kleinen Staude, = pāṇḍuraphalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. VĀRAH. BṚH. S. 76, 6. — 4) f. ī N. pr. einer Kiṁnarī MED. — Vgl. uṣṭradhūsarapucchikā, welches wohl richtiger zerlegt worden wäre in uṣṭra – dhū- + puccha. dhūsara 1) Spr. 3520. KATHĀS. 53, 2. 65, 162 (kapila-). 66, 8. 86, 58. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 dhūsara dhūsara, i. e. dhvaṁs + ara, I. adj., f. rā, Gray (like dust), Ragh. 5, 42. II. f. rā, A small shrub, Varāh. Bṛh. S. 76, 6. — Comp. krama-, adj. having become by degrees gray (like dust), Ragh. 16, 17. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 dhūsara a. dust-coloured, grey. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 dhūsara dhūs-ara, a. [dhvas] dust-coloured, grey (-tva, n. abst. N.): -ka, m. N. of a jackal. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 dhūsara puṁstrī dhū–sara kicca na ṣatvam . 1 gardabhe 2 uṣṭre 3 kapote rājani° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 4 tailakāre pu° hema° dhūsa–rak . 5 īṣatpāṇḍuvarṇe kṛṣṇaśvetavarṇe śuklapītavarṇe ca pu° 6 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . klāntaṁ rajodhūsaraketusainyam utkrāntavarṇakramadhūsarāṇām raghuḥ . kiraṇaparikṣayadhūsarapradoprām . lalāṭikācandanadhūsarālakā kumā° . 7 pāṇḍuraphalīkṣupe strī rājaniḥ ṭāp . 8 kinnarībhede strī medi° gaurā° ṅīṣ . |
धूसरिमन् – dhūsariman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhūsariman m. grey or dusty-white (the colour)
Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 dhūsariman m. grey colour. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 dhūsariman dhūsar-i-man, m. dust-colour. |
ध्वांतम् – dhvāṁtam | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
dhvāṁtam Darkness; dhvāṁtaṁ nīlanicolacāru sudṛśāṁ pratyaṁgamāliṁgati Gīt. 11; N. 19. 42; Śi. 4. 62. — Comp. –unmeṣaḥ, –vittaḥ a fire-fly. –śātravaḥ, –arātiḥ 1. the sun. –2. the moon. –3. fire. –4. the white colour. |
निर्जल – nirjala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nirjala “nir-jala” mf (“ā”) n. waterless, dry (m. or n. a dry country,
desert, waste mf (“ā”) n. not mixed with water (as buttermilk) nirjala “nir-jala” mf (“ā”) n. “-la-toyadābha” mfn. of the colour of a waterless cloud i.e. white, fair nirjala “nir-jala” mf (“ā”) n. “-lanmināya” Nom. ā. “-yate”, to be like a fish without water, Bhsm. nirjala “nir-jala” mf (“ā”) n. “-lākādaśī” f. the 11th day in the light half of the month Jyaiṣṭha (on which even the drinking of water is forbidden) Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nirjala (nis + jala) adj. f. ā “kein Wasser habend, wasserlos”; subst. “eine wasserlose Gegend” H. 953. deśa R. 2, 80, 12. vasudhā VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 108. sthāna RĀJA-TAR. 1, 126. pathin 4, 287. koṣaṁ ca janayedrājā nirjalebhyo yathā jalam MBH. 12, 4739. “nicht mit Wasser versetzt”, von Buttermilch AK. 2, 9, 53. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 nirjala a. waterless, s. such a land. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 nirjala tri° nirgataṁ jalaṁ yasmāt prā° ba° . jalaśūnye deśe koṣañca janayedrājā nirjalebhyo yathā jalam bhā° śā° 130 a° . |
पंगुल – paṁgula | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
paṁgula a. Lame, crippled. –laḥ A horse of silvery-white colour. |
पङ्गुल – paṅgula | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899paṅgula mfn. id.
paṅgula n. (?) lameness paṅgula m. a horse of a glassy or silvery white colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch paṅgula (von paṅgu) 1) adj. = paṅgu H. ś. 104. Ungenan (wie auch das vorangehende khañja) in der Bed. des abstr. SUŚR. 1, 360, 12. 2, 43, 15. — 2) m. “ein Pferd von der Farbe des weissen Glases” H. 1243. paṅgula vgl. pāṅgulya. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 paṅgula paṅgu + la, 1. adj. Lame. 2. Lameness, Suśr. 1, 360, 12. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 paṅgula pu° sitakādhābhahayabhede hema° . |
पद्म – padma | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899padma m. n. (2. or 3. “pad”?) a lotus (esp. the flower of the lotus-plant
Nelumbium Speciosum which closes towards evening; often confounded with the water-lily or Nymphaea Alba) &c. (ifc. f. “ā”) m. the form or figure of a lotus (a N. given by the Tāntrikas to the 6 divisions of the upper part of the body called Cakras q.v.) m. a partic. mark or mole on the human body m. red or coloured marks on the face or trunk of an elephant m. a partic. part of a column or pillar m. a kind of temple m. an army arrayed in the form of a lotus m. a partic. posture of the body in religious meditation, Vedānt. (cf. “padmāsana”) m. a kind of coitus m. one of the 9 treasures of Kubera (also personified) m. one of the 8 treasures connected with the magical art called Padminī &c. m. a partic. high number (1000 millions or billions) &c. m. a partic. constellation m. N. of a partic. cold hell m. a partic. fragrant substance (v.l. “-maka”) m. the root of Nelumbium Speciosum m. a species of bdellium m. lead padma m. a species of plant padma m. an elephant padma m. a species of serpent padma m. N. of Rāma (son of Daśa-ratha) padma m. of two serpent-demons &c. padma m. of one of the attendants of Skanda padma m. of a mythical Buddha 136 n. 1. padma m. (with Jainas) N. of the 9th Cakra-vartin in Bhārata and of one of the 9 white Balas padma m. N. of a king padma m. of a prince of Kaśmīra (founder of Padma-pura and of a temple; see “padma-svāmin”) padma m. of another man padma m. of a Brāhman padma m. of a mythical elephant (cf. “mahā-padma”) padma m. of a monkey padma m. of a mountain padma m. a species of plant (Clerodendrum Siphorantus or Hibiscus Mutabilis padma m. cloves padma m. the flower of Carthamus Tinctoria padma m. N. of the mother of Muni-suvrata (the 20th Arhat of the present Avasarpiṇī) padma m. of a female serpent-demon (= the goddess Manasā, wife of the sage Jarat-kāru; cf. “padma-priyā”) padma m. of a daughter of king Bṛihadratha and wife of Kalki padma mfn. lotus-hued, being of the colour of a lotus Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 padma a. [pad-man] Lotus-hued. –dmaṁ (1) A lotus (m. also in this sense); padmapatrasthitaṁ toyaṁ dhatte muktāphalaśriyaṁ. (2) A lotus-like ornament. (3) The form or figure of a lotus. (4) The root of a lotus. (5) The coloured marks on the trunk and face of an elephant. (6) An army arrayed in the form of a lotus. (7) A particular high number (one thousand billions). (8) Lead. (9) N. given by the Tāntrikas to the six divisions of the upper part of the body called Chakras. (10) A mark or mole on the human body. (11) A spot. (12) N. of a particular part of a column. –dmaḥ A kind of temple. (2) An elephant. (3) A species of serpent. (4) An epithet of Rāma. (5) One of the nine treasures of Kubera, see navanidhi. (6) A kind of coitus or mode of sexual enjoyment. –dmā (1) N. of Lakṣmī, the goddess of fortune, and wife of Viṣṇu; (taṁ) padmā padmātapatreṇabheje sāmrājyadīkṣitaṁ R. 4. 5. (2) Cloves. — Comp. –akṣa a. lotuseyed. ( –kṣaḥ) an epithet of Viṣṇu or the sun. ( –kṣaṁ) the seed of a lotus. –aṁtaraṁ –raḥ a lotus-leaf. –ākaraḥ 1. a large tank or pond abounding in lotuses. –2. a pond or pool of water in general. –3. a lotus-pool. –4. an assemblage of lotuses; Bh. 2. 73. –ālayaḥ an epithet of Brahman, the creator. ( –yā) 1. an epithet of Lakṣmī. –2. cloves. –āsanaṁ 1. a lotus-seat; Ku. 7. 86. –2. a particular posture in religious meditation; ūrumūle vāmapādaṁ punastu dakṣiṇaṁ padaṁ . vāmorau sthāpayitvā tu padmāsanamiti smṛtaṁ .. (–naḥ) 1. an epithet of Brahman, the creator. –2. of Śiva. –3. of the, sun. –āhvaṁ cloves. –udbhavaḥ an epithet of Brahman. –kara, –hasta a. holding a lotus. ( –raḥ, –staḥ) 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu. –2. a lotus-like hand. –3. N. of the sun. ( –rā, –stā) N. of Lakṣmī. –karṇikā 1. the pericarp of a lotus. –2. the central part of an army arrayed in the form of a lotus. –kalikā a lotus-bud, an unblown lotus. –kāṣṭhaṁ a fragrant wood used in medicine. –keśaraḥ –raṁ the filament of a lotus. –kośaḥ, –koṣaḥ 1. the calyx of a lotus. –2. a position of the fingers resembling the calyx of a lotus. –khaṁḍaṁ, –ṣaṁḍaṁ a multitude of lotuses. –gaṁdha, gaṁdhi a. lotus-scented, or as fragrant as or smelling like a lotus. ( –dhaṁ, –gaṁdhi n.) = padmakāṣṭha q. v. –garbhaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. –2. of Viṣṇu. –3. of Śiva. –4. the sun. –5. the inside or middle of a lotus. –guṇā, –gṛhā 1. an epithet of Lakṣmī, the goddess of wealth. –2. cloves. –jaḥ, –jāta, –bhavaḥ, –bhūḥ, –yoniḥ, saṁbhavaḥ epithets of Brahman, the lotusborn god. –taṁtuḥ the fibrous stalk of a lotus. –nābhaḥ, –bhiḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu. –nālaṁ a lotus-stalk. –nidhiḥ a treasure of the value of a Padma. –pāṇiḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. –2. N. of Buddha. –3. N. of the sun. –4. of Viṣṇu. –puṣpaḥ the Karṇikāra plant. –baṁdhaḥ a kind of artificial composition in which the words are arranged in the form of a lotus-flower; see K. P. 9 ad. loc. –baṁdhuḥ 1. the sun. –2. a bee. –bījaṁ the seed of a lotus. –bhāsaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –mālinī the goddess of wealth. –rāgaḥ, –gaṁ a ruby; R. 13. 53; 17. 23; Ku. 3. 53. –rūpā an epithet of the goddess of wealth. –rekhā a figure on the palm of the hand (of the form of a lotus- flower) which indicates the acquisition of great wealth. –lāṁchanaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. –2. Kubera. –3. the sun. –4. a king. ( –nā) 1. an epithet of Lakṣmī1, the goddess of wealth. –2. or of Sarasvatī, the goddess of learning. –3. N. of Tārā. –vāsā an epithet of Lakṣmī. –samāsanaḥ an epithet of Brahman. –snuṣā 1. an epithet of Gaṅgā. –2. of Lakṣmī. –3. of Durgā. –hāsaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch padma UṆĀDIS. 1, 139. m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. TRIK. 3, 5, 11. 1) m. n. “Wasserrose, Nelumbium speciosum”, aber nicht die Pflanze selbst, sondern nur “die einzelne Blume” (die sich gegen Abend schliesst), AK.1,2,3,38. TRIK.1,2,36.3,3,299. H. 1160. an.2,328. MED. m. 18. HALĀY.3,58.5,72. SIDDH. K. 251,a,4. babhau varṣāmbuviklinnaṁ padmamāgalitaṁ yathā MBH. 1, 5412. 12, 6779. fg. bhagavannābhyāṁ padmaḥ samutthitaḥ 3, 15820. 13, 4555. padmabodhanamudyantaṁ paśya sūryam R. 2, 89, 2 (97, 2 GORR.). Spr. 835. 928. tvaṁ padma iva vātena saṁnataḥ priyadarśanā R. GORR. 2, 8, 40. bhruvormadhye sahajaḥ pipluruttamaḥ. padmasaṁkāśaḥ N. 17, 5. SUŚR. 1, 41, 9. 103, 12. 223, 14. RAGH. 3, 17. padmātapatra 4, 5. -reṇu ŚĀK. 171. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 19, 5. 45, 87. 59, 9. KATHĀS. 32, 56. 40, 103. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 110. SĀH. D. 21, 5. -locanā INDR. 2, 31. -nibhekṣaṇa N. 12, 21. lohitapadmanetra MBH. 5, 1815. mukha- gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56, Sch. phullapadmānanaśrī VID. 285. caraṇau -tāmrau ŚĀK. 69. bhavatpādapadmarajaḥpavitrīkṛtatanu PAÑCAT. 191, 14. salalitanartitavāmapādapadmā SĀH. D. 56, 8. Spr. 691. sapadmāṁ padminīmiva MBH. 6, 4613. R. 5, 18, 6 (lies sapadmāmiva). 4, 44, 86. 87. HARIV. 13147. RAGH. 13, 51. KATHĀS. 21, 10. sapadmayā – śriyā R. GORR. 2, 13, 8. śrīrapadmeva (so v. a. “ohne Schmuck”) 3, 40, 19. MṚCCH. 82, 20. bhraṣṭapadmāmiva śriyam R. 6, 10, 19. Vgl. nīla-. — 2) “die Form –, die Figur einer Wasserrose”: padmasvastikasaṁsthitaiḥ (gṛhameghaiḥ) R. 5, 10, 4. MĀRK. P. 50, 92; vgl. MEGH. 78. Der Oberkörper des Menschen wird von den Tāntrika in 6 Padma oder Cakra eingetheilt; s. u. cakra 4. — 3) Bez. “bestimmter Male auf dem menschlichen Körper”: daśapadmavān (rāmaḥ) R. 5, 32, 11. “rothe Flecken auf der Haut des Elephanten”, m. n. TRIK. 3, 3, 299. MED. n. H. 1229.H. an. HALĀY. 2, 64. Vgl. padmaka, padmin. — 4) Bez. “eines bestimmten Theils einer Säule”: stambhaṁ vibhajya navadhā vahanaṁ bhāgo ghaṭo ‘sya bhāgo ‘nyaḥ. padmaṁ tathottaroṣṭhaṁ kuryādbhāgena bhāgena.. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 52, 29. — 5) m. Bez. “einer best. Tempelform” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 55, 17. padmaḥ padmākṛtiḥ 23. — 6) “ein in der Form einer Wasserrose aufgestelltes Heer”, m. n. TRIK. 3, 3, 299. MED. m. H. an. yataśca bhayamāśaṅkettato vistārayedbalam. padmena caiva vyūhena niviśeta sadā svayam.. M. 7, 188. paścārghe tasya padmasya garbhavyūhaḥ sudurbhidaḥ. śūcīpadmasya garbhastho gūḍho vyūḍhaḥ kṛtaḥ punaḥ.. MBH. 7, 3110. — 7) Bez. “einer bestimmten Stellung des Körpers bei religiösen Vertiefungen” (vgl. padmāsana): karacaraṇādisaṁsthānaviśeṣalakṣaṇāni padmasvastikādīni āsanāni VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 130. — 8) m. Bez. “einer best. Art des coitus”: hastābhyāṁ ca samāliṅgya nārī padmāsanopari. ramedgāḍhaṁ samākṛṣya bandho ‘yaṁ padmasaṁjñakaḥ.. RATIMAÑJARĪ im ŚKDR. — 9) “eine der Schätze des” Kuvera, m. AK.1,1,1,67. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 184,a,5 v. u. H. 193. H. an. m. n. TRIK.1,1,79.3,3,299. MED. nidhipravaramukhyai ca śaṅkhapadmau dhaneśvarau. sarvānnidhīnpragṛhyātha upāstāṁ vai dhaneśvaram.. MBH. 2, 418. yuktaśca śaṅkhapadmābhyāṁ nidhīnāmadhipaḥ prabhuḥ HARIV. 2467. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 30 (zugleich N. pr. eines Nāga). atha tasya svapne padmanidhiḥ kṣapaṇakarūpī saṁdarśanaṁ gatvā provāca PAÑCAT. 235, 10. 11. śaṅkhapadmau nidhī citre (AUFRECHT vermuthet citrau) dṛṣṭvā duṣṭairvimucyata iti purāṇam UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 139. Was soll aber sein padmaḥ syānnidhiśaṅkhayoḥ, da padma doch nicht = śaṅkha ist? m. “einer der 8 Schätze, die zur Zauberkunst” Padmini “in Beziehung stehen”, MĀRK. P. 68, 5. 8. — 10) “eine best. grosse Zahl”, m. n. TRIK. 3, 3, 299. MED. m. H. an. “1000 Billionen” R. 6, 4, 58. ayutaṁ prayutaṁ caiva padmaṁ kharvamathārbudam. śaṅkhaṁ caiva mahāpadmam u. s. w. MBH. 2, 2143. koṭīsahasrāyutapadmasaṁkhyāḥ SUŚR. 2, 534, 8. MBH. 1, 3121. 3, 10514. 7, 2089. 13, 5212. 5216. 5222. R. 6, 2, 20. MĀRK. P. 47, 3. Vgl. SCHIEFNER im Bull. de l’Acad. Imp. des sc. V, 300. — 11) N. “einer best. Constellation” (= kamala) VARĀH. BṚH. 12, 14; vgl. BHAṬṬOTPALA zu LAGHUJ. 10, 5. — 12) N. einer kalten Hölle bei den Buddhisten BURN. Intr. 201. — 13) m. “eine best. Pflanze” HALĀY. 5, 26. m. n. = padmakāṣṭha “eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze” DHAR. im ŚKDR. “die Wurzel von Nelumbium speciosum” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “eine Art Bdellion”, s. u. guggulu. “einen best. wohlriechenden Stoff” bezeichnet das Wort in der folg. Stelle: tuṅgapadmavimiśreṇa candanena MBH. 1, 4954; vgl. padmaka neben tuṅga 12, 9346. — 14) m. n. “Blei” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 15) m. “Elephant” COLEBR. und LOIS. zu AK. 2, 8, 2, 3; vgl. padmin und weiter unten unter 23. — 16) m. “eine Schlangenart” SUŚR. 2, 265, 8. — 17) m. N. pr. eines Nāga (“Schlangendämons”) TRIK. 1, 2, 6. H. an. MED. MBH. 2, 360. 12, 13803. R. 5, 78, 9. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 30 (hier zugleich “einer der Schätze des” Kuvera). dvau ca padmau MBH. 1, 1555. 5, 3629. N. pr. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 84. — 18) m. N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2558. — 19) m. N. pr. des 9ten Cakravartin in Bhārata (bei den Gaina) H. 693. — 20) m. N. pr. eines der 9 weissen Bala (bei den Jaina H. 698. — 21) m. Bein. Rāma’s, des Sohnes des Daśaratha von der Kauśalyā, DHAR. im ŚKDR. ŚATR. 9, 94. — 22) N. pr. eines Fürsten MBH. 2, 332. von Kāśmira RĀJA-TAR. 4, 678. gründet Padmapura und errichtet einen Padmasvāmin 694. N. pr. eines Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 7, 1508. eines Brahmanen LALIT. 226. — 23) N. pr. eines mythischen Elephanten R. GORR. 1, 6, 26; vgl. mahāpadma. — 24) N. pr. eines Affen R. 6, 3, 19. — 25) m. N. pr. eines Berges VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 5. — 26) f. padmā a) “die Lotusfarbige” (vgl. MBH. 13, 509), Bein. der Śrī, der Göttin des Glückes und Gemahlin Viṣṇu’s, AK. 1, 1, 1, 22. H. 220. MED. HALĀY. 1, 31. M. 7, 11. MBH. 2, 2294. 4, 186. 12, 8353. 13, 507. 14, 1489. R. 1, 45, 43. 2, 70, 12. 79, 15. R. GORR. 2, 86, 19. RAGH. 4, 5. Vgl. padmaśrī. — b) N. zweier Pflanzen: “Clerodendrum Siphonanthus R. Br.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 8. MED. RATNAM. 37. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 377, 15. 2, 439, 5. “Hibiscus mutabilis Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 5, 11. MED. — c) “Gewürznelken” ŚKDR. nach AK. 2, 6, 3, 27, wo es heisst, dass die Synonyme von śrī Namen der “Gewürznelken” seien. — d) “die Blüthe von Carthamus tinctorius Lin.” RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — e) N. pr. der Mutter des Munisuvrata, des 20ten Arhant’s der gegenwärtigen Avasarpiṇī, H. 40. — f) N. pr. eines weiblichen Schlangendämons MED. (wo -pannagīṣu zu lesen ist), = manasā ŚKDR. WILS.; vgl. padmapriyā. — g) N. pr. einer Tochter des Königs Bṛhadratha und Gemahlin Kalki’s KALKI-P. 10 im ŚKDR. — 27) adj. “lotusfarbig”: trayo ‘syai varṇāḥ śuklaḥ padmaḥ suvarṇa iti ṢAḌV. BR. 4, 7. padma 1) m. Spr. 2591. LA. (II) 91, 15. — 3) “Mal –, Fleck von best. Gestalt”: masāragalvarkanibhaiścitraiḥ padmairalaṁkṛtaḥ (mṛgaḥ) R. 3, 48, 12. — 9) personificirt R. 7, 15, 16. 34. — 23) R. 7, 31, 36. — Vgl. mahā-. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 padma 1 I A serpent born to sage Kaśyapa of his wife Kadrū. (Śloka 10, Chapter 35, Ādi Parva). padma 2 II A King. This King shines in the court of Yama. (Śloka 39, Chapter 10, Sabhā Parva). padma 3 III A soldier of Subrahmaṇya. (Chapter 45, Śalya Parva). padma 4 IV A nidhi (treasure). This nidhi belongs to Kubera. (Śloka 39, Chapter 10, Sabhā Parva). Śaṅkhanidhi, Padmanidhi and a Puṣpakavimāna were presented to Kubera by Brahmā. (Uttara Rāmāyaṇa). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 padma padma (curtailed pad + mant), I. m. and n. 1. A lotus flower, MBh. 1, 5412. 2. Ornament, Rām. 6, 10, 19. 3. Moles or marks on the body, 5, 32, 11. 4. A spot, 3, 48, 12. 5. Coloured marks on the face and trunk of an elephant. 6. A lotus-like form of array, Man. 7, 188. 7. A particular sitting posture when absorbed in meditation, Vedāntas. in Chr. 217, 17. 8. One of Kuvera’s treasures, MBh. 2, 418. 9. A large number, 1000 billions, 2, 2143. 10. A certain fragrant plant. II. m. 1. A kind of snake, Suśr. 2, 265, 8. 2. The name of a Nāga. 3. A proper name. III. f. mā, 1. A name of Śrī, Man. 7, 11. 2. The name of two plants, Clerodendrum siphonanthus, and Hibiscus mutabilis. 3. A proper name. — Comp. abhi-, adj. 1. adorned with lotus-like spots. 2. beautiful in every part of the body, Johns. Sel. 46, 74. bhrātṛ-padma-vana, n. a group of lotus-like brothers. mahā-, I. m. 1. one of the Nāgas. 2. one of Kuvera’s treasures. 3. a Kiṁnara, or attendant on Kuvera. 4. a large number, one hundred thousand millions, MBh. 2, 2143. 5. the name of a lake, Rājat. 5, 68; 103. II. n. the white lotus. sa-, adj. provided with lotus flowers, Rām. 3, 52, 39. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 padma m. n. lotus, esp. the flower (which closes at evening), fig. an army arrayed in the form of a lotus or a cert. posture of the body in religious meditation; one of the treasures of Kubera, a cert. high number (1000 billions). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 padma pad-ma, m. n. lotus flower (which closes at night: nelumbium speciosum); lotus-shaped array; kind of sitting posture during religious absorption; one of the nine treasures of Kubera; 1000 billions; N. of a Nāga N.; ā, f. the Lotus-coloured, ep. of the goddess of fortune, Śrī. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 padma na° pada–man . 1 kamale 2 gajamukhādisthe vindasamudāye kamalākāreṇa sainyāderabhiniveśanarūpe 3 vyūhabhede 4 nidhibhede arvudamabja miti padmaparyāyābjanāmnoktāyāṁ 5 daśārvudasaṁkhyāyāṁ 6 tatsaṁkhyāteṣu 7 puṣkaramūle 8 sīsake dhātau 9 śarorasthe nāḍīcakrabhede ca medi° 10 padmakāṣṭhoṣadhau dharaṇiḥ . dehasthapadmāni ca cakratvena prasiddhāni tāni ca cakraśabde 2808 pṛ° darśitāni . kamale pu° na° amare sthitaṁ tatrāsya puṁstvamaprayuktadoṣayuktamityālaṅkārikāḥ . 11 dāśarathau 12nāgabhede pu° dharaṇiḥ . 13 jinacakravartibhede pu° hema° 14 rativandhabhede pu° hastābhyāñca samāliṅgya nārī padmāsanopari . ramedugāḍhaṁ samākṛṣya bandho’yaṁ padmasaṁjñakaḥ ratima° . |
परिपण – paripaṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899paripaṇa “pari-paṇa” m. n. ( “paṇ”) = “nīvī” (capital, stock ?)
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch paripaṇa (von 1. paṇ mit pari oder pari + paṇa) n. = nīvī AK. 2, 9, 80. 3, 4, 27, 214. H. 869 (m.). an. 2, 529. MED. v. 15. HALĀY. 5, 38. Wird durch “Kapital” erklärt; vgl. jedoch u. nīvī 2. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 paripaṇa pari-paṇa, n. playing for (-°); -pat-ana, n. flying about, hovering; -pantha-ka, m. (obstructor of one’s path), adversary, enemy; -pantha-ya, den. P. oppose, resist (ac.); -panthin, a. besetting one’s path; m. waylayer, opponent, enemy; -panthī-bhū, become the adversary of, oppose (g.); -pava-na, n. cleansing (of grain), winnowing flail; -paśavya, a. relating to the sacrificial animal; -pāka, m. becoming fully cooked; digestion; ripening; maturity; perfection; consequence, effect; fulness, fulfilment (of time): -tas, ab. in consequence of; -pācana, a. cooking fully; maturing; -pācayitṛ, a. id.; -pāṭala, a. very pale-red; -pāṭi, f. succession; -pāṭha, m. complete enumeration: in. (know) completely; -pāṇa, n. hiding-place; -pāṇḍiman, m. extreme whiteness; -pāṇḍu, a. very white or pale: -ra, a. very white; -pārśva, a. being at the side, close at hand: -vartin, a. remaining at one’s side, standing beside (g.); -pā-laka, a. protecting; maintaining; -pālana, n. protection; maintenance; nurture: ā, f. protection, nurture, ī-ya, fp. to be guarded; — maintained; -pālya, fp. to be protected; — maintained or observed; -piṅgī-kṛ, colour deep red-brown; -piñja, a. full of (in.); -piñj-ara, a. brownish-red, orange-coloured; -pi-pālayiṣā, f. desire to maintain; -pīḍana, n. squeezing out; injuring, prejudicing (-°); puṣṭa-tā, f. being nourished by, feeding on (-°); -pūti, f. complete purification; -pūra-ka, a. fulfilling; bestowing abundance; -pūr-aṇa, n. filling; completion; -pūrin, a. bestowing abundantly; -pūrṇa, pp. (1. pṛ) filled with (-°); -pūrṇendu, m. full moon; -pūrti, f. becoming full of (-°); completion; -pelava, a. very delicate, tiny; -pothaka,a. furthering, confirming; -poṣaṇīya, fp. to be cherished; -praśna, m. enquiry, after (-°); -prāpti, fp. obtainment; -prepsu, des. a. wishing to reach or obtain, seeking after, desiring (ac.); -plavā, a. running to and fro; m. fluctuation; -pluta, pp. (plu) overwhelmed; bathed (in tears: -°). |
पांडु – pāṁḍu | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
pāṁḍu a. Pale-white, whitish, pale, yellowish; vikalakaraṇaḥ pāṁḍucchāyaḥ śucā paridurbalaḥ U. 3. 22. –ḍuḥ (1) The pale-white or yellowish-white colour. (2) Jaundice. (3) A white elephant. (4) N. of the father of the Pāṇḍavas. [He was begotten by Vyāsa on Ambālika, one of the widows of Vichitravīrya. He was called Pāṇḍu, because he was born pale (pāṁḍu) by reason of his mother having become quite pale with fear when in private with the sage Vyāsa; (yasmātpāṁḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya mamiha . tasmādeva sutaste vai pāṁḍureva bhaviṣyati Mb.). He was prevented by a curse from having progeny himself; so he allowed his first wife Kuntī to make use of a charm she had acquired from Durvāsas for the birth of sons. She gave birth to Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhīma and Arjuna; and Mādri, his other wife, by the use of the same charm, gave birth to Nakula and Sahadeva. One day Pandu forgot the curse under which he was labouring, and made bold to embrace Mādri, but he fell immediately dead in her arms.] — Comp. –āmayaḥ jaundice. –kaṁbalaḥ 1. a white blanket. –2. a warm upper garment. –3. the housing of a royal elephant. –kaṁbalin m. 1. a carriage covered with a woollen blanket. –2. the housings of a royal elephant. –putraḥ a son of Pāṇḍu, any one of the five Pāṇḍavas. –pṛṣṭha a. ‘white-backed’, having no auspicious marks on the body, one from whom nothing great is to be expected. –bhūmaḥ a region full of chalky soil. –mṛttikā 1. white or pale soil. –2. the opal. –mṛd f. chalk. –rāgaḥ whiteness, pallor. –rogaḥ jaundice. –lekhaḥ a sketch made with chalk; a rough draft or sketch made on the ground, board &c.: pāṁḍulekhena phalake bhumau vā prathamaṁ likhaṁt . nyūnādhikaṁ tu saṁśodhya paścātpatre niveśayet .. Vyāsa. –śarkarā light-coloured gravel (pramehabheda) –śarmilā an epithet of Draupadī. –sopākaḥ N. of a mixed tribe; cāṁḍālātpāṁḍusopākastvaksāravyavahāravān Ms. 10. 37. |
पांडुकः – pāṁḍukaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
pāṁḍukaḥ (1) The yellowish-white colour. (2) Jaundice. (3) N. of Paṇḍu. |
पांडुरिमन् – pāṁḍuriman | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
pāṁḍuriman m. Paleness, white or pale colour. |
पाण्डु – pāṇḍu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍu mfn. (“paṇḍ”?) yellowish white, white, pale &c.
mfn. jaundiced pāṇḍu m. jaundice pāṇḍu m. pale or yellowish white colour pāṇḍu m. a white elephant pāṇḍu m. Trichosanthes Dioeca pāṇḍu m. a species of shrub pāṇḍu m. N. of a son of Vyāsa by the wife of Vicitra-vīrya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Vidura (he was father of the five Pāṇḍavas) &c. pāṇḍu m. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra pāṇḍu m. of a son of Dhātri by āyatī (v.l. “prāṇa”) pāṇḍu m. of an attendant of śiva pāṇḍu m. of a Nāgarāja pāṇḍu pl. of a people in Madhya-deśa (v.l. “pāṇḍya” and “-ḍva”) pāṇḍu f. Glycine Debilis Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍu UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 38. 1) adj. (f. gleichfalls pāṇḍu P. 4, 1, 44, Vārtt., Sch. VOP. 4, 16) “weisslich gelb, weiss, bleich” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 13, 53. TRIK. 3, 3, 113. H. 1393. an. 2, 122. MED. ḍ. 18. HALĀY. 4, 47. yathā pāṇḍvāvikam ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 3, 10. kṛśā pāṇḍuśca lakṣyase MBH. 4, 519. SUŚR. 1, 61, 10. 85, 20. 121, 11. 12. -vṛkṣapraroha 135, 8. 158, 13. -gātratā 263, 17. pāṇḍvavabhāsa 2, 2, 8. śaśāṅkaḥ kāminīgaṇḍapāṇḍuḥ MṚCCH. 25, 24. kṣaumam – indupāṇḍu ŚĀK. 80. pāṇḍudukūla LALIT. ed. Calc. 332, 13 u.s.w. pattra ŚĀK. 18. 110. -varṇā (damayantī) N. 2, 3. mukhena rodhrapāṇḍunā RAGH. 3, 2. -mukhī KATHĀS. 28, 2. bhasma- 25, 81. jarā- 31, 40. -sikata ŚĀK. 56. MEGH. 18. 24. 30. āpāṇḍupītikā mṛt VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 20. āpāṇḍubhasmoṣṭrakharānurūpā (śilā) 111. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. Vgl. pāṇḍara, pāṇḍura. — 2) m. a) “Gelbsucht” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. Verz. d. B. H. 278; vgl. pāṇḍuroga. — b) N. zweier Pflanzen: “Trichosanthes dioeca Roxb.” (paṭola) und = pāṇḍuraphalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “ein weisser Elephant” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des Vyāsa von der Frau des Vicitravīrya und Bruders des Dhṛtarāṣṭra und des Vidura, TRIK. 2, 8, 13. 3, 3, 113. H. an. MED. AV. PARIŚ. in Verz. d. B. H. 91. MBH. 1, 95. 2213. 2441. 2721. 3808. 4291 (Ursprung des Namens). 15, 851. HARIV. 1932. 3010. 4055. KATHĀS. 21, 20. fgg. VP. 437. 459. BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 24. — e) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Janamejaya und Bruders des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 3745. LIA. I, Anh. XXIV. — f) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Dhātar von der Āyati VP. 82, N. 1; nach anderen Autoritäten heisst dieser Sohn Prāṇa. — g) N. pr. eines Dieners des Śiva VYĀḌI zu H. 210. — h) N. pr. eines Nāgarāga VYUTP. 85. — i) N. pr. eines Volkes in Madhyadeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 3 (v. l. pāṇḍya und pāṇḍva). — 3) f. = māṣaparṇī “Glycine debilis Ait.” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pari-. pāṇḍu 2) i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 338,b,33. 339,b,46. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 pāṇḍu 1 I Father of the Pāṇḍavas. pāṇḍu 2 II The second son of. Janamejaya. (Chapter 94, Ādi Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍu pāṇḍu, I. adj. Pale, white, yellowish white, Śāk. d. 80. II. m. The name of a sovereign, father of Yudhiṣṭhira, and the other four Pāṇḍavas. — Comp. puṣpa-, m. a kind of snake. vi-, adj. pale, Śic. 9, 3. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pāṇḍu a. whitish yellow, white, pale (abstr. -tā f., -tva n.), N. of an ancient king. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 pāṇḍu pāṇḍ-u, a. (f. id.) yellowish white, whitish, pale; m. N. of a sovereign of ancient Delhi, a son of Vyāsa and brother of Dhṛtarāṣṭra; -cchāya, a. white-coloured; -tā, f. yellowish white colour, paleness; -nanda-na, m. son of Pāṇḍu; -pattra, n. yellow (= withered) leaf; -putra, m. son of Pāṇḍu; -bhūma, m. pale-coloured (chalky) soil. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 pāṇḍu raḥ puṁ, (pāṇḍurasyāstīti . pāṇḍu + nagapāṁśupāṇḍubhyaśca . 5 . 2 . 107 . ityasya sūtrasya vārtikoktyā raḥ .) śvetapītamiśritavarṇaḥ . tadbati, tri . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 5 . 17 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 8 . 8 . 3 . tata uccaiḥśravā nāma hayo’bhūccandrapāṇḍuraḥ . tasmin baliḥ spṛhāñcakrenendra īśvaraśikṣayā ..) kāmalārogaḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. śvitraroge, klī . iti halāyudhaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pāṇḍu pu° paḍi–ku ni° dīrghaḥ . sitapītasamāyuktaḥ pāṇḍuvarvaṇaḥ prakīrtitaḥ 1 subhūtyukte pāṇḍustu pītabhāgārdhaḥ ketakīdhūlisannibhaḥ ityukte ca 2 varṇamede 3 tadvati tri° . striyāmudantaguṇavacanatve’pi na ṅīp pāṇḍuśabdaparyudāsāt . 4 sitavarṇe śabdaratnā° 5 tadvati tri° sāntanuputravicitravīryasya kṣetre vyāsenotpādite 6 nṛpabhede 7 nāgabhede 8 śvetagaje 9 rogabhede ca śabdara° . 10 pāṇḍuraphalīkṣupe 11 paṭole ca rājani° . 12 deśabhede pu° pāṇḍunṛpotpattikathā bhā° ā° 106 a° tannāmatākāraṇañca uktaṁ yathā tatastenaiva vidhinā maharṣistāmavindata . ambālikāmathābhyāgādṛṣiṁ dṛṣṭvā ca sāpi tam . vivarṇā pāṇḍusaṅkāśā samapadyata mārata! ityupakrame yasmāt pāṇḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya māmiha . taṇādeṣa sutaste vai pāṇḍureva bhaviṣyati . nāma tasya tadeveha bhaviṣyadi śubhānane . tasya digvijayādikathā taduttarādhyāyeṣu dṛśyā . pāṇḍurogabhede nidānādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā pāṇḍurogāḥ smṛtāḥ pañca vātapittakaphaistrayaḥ . caturthaḥ sannipātena pañcamo bhakṣaṇānmṛdaḥ pañcamo bhakṣaṇāt mṛda iti nanu mṛttikāpi dūṣitavātādidoṣadvāreṇaiva pāṇḍurogaṁ janayatoti mṛdbhakṣaṇajaḥ pāṇḍurogodoṣajādabhinna eva kathaṁ pañcama iti ucyate aparakāraṇakupitā vātādayo’nyānapi rogān karvanti . mṛttikābhakṣṇāt kupitāstu vātādayo viśeṣataḥ pāṇḍurogameva janayantyeveti viśeṣāt cikitsāviśeṣācca pañcamaḥ carakeṇoktaḥ . taccikitsāparakāraṇakupitadoṣajanitapāṇḍurogacikitsā bhavatīti suśrutena mṛttikājaḥ pṛthak na paṭhitaḥ . atha viprakṛṣṭanidānapūrvikāṁ samprāptimāha vyavāyamamlaṁ lavaṇāni madyaṁ mṛdaṁ divāsvapnamatīva tīkṣṇam . niṣevamāṇasya vidūṣya raktaṁ doṣāstvacaṁ pāṇḍuratāṁ nayanti tīkṣṇaṁ rājikādi . atha pūrvarūpamāha tvaksphoṭaniṣṭhīvanagātrasādamṛdbhakṣaṇaprekṣaṇakūṭaśothāḥ . viṇmūtraṣītatvamathāvipāko bhaviṣyatastasya puraḥsarāṇi prekṣaṇakūṭaśothaḥ iti akṣigolakaśothaḥ . atha vātikasya pāṇḍurogasya lakṣaṇamāha tvaṅmūtranayanādīnāṁ rūkṣakṛṣṇāruṇāmatā . vātapāṇḍvāmaye kampastodāmāhabhramādayaḥ . kṛṣṇāruṇāmatā pāṇḍutvaṁ nātikrāmati . ataeva suśrute sarveṣu caiteṣvapi pāṇḍubhāvo yato’dhiko’taḥ khalu pāṇḍurogaḥ iti . bhramādaya ityādiśabdāt medaśūlādayaḥ . atha ṣaittikasya lakṣaṇamāha pītatvaṅnakhaviṇbhūtradāhatṛṣṇājvarānvitaḥ . bhinnaviṭko’tipītābhaḥ pittapāṇḍvāmaye naraḥ . bhinnaviṭkaḥ sadravamalaḥ . atha ślaiṣmikasya lakṣaṇamāha kaphaprasekaḥ śvayathuḥ tandrālasyātigauravaiḥ . pāṇḍurogī kaphāt śuklaistvaṅmūtranayanānanaiḥ . atropalakṣaṇe tṛtīyā . sānnipātikasya lakṣaṇamāha sarvānnasevinaḥ sarve duṣṭā doṣāstridoṣajam . tridoṣaliṅgaṁ kurvanti pāṇḍurogaṁ suduḥsaham . atha mṛjjasya samprāptimāha mṛttikādanaśīlasya kupyatyanyatamo malaḥ . kamāyā mārutaṁ, pitta mūṣarā, madhurā kapham . kopayenmṛdrasādīṁśca raukṣyādbhuktañca rūkṣayet . pūrayatyavipakvaiśca srotāṁsi niruṇaddhyapi . indriyāṇāṁ balaṁ hatvā tejo vīryaujasī tathā . pāṇḍurogaṁ karotyāśu samavarṇāgnināśanam . srotāṁsi śirāmukhāni . tejo dīptiḥ ojaḥ sarvadhāturasaḥ . atha mṛjjasya lakṣaṇamāha mṛdbhakṣaṇādbhavetpāṇḍu standrālasyanipīḍitaḥ . sakāsaśvāsaśūlārtaḥ sadā’ruci samanvitaḥ . śūnākṣikūṭagaṇḍabhrūḥ śūnapānnābhimehanaḥ . kṛmikoṣṭho’tisāryeta malaṁ sāsṛkkaphānvitam . krimikoṣṭhaḥ udarābhyantarasthakṛmirbhavedityanena sambadhyate atisāryeta malamiti karmakartṛ tatkarmavat mantavyam . tasmin karmaṇyarthe’tra yakpratyayaḥ . athāsādhyasya lakṣaṇamāha jvarārocakahṛllāsaccharditṛṣṇāklamānvitaḥ . pāṇḍurogī tribhirdoṣaistyājyaḥ kṣīṇo hatendriyaḥ . pāṇḍurogaścirotpannaḥ kharībhūto na sidhyati . kālaprakarṣāt śūnāṅgo yo vā pītāni paśyati kharībhūtaḥ atirūkṣitaḥ sarvadhātuḥ baddhālpaviṭ saharitaṁ sakaphaṁ yo’tisāryate . pītasvedātidigdhāṅgaḥ chardimūrchātṛṣānvitaḥ . pāṇḍudantanakho yastu pāṇḍunetraśca yo bhavet . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśī ca pāṇḍurogī vinaśyati . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśīṁ pībavarṇasya rāśiṁ paśyati . anteṣu śūnaṁ parihīnamadhyaṁ mlānaṁ tathānteṣu ca madhyaśūnam . gude mukhe śephasi muṣkayośca śūnaṁ pratāmyantamasaṁjñakalpam . urabhre nihate caiva pāṇḍurogaḥ prajāyate śātā° meṣabadhakarmaṇobipāka stadroga uktaḥ . 1 3 māṣaparṇyām (māṣāṇī) strī rājani° . pāṇḍorapatyam orañ pā° añ . pāṇḍava pāṇḍorapatye yudhiṣṭhirādau . pāṇḍoḥ janapadabhedasya rājā pāṇḍorḍyan vārti° ḍyan . pāṇḍudeśanṛpe raghu4 . 9 2 . svārthe ka pāṇḍuka tatrārthe tataḥ astyarthe ini pāṇḍukin tadrogayute tri° . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pāṇḍuka dhānābhede suśrutaḥ . tatra pṛṣo° dīrghamadhyaḥ pāṇḍūka tatrārthe paṅgukaśabde 2 49 2 pṛ° suśrutavākyaṁ dṛśyam . pāṇḍukasya vṛddhiḥ kṣīrikāvṛddhyā bhavatotyuktaṁ vṛṁ° sa° 29 a° . |
पाण्डुक – pāṇḍuka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuka mfn. = “pāṇḍu”
pāṇḍuka m. a pale or yellowish-white colour pāṇḍuka m. jaundice pāṇḍuka m. a species of rice (cf. “-ḍūka”) pāṇḍuka m. (with Jainas) N. of one of the 9 treasures pāṇḍuka m. N. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra pāṇḍuka n. N. of a forest Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍuka (von pāṇḍu) 1) adj. = pāṇḍu HALĀY. 4, 47, v. l. — 2) m. a) “Gelbsucht” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.; vgl. pāṇḍukin. — b) “eine best. Reisgattung” SUŚR. 1, 73, 4. 195, 6; vgl. pāṇḍūka. — c) N. pr. = pāṇḍu 2,d. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — 3) n. N. pr. eines Waldes ŚATR. 8, 34. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍuka pāṇḍu + ka, m. The jaundice. |
पाण्डुच्छाय – pāṇḍucchāya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍucchāya “pāṇḍu-cchāya” mfn. white-coloured |
पाण्डुर – pāṇḍura | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍura mf (“ā”) n. whitish, white, pale, yellow &c.
pāṇḍura m. a form of jaundice pāṇḍura m. Anogeissus Latifolia pāṇḍura m. an Andropogon with white flowers pāṇḍura m. N. of one of the attendants of Skanda pāṇḍura mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. Glycine Debilis pāṇḍura m. of a Buddhist deity (cf. “pāṇḍarā”) pāṇḍura n. the white leprosy, vitiligo Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍura (von pāṇḍu) KĀŚ. und SIDDH. K. zu P. 5, 2, 107. 1) adj. f. ā “weisslich, weiss, bleich” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 23. H. 1393. an. 3, 577. MED. r. 183. HALĀY. 4, 47. 52. SUŚR. 1, 286, 9. 2, 168, 17. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 33, 2. 53, 7. -nakha 67, 3. kaca H. 571. HALĀY. 2, 377. candra- BHĀG. P. 8, 8, 3. mukhena śarapāṇḍunā RAGH. 14, 26. kṛśa- KATHĀS. 27, 34. 32, 155. ātapatra, chattra R. 2, 2, 5. 98, 26. gṛha 57, 22. Spr. 91. pāṇḍurāruṇavarṇāni srotāṁsi DAŚ. 1, 18. chavi ŚĀK. 58. ā- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 35, 4. 53, 106. kapota 87, 13. āpāṇḍurībhūtamukhacchavi KUMĀRAS. 3, 33. Vgl. pāṇḍara. — 2) m. a) “eine Form der Gelbsucht” (kāmalāroga) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) “eine best. Pflanze”, = maruvaka H. an. MED. — c) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2575. — 3) f. ā = māṣaparṇī “Glycine debilis Ait.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. “der weisse Aussatz” H. 466. HALĀY. 2, 449. pāṇḍura 1) KATHĀS. 71, 2. — 5) f. ā N. pr. einer buddh. Göttin, = tārā WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 36. pāṇḍarā (sic) Gattin Amitābha’s (während Tārā die Gattin Amoghasiddha’s genannt wird) 12. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 pāṇḍura A soldier of Subrahmaṇya. (Śloka 73, Chapter 45, Śalya Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍura pāṇḍu + ra, I. adj., f. rā, Of a yellowish white colour, white, pale, Bhāg. P. 8, 8, 8. II. m. a proper name. — Comp. ā-, adj. a little pale, Amar. 89. vi-, adj. pale. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pāṇḍura a. whitish, pale. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 pāṇḍura pāṇḍu-ra, a. whitish, white, pale: -tā, f. white colour; -ya, den. P. colour whitish yellow; i-ta, pp. coloured yellowish white; i-man, m. pale colour; ī-kṛ, colour yellowish white. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pāṇḍura pu° pāṇḍurvarṇo’syāsti ra . 1 śvetapītamiśrite varṇe amaraḥ 2 tadvati tri° . paḍi–ura pṛṣo° vṛddhiḥ . 3 śvetavarṇe 4 tadvati ca halā° . 5 kāmalākhye roge 6 śvitraroge na° śabdaratnā° . 7 māṣaparṇyāṁ strī ṭāp rājani° . |
पाण्डुरता – pāṇḍuratā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuratā “pāṇḍura-tā” f. white colour, whiteness
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍuratā (von pāṇḍura) f. “die weisse Farbe” RĀJA-TAR. 4, 198. PAÑCAT. 253, 2. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍuratā pāṇḍura + tā, f. White colour, Pañc. 253, 2. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pāṇḍuratā f. -riman m. abstr. to prec. |
पाण्डुरय – pāṇḍuraya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuraya Nom. P. “yati”, to colour white, Vāsav. |
पाण्डुरित – pāṇḍurita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍurita “pāṇḍurita” mfn. white-coloured
mfn. Balar. |
पाण्डुरिमन् – pāṇḍuriman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuriman m. white colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍuriman (von pāṇḍura) m. “eine bleiche Farbe” NAIṢ 22, 54. |
पाण्डुरीकरण – pāṇḍurīkaraṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍurīkaraṇa “pāṇḍurī-karaṇa” n. colouring white |
पाण्डुरीकरणकृ – pāṇḍurīkaraṇakṛ | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍurīkaraṇakṛ “pāṇḍurī-karaṇa-kṛ” to colour white |
पीत – pīta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pīta mfn. (1. “pā”) drunk, sucked, sipped, quaffed, imbibed &c. &c.
pīta ifc. having drunk, soaked, steeped, saturated, filled with (also with instr.) (cf. g. “āhitāgny-ādi”) pīta n. drinking pīta mf (“ā”) n. (possibly fr. 2. “pi” or “pyai”, the colour of butter ind oil being yellowish) yellow (the colour of the Vaiśyas, white being that of the Brāhmans, red that of the Kshatriyas, and black that of the śūdras) &c. pīta m. yellow colour pīta m. a yellow gem, topaz pīta m. a yellow pigment prepared from the urine of kine pīta m. N. of sev. plants (Alangium Hexapetalum, Carthamus Tinctorius, Trophis Aspera) pīta m. of the Vaiśyas in śālmala-dvipa pīta mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of sev. plants (Curcuma Longa and Aromatica, a species of Dalbergia Sissoo, a species of Musa, Aconitum Ferox, Panicuni Italicum = “mahā-jyotihmatī”) pīta m. a kind of yellow pigment (= “go-rocanā”) pīta m. a mystical N. of the letter “ṣ” pīta n. a yellow substance pīta n. gold pīta n. yellow orpiment Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 pīta a. [pā-karmaṇi kta] (1) Drunk, quaffed; vanāya pītapratibaddhavatsāṁ (gāṁ musoca) R. 2. 1. (2) Steeped, soaked in, filled or saturated with (3) Absorbed, drunk up, evaporated; Ku. 4. 44. (4) Watered, sprinkled with water; pātuṁ na prayama vyavasyati jalaṁ yaṣma svapīteṣu yā S. 4 8 (5) Yellow; vidyutprabhāracitapītapaṭottarīyaḥ Mk. 5. 2. –taḥ (1) Yellow colour. (2) Topaz. (3) Safflower. (4) A yellow pigment prepared from cow’s urine. –taṁ (1) Gold. (2) Yellow orpiment. — Comp. –abdhiḥ an epithet of Agastya. –aṁbaraḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu; iti nigaditaḥ prītaḥ pītāṁbaropi tathākarot Gīt. 12. –2. an actor. –3 a religious mendicant wearing yellow garments. –aruṇa a. yellowish-red. ( –ṇaḥ) the middle of day-break. –aśman m. topaz. –kadalī a species of banana (svarṇakadalī). –kaṁdaṁ the carrot. –kāveraṁ 1. saffron. –2. brass. –kāṣṭhaṁ yellow sanders. –gadhaṁ yellow sandal. –caṁdanaṁ 1. a species of sandal-wood. –2. saffron. –3. turmeric. –caṁpakaḥ a lamp. –tuṁḍaḥ a Kāraṇḍava bird. –dāru n. a kind of pine or Sarala tree. –dugdhā 1. a milch cow. –2. a cow whose milk has been pledged. –3. a cow tied up to be milked. –druḥ the Sarala tree. –nīla a. green. ( –laḥ) the green colour. –pādā a kind of bird (Mar. mainā). –puṣpaḥ N. of several plants, caṁpaka, karṇikāra &c. –maṇiḥ a topaz. –mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance –mūlakaṁ the carrot. –yūthī yellow jasmine. –rakta a. yellowish-red, orange-coloured. ( –ktaṁ) a kind of yellow gem, the topaz. –rāgaḥ 1. the yellow colour. –2. wax. –3. the fibres of a lotus. –lohaṁ brass. –vālukā turmeric. –vāsas m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. –sāraḥ 1. the topaz. –2. the sandal tree. ( –raṁ) yellow sandal-wood. –sāri n. antimony. –skaṁdhaḥ a hog. –sphaṭikaḥ the topaz. –harita a. yellowishgreen. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pīta (partic. praet. pass. von 1. pā) “getrunken”: jīvapītasarga adj. “dessen Strahlen (Güsse) von Lebendigen getrunken sind” ṚV. 7, 149, 2. Belege aus der späteren Literatur für diese und andere Bedd. s. u. pā. pīta 1) adj. f. ā “gelb” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1394. an. 2, 178. MED. t. 34. HALĀY. 4, 50. BALA beim Schol. zu NAIṢ 8, 98. VYUTP. 48. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 8. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. SUŚR. 1, 45, 3. 61, 9. pītāvabhāsa 84, 6. 259, 6. 262, 15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 29, 22. Die Farbe der Vaiśya, wie weiss die der Brahmanen, roth die der Krieger und schwarz die der Śūdra, 3, 19; vgl. MBH. 12, 6934. MUIR, Sanskrit Texts I, 191. – AK. 2, 4, 2, 52. 56. HALĀY. 2, 50. MĀRK. P. 109, 65. -kauṣeya Citat beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 6, 5. -cchavivarṇa VYUTP. 205. -māñjiṣṭha R. 2, 94, 5. āpītasūryaṁ nabhaḥ MṚCCH. 84, 8. — 2) m. a) “Topas” RATNAM. bei WILS. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “ein gelbes aus Kuhurin verfertigtes Pigment” RATNAM. bei WILS. — c) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Alangium hexapetalum” (aṅkoṭha); “Safflor, Carthamus tinctorius; Trophis aspera” (śākhoṭa) RĀJAN. — 3) f. ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Gelbwurz”, = haridrā AK. 2, 9, 41. H. 418. H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. = dāruharidrā, mahājyotiṣmatī, kapilaśiṁśapā, priyaṅgu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = ativiṣā ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) “eine Art gelbes Pigment” (gorocanā) RĀJAN. — c) mystische Bez. “des Buchstabens” ṣa Ind. St. 2, 316. — 4) n. a) “Gold” BALA a. a. O. NAIṢ 8, 98. — b) “Auripigment” RĀJAN. pīta Z. 2 lies 1, 149, 2. pīta s. u. 2. pī. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pīta pīta, adj., f. tā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 2, 94, 5. — Comp. ā-, adj. yellowish, Rām. 2, 76, 4. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pīta [1] -> pā2. pīta [2] a. yellow; abstr. tā f. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 pīta 2. pīta, a. yellow: -tā, f. yellowness; yellow colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pīta tri° pā–karmaṇi kta . 1 pānakarmaṇi bhāve kta . 2 pāne na° pivati varṇāntaraṁ pā–ūṇā° kartari kta . 3 varṇabhede pu° 4 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . 5 haritāle na° medi° . pītaṁ pānamastyasya ac . 6 pānakartari tri° vanāya pīta pratibaddhavatsām raghuḥ . kāvye varṇanīyapītavarṇadravyāṇi kavikalpalatāyāmuktāni yathā pītāni brahma 1 jīve 2 ndra 3 garuḍe 4 śvaradṛ 5 gjaṭāḥ 6 . gaurī 7 dvāpara 8 gomūtra 9 madhu 10 vīrarasā 11 rajaḥ 12 . haridrā 13 rocanā 14 rīti 15 gandhake 16 dīpa 17 campake 18 . kiñjalka 19 valkale 20 śāli 21 haritāla 22 manaḥśilāḥ 23 . karṇikāvaṁ 24 cakravāka 25 vānarau 26 śārikāmukham 27 . keśavāṁśuka 28 maṇḍūka 29 sarāga 30 kanakādayaḥ 31 . |
पुंडरीकम् – puṁḍarīkam | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
puṁḍarīkam (1) A lotus-flower, especially a white lotus: U. 6. 12, 29; Māl. 9. 14. (2) A white parasol. (3) A medicine, drug. –kaḥ (1) The white colour. (2) N. of the elephant presiding over the south-east direction: R. 18. 8. (3) A tiger. (4) A kind of serpent. (5) A species of rice. (6) A kind of leprosy. (7) A fever in an elephant. (8) A kind of mango tree. (9) A pitcher, water-pot. (10) Fire (11) A (se ctarial) mark on the fore-head. — Comp. –akṣaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu; R. 18. 8. –plavaḥ a kind of bird. –muvī a kind of leech. |
पुण्डरीक – puṇḍarīka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899puṇḍarīka n. ( “puṇ” [?]; cf. a lotus-flower (esp. a white lotus; ifc.
expressive of beauty cf. g. “vyāghrādi”) &c.&c. (it is sacred to śikhin, one of the Buddhas 515) n. a white umbrella n. a kind of drug puṇḍarīka n. (m. or n. ?) a mark on the forehead n. N. of a Tīrtha puṇḍarīka m. a kind of sacrifice puṇḍarīka m. a species of rice puṇḍarīka m. a kind of fragrant mango puṇḍarīka m. Artemisia Indica puṇḍarīka m. a variety of the sugar-cane puṇḍarīka m. a tiger puṇḍarīka m. a kind of bird puṇḍarīka m. a kind of serpent puṇḍarīka m. a kind of leprosy puṇḍarīka m. fever in an elephant puṇḍarīka m. white (the colour) puṇḍarīka m. N. of a Nāga puṇḍarīka m. of the elephant of the south-east quarter puṇḍarīka m. of an ancient king puṇḍarīka m. of a son of Nabha or Nabhas puṇḍarīka m. of a Brāhman renowned for filial piety, and afterwards worshipped as the god Viṭhobl 263 puṇḍarīka m. (with Jainas) of a Gaṇa-dhara puṇḍarīka m. of a hermit (son of Sveta-ketu and Lakshmi) puṇḍarīka m. of a poet puṇḍarīka m. of a mountain puṇḍarīka m. of a daughter of Vasiṣṭha (wife of Prāṇa or Pāṇḍu) puṇḍarīka m. of a river in Krauṇca-dvipa Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch puṇḍarīka (puṇḍarīka UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 4, 20.) 1) n. a) “Lotusblüthe”, insbes. “eine weisse”, AK. 1, 2, 3, 40. TRIK. 3, 3, 32. H. 1162. an. 4, 20. MED. k. 199. HALĀY. 3, 58. ŚĀŚVATA bei UJJVAL. VYUTP. 142. ṚV. 10, 142, 8. TBR. 1, 8, 2, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 5, 6. fgg. 14, 5, 3, 10. 9, 3, 14. nakṣatrāṇāmavakāśena puṇḍarīkaṁ jāyate PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 6. tasya yathā kapyāsaṁ puṇḍarīkamevamakṣiṇī CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 7. MBH. 1, 6592. 7283. 5, 2564. 13, 4896. 5244. HIḌ. 1, 32. HARIV. 8996. 12669. SUŚR. 1, 141, 21. -palāśākṣa R. 2, 87, 3 (95, 3 GORR.). puṇḍarīkātapatra adj. RAGH. 4, 17. MĀLAV. 65. BRAHMAP. in LA. 53, 3. Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 25, Śl. 6. śreyaḥśriyaḥ puṇḍarīkam ŚATR. 1, 6. RAGH. 18, 7 (am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā). als Bild des menschlichen Herzens AV. 10, 8, 43. CHĀND. UP. 8, 1, 1. SUŚR. 1, 248, 4. puṇḍarīkeṇa sadṛśaṁ hṛdayaṁ syādadhomukham 329, 9. in comp. mit dem verglichenen Gegenstande als Ausdruck der “Schönheit” gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56. — b) “ein weisser Sonnenschirm” TRIK. H. an. MED. ŚĀŚVATA a. a. O. (es ist sitacchattre st. sitapattre zu lesen). — c) “ein best. Heilmittel” H. an. MED. ŚĀŚVATA. — d) (könnte auch m. sein) “Stirnzeichen” (tilaka Randglosse): śivaśriyaḥ ŚATR. 1, 6; vgl. puṇḍra, puṇḍhra. — e) N. pr. eines heiligen Badeplatzes MBH. 3, 6053. — 2) m. a) “ein best. Opfer”: aśvamedho rājasūyaḥ puṇḍarīko ‘tha gosavaḥ. etairapi mahāyajñairiṣṭaṁ te MBH. 3, 1133. 5091. 6053. 5, 4008. 4090. 7, 2293. 9, 2888. 13, 1732. — b) “eine Art Reis” SUŚR. 1, 195, 6. “eine wohlriechende Mango-Art” H. an. MED. “Artemisia indica” (damanaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “eine Art Zuckerrohr” (koṣakāra; vgl. puṇḍra) TRIK. H. an. MED. WILSON giebt diese Bed. nach BHAR. zu AK. und übersetzt koṣakāra durch “Seidenraupe”, fügt aber ein Fragezeichen hinzu. — c) “Tiger” AK. 3, 4, 1, 11. TRIK. H. 1285. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 71. ŚĀŚVATA. — d) “eine Art Schlange”, = rājilāhi H. an. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 5, 3629. VP. 149, N. 16. — e) “eine Art Aussatz” SUŚR. 1, 268, 1. saśvetaṁ raktaparyantaṁ puṇḍarīkadalopamam. sotsedhaṁ ca sarāgaṁ ca puṇḍarīkaṁ pracakṣate.. MĀDHAVAK. im ŚKDR. — f) “Fieber beim Elephanten” H. an. — g) “Krug.” — h) “die weisse Farbe” ANEKĀRTHAKOṢA im ŚKDR. — i) N. pr. des Weltelephanten im Südosten AK. 1, 1, 2, 5. TRIK. H. 170. H. an. MED. HĀR. 148. HALĀY. 1, 104. ŚĀŚVATA. RAGH. 18, 7. — k) N. pr. eines alten Königs MBH. 2, 325. eines Sohnes des Nabha (Nabhas) HARIV. 824. RAGH. 18, 7. VP. 386. BHĀG. P. 9, 12, 1. N. pr. eines Gaṇadhara bei den Jaina H. an. ŚATR. 1, 6. fgg. 499. 14, 186. N. pr. eines Einsiedlers, eines Sohnes des Śvetaketu von der Lakṣmī, KĀD. in ZdmG.7, 584. SĀH. D. 79, 18. — l) N. pr. eines Berges ŚATR. 1, 332. 5, 254. 293. -śiroratna 1, 6. — 3) f. ā N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu H. 113. MBH. 1, 4819. 4, 259. HARIV. 12471. 14164 (wo -kā su- zu lesen ist). R. 2, 91, 45 (100, 46 GORR.). N. pr. einer Tochter Vasiṣṭha’s und Gemahlin Prāṇa’s (Pāṇḍu’s) VP. 82, N. 1. 84, N. 8. — Vgl. puruṣa-, pauṇḍarīka. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 puṇḍarīka 1 I A King born of the race of Śrī Rāma. He was the son of Niṣadha and father of Kṣemadhanvā. (9th Skandha, Bhāgavata). puṇḍarīka 2 II One of the Aṣṭadiggajas (elephants guarding the eight zones). (See under Aṣṭadiggajas). puṇḍarīka 3 III A brahmin who lived during the period of Nārada. Nārada once held a scholarly conversation with him on virtue. He saw Mahāviṣṇu in person and attained sāyujya (intimate union with a deity). (Chapter 124, Anuśāsana Parva). puṇḍarīka 4 IV A great yajña. (Śloka 100, Chapter 5, Sabhā Parva). puṇḍarīka 5 V A holy place situated on the border of Kurukṣetra. One who bathes in a sacred pond there would get the benefit of doing a Puṇḍarīkayajña. (Śloka 83, Chapter 83, Vana Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 puṇḍarīka puṇḍarīka, I. n. 1. The white lotus flower. 2. A lotus in general, Rām. 2, 95, 3 Gorr. II. m. 1. A kind of sacrifice, MBh. 3, 1133. 2. A kind of rice. 3. A kind of leprosy. 4. The elephant of the south-east quarter, Ragh. 18, 7. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 puṇḍarīka n. a lotus-flower, esp. a white one (poss. -vant); m. a man’s name, f. ā a woman’s name. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 puṇḍarīka puṇḍarīka, n. (white) lotus flower (also as an emblem of the human heart); m. N. of the elephant of the south-eastern quarter; -mukhī, f. kind of leeach; -akṣa, m. Lotus-eyed, ep. of Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 puṇḍarīka na° puḍi–īka ni° . 1 śvetapadme 2 agnikīṇasthe 3 diggaje pu° 4 vyāghre puṁstrī° amaraḥ striyāṁ jātitvāt ṅīṣ . 5 śvetapattre 6 bheṣaje ca na° . 7 āmre 8 rājilasarpe 9 hastijvare pu° hemaca° . 10 damanakavṛkṣe rājani° . 11 kamaṇḍalau 12 śvetavarṇe anekārthakoṣaḥ 13 śvetavarṇavati tri° 14 kuṣṭhabhede pu° . saśvetaṁ raktaparyantaṁ puṇḍarīkadalopamam . sotsedhañca sarāgañca puṇḍarokaṁ pracakṣate mādhavakaraḥ . 15 koṣakārabhede pu° medi° . |
पुण्ड्र – puṇḍra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899puṇḍra m. N. of a son of the Daitya Bali (ancestor of the Puṇḍras)
puṇḍra m. (pl.)of a people and their country (the modern Bengal and Behar) &c. m. of a son of Vasu-deva m. sugar-cane (or a red variety of it) m. Gaertnera Racemosa m. Ficus Infectoria m. Clerodendrum Phlomoides m. a white lotus-flower m. a worm puṇḍra m. or n. a mark or line made on the forehead with ashes or colouring substances to distinguish Vaiṣṇavas fr. śaivas &c., a sectarian mark 66; 67 (cf. “ūrdhva-p-, tri-p-“) puṇḍra n. N. of a mythical city between the mountains Hima-vat and Hemakūṭa Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch puṇḍra 1) m. “eine Art Zuckerrohr” AK. 2, 4, 5, 29. H. 1194. H. an. 2, 439. MED. r. 60. puṇḍrekṣu RĀGA-TAR. 4, 500. — 2) m. pl. N. pr. eines Volkes und des von ihm bewohnten Landes (“das Land des Zuckerrohrs”; vgl. gauḍa), das heutige Bengalen und Bihār, TRIK. 2, 1, 7. H. an. MED. LIA. I, 140. fg. 271. 556. fg. AIT. BR. 7, 18. MBH. 1, 4221. 4453. 2, 584. 1096. 1872. 6, 358 (VP. 190). 8, 236. 14, 832. R. 4, 41, 18. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 70. 9, 15. 10, 14. 16, 3. VP. 176. MĀRK. P. 57, 45. sūtairmāgadhapuṇḍraiśca gīyamānaḥ HARIV. 15851. Der Name des Landes wird auf einen gleichnamigen Sohn Bali’s zurückgeführt MBH. 1, 4219. 8, 875. HARIV. 1685. VP. 444. BHĀG. P. 9, 23, 4. Vielleicht ist auch MBH. 1, 228 puṇḍraḥ st. pundraḥ zu lesen. Nach dem VĀYU-P. (s. VP. 231, N. 4) N. einer mythischen, zwischen Himavant und Hemakūta gelegenen Stadt. — 3) m. “Gaertnera racemosa” (atimuktaka, vāsantī) H. an. MED. — 4) m. = puṇḍarīka “weissblühender Lotus” H. an. MED. — 5) m. “ein best. Baum”, = hrasvaplakṣa RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 6) “Mal, Sectenzeichen” (= tilaka nach ŚKDR. soll tilaka in H. an. N. eines Baumes sein, citra, lalāma) AK. 3, 4, 23, 145. HALĀY. 5, 69. m. H. 653. H. an. MED. n. HALĀY. 2, 386. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 1, 34. 38. Vgl. tri-, ūrdhva- (auch PADMA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 14,b,17). Vgl. puṇḍhra. — 7) m. “Wurm” H. an. MED. — 8) m. N. pr. eines Daitja H. an. MED. oxyt. UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 13. — Vgl. catuḥpuṇḍra, pauṇḍra, pauṇḍraka, pauṇḍrika. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 puṇḍra 1 I An ancient King in Bhārata. (Śloka 224, Chapter 1, Ādi Parva). puṇḍra 2 II An ancient region of Bhārata. The region comprised then the present district of Mālada, certain portions on the east coast of river Kosī and certain portions of Dinājpur. King Pāṇḍu conquered Puṇḍra. (Chapter 112, Ādi Parva). The people of Puṇḍra came to the Rājasūya of Yudhiṣṭhira with presents. The Pauṇḍrakavāsudeva mentioned in the Bhāgavata was the King of Puṇḍra. Karṇa and Arjuna conquered this country at different times. (Chapter 52, Sabhā Parva; Chapter 8, Karṇa Parva; Chapter 82, Āśvamedhika Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 puṇḍra puṇḍra, m. 1. pl. The name of a people and their country, the greater part of Bengal and part of Behar. 2. A kind of sugar-cane. 3. (and n.), A mark or line made on the forehead with sandal. — Comp. tri-, n. three horizontal marks made across the forehead, especially by the followers of Śiva. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 puṇḍra m. N. of an ancient hero; pl. N. of a people. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 puṇḍra puṇḍra, m. pl. N. of the people of the modern Bengal and Behar; n. sectarian mark; -ka, m. pl. id.; -vardhana, n. N. of a town; -ikṣin, m. sugar-cane. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 puṇḍra pu° puḍi–bhedane rak . (puṁḍiyā) 1 ikṣubhede amaraḥ . ikṣuśabde dṛśyam ūrdhvapuṇḍrakādau ikṣubhedatulyākāratayā prayogaḥ 2 detyabhede 3 atimuktake 4 citrake 5 kṛmau 6 puṇḍarīke 7 deśabhede pu° medi° . sa ca deśaḥ vṛ° 14 a° udayagiribhadra gauḍakapauṇḍotkalakāśimekhalāsvaṣṭhāḥ pūrvasyāmuktaḥ . tena tasya prāksthatvāt nagarāntatve dvipadavṛddhiḥ pauṇḍranāgara tatra bhave tri° puṇḍraḥ kaliṅgaśca tathā bāle ca kṣatramucyate harivaṁ° 318 a° so’bhijano’sya tasya rājā vā aṇ . pauṇḍra pitrādikrameṇa taddeśavāsini tannṛpe ca . bahutve tasya luk . sūtairmāgadhapuṇḍraiśca gīyamānastatastataḥ harivaṁ° 311 a° . 8 tilakavṛkṣe hemaca° . 9 hrasvaplakṣe rājani° . svārghe ka . puṇḍraka mādhavīlatāyām amaraḥ . ikṣubhedādau ca . |
प्रपाण्डु – prapāṇḍu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899prapāṇḍu “pra-pāṇḍu” or “-ḍura” mfn. very white, of a dazzling white
colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch prapāṇḍu (1. pra + pā-) adj. “sehr weiss, blendend weiss” SUŚR. 2, 310, 18. |
बलक्ष – balakṣa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899balakṣa mf (“ī”) n. (also written “valakṣa”) white &c.
balakṣa m. white (the colour) balakṣa m. (with “pakṣa”) the light half of a month Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 balakṣa a. [balaṁ kṣāyatyasmāt kṣai-ka] White; dviradadataṁbalakṣamalakṣyata sphuritabhṛṁgamṛgacchavi ketakaṁ Śi. 6. 34. –kṣaḥ The white colour. — Comp. –guḥ (for go ‘a ray’) the moon; yathānatyarjunābjanmasadṛkṣāṁko balakṣaguḥ Kāv. 1. 45 (given as an instance of the prasāda quality of the Gauḍīyas). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch balakṣa (auch ba-) adj. f. ī “weiss” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1393. HALĀY. 4, 17. TBR. 3, 8, 23, 3. TS. 2, 1, 2, 2. 5, 6, 12, 1. KĀṬH. 12, 13. 27, 2. kṛṣṇa- PAÑKAV. BR. 17, 1, 14. LĀṬY. 8, 6, 15, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 4, 17. ŚIŚ. 6, 34. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 386. H. an. 3, 182. — Vgl. palakṣa. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 balakṣa f. balakṣī white. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 balakṣa balakṣa, a. (ī) white: -gu, m. (white-rayed), moon. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 balakṣa pu° balaṁ kṣāyatyasmāt kṣai–ka . 1 śuklavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . amaraḥ . antyasthavādirayamiti svāmī . |
बहल – bahala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bahala mfn. thick, dense, compact, firm, solid
mfn. bushy, shaggy (as a tail) mfn. wide, extensive mfn. deep, intense (as a colour) mfn. harsh (as a tone) mfn. manifold, copious, abundant (ibc. = in a high degree; ifc. = filled with, chiefly consisting of). (often v.l. “bahula”) bahala m. a kind of sugar-cane bahala m. Anethum Sowa Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 bahala a. [baṁh –kalac nalopaśca] (1) Very much, copious, abundant, plentiful, manifold, great, strong; U. 1. 38; 3. 23; Śi. 9. 8; Bv. 4. 27. (2) Thick, dense. (3) Shaggy (as a tail); bahalottuṁgalāṁgūla Mal. 3. (4) Hard, firm, compact. (5) Harsh (as a sound). –laḥ A kind of sugar-cane. –lā Large cardamoms. — Comp. –gaṁdhaḥ a kind of sandal. –tvacaḥ the white flowering lodhra. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch bahala (von bah) 1) adj. “dicht, dick” (von einem Stoffe, einer flüssigen Masse) H. 1447. SUŚR. 1, 45, 4. 64, 11. 343, 5. 2, 310, 15. tuṣāravarṣa RĀJA-TAR. 4, 367. nṛpabahalamāṁsamastiṣkapaṅkaprāgbhāra PRAB. 5, 7. -phenilabudbudaughaiḥ 55, 5. -rudhiratoyāḥ 87, 11. samastāśāstamberamakarṇatālāsphālanabahalatarapavanasaṁpāta 2, 7. vahalānurāgakuruvinda so v. a. “dunkelroth” ŚIŚ. 9, 8. “derb” von einem Tone PRAB. 85, 3. “breit, umfänglich” SUŚR. 1, 54, 17. 2, 201, 16. aśru- so v. a. “von Thränen erfüllt” DAŚAK. 128, 13. “mannichfach, vielfach”: parivādavahaladoṣa MṚCCH. 55, 23. kliṣṭabahalakleśa KATHĀS. 36, 73. adv.: bahalodyatavipramattavīvāhavidhi (?) 34, 255. In allen aus PRAB. angeführten Stellen hat die v.l. bahula. — 2) m. “eine Art Zuckerrohr.” — 3) f. ā a) “Anethum Sowa Roxb.” (śatapuṣpā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “grosse Kardamomen” (sthūlailā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. bahala vgl. bāhalya weiter unten. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 bahala a. thick, dense, wide, large, intense; filled with, consisting mostly in (–°). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 bahala bah-ala, a. thick, dense; bushy, shaggy (tail); wide, extensive; deep (colour, tone); manifold, copious, abundant; -°, filled with, chiefly consisting in; °-, ad. greatly: -tā, f. thickness. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 bahala tri° bahi–kalac nalopaśca 1 pracure 2 bahuśabdārthe ca . |
ब्रह्मदत्त – brahmadatta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899brahmadatta “brahma-datta” mfn. given by Brahma
mfn. given by Brahmā brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. N. of various men (cf. “naḍādi”) brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a man with the patr. Caikitāneya brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a king (pl. his descendants) brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a prince of the Paṇcālas in Kāmpilya &c. brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a king of the Sālvas brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a prince in Vārānasī brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a prince in śrāvastī brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. (cf. 420, I) of a prince in Campā brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a prince in Kusuma-pura brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of the 12th Cakra-vartin in Bhārata brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a Brāhman brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of a merchant brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of the father of Kṛiṣṇa-datta brahmadatta “brahma-datta” m. of sev. authors Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch brahmadatta (brahman + datta) 1) adj. a) “von” Brahman “gegeben”: iṣavaḥ R. 3, 18, 38. -varaḥ skandaḥ MBH. 3, 14619. -varaṁ saraḥ 13, 7282. — b) “durch das” Brahman “gegeben”: mṛttike brahmadattāsi kāśyapenābhimantritā TAITT. ĀR. 10, 1, 8. — 2) m. oxyt. N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. Caikitāneya ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 1, 26. eines Fürsten MBH. 2, 331. pl. “seine Nachkommen” 334. N. pr. eines Fürsten der Pañkāla in Kāmpilya R. 1, 34, 45. fg. (35, 44 GORR.). MBH. 12, 5136 fgg. 8603. HARIV. 981. 1039. fgg. 1252. fgg. VP. 452. BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. P. 2, 3, 9, Sch. der Śālva HARIV. 15387. fgg. in Vārāṇasī BURN. Intr. 140. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 235(5). KATHĀS. 3, 27. 19, 54. in Campā SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 235(5). in Śrāvastī ebend. 234 (4). in Kusumapura HIOUEN-THSANG 1, 244. – LALIT. ed. Calc. 199, 10. N. pr. des 12ten Cakravartin in Bhārata H. 694. N. pr. eines Brahmanen HARIV. 7994. fgg. PAÑCAT. 264, 22. KATHĀS. 33, 37. eines Kaufmanns 28, 115. — Vgl. brāhmadattāyana. brahmadatta 2) ein Fürst in Vārāṇasī KATHĀS. 114, 20. brahmadatta 2) fährt zur Hölle HEM. YOGAŚ. 2, 27. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 brahmadatta 1 I A famous king of Kāṁpilyapura. brahmadatta 2 II Another King who ruled over Kāṁpilya. This King was the son of the hermit Cūli and his wife Somadā, a Gandharva woman whose mother was Ūrmilā. When he was ruling Kāṁpilya, Kuśanābha was the King of Kānyakubja. One hundred beautiful daughters were born to the King Kuśanābha. One day while they were playing in the jungle Vāyubhagavān (wind-god) saw them and grew lustful. But they did not yield to his request. So he got angry and cursed them and they became hump-backed. The King was very sorry. He presented his hundred hunch-backed daughters to King Brahmadatta, who, by his divine power straightened their backs. When they regained their former form they became the wives of Brahmadatta. This story occurs in Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Bālakāṇḍa, Sargas 32 & 33. brahmadatta 3 III Mention is made in Mahābhārata, Bhaviṣya Parva, Chapter 104, about another Brahmadatta. He was the King of Sālva. Though he had two wives he had no children. Finally by the grace of Śiva two children were born to them. They were called Haṁsa and Ḍibhaka. (For further information see Ḍibhaka). brahmadatta 4 IV A king who ruled over the country of Kāśi. One night he saw two swans flying in the air. They were of golden colour. There were a number of swans around them. They seemed like two lightnings in the midst of white clouds. Brahmadatta wished to see them again. His desire increased to such an extent that he had desire for nothing else. He consulted his ministers and made a lake. Every creature which seemed beautiful to him was brought to that place. Hearing this those two swans also came there. By and by he tamed them and asked them how they got the golden colour. The swans said thus: “Oh King! you might have heard of the famous mountain Mandara, which is the field of games of the Devas (gods). At the time of the churning of the milk sea when this mountain was used as churn-drill, Amṛtaṁ (celestial nectar of immortality) touched this mountain. So the flowers, fruits and roots in the vicinity of this mountain got the power of removing death, wrinkles etc. Candracūḍa also will come to this mountain occasionally to play on the top of it and so it became more glorious than the mount Kailāsa. One day while Mahādeva was playing in those gardens he had to leave on an urgent matter concerning Gods. So he left Pārvatī there and went away. Devī began to walk about in those gardens with pangs of separation. Spring season came. The Gaṇas (servants of Śiva) and the maids of Pārvatī attended on her. One day Maṇipuṣpeśvara, a Gaṇa, hankered after Candralekhā, daughter of Jayā. She had been engaged in fanning Pārvatī. Both were young and their figures suited each other. Candralekhā reciprocated his love. Understanding this Piṅgeśvara and Guheśvara, two gaṇas looked at each other and smiled. Seeing this Devī looked round with anger to see what caused them to smile. They squinted their eyes and showed Manipuṣpe vara and Candralekhā to Devī. Because of separation she had been much worried, weary and sad. So all these affairs made her angry. She said: “It is good that you behave like this when I am in this plight ! The two are making love. Seeing that, you are laughing. May these two dotards be born on the earth and become husband and wife there. Let you two who laughed before me without humility also be born on the earth, first as poor Brāhmaṇas, and then as Brahmarakṣas (demon friends), outcasts, robbers, dogs with tails cut off and finally as various kind of birds.” Thus she cursed the four of gaṇas. Then a gaṇa named Dhūrjaṭa said to Pārvatī: “Devī, this is unfortunate. They have not commited any severe crime.” Devī got angry at him and cursed him too: “May you also be born on the earth as a human being.” After this Jaya the loved maid of Pārvatī requested her for absolution from curse, for all. The Devī said that all of them would get absolution at the place of penance of Brahmā and other gods and would return here. Of these, Candralekhā and her husband and Dhūrjaṭa would be happy on the earth. The two others would lead a miserable life on the earth.” (Kathāsaritsāgara, Padmāvatīlaṁbaka, Taraṅga 1). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 brahmadatta a. given by Brahman; a man’s name. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 bra(vra)hmadatta ikṣākuvaṁśye nṛpabhede 2 ta° . 2 hiraṇyagarbheṇa datte tri° 4 ta° . 3 viprāya datte tri° . 4 śukadevasya kanyāyāṁ kṛtvīsamākhyāyāṁ aṇuhasya putrabhede pu° tatkathā harivaṁ° 11 a° dṛśyā . |
मुटः – muṭaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
muṭaḥ 1. a tree bearing large blossoms. –2. the sun. –3. a rogue. (– ṭaṁ) a large free market or fair. –mūla a. 1. rootless (as a tree). –2. baseless, unfounded (as a statement, charge &c.). –3. eradicated. — megha a. cloudless. –medha a. without understanding, stupid; foolish, dull. –moha a. free from illusion. (–haḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –yatna a. inactive, lazy, dull. –yaṁtraṇa a. 1. unrestrained, unobstructed, uncontrolled, unrestricted. –2. unruly, self-willed, independent. (–ṇaṁ) 1. squeezing out. –2. absence of restraint, independence. –yaśaska a. without fame, discreditable, inglorious. –yukti f. 1. disunion. –2. absence of connection or government. –3. unfitness, impropriety. –yuktika a. 1. disjoined, unconnected. –2. illogical, unmeaning. –3. unfit, improper. — yūtha a. separated from the herd, strayed from the flock (as an elephant). –yūṣa = niryāsa, –yogakṣema a. free from care. –rakta a. (nīrakta) colourless, faded. –raja, –rajaska a. (nīraja, nīrajaska) 1. free from dust. –2. devoid of passion or darkness. (–jaḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –rajas (nīrajas) a. see nīraja. (–f.) a woman not menstruating. -tamasā absence of passion or darkness. –rata (nīrata) a. not attached to, indifferent. –raṁdhra a. (nīraṁdhra) 1. without holes or interstices, very close or contiguous, thickly situated; U. 2. 23. –2. thick, dense. –3. coarse, gross. –rava a. (nīrava) not making any noise, noiseless. R. 8. 58. –rasa a. (nīrasa) 1. tasteless, unsavoury, flavourless. –2. (fig.) insipid, without any poetic charm; nīrasānāṁ padyānāṁ S. D. 1. –3. sapless, without juice, withered or dried up; S. Til. 9. –4. vain, useless, fruitless; alabdhaphalanīrasān mama vidhāya tasmin jane V. 2. 11. –5. disagreeable. –6. cruel, merciless. (–saḥ) the pomegranate. –rasana a. (nīrasana) having no girdle (rasanā); Ki. 5. 11. –ruc a. (nīruc) without lustre, faded, dim. –ruj, –ruja a. (nīruj, nīruja) free from sickness, healthy, sound; nīrujasya kimauṣadhaiḥ H. 1. –rūpa a. (nīrūpa) formless, shapeless. (–paḥ) 1. air, wind. –2. a god. (–paṁ) ether. –roga a. (nīrogaṁ) free from sickness or disease, healthy, sound; Pt. 1. 118. — lakṣaṇa a. 1. having no auspicious marks, ill-featured. –2. undistinguished. –3. unimportant, insignificant. –4. unspotted. –5. having a white back. –lajja a. shameless, impudent. –liṁga a. having no distinguishing or characteristic marks. –lipta a. 1. unanointed. –2. undefiled, unsullied. –3. indifferent to. (–ptaḥ) 1. N. of Kṛṣṇa. –2. a sage. –lepa a. 1. unsmeared, unanointed; Ms. 5. 112. –2. stainless, sinless. (–paḥ) a sage. –lobha a. free from desire or avarice, unavaricious. — loman a. devoid of hair, hairless. –vaṁśa a. without posterity, childless. –vacana a. 1. not speaking, silent. –2. unobjectionable, blameless; (for other senses see the word separately). –vaṇa, –vana a. 1. being out of a wood. –2. free from woods. –3. bare, open. –vara=nirdaraṁ q. v. –vasu a. destitute of wealth, poor. –vācya a. 1. not fit to be said. –2. blameless, unobjectionable. –vāta a. free or sheltered from wind, calm, still; R. 15. 66. (–taḥ) a place sheltered from or not exposed to wind; nirvāte vyajanaṁ H. 2. 165. –vānara a. free from monkeys. –vāyasa a. free from crows. –vārya a. 1. irresistible. –2. acting fearlessly or boldly. –vikalpa, –vikalpaka a. 1. not admitting an alternative. –2. being without determination or resolution. –3. not capable of mutual relation. –4. conditioned. –5. undeliberative. –6. recognizing no such distinction as that of subject and object, or of the knower and the known; as applied to samādhi or contemplation, it is ‘an exclusive concentration upon the one entity without distinct and separate consciousness of the knower, the known, and the knowing, and without even self-consciousness’; nirvikalpakaḥ jñatṛjñānādivikalpamedalayāpekṣaḥ; nocaccetaḥ praviśa sahasā nirvikalpesamādhau Bh. 3. 61; Ve. 1. 23. –7. (in phil.) not arising from the relation of the qualifier and the qualified, (viśeṣaṇaviśeṣyasaṁbaṁdhānavagāhi pratyakṣaṁ jñānaṁ) said of knowledge not derived from the senses, as ghaṭatva. (–lpaṁ) ind. without hesitation or wavering. –vikāra a. 1. unchanged, unchangeable, immutable. –2. not disposed; M. 5. 14. –3. disinterested; Rs. 2. 28. (– raḥ) the Supreme deity. –vikāsa a. unblown. –vighna a. uninterrupted, unobstructed, free from impediments. (–ghnaṁ) absence of impediment. –vicāra a. not reflecting, thoughtless, inconsiderate; re re svairiṇi nirvicārakavite māsmatprakāśībhava Chandr. 1. 2. (–raṁ) ind. thoughtlessly, unhesitatingly. –vicikitsa a. free from doubt or reflection. –viceṣṭa a. motionless, insensible. –vitarka a. unreflecting. –vinoda a. without amusement, void of pastime, diversion or solace; Me. 86. — viṁdhyā N. of a river in the Vindhya hills; Me. 28. –vimarśa a. void of reflection, thoughtless. –vivara a. 1. having no opening or cavity. –2. without interstices or interval, close, compact; Śi. 9. 44. –vivāda a. 1. not contending or disagreeing. –2. undisputed, not contradicted or disputed, universally acknowledged. –viveka a. indiscreet, void of judgment, wanting in discrimination, foolish. –viśaṁka a. fearless, undaunted, confident; Ms. 7. 176; Pt. 1. 85. –viśeṣa a. 1. showing or making no difference, undiscriminating, without distinction; nirviśeṣā vayaṁ tvayi Mb., nirviśeṣo viśeṣaḥ Bh. 3. 50 ‘a difference without distinction’. –2. having no difference, same, like, not differing from (oft. in comp.); nirviśeṣākṛti ‘having the same form’; pravātanīlotpalanirviśeṣaṁ Ku. 1. 46; sa nirviśeṣapratipattirāsīt R. 14. 22. –3. indiscriminate, promiscuous. (–ṣaḥ) absence of difference. (nirviśaṣaṁ and nirviśeṣeṇa are used adverbially in the sense of ‘without difference’, ‘equally’, ‘indiscriminately’; svagṛhanirviśeṣamatra sthīyatāṁ H. 1; R. 5. 6.). — viśeṣaṇa a. without attributes. –viṣa a. poisonless (as a snake); nirviṣā ḍuṁḍubhāḥ smṛtāḥ. –viṣaya a. 1. expelled or driven away from one’s home, residence or proper place; manonirviṣayārthakāmayā Ku. 5. 38, R. 9. 32. –2. having no scope or sphere of action; kiṁca evaṁ kāvyaṁ praviralaviṣayaṁ nirviṣayaṁ vā syāt S. D. 1. –3. not attached to sensual objects, (as mind). –viṣāṇa a. destitute of horns. –vihāra a. having no pleasure. –vīja, –bīja a. 1. seedless. –2. impotent. –3. causeless. –vīra a. 1. deprived of heroes; nirvīramurvītalaṁ P. R. 1. 31. –2. cowardly. — vīrā a woman whose husband and children are dead. –vīrya a. powerless, feeble, unmanly, impotent; nirvīryaṁ guruśāpabhāṣitavaśāt kiṁ me tavevāyudhaṁ Ve. 3. 34. –vṛkṣa a. treeless. –vṛṣa a. deprived of bulls. –vega a. not moving, quiet, calm. –vetana a. honorary, unsalaried. — veda a. not acknowleding the Vedas, an atheist, infidel. –veṣṭanaṁ a weaver’s shuttle. –vaira a. free from enmity, amicable, peaceable. (– raṁ) absence of enmity. –vyaṁjana a. 1. straight-forward. –2. without condiment. (–ne ind.) plainly, in a straight-forward or honest manner. — vyatha a. 1. free from pain. –2. quiet, calm. –vyapekṣa a. indifferent to, regardless of; R. 13. 25; 14. 39. –vyalīka a. 1. not hurting or offending. –2. without pain. –3. pleased, doing anything willingly. –4. sincere, genuine, undissembling. –vyāghra a. not haunted or infested by tigers. –vyāja a. 1. candid, upright, honest, plain. –2. without fraud, true, genuine. –3. got by heroism or daring deeds (not by fraud or cowardly conduct); Māl. 5. 12. –4. not hypocritical; Bh. 2. 82. (–jaṁ ind.) plainly, honestly, candidly; Amaru. 79. –vyāpāra a. 1. without employment or business, free from occupation; R. 15. 56. –2. motionless; U. 6. –vraṇa a. 1. unhurt, without wounds. –2. without rents. –vrata a. not observing vows. –himaṁ cessation of winter. –heti a. weaponless. –hetu a. causeless, having no cause or reason. –hnīka a. 1. shameless, impudent. –2. bold, daring. |
रजत – rajata | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rajata mfn. (cf. 2. “ṛjra”) whitish, silver-coloured, silvery (“-taṁ
hiraṇyam”, “whitish gold” i.e. silver) mfn. silver, made of silver rajata n. (m. g. “ardharcodi”) silver &c. &c. rajata n. (only gold rajata n. a pearl ornament rajata n. ivory rajata n. blood rajata n. an asterism rajata n. N. of a mountain and of a lake. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 rajata a. [raṁj atac nalopaḥ Uṇ. 3. 111] (1) Silvery, made of silver. (2) Whitish. –taṁ (1) Silver; śuktau rajatamidamiti jñānaṁ bhramaḥ; Ki. 5. 41; N. 22. 52. (2) Gold. (3) A pearl-ornament or necklace. (4) Blood. (5) Ivory. (6) An asterism, a constellation. (7) A monntain. — Comp. –adriḥ N. of Kailāsa. –kūṭaḥ N. of a peak of the Malaya mountain. –dyutiḥ N. of Hanumat. –prasthaḥ N. of Kailāsa. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch rajata (von raj = 5. arj wie arjuna und rajas) UṆĀDIS. 3, 111. 1) adj. “weisslich, silberfarbig” (AK. 3, 4, 14, 82. H. an. 3, 287. MED. t. 143); “silbern”: ṛjramukṣaṇyāyane rajataṁ harayāṇe. rathaṁ yuktamasanāma suṣāmaṇi ṚV. 8, 25, 22. (puram) rajatāmantarikṣamakurvata AIT. BR. 1, 23. VS. 23, 37. rajataṁ hiraṇyam “weissliches Gold” d. h. “Silber” TS. 1, 5, 1, 2. ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 7. 13, 4, 2, 10. 14, 1, 3, 14. KĀṬH. 10, 4. suvarṇarajatau rukmau ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 3, 11. TBR. 1, 5, 10, 1. 7. 8, 9, 1. pātra 2, 2, 9, 7. 3, 9, 6, 5. niṣka PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 1, 14. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 3, 15. CHĀṆD. UP. 3, 19, 1. — 2) m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. zu belegen nur das n. a) “Silber” AK. 2, 9, 97. H. 1043. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 17. 5, 5. AV. 5, 28, 1. 13, 4, 51. AIT. BR. 7, 12. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 2, 37. 26, 2. 20. KAUŚ. 16. CHĀND. UP. 4, 17, 7. ṢAḌV. BR. 6, 6. M. 8, 321. 11, 57. 167. R. 1, 53, 11. suvarṇarajataiḥ 2,32,14. 94,5. SUŚR.1,5,2. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 64,1. KIR.5,41. NAIṢ 22,52. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 282,a,28. — b) “Gold” H. 1045. AK. 3, 4, 14, 82 soll KṢĪRASVĀMIN nach AUFRECHT hemni st. hāre lesen. — c) “Perlenschmuck” AK. 3, 4, 14, 82.H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 5. — d) “Blut.” — e) “Elfenbein.” — f) “ein best. Berg” (als neutr.! vgl. rajatakūṭa u.s.w.). — g) “ein best. See” (als neutr.!) H. an. — h) “Sternbild” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — Vgl. mahā-. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 rajata rajata (cf. arjuna, rañj, and rāj), I. adj. White. II. n. 1. White, the colour. 2. Silver, Kir. 5, 41; Rājat. 5, 482. 3. Gold. 4. Ivory. 5. Blood. 6. A necklace. 7. The name of the mountain Kailāsa. 8. An asterism. — Comp. mahā-, n. gold. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 rajata a. whitish, silver-coloured, silvery; n. silver. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 rajata raj-ata, a. [raj = arj] silvery. whitish (V.); made of silver (V.); n. silver: -kūṭa, N. of a peak in the Malaya range; -daṁṣṭra, m. N. of a fairy; -parvata, m. mountain of silver (sp. an artificial one as a gift for Brāhmans); -pātrā, n. silver vessel; -bhājana, n. id.; -maya, a. (ī) made of silver; -acala, -adri, m. silver mountain, ep. of Kailāsa. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 rajata ranja–atac nalopaḥ . 1 rūpye amaraḥ . 2 gaje 3 dante 4 rudhire 5 hāre 6 śaile 7 svarṇe 8 dhavale ca hemaca° . 9 śuklaguṇavati tri° . rūpyadhātorutpattyādi bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā tripurasya badhārthāya nirnimiṣairvilocanaiḥ . nirīkṣayāmāsa śivaḥ krodhena paripūritaḥ . agnistatkālamapatattasyaikasmādvilocanāt . tatorudraḥ samabhavadvaiśvānara iva jvalan . dvitīyādapatannetrādaśruvindustu vāmakāt . tasmādrajatamutpannamuktakarmasu yojayet . kṛtrimañca bhavettaddhi vaṅgādirasayogataḥ . rūpyantu rajataṁ tārañcandrakānti sitaprabham . guru snigdhaṁ mṛdu śvetaṁ dāhe chede ghanaṁ kṣamam . varṇāḍhyaṁ candravat svacchaṁ rūpyaṁ navaguṇaṁ śubham . kaṭhinaṁ kṛtrimaṁ rūkṣaṁ raktaṁ pītadalaṁ laghu . dāhacchedaghanairnaṣṭaṁ kapyaṁ duṣṭaṁ prakīrtitam . tāraṁ śarīrasya karoti tāpaṁ śataṁ ghanaṁ yacchati śukranāśam . vīryaṁ balaṁ hanti tanośca puṣṭiṁ mahāgadān śoṣayati hyaśuddham . sthānāntare tatraiva tasya śodhanavidhiḥ pattalīkṛtapattrāṇi tārasyāgnau pratāpavet . niṣiñcettaptataptāni taile takre ca kāñjike . gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ kaṣāyeca tridhā tridhā . evaṁ rajatapattrāṇāṁ viśuddhiḥ samprajāyate . athāśuddhasya rūpyasya doṣamāha rūpya tvaśuddhaṁ prakaroti tāpaṁ vibandhakaṁ vīryabalakṣayañca . dehasya puṣṭiṁ harate tanoti roṣāṁstataḥ śodhanamasya kuryāt . atha rūpyamāraṇavidhiḥ bhāgaikaṁ tālakaṁ madyaṁ yāmamamlena kenacit . tena bhāgatrayaṁ tārapattrāṇi parilepayet . dhṛtvā mūṣāḥ puṭe ruddhvā puṭet triṁśadvanopalaiḥ . samuddhṛtya punastālaṁ dattvā ruddhvā puṭe pacet . evaṁ caturdaśapuṭaistārambhasma prajāyate . athānya prakāraḥ snuhīkṣīreṇa saṁpiṣṭaṁ mākṣikaṁ tena lepayet . tālakasya prakāreṇa tārapattrasya buddhimān . puṭeccaturdaśa puṭaistārambhasma prajāyate . evaṁ māritasya rūpyasya guṇaḥ raupyaṁ śītaṁ kaṣāyañca svādu pākarasaṁ saram . vayasaḥ sthāpanaṁ snigdhaṁ lekhanaṁ vātapittajit . pramehādikarogāṁśca nāśayatyacirād dhruvam . |
राम – rāma | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rāma mf (“ā”) n. (prob. “causing rest”, and in most meanings fr. “ram”)
dark, dark-coloured, black (cf. “rātri”) (“rāmaḥ śakuniḥ”. a black bird, crow mf (“ā”) n. white (?) mf (“ā”) n. pleasing, pleasant, charming, lovely, beautiful &c. rāma m. a kind of deer rāma m. a horse rāma m. a lover rāma m. pleasure, joy, delight rāma m. N. of Varuṇa. rāma m. N. of various mythical personages (in Veda two Rāmas are mentioned with the patr. Mārgaveya and Aupatasvini; another Rāmas with the patr. Jāmadagnya [cf. below] is the supposed author of ; in later times three Rāmas are celebrated, viz. 1. Paraśu-rāma [q.v.], who forms the 6th Avatāra of Viṣṇu and is sometimes called Jāmadagnya, as son of the sage Jamad-agni by Reṇukā, and sometimes Bhārgava, as descended from Bhṛigu; 2. Rāma-candra [see below]; 3. Bala-rāma [q.v.], “the strong Rāma”, also called Halāyudha and regarded as elder brother of Kṛiṣṇa [ 112] accord. to Jainas a Rāma is enumerated among the 9 white Balas; and in a Rāmas is mentioned among the 7 ṛiṣis of the 8th Manv- antara) &c &c. N. of a king of Malla-pura rāma m. of a king of śṛiṅga-vera and patron of Nāgeśa rāma m. of various authors and teachers (also with “ācārya, upādhyāya, kavi, cakra-vartin, jyotir-vid, jyau-” “tiṣaka, tarka-vāg-īśa, dīkṣita, daiva- jṇa, paṇḍita, bhaṭṭa, bhaṭṭācārya, vājapeyin, śarman, śāstrin, saṁyamin, sūri” &c.) rāma m. N. of the number “three” (on account of the 3 Rāmas) (“rāmasya iṣuḥ”, a kind of cane = “rāmakaṇḍa” rāma pl. N. of a people rāma mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a beautiful woman, any young and charming woman, mistress, wife, any woman &c. (for comp. see p.878) mf (“ā”) n. a dark woman i.e. a woman of low origin mf (“ā”) n. N. of various plants (Jonesia Asoka; Aloe Perfoliata; Asa Foetida &c.) vermilion mf (“ā”) n. red earth mf (“ā”) n. a kind of pigment (= “gorocanā”) mf (“ā”) n. a river mf (“ā”) n. a kind of metre rāma mf (“ā”) n. (in music) a kind of measure mf (“ā”) n. N. of an Apsaras mf (“ā”) n. of a daughter of Kumbhāṇḍa mf (“ā”) n. of the mother of the ninth Arhat of the present Ava-sarpiṇī rāma mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. darkness, night rāma n. id. rāma n. the leaf of Laurus Cassia rāma n. Chenopodium Album rāma n. = “kuṣṭha” Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 rāma a. [ram kartari ghañ ṇa vā] (1) Pleasing, delighting, rejoicing. (2) Beautiful, lovely, charming. (3) Obscure; dark-coloured, black. (4) White. –maḥ 1 N. of three celebrated personages; (a) Paraśurāma, son of Jamadagni; (b) Balarāma, son of Vasudeva and brother of Kṛṣṇa, q. q. v. v.; (c) Rāmachandra or Sītārāma, son of Daśaratha and Kausalyā and the hero of the Rāmayaṇa; (the word is thus derived in Purāṇas: — rāśabdo viśvavacano maścāpīśvaravācakaḥ . viśvādhīneśvaro yo hi tena rāmaḥ prakīrtitaḥ ..). [When quite a boy, he with his brother was taken by Viśvāmitra, with the permission of Daśaratha, to his hermitage to protect his sacrifices from the demons that obstructed them. Rāma killed them all with perfect ease, and received from the sage several miraculous missiles as a reward. He then accompanied Viśvāmitra to the capital of Janaka where he married Sītā having performed the wonderful feat of bending Siva’s bow, and then returned to Ayodhya. Daśaratha, seeing that Rāma was growing fitter and fitter to rule the kingdom, resolved to install him as heir-apparent. But, on the eve of the day of coronation, his favourite wife Kaikeyi, at the instigation of her wicked nurse Manthara, asked him to fulfil the two boons he had formerly promised to her, by one of which she demanded the exile of Rāma for fourteen years and by the other the installation of her own son Bharata as Yuvarāja. The king was terribly shocked, and tried his best to dissuade her from her wicked demands, but was at last obliged to yield. The dutiful son immediately prepared to go into exile accompanied by his beautiful young wife Sītā and his devoted brother Lakṣmaṇa. The period of his exile was eventful, and the two brothers killed several powerful demons and at last roused the jealousy of Rāvaṇa himself. The wicked demon resolved to try Rāma by carring off his beauteous wife for whom he had conceived an ardent passion, and accomplished his purpose being assisted by Mārīcha. After several fruitless inquiries as to her whereabouts, Hanumat ascertained that she was in Laṅkā and persuaded Rāma to invade the island and kill the ravisher. The monkeys built a bridge across the ocean over which Rāma with his numerous troops passed, conquered Lanka, and killed Rāvaṇa along with his whole host of demons. Rāma, attended by his wife and friends in battle, triumphantly returned to Ayodhyā where he was crowned king by Vasiṣṭha. He reigned long and righteously and was succeeded by his son Kuśa. Rāma is said to be the seventh incarnation of Viṣṇu; cf. Jayadeva: –vitarasi dikṣu raṇe dikpatikamanīyaṁ daśamukhamaulibaliṁ ramaṇīyaṁ . keśava dhṛtaraghupatirūpa jaya jagadīśa hare Gīt. (1)]. (2) A kind of deer. (3) N. of Aruṇa. (4) A lover. (5) A horse. –maṁ (1) Darkness. (2) Leprosy (kuṣṭhaṁ). (3) A tamāla leaf. — Comp. –anujaḥ N. of a celebrated reformer, founder of a Vedāntic sect and author of several works. He was a Vaiṣṇava. –ayanaṁ (ṇaṁ) 1. the adventures of Rāma. –2. N. of a celebrated epic by Vālmīki which contains about 24000 verses in seven Kāṇḍas or books. –īśvaraḥ N. of a sacred place of pilgrimage. –giriḥ N. of a mountain; (cakre) snigdhacchāyāttaruṣu vasatiṁ rāmagiryāśrameṣu Me. 1. –cadraḥ, –bhadraḥ N. of Rāma, son of Daśaratha. –janman n. the birth or birth-day of Rāma. –dūtaḥ 1. N. of Hanumat. –2. a monkey. ( –tī) a kind of basil. –navamī the ninth day in the bright half of Chaitra, the anniversary of the birth of Rāma. –pūgaḥ a kind of betel-nut tree. –vallabhaḥ the birchtree. –sakhaḥ N. of Sugrīva. –setuḥ ‘the bridge of Rāma’, a bridge of sand between the Indian peninsula and Ceylon now called Adam’s bridge. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch rāma (wohl desselben Ursprungs wie rātrī) 1) adj. (f. ā) “dunkelfarbig, schwarz” NIR. 12, 13. AK. 3, 4, 23, 143. H. 1397. an. 2, 334. MED. m. 26. fg. HALĀY. 4, 49. rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. Schaf 12, 2, 19. nāsya rāma (= ramaṇīyaḥ putraḥ Comm.) ucchiṣṭaṁ pibet TAITT. ĀR. 5, 8, 13. rāmā “eine Dunkle” d. i. “ein Weib gemeiner Herkunft”: nāgniṁ citvā rāmāmupeyāt TS. 5, 6, 8, 3. TAITT. ĀR. 5, 8, 13. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 27. Auch die Bedeutung 2. rāma 2) “c)” greek wäre indessen hier möglich. Nach AK. H. an. und MED. auch “weiss.” — 2) m. a) “eine Hirschart” AK. 2, 5, 11. TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. an. MED. — b) “Pferd” MED. — c) N. pr. eines Mannes ṚV. 10, 93, 14. mit dem patron. Mārgaveya AIT. BR. 7, 27. 34. Aupatasvini ŚAT. BR. 4, 6, 1, 7. Jāmadagnya, Verfassers von ṚV. 10, 110. Im Epos und später erscheinen “drei” Rāma (daher rāma als Bez. “der Zahl drei” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 20), von denen die beiden ersten für Incarnationen Viṣṇu’s gelten: a) mit dem patron. Jāmadagnya oder Bhārgava, ein Sohn der Reṇukā, auch paraśurāma genannt, TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. 848. H. an. MED. (wo raiṇukeye st. vaiṇukeye zu lesen ist). rāmaḥ śastrabhṛtāmaham (vgl. HARIV. 5869) sagt Kṛṣṇa BHAG. 10, 31. MBH. 1, 272. 2612. 3, 8658. 8, 1584. 12, 1715. fgg. 12948. HARIV. 2313. fgg. 5869. fg. rāmarāmavivāda R. 1, 3, 11 (5 GORR.). 74, 22. fg. 76, 1. R. GORR. 1, 77, 23. 37. RAGH. 11, 68. — b) mit dem patron. Rāghava oder Dāśarathi TRIK. 2, 8, 3. 3, 3, 302. H. 703. H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 11197. 15933. 12, 12949. HARIV. 822. 2324. fgg. 3065. fgg. 5871. 7373. R. 1, 1, 10. 17. 20. rāmarāmavivāda 3, 11 (5 GORR.). ramayatyeva sa guṇairudāraistairimāḥ prajāḥ. yasmādato rāma iti nāmaitattasya viśrutam.. R. GORR. 1, 1, 22. 6, 102. RAGH. 11, 68. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 30. VP. 384. BHĀG. P. 9, 10. fgg. Spr. 2630. rāmo hemamṛgaṁ ma rvetti 2631. ramante yogino ‘nante satyānande cidātmani. iti rāmapadenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate.. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 286. — g) = Balarāma, Halāyudha, ein älterer Bruder Kṛṣṇa’s AK. 1, 1, 1, 18. 3, 4, 23, 143. H. 224. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 29. BHĀG. P. 1, 11, 17. 10, 1, 8. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 268. 281. 284. 289. erscheint bei den Jaina unter den 9 “weissen” (s. oben u. 1) Bala’s H. 698. — Rāma unter den sieben Weisen eines Manu HARIV. 453. MĀRK. P. 80, 4. Rāma ist ein auch später häufig vorkommender Name: so heisst z. B. ein Sohn Tārāvaloka’s und einer Mādrī und Zwillingsbruder Lakṣmaṇa’s KATHĀS. 113, 32. verschiedene Lehrer, Autoren u.s.w. BURN. Intr. 567 (neben bhadanta-). COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,49. Verz. d. B. H. No. 109. 833. Ind. St.8,389. HALL 84. 119. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 126,b, No. 220. 129,b, No. 234. 148,a,9. 151,b, No. 321. fgg. 335,b, No. 788. 341,b, N. 358,a, No. 853. 386,a, No. 505. ein Fürst von Mallapura 148,b,15. 18. von Śṛñgavera 165, “a”, 7. 178, “a”, 16. – RĀJA-TAR. 8, 785. KṢITĪŚ. 10, 7. fgg. — d) Bein. Varuṇa’s MED. — e) pl. N. pr. eines Volkes VP. 177. — 3) f. ā a) “ein Weib niedriger Herkunft”; s. u. 1). — b) = hiṅgu “Asa foetida” H. an. MED. = hiṅgula “Mennig” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī “Dunkel, Nacht”: uṣā na rāmīraruṇairaporṇute ṚV. 2, 34, 11. — 5) n. a) “Dunkel”: agnī ruśadbhirvarṇairabhi rāmamasthāt ṚV. 10, 3, 3. — b) = vāstuka (“Chenopodium album”) und kuṣṭha (in welcher Bed.?) H. an. MED. = tamālapattra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. adho-, paraśu-, bala-, bhadanta-, maṇi-, manasā-. rāma (von ram) 1) nom. act. “Lust, Freude”: svakuṭumba- adj. BHĀG. P. 7, 6, 14. — 2) oxyt. nom. ag. gaṇa jvalādi zu P. 3, 1, 140. a) adj. (f. a) “erfreuend, entzückend, lieblich, reizend” AK. 3, 4, 23, 143. H. an. 2, 334. MED. m. 26. fg. rāmasya lokarāmasya R. 1, 19, 20. bhāvena rāmā MBH. 1, 1812. R. 2, 44, 24. KATHĀS. 65, 27. mṛgī MĀRK. P. 65, 22. rāmādrāmaṁ jagadabhūdrāme rājyaṁ praśāsati “lieblicher als lieblich” MBH. 7, 2246. BHAṬṬ. 10, 2. NALOD. 1, 5. — b) m. “Liebhaber” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 19, 5. — c) f. ā a) “eine Schöne, ein junges reizendes Weib, Geliebte, Frau” AK. 2, 6, 1, 4. TRIK. 2, 6, 1. H. 505. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 326. KAṬHOP. 1, 25. MBH. 1, 3039. R. 5, 11, 20. RAGH. 5, 49. 12, 23. 16, 15. VIKR. 114. Spr. 24. 691. 1456. 2629. 2651. 4817. 4931. 5274. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 19, 5. GĪT. 1, 44. KATHĀS. 18, 12. 56, 425. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 370. arundhatī satīnāṁ tu rāmāsu ca tilottamā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,36. BHĀG. P.3,23,40. 44.4,26,14. 28,59. PAÑCAR.2,3,32.4,5. 48. DHŪRTAS. 87,15. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = śvetakaṇṭakārī, gṛhakanyā, ārāmaśītalā, aśoka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “ein best. Pigment” (gorocanā) RĀJAN. — d) “Röthel, rubrica” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — e) “Fluss” MED. auch in H. an. ist wohl hiṅgu nadīstriyoḥ zu lesen. — z) “ein best. Metrum”: metrical sequenceJourn. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 514. — h) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 183. einer Tochter Kumbhāṇḍa’s HARIV. 9973. 11026. fg. der Mutter des 9ten Arhant’s der gegenwärtigen Avasarpiṇī H. 39. — Vgl. su-. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 rāma (ŚRĪ RĀMA). The seventh incarnation of Mahāviṣṇu, a very powerful king of the solar dynasty. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 rāma rāma, i. e. ram + a, I. adj. 1. Beautiful. 2. Black. 3. White. II. m. 1. A proper name, particularly the hero of the Rāmāyaṇa. 2. A name of Varuṇa. 3. A horse. 4. A sort of deer. III. f. mā, A beautiful female, Vikr. d. 114; Amar. 58. — Comp. paraśu-, m. the first of the three renowned Rāmas, the son of Jamadagni, Prab. 5, 5 (cf. Chr. 16, 17). bala-, m. the third Rāma, the half-brother of Kṛṣṇa, MBh. 1, 7912. Cf. rāma-candra. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 rāma rām-a, a. dark-coloured, black (V.); pleasing, delightful, charming, lovely; m. N.: in. V. two Rāmas are mentioned (w. the pat. Mārgaveya and Aupatasvini) and in E. three are distinguished: (a) Rāma Jāmadagnya or Bhārgava = Paraśu-rāma; (b) Bala-rāma or Halāyudha (elder brother of Kṛṣṇa); (c) Rāma Rāghava or Dāśarathi = Rāmacandra or Sītā-rāma (hero of the Rāmāyaṇa); freequent N. in later C.; n. [causing to rest: ram] darkness (RV.1). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 rāma pu° rama–kartari ghañ ṇa vā . 1 paraśurāme 2 daśarathajyeṣṭhaputre śrīrāme 3 balarāme ca bhārgavo rāghavo gopastrayo rāmāḥ pakīrtitā vahnipu° . rāmaśabdaniruktiḥ rāpabdā viśvavacano maścāpīśvaravācakaḥ . viśvānādhīśvaro yo hi tena rāmaḥ prakortita brahmava° ja° kha° 110 a° . 4 manohare 5 site 6 asite ca tri° medi° . 7 vāstūkaśāke 8 kuṣṭhe (kuḍa) na° medi° 9 tamālapatre na° rājani° . |
रूपम् – rūpam | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
rūpam [rūp-ka bhāve ac vā] (1) Form, figure, appearance; virūpaṁ rūpavaṁtaṁ vā pumānityeva bhuṁjate Pt. 1. 143; so surūpa, kurūpa. (2) Form or the quality of colour (one of the 24 guṇas of the Vaiśeṣikas); cakṣurtātragrāhyajātimān guṇo rūpaṁ Tarka K; (it is of six kinds: –śukla, kṛṣṇa, pīta, rakta, harita, kapila, or of seven, if citra be added). (3) Any visible object or thing. (4) A handsome form or figure, beautiful form, beauty, elegance, grace; mānupīṣu kathaṁ vā syādasya rūpasya saṁbhavaḥ S. 1. 26; vidyā nāma narasya rūpamadhikaṁ Bh. 2. 20; rūpaṁ jarā haṁti &c. (5) Natural state or condition, nature, property, characteristic, essence. (6) Mode, manner. (7) A sign, feature. (8) Kind, sort, species (9) An image, a reflected image. (10) Similitude, resemblance. (11) Specimen, type, pattern. (12) An inflected form, the form of a noun or a verb derived from inflection (declension or conjugation). (13) The number one, an arithmetical unit. (14) An integer. (15) A drama, play, see rūpaka. (16) Acquiring familiarity with any book by learning it by heart or by frequent recitation. (17) Cattle. (18) A sound, a word. (19) A known quantity. (20) A beast. (21) A verse. (22) A name. (23) The white colour. (rūpa is frequently used at the end of comp. in the sense of ‘formed or composed of,’ ‘consisting of,’ ‘in the form of,’ ‘namely;’ ‘having the appearance or colour of,’ taporūpaṁ dhanaṁ; dharmarūpaḥ sakhā &c.). — Comp. –adhibodhaḥ the perception of form or colour of any object by the senses. –abhigrāhita a. caught in the act, caught red-handed. –asraḥ Cupid. –ājīvā a harlot, prostitute, courtezan. –āśrayaḥ an exceedingly beautiful person. –iṁdriyaṁ the organ which perceives form and colour, the eye. –uccayaḥ a collection of lovely forms; S. 2. 9. –kāraḥ, –kṛt m. a sculptor. –grahaḥ the eye. –jña a. perceiving forms, distinguishing visible objects. –tattvaṁ inherent property, essence. –dhara a. of the form of, disguised as; jugopa gorūpadharāmivormīm R. 2. 3. –dhārin a. 1. having a form or shape. –2. possessed of beauty, lovely. (–m.) an actor. –nāśanaḥ an owl. –bhāgānubaṁdhaḥ the addition of a fraction to a unit. –lāvaṇyaṁ exquisiteness of form, elegance. –viparyayaḥ disfigurement, morbid change of bodily form. –śālin a. beautiful. –saṁpad, –saṁpattiḥ f. perfection or excellence of form, richness of beauty, superb beauty; udapādi cāsyā rūpasaṁpadā āvirbhūtavismayasya tasya manasi K. |
ललाम – lalāma | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899lalāma mf (“ī”) n. having a mark or spot on the forehead, marked with
paint &c. (as cattle) mf (“ī”) n. having any mark or sign mf (“ī”) n. beautiful, charming mf (“ī”) n. eminent, best of its kind (f. “ā”) lalāma m. n. ornament, decoration, embellishment &c. lalāma mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a female demon lalāma m. a kind of ornament for the ears lalāma n. (only a coloured mark on the forehead of a horse or bull lalāma n. a sectarial mark lalāma n. any mark or sign or token lalāma n. a line, row lalāma n. a flag, banner lalāma n. a tail lalāma n. a horse lalāma n. = “prabhāva”. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 lalāma a. (mī f.) (1) Beautiful, lovely, charming. (2) Having a mark on the forehead marked with a blaze. –maṁ (1) An ornament for the forehead, an ornament or decoration in general; (m. also in this sense); ahaṁ tu tāmāśramalalāmabhūtāṁ śakuṁtalāmadhikṛtya bravīmi S. 2; Śi. 4. 28. (2) Anything the best of its kind. (3) A mark on the forehead. (4) A sign, symbol, mark in general. (5) A banner, flag. (9) A row, series, line. (7) A tail. (8) A mane. (9) Eminence, dignity, beauty. (10) A horn. –maḥ A horse. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch lalāma 1) adj. (f. lalāmī) “mit einer Blässe (Stirnfleck) versehen”, vom Vieh. AV. 15, 1, 1. TS. 2, 1, 3, 1. 4, 1. 7, 3, 17, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 1, 33. lalāmairharibhiḥ MBH. 7, 962. dhūmra- TS. 2, 1, 10, 1. kṛṣṇa- KĀṬH. 13, 5. Ueberh. “mit einem (hellen) Fleck versehen”: kṛṣṇāṁllalāmāṁścāmarān śuklāṁścānyāñchaśiprabhān (es ist der “Schweif”, nicht das “Thier” selbst gemeint) MBH. 2, 1861. tamas 12, 13192 (= cintāmaṇiratnavadbhāvarūpa NĪLAK.). — 2) m. n. “Schmuck (Stirnschmuck), Zierde”: sudarśanaṁ vai devatānāṁ lalāmam MBH. 5, 1882. HARIV. 16065. BHĀG. P. 3, 14, 49. 22, 18. 5, 3, 3. 6, 6. unbestimmt ob lalāma oder lalāman: jagrāha prathamaṁ rāmo lalāmapratimaṁ (la- = dhvaja NĪLAK.) halam HARIV. 5037. āśramalalāmabhūtā ŚĀK. 25, 4. KATHĀS. 101, 61. DAŚAK. 68, 2. BHĀG. P. 3, 16, 9. 5, 16, 16. ŚIŚ. 4, 28. Vgl. u. 4). — 3) f. ī a) Bez. einer Unholdin AV. 1, 18, 1. — b) “ein best. Ohrenschmuck” ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. “Blässe, Stirnfleck” AK. 3, 4, 23, 145 (aśvabhūṣāḥ aśvalalāṭe ‘nyavarṇacihnam, gavādīnāṁ lalāṭacitram d. i. -cihnam BHAR. nach ŚKDR.). “Mal, Sectenzeichen” (puṇḍra) AK. H. an. 3, 406. MED. m. 51. HALĀY. 5, 69. “Zeichen” (cihna, lakṣman, lāñchana) H. an. MED. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 184,b,7. “Banner, Flagge” (dhvaja, ketu, patākā) AK. H. an. MED. VYUTP. 159. “Schmuck” (bhūṣā) H. an. MED. HALĀY. VYUTP. “eine Zierde unter seines Gleichen, der Beste in seiner Art” (pradhāna, prādhānya) AK. H. an. MED. = prabhāva H. an. MED. HALĀY. = ramya H. an. MED. “Schweif” AK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. “Horn; Pferd” H. an. MED. HALĀY. — Vgl. lālāmika. lalāma 1) ṚV. 1, 100, 16. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 lalāma A division among horses. The white patch on the forehead of a horse is also called Lalāma and so horses with lalāma are called Lalāmas. (Śloka 13, Chapter 13, Droṇa Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 lalāma lalāma (akin to lal), I. n., also lalāman lalāman, 1. A mark. 2. A flag. 3. An ornament, Śāk. 25, 4. 4. A mane. 5. A tail. 6. A line. 7. Majesty, dignity. 8. Chief, principal, Daśak. in Chr. 184, 18. II. f. mī, An ornament worn in the ear. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 lalāma f. -mī having a blaze or star (cattle); s. ornament, decoration; f. ī N. of a female demon. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 lalāma lalāma, a. (ī) having a forehead mark; m. n. ornament, decoration: -n, n. id. (C.). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 lalāma [n] klī, lalāmam . yathāha rudraḥ . pradhānadhvajaśṛṅgeṣu puṇḍrabāladhilakṣmasu . bhūṣāvājiprabhāveṣu lalāmaṁ syāt lalāma ca .. (pradhāne . yathā, raghuḥ . 5 . 64 . tatra svayaṁvarasamāhṛtarājalokaṁ kanyālalāma kamanīyamajasya lipsoḥ .. puruṣaḥ . iti raghuṭīkāyāṁ mallināthadhṛtayādavaḥ . 5 . 64 ..) Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 lalāma na° lala–ac tamamati ama–aṇ . 1 pradhāne, 2 dhvaje 3 śṛṅge 4 bāladhau 5 cihne 6 bhūṣāyāṁ 7 ramye 8 tilake 9 ghoṭake 10 prabhāve ca medi° . nāntatvamapyasya rudraḥ . |
लोहित – lohita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899lohita mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. (cf. “rohita”) red, red-coloured, reddish &c.
&c. mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. made of copper, copper, metal lohita m. red (the colour), redness lohita m. a partic. disease of the eyelids, SarṅgS. lohita m. a kind of precious stone lohita m. a species of rice lohita m. a sort of bean or lentil lohita m. Dioscorea Purpurea lohita m. Cyprinus Rohita lohita m. a sort of deer lohita m. a snake, serpent lohita m. the planet Mars lohita m. N. of a serpent-demon lohita m. of a man (pl. his descendants) (cf. lohita m. of a country lohita m. of a river (the Brahma-putra) lohita m. of a sea lohita m. of a lake lohita m. (pl.) of a class of gods under the 12th Manu lohita mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of one of the 7 tongues of Agni lohita m. Mimosa Pudica lohita m. a Punar-navā with red flowers lohita mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. (“lohinī”) f. a woman with a red-coloured skin or red with anger lohita n. any red substance lohita n. (also m. g. “ardharcādi”; ifc. f. “ā”), blood &c. &c. (“-taṁ” “kṛ”, to shed blood) lohita n. ruby lohita n. red sanders lohita n. a kind of sandal-wood lohita n. a kind of Agallochum lohita n. an imperfect form of rainbow lohita n. a battle, fight lohita Nom. P. “-tati”, to be or become red Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 lohita a. (lohitā or lohinī f.) [ruh-itac rasya laḥ Tv.] (1) Red, redcoloured; srastāṁsāvatimātralohitatalau bāhū ghaṭotkṣepaṇāt S. 1. 30; Ku. 3. 29; muhuścalatpallavalohinībhiruccaiḥśikhābhiḥ śikhinovalīḍhāḥ Ki. 16. 53. (2) Copper, made of copper. –taḥ (1) The red colour. (2) The planet Mars. (3) A serpent. (4) A kind of deer. (5) N. of the river Brahmaputra. (6) A kind of rice. –tā N. of one of the seven tongues of fire. –taṁ (1) Copper. (2) Blood; Ms. 8. 284. (3) Saffron. (4) Battle. (5) Red sanders. (6) A kind of sandal. (7) An imperfect form of a rainbow. (8) A kind of agallochum. — Comp. –akṣaḥ 1. a red die. –2. a kind of snake. –3. the (Indian) cuckoo. –4. an epithet of Viṣṇu. ( –kṣaṁ) 1. the armpit, thigh-joint; hip. –aṁgaḥ 1. the kāṁpilla tree. –2. the planet Mars. –ayas n. copper. –arman n. a red swelling in the whites of the eyes. –aśokaḥ a variety of Asoka (having red flowers). –aśvaḥ fire. –ānanaḥ an ichneumon. –ārdra a. dripping with blood. –īkṣaṇa a. redeyed. –uda a. having red or bloodred water. –kalmāṣa a. red-spotted. –kṛṣṇa a. dark-red. –kṣayaḥ loss of blood. –grīvaḥ an epithet of Agni. –caṁdanaṁ saffron. –puṣpakaḥ the granate tree. –mṛttikā red chalk. –śatapatraṁ a red lotus-flower. –śavala a. dappled with red. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch lohita (= älterem rohita) UṆĀDIS. 3, 94. 1) adj. f. lohitā (SUŚR. 1, 135, 1) und lohinī VOP. 4, 27. a) “röthlich, roth” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 180. H. 1395. an. 3, 290. fg. (wo wohl varṇabhede st. balabhede zu lesen ist, welches WILSON durch “a form of array” wiedergiebt). MED. t. 148. HALĀY. 4, 48. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. AV. 6, 127, 1. 14, 2, 48. 15, 1, 7. 8. niryāsa TS. 2, 5, 1, 4. lohinī AV. 7, 74, 1. 10, 2, 11. tvac 13, 3, 21. tanū 54. mṛttikā AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 3, 5, 4, 23. 14, 5, 2, 3. KIR. 16, 53. – ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 1, 2. 5, 4, 1. 6, 6, 2, 11. -piṇḍa 14, 6, 11, 3. -rasa 13, 4, 4, 10. -sūtra KAUŚ. 85. aja 19. 35. 39. aśvattha 48. lohitoṣṇīṣa ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 7, 4. GṚHY. 2, 9, 7. roman ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 24. -pāṁsu GOBH. 4, 2, 7. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. M. 5, 6. ghanāḥ MBH. 3, 14269. lohitāditya R. 3, 49, 4. HARIV. 12794. bhūmi SUŚR. 1, 135, 1. lākṣā ṚT. 1, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 15. 65, 2. Ind. St. 8, 273. karman BHĀG. P.4,29,27.5,19,19. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 175,b, No. 398. bhāskaraḥ sarvalohitaḥ R. 4, 60, 17. ati- KUMĀRAS. 3, 29. ŚĀK. 119. atimātra- 29. mṛdu- MAITRJUP. 6, 30. — b) “kupfern, metallen”: pātra KAUŚ. 29. svadhiti AV. 6, 141, 2. GOBH. 3, 6, 6. — 2) m. a) “eine best. Krankheit der Augenlider” ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 87. — b) “ein best. Edelstein” (nicht “Rubin”) Spr. 2693. — c) “eine Reisart” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 228, 10. — d) “Linsen” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — e) “Dioscorea purpurea” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) “ein best. Fisch, Cyprinus Rohita Ham.” — g) “eine best. Hirschart” TRIK. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — h) “Schlange” DHAR. im ŚKDR. — i) “der Planet Mars” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 8. Ind. St. 2, 261. — k) N. pr. a) eines Nāga MBH. 2, 360. — b) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu VP. 268. = surāntara DHAR. im ŚKDR. — g) eines Mannes P. 4, 1, 18. -smṛti MAŚK. Coll. I, 19. pl. “seine Nachkommen” PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 57, 11. HARIV. 1465 (st. lohitā yāmadūtāśca liest die neuere Ausg. lohitāyanapūtāśca, 1771 lesen beide Ausgg. lauhityāḥ). — d) “eines Flusses” (der Brahmaputra) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH. 13, 7647. — e) eines Meeres: lohitasyodadheḥ kanyā krūrā lohitabhojanā MBH. 3, 14366. 14494. raktajalaṁ ghoraṁ lohitaṁ nāma sāgaram. gatvā R. 4, 40, 39; vgl. lohitodo varuṇālayaḥ MBH. 3, 14269. — z) eines Sees: lohite (lohito die neuere Ausg.) hrade HARIV. 9791; vgl. 9145 und LIA. I, 155, N. — h) eines Landes MBH. 2, 1025. — 3) f. lohitā a) Bez. einer der sieben Zungen des Agni GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — b) Bez. zweier Pflanzen: = varāhakrāntā und raktapunarnavā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. lohinī “eine Frau von röthlicher Hautfarbe” HALĀY. 4, 53. JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — 5) n. a) “Kupfer, Metall” AV. 11, 3, 7. — b) “Blut” (auch m. nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 251,a,2 v. u.). AK.2,6,2,15. H. 621. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. AV.9,7,17. 10,9,18. 11,5,25. VS. 39,9. 10. TS.2,1,7,2.4,1,1. yo lohitaṁ karavat “wer Blut vergiesst” 6, 10, 2. TBR. 3, 2, 9, 2. AIT. BR. 2, 14. lohitaṁ duhīta ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 2, 1. 14, 6, 2, 13. KAUŚ. 11. 13. 36. CHĀND. UP. 6, 5, 2. M. 4, 56. 8, 284. MBH. 3, 14366. R. 4, 44, 65. 5, 14, 18. SUŚR. 1, 121, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 59. 67. VET. in LA. (III) 4, 7. salohitā diśaścāsan so v. a. “blutroth gefärbt” MBH. 3, 11399. — c) “Schlacht” H. an. — d) “Safran; rother Sandel”; = gośīrṣa (“eine Art Sandelholz”) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. = pattaṅga, haricandana und tṛṇakuṅkuma RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) “eine best. unvollkommene Form eines Regenbogens” TRIK. — Vgl. a-, ā- (auch ṚT. 1, 21), kṛṣṇa-, dhūmra-, nīla- (adj. auch R. 2, 96, 30), bṛhallohita, vi-, su-, lohitya, lauhitya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 lohita 1 (rohita) I (ROHITA) Son of Hariścandra. (For details see under HARIŚCANDRA). lohita 2 II A king of ancient India. This king was conquered by Arjuna. (Śloka 17, Chapter 27, Vana Parva). lohita 3 III A serpent. This serpent is a member of the court of Varuṇa. (Śloka 8, Chapter 9, Sabhā Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 lohita lohita (= lohita, q. cf.), I. adj., f. tā, or inī, Red, Śāk. d. 29. II. m. 1. Red, the colour. 2. The planet Mars. 3. A sort of deer. 4. A snake. 5. A form of array. 6. A sort of fish, Cyprinus rohita. 7. (m. ?). A kind of mineral, Pañc. i. d. 89. III. n. 1. Blood, Man. 4, 56. 2. War, battle. 3. Red sanders. 4. Saffron. — Comp. dhūmra-, adj. of a grey-red colour, MBh. 13, 753. nīla-, I. adj. blue-red, purple, of a purple colour, Śāk. d. 194. II. m. the name of one of the great periods called Kalpas. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 lohita (f. -tā & lohinī) reddish, red, coppery, metallic. — m. a cert. precious stone, (*a kind of fish*). N. of a serpent-demon etc.; n. copper, metal i.g., blood, *saffron. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 lohita loh-ita [later form of rohita], a. (C. ā; V., C. inī) reddish, red; made of copper or metal (V., rare); m. a kind of gem (not ruby; very rare); planet Mars; n. red substance (V., rare); copper, metal (AV.1); blood (ord. mg.): -ṁ kṛ, shed blood (V.). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 lohita na° ruha itac rasya laḥ . 1 kuṅkume 2 raktacandana 3 raktagośīrṣakabhede medi° . 4 pattaṅge 5 haricandane śabdaca° . 6 tṛṇakuṅkume 7 rudhire ca rājani° 8 yuddhe hemaca° . 9 nadabhede 10 mardane 11 raktavarṇe ca pu° medi° . 12 raktatāyuta tri° . 13 mṛgabhede 14 rohitamatsye 15 sarpe 16 devabhede bharataḥ . 17 masūre śabdaca° 18 raktālau 19 raktaśālau rājani° . 20 vanabhede 21 sarovarabhede brahmaputraśabde dṛśyam . sarvatra jātau striyāṁ ṅīṣ . varṇe tu strītve ṅīp tasya naḥ . lohinī lāhitavarṇayutastriyām . ruha–inan rasya laḥ . rohaṇakartari striyāṁ ṭāp . |
वंशरोचना – vaṁśarocanā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vaṁśarocanā “vaṁśa-rocanā” f. an earthy concretion of a milk white
colour formed in the hollow of a bamboo and called bamboo-manna (also “-locana” Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch vaṁśarocanā f. “Tabaschir” AK. 2, 9, 110. H. 1154. VYUTP. 135. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 vaṁśarocanā strī, (rocate iti . ruca + nandyāditvāt lyuḥ . ṭāp . vaṁśasya rocanā .) svanāmakhyātavaṁśaparvasthitaśvetavarṇauṣadhaviśeṣaḥ . vaṁśalocana iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . tvakkṣīrā 2 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 9 . 109 .. vaṁśalocanā 3 . iti bharataḥ .. tugākṣīrī 4 śubhā 5 vāṁśī 6 vaṁśajā 7 . iti ratnamālā .. kṣīrikā 8 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. tugā 9 tvakkṣīrī 10 śubhrā 11 vaṁśakṣīrī 12 vaiṇavī 13 tvaksārā 14 karmarī 15 śvetā 16 vaṁśakarpūrarocanā 17 tuṅgā 18 rocanikā 19 piṅgā 20 vaṁśaśarkarā 21 . asyā guṇāḥ . rūkṣatvam . kaṣāyatvam . madhuratvam . himatvam . raktaśuddhikāritvam . tāpapittodrekaharatvañca . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. api ca . vaṁśajā vṛṁhaṇī vṛṣyā balyā svādbī ca śītalā . tṛṣṇākāsajvaraśvāsakṣayapittāsrakāmalāḥ . haret kuṣṭhaṁ vraṇaṁ pāṇḍuṁ kaṣāyā vātakṛcchrajit .. iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 vaṁśaro(lo)canā strī vaṁśeṣu rocate ruca–lyu vā rasya laḥ . vaṁśaparvasthite śvetavarṇe karpūrākāre dravye . (vaṁśalocana) . vaṁśajā vṛṁhaṇī vṛṣyā balyā svādvī ca śītalā . tṛṣṇākāsajvaraśvāsakṣayapittāsrakāmalāḥ . haret kuṣṭhaṁ praṇaṁ pāṇḍuṁ kaṣāyavātakṛcchrajit bhāvapra° . |
वंशलोचना – vaṁśalocanā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vaṁśalocanā “vaṁśa-locanā” f. an earthy concretion of a milk white
colour formed in the hollow of a bamboo and called bamboo-manna (also “-locana” Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch vaṁśalocanā f. dass. ŚABDAR. bei WILSON. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 vaṁśalocanā strī, (vaṁśarocanā . rasya laḥ .) vaṁśarocanā . iti hemacandraḥ .. asyā guṇāḥ . kaṣāyamadhurā rūkṣā vātaghnī vaṁśalocanā . tugākṣīrī kṣayaśvāsakāsaghnī madhurā himā .. iti rājavallabhaḥ .. |
विचित्र – vicitra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vicitra “vi-citra” see s.v.
vicitra “vi-citra” mf (“ā”) n. variegated, many-coloured, motley, brilliant &c. mf (“ā”) n. manifold, various, diverse &c. mf (“ā”) n. strange, wonderful, surprising &c. mf (“ā”) n. charming, lovely, beautiful mf (“ā”) n. amusing, entertaining (as a story) mf (“ā”) n. painted, coloured vicitra “vi-citra” mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. manifoldly, variously mf (“ā”) n. charmingly vicitra “vi-citra” m. the Aśoka tree vicitra “vi-citra” m. N. of a king vicitra “vi-citra” m. of a son of Manu Raucya or Deva-sāvarṇi vicitra “vi-citra” m. of a heron vicitra “vi-citra” mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a white deer vicitra “vi-citra” m. colocynth vicitra “vi-citra” m. (in music) a partic. Mūrchanā vicitra “vi-citra” m. N. of a river vicitra “vi-citra” n. variegated colour, party-colour vicitra “vi-citra” n. wonder, surprise vicitra “vi-citra” n. a figure of speech (implying apparently the reverse of the meaning intended) vicitra “vi-citra” n. “-katha” m. “one whose stories are amusing”, N. of a man vicitra “vi-citra” n. “-caritra” mfn. behaving in a wonderful manner vicitra “vi-citra” n. “-cīnāṁśuka” n. variegated China cloth, shot or watered China silk vicitra “vi-citra” n. “-tā” f. “-tva” n. variegation, variety, wonderfulness vicitra “vi-citra” n. “-deha” mfn. having a painted body vicitra “vi-citra” n. elegantly formed vicitra “vi-citra” m. a cloud vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-paśu” m. N. of a poet vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-bhūṣaṇa” m. N. of a Kiṁ-nara vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-mālyābharaṇa” mfn. having variegated garlands and ornaments vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-mauliśrī-cūḍa” m. N. of a prince vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-rūpa” mfn. having various forms, various, diverse vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-varṣin” mfn. raining here and there (not everywhere) vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-vākya-paṭutā” f. great eloquence vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-vāgurocchrāya-maya” mf (“ī”) n. filled with various outspread nets vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-vīrya” m. “of marvellous heroism”, N. of a celebrated king of the lunar race (the son of śāṁtanu by his wife Satya- vatī, and so half-brother of Bhīṣma; when he died childless, his mother requested Vyāsa, whom she had borne before her marriage to the sage Parāśara, to raise up issue to Vicitra-vīrya; so Vyāsa married the two widows of his half-brother, Ambikā and Ambālikā, and by them became the father of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu; cf. 375; 376) vicitra “vi-citra” m. (“-sū” f. “mother of Vicitra-vīrya”, N. of Satya-vatī vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-siṁha” m. N. of a man vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-trāṅga” m. “having variegated limbs or a spotted body”, a peacock vicitra “vi-citra” m. a tiger vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-trāpīḍa” m. N. of a Vidyā-dhara vicitra “vi-citra” m. “-trālaṁkāra-svara” m. N. of a serpent-demon Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 vicitra a. (1) Diversified, variegated, spotted, speckled; Mu. 1. 4. (2) Various, varied. (3) Painted. (4) Beautiful, lovely; kvacidvicitraṁ jalayaṁtramaṁdiraṁ Rs. 1. 2. (5) Wonderful, surprising, strange; hatavidhilasitānāṁ hī vicitro vipākaḥ Śi. 11. 64. –trā A white deer. –traṁ (1) Variegated colour. (2) Surprise. — Comp. –aṁga a. having a spotted body. ( –gaḥ) 1. a peacock. –2. tiger. –deha a. having a lovely body. ( –haḥ) a cloud. –rūpa a. diverse. –vīryaḥ N. of a king of the lunar race. [He was a son of Śantanu by his wife Satyavatī and so half-brother of Bhishma. When he died childless, his mother called Vyāsa (her own son before her marriage), and requested him to raise up issue to Vichitravīrya in accordance with the practice of Niyoga. He complied with the request, and begot on Ambikā and Ambālika, the two widows of his brother, two sons Dhṛtarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu respectively]. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch vicitra (2. vi + citra) 1) adj. (f. ā) Accent eines mit vi- anlautenden comp., dessen zweites Glied ein adj. ist, gaṇa vispaṣṭādi zu P. 6, 2, 24. a) “vielfarbig, bunt, schillernd”: -mālyābharaṇaiḥ MBH. 3, 2114. – veṣābharaṇāḥ R. 1, 9, 22. 2, 39, 17. -vālukajala 55, 31. 91, 21. rukmavinduvicitrābhyāṁ carmabhyām 100, 21. 3, 49, 3. 61, 11. Spr. 2207. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 39. 12, 11. 24, 14. 43, 57. 64, 1. 2. Ind. St. 2, 258. 278. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 12. 2, 1, 36. 3, 23, 14. — b) “verschiedlich, mannichfaltig, verschiedenartig”: surāpānasya niṣkṛtiḥ M. 11, 98. vicitrāyudhapāṇayaḥ MBH. 3, 12092. vanāni 16743. vicitrārthapada (ākhyāna) R. 1, 4, 28 (3, 72 GORR.). 2, 95, 3. 7, 20,12. Spr. 731. 1253 (II). saṁsāra 1623 (II). RĀJA-TAR. 2, 113. Spr. 3276. 3359. 4990. BHĀG. P. 1, 7, 17. 3, 1, 37. 7, 24. 18, 19. 22, 20. 26, 5. 4, 14, 21. 7, 1, 10. SĀH. D. 100. NĪLAK. 114. vicitrādhyāya Verz. d. Oxf. H. 325,a,31. vicitram adv.: upakūjitā BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 4. vicitravikṛtānanāḥ KATHĀS. 46, 201. vicitrakṛtrimāṇi PAÑCAR. 2, 1, 24. nānāvicitrakṛtamaṇḍana CAURAP. 19. — c) “seltsam, absonderlich, wunderbar”: atyadbhutamidaṁ tvadya vicitramābhāti me MBH. 3, 12029. vastuśaktayaḥ Spr. 238 (II). 1019. kimatra vicitram GĪT.8,8. KATHĀS. 49,241. RĀJA-TAR.5,261. SĀH. D. 722. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 250,a,40. vicitrā hi sūtrasya kṛtiḥ pāṇineḥ KĀŚ. zu P. 1, 2, 35. n. “eine Gattung des Paradoxon”: vicitraṁ yatnaścedviparītaḥ phalecchayā KUVALAJ. 107,b. z. B. namanti santastrailokyādapi labdhuṁ samunnatim ebend. PRATĀPAR. 91,b,3. — d) (“durch Abwechselung) reizend, prächtig, schön”: gṛhāṇi R. 1, 6, 26. jalayantramandira ṚT. 1, 2. kṣapāḥ Spr. 1039 (II). śayyā 1391. brahmasabhā PAÑCAR. 1, 10, 94. kathā so v. a. “unterhaltend, amüsant” KATHĀS. 18, 68. 40, 115. 63, 5. 69, 185. HIT. 8, 18. 26, 22. -vākyapaṭutā so v. a. “Beredsamkeit” Spr. 4713. arthavacca vicitraṁ ca na śakyaṁ bahu bhāṣitum 2766. karṇe kalaṁ kimapi rauti śanairvicitram 1884. vicitraṁ gāyanti R. 3, 79, 12. — 2) m. N. pr. a) eines Fürsten MBH. 1, 2697. — b) eines Sohnes des Manu Raucya (Devasāvarṇi) HARIV. 489. MĀRK. P. 94, 31. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 31. — c) eines Reihers HIT. 120, 10. — 3) f. ā “Koloquinthe” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. SIDDH.K.249,b,1. — Vgl. vaicitrya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 vicitra A Kṣatriya King. It is mentioned in Mahābhārata, Ādi Parva, Chapter 67, Stanza 61, that this King was born from a portion of the asura Krodhavaśa. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 vicitra a. variegated, many-coloured; various, manifold, different; extraordinary, strange, wonderful beautiful, surprising, amusing. Abstr. – tā f. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 vicitra vi-citra, a. variegated, many-coloured, brilliant; various, manifold, diverse; strange, wonderful; (varied), charming, lovely, beautiful; entertaining (story): -m, ad.; -katha, m. (telling interesting tales), N.; -tā, f. variety; strangeness; -mālya+ābhar-aṇa, a. having variegated garlands and ornaments; -vākya-paṭu-tā, f. great eloquence; -vāgura+uccrāya-maya, a. (ī) filled with various outspread nets; -vīrya, m. (of marvellous heroism), N. of a son of Śaṁtanu and Satyavatī (after his death, Vyāsa begat Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu, and Vidura with his widow); -siṁha, m. N.; -āpīḍa, m. N. of a fairy. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 vicitra na° viśeṣeṇa citram . 1 karvūravarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° śabdaca° 3 āścarye tri° . 4 mṛgervārau strī rājani° . 5 arthālaṅkārabhede na° alaṅkāraśabde 403 pṛ° dṛśyam . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . bhurjapatravṛkṣe pu° rājani° . |
विशद – viśada | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899viśada “vi-śada” mf (“ā”) n. (prob. fr. 1. “śad”) “conspicuous”, bright,
brilliant, shining, splendid, beautiful, white, spotless, pure (lit. and fig.; “am” ind.) &c. mf (“ā”) n. calm, easy, cheerful (as the mind, the eye, a smile) mf (“ā”) n. clear, evident, manifest, intelligible (compar. “-tara”) mf (“ā”) n. tender, soft (to the touch; as food, wind, odour) viśada “vi-śada” mf (“ā”) n. (ifc.) skilled or dexterous in, fit for mf (“ā”) n. endowed with viśada “vi-śada” m. white (the colour) viśada “vi-śada” m. N. of a king (the son of Jayad-ratha) viśada “vi-śada” n. yellowish sulphurate of iron viśada “vi-śada” n. “-tā” f. clearness, distinctness (v.l.) viśada “vi-śada” n. “-nara-karankāya” (ā. “-yate”), to resemble a white human skull viśada “vi-śada” n. “-prajṇa” mfn. of clear understanding, keen-witted, sagacious viśada “vi-śada” n. “-prabha” mfn. of pure effulgence, shedding pure light viśada “vi-śada” n. “-dātman” mfn. pure-hearted viśada “vi-śada” n. “-dānana” mfn. (ifc.) one whose face is radiant with Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 viśada a. (1) Clear, pure, pellucid, clean, spotless; yogatidrātaviśadaiḥ pāvanairavalokanaiḥ R. 10. 14, 19. 39; 8. 3 praṇayaviśadā dṛṣṭiṁ vaktre dadāti na śaṁki tā Ratn. 3. 9. Ki. 5. 12. (2) White, of a pure, white colour; nirdhautahāragulikāviśadaṁ himāṁbhaḥ R. 5. 70; Ku. 1. 44. 6. 25, Śi. 9. 26, Ki. 4. 23. (3) Bright, shining, beautiful; Ku. 3. 33; Śi. 8. 70. (4) Clear, evident, manifest. (5) Calm, free from anxiety, at ease: jāto mamāyaṁ viśadaḥ prakamaṁ (aṁtarātmā) S. 4. 21, V. 3. –daḥ The white colour. (viśadīkṛ) 8. U. ‘to explain make clear, illustrate’). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch viśada 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “klar, hell, blank, heiter, rein”; = śukla, pāṇḍura, śuci u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. TRIK. 3, 3, 211. H. 1392. 1436. an. 3, 339. MED. d. 39. HALĀY. 1, 132. acchasphaṭika- (ambhas) MEGH. 52. nirdhautahāraguṭikā- (himāmbhas) RAGH. 5, 70. śīdhu Spr. 3322. madya SUŚR. 2, 477, 3. Oel 1, 182, 3. Urin 2, 82, 15. vīrya 1, 148, 9. vyoman RĀJA-TAR. 3, 375. prabhā ŚIŚ. 9, 26. RAGH. 4, 18. 9, 38. candrapādāḥ MEGH. 71. candrikā RAGH. 19, 39. daśanāṁśavaḥ KUMĀRAS. 6, 25. – hāramayūkha BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 25. himācala KIR. 5, 12. śṛṅgocchrāyaiḥ kumudaviśadaiḥ MEGH. 59. sphaṭika- (nagendra) 63. vapus GĪT. 1, 12. kadamba 2, 8. kaca AK. 2, 6, 2, 49. H. 570. śastra BHĀG. P. 8, 10, 14. Auge SUŚR. 2, 141, 17. kumudaviśadāni prekṣitāni MEGH. 41. prītiviśadairnetraiḥ RAGH. 17, 35. viśvāsaviśadāṁ dṛśam RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1279. Mund SUŚR. 2, 235, 6. prasādaviśadānana RĀJA-TAR. 3, 25. adhara KUMĀRAS. 3, 33. oṣṭhastāmbūladyutiviśadaḥ ŚIŚ. 8, 70. smita KUMĀRAS. 1, 45. BHĀG. P. 4, 16, 9. dantāvabhāsaviśadasmitavaktrakānti ṚT. 3, 18. svarūpaṁ brahmacaryaṁ ca MBH. 4, 186. antarātman ŚĀK. 97. āśaya BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 45. 4, 20, 10. hṛtpadma KAIVALJOP. bei MUIR, ST. 4, 304. hṛdaya Spr. 4568. cetas 2071. viśadātman 2680. 4232. yaśas KATHĀS. 22, 36. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 11. kīrti 8, 21, 4. RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1152. anuvṛtti BHĀG. P. 3, 4, 12. nṛpaśrī RĀJA-TAR. 4, 373. -prajña 5, 79. vijñāna SARVADARŚANAS. 29, 18. svarūpāvabhāsa 47, 18. phalapaṅkti MĀRK. P. 43, 39. nijadīrghavaṁśaviśadapreṅkhatpatākākṛti Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 506, Śl. 22. “rein, lauter”, von einem Menschen KĀM. NĪTIS. 12, 34. — b) “klar, deutlich, verständlich”; = vyakta TRIK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 67. viśadapaṭuravaiḥ PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 14. ucchūsita RAGH. 8, 3. niḥśvāsa (suviśada) MṚCCH. 48, 22. śāstra HARIV. 15701 (viṣada die ältere, viśada die neuere Ausg.). vivekaviśadā kathā RĀJA- TAR. 2, 113. bhāratavyākhyā Verz. d. Oxf. H.2,a, No. 14. fg. 161,b,35 (su-). 257,b,31 (-tara). — c) “weich anzufühlen” MBH. 12, 6856. 14, 1416. von Speisen im Gegens. zu khara PAT. zu P. 7, 3, 69. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 35. 4, 2, 16. H. 921, Schol. SUŚR. 1, 246, 21. der Südwind 76, 14. von einem Geruch MBH. 12, 6848. 14, 1409. — d) “geschickt zu Etwas (geschmeidig)”: nṛtyaprayogaviśadau caraṇau MṚCCH. 9, 19. — e) am Ende eines comp. “behaftet mit”: kāsaśvāsādiduḥkha- SARVADARŚANAS. 101, 1. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des Jayadratha, BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 23. — Vgl. vaiśadya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 viśada A King who was the son of Jayadratha and father of King Senajit. (Bhāgavata, Skandha 9). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 viśada viśada, I. adj. 1. Of a white colour, Megh. 41; Śiś. 9, 26; Kir. 5, 12. 2. Clear, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3322. 3. Pure, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2680; spotless, Śāk. d. 97. 4. Evident. 5. Beautiful. II. m. White, the colour. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 viśada a. clear, pure, distinct, intelligible; tender, soft; dexterous, fit for (–°). Abstr. -tā f. |
वेणुमन्त – veṇumanta | Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975veṇumanta A mountain very famous in the Purāṇas. This mountain is
white in colour. It is said that this mountain is on a par with the mountain Mandara in the Northern region. (M.B. Sabhā Parva, Dākṣiṇātyapāṭha, Chapter 33). |
वोरुखान – vorukhāna | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vorukhāna m. a horse (described as one of a pale red colour)
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch vorukhāna m. “ein Pferd von blassrother Farbe” H. 1240. wohl nach einem Lande, vielleicht Hyrkanien, benannt. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 vorukhāna vorukhāna, m. A horse described as of red and white colour. |
शार – śāra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāra mf (“ā”) n. (in most meanings also written “sāra”; of doubtful
derivation) variegated in colour, of different colours (as dark hair mixed with grey), motley, spotted, speckled 2 mf (“ā”) n. yellow śāra m. variegating or a variegated colour, (esp.) a mixture of blue and yellow, green śāra m. (also “śāraka”) a kind of die or a piece used at chess or at backgammon śāra m. air, wind śāra m. hurting, injuring (fr. “śṝ”) śāra mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. a chessman &c. (see m.) śāra m. a kind of bird (= “śāri”) śāra m. Kuśa grass śāra n. a variegated colour śāra Vṛiddhi form of “śara”, in comp. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śāra a. [śār-ac śṝ-ghañ vā] (1) Variegated, speckled, mottled, spotted. (2) Yellow. –raḥ (1) A variegated colour. (2) Green colour. (3) Air, wind. (4) A piece used at chess, a chessman; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake trīḍati praṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39. (5) Injuring, hurting Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śāra P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2 (vgl. P. 6, 1, 159). m. f. (ī) TRIK. 3, 5, 19. 1) adj. “bunt, scheckig” P. 3, 3, 21. Vārtt. 2. AK. 3, 4, 25, 168. H. an. 2, 461. MED. r. 90. HALĀY. 4, 56. palita- DAŚAK. 60, 5. Vgl. kṛṣṇa- und sāra. — 2) m. a) “ein beim Würfelspiel gebrauchter Stein, – Figur” H. 487.H. an. MED. kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ Spr. 2294. pramādadatta- DAŚAK. 70, 4. — b) “Wind” P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2. AK. H. an. MED. — c) nom. act. von śar, = hiṁsana ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — 3) f. ī a) = 2) a) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. (sārī). — b) Kuśa-“Gras” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śāra śāra, I. adj. 1. Variegated (in colour), Daśak. in Chr. 180, 1 (of hair, mixed with greyand white). 2. Yellow. II. m. 1. Hurting (vb. śṛ10). 2. A mixture of blue and yellow, a green. 3. Variegating. 4. Air, wind (cf. sāra). 5. A piece or man at chess, backgammon, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 24 (cf. sāra). III. f. rī. 1. An arrow (vb. śṛ10, cf. śara), Chr. 297, 16 = Rigv. i. 112, 16. 2. Kuśa grass. — Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj. blue-black, Megh. 48, read -śāra (Sch.). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śāra f. ā mottled, spotted; m. a stone or piece used at sev. games (also f. ī). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śāra śāra, a. variegated, speckled, spotted; m. piece or figure used on a draught-board: ī, f. id.; a bird. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 śāra t ka daurbalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (adanta curā°-para°-aka°-seṭ .) aśaśārat . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śāra daurvalye ada° cu° uma° saka° seṭ . śārayati–te aśaśārat ta . śāra na° śāra–ac, śṛ–ghañ vā . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 3 vāyau pu° amaraḥ 4 akṣopakaraṇe medi° . |
शित – śita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śita mfn. (for 2. see p.1071, col.2) satisfied, regaled
śita mfn. (for 1. and 4. see under “śi” and “śo”) w.r. for “sita”, “bright- coloured, white.” śita m. N. of a son of Viśvāmitra śita mfn. (for 1. &c. see p.1069, col.3) whetted, sharp &c. &c. mfn. thin, slender, weak, feeble Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śita p. p. [śo-kta] (1) Sharpened, whetted. (2) Thin, emaciated. (3) Wasted, declined. (4) Weak, feeble, — Comp. –agraḥ a thorn. –dhāra a. sharp-edged. –śūkaḥ 1. barley. –2. wheat. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śita partic. s. u. 1. śā. śita partic. s. u. 2. śā und vgl. somaśita. śita m. N. pr. eines Sohnes des Viśvāmitra MBH. 13, 253. śita adj. “weiss”, subst. f. “Zucker” u. s. w. fehlerhaft für sita. Die Aehnlichkeit von śiti kann zu dieser Schreibung Veranlassung gegeben haben; sita ist durch falsche Etymologie aus asita gebildet worden, wie sura aus asura. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śita a. whetted, sharp, thin. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śita śita, pp. of 1. 2. śā; a, incorr. for sita, white: -tā, f. sharpness; -dhāra, a. keen-edged; -śara-śata, n. pl. hundreds of sharp arrows. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śita tri° śo–kta . 1 durbale 2 śākite ca medi° 3 kṛśe viśvaḥ |
शिथिल – śithila | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śithila mf (“ā”) n. (collateral form of prec.) loose, slack, lax, relaxed,
untied, flaccid, not rigid or compact &c. &c. mf (“ā”) n. soft, pliant, supple mf (“ā”) n. unsteady, tremulous mf (“ā”) n. languid, inert, unenergetic, weak, feeble &c. mf (“ā”) n. careless in (loc.) mf (“ā”) n. indistinct (as sound) mf (“ā”) n. not rigidly observed mf (“ā”) n. loosely retained or possessed, abandoned, shaken off śithila mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. loosely, not firmly śithila mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of tawny-coloured ant (said to be a variety of the white ant) śithila n. a loose fastening, looseness, laxity, slowness śithila n. a partic. separation of the terms or members of a logical series Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śithila a. [ślath-kilac pṛṣo- Uṇ. 1. 53] (1) Loose, loosened, slackened, relaxed. (2) Untied, unfastened; S. 2. 6. (2) Severed, fallen from the stalk; arkasyopari śithilaṁ cyutamiva navamallikākusumaṁ S. 2. 8. (3) Languid, enfeebled, unnerved. (4) Weak, feeble; aśithilapariraṁbha U. 1. 24, 27 ‘fast or close embrace’. (5) Flaccid, flabby. (6) Dissolved. (7) Decayed. (8) Ineffective, futile, vain. (9) Inattentive, careless; Pt. 4. 116. (10) Loosely done, not strictly or rigidly performed. (11) Cast off, abandoned. –laṁ (1) Laxity, looseness. (2) Slowness. śithi līkṛ means 1. to loosen, unfasten, untie. –2. to relax, slacken. –3. to weaken, impair, enfeeble. (4) to give up, abandon; R. 2. 41. śithilībhū 1. to be slackened or relaxed. –2. to fall off from; Mk. 1. 13). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śithila UṆĀDIS. 1, 54 (vielleicht ist hier śithira zu schreiben). adj. (f. ā) dass. TRIK. 3, 1, 8. H. 491. HALĀY. 4, 92. tantu KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 1, 6. TS. 7, 1, 5, 4. nirvīryaḥ śithilo yātayāmā “schlaff” 8, 1. KĀṬH. 11, 1. 36, 5. 7. rāṣṭra “aus den Fugen gehend” 37, 12. chandas PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 1, 12. TS. 6, 5, 10, 3. indro vai śithila ivāpratiṣṭhita āsīt 7, 3, 7, 1. a- WEBER, Nax. 2, 303. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 1, 11. 2, 1, 1, 9. — navasaṁropaṇaśithilastaruḥ Spr. (II) 90. navamallikākusuma ŚĀK. 41. vāsas MEGH. 69. VIKR. 115. RĀJA-TAR.4,434. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 139,a, No. 276. bandha SUŚR. 1, 66, 13. ŚĀK. 39. aśithilaparirambha UTTARAR. 11, 12 (15, 16). ṛtuparyāyaśithilaiḥ – mayūrāṅgaruhaiḥ (“Pfauenfedern”) HARIV. 3832. yantra SUŚR. 1, 26, 1. GOLĀDHY. GOLAB. 2. -candanatilaka DAŚAK. 91, 7. -bhuja Spr. (II) 622. KUVALAJ. 125,a. SĀH. D. 67,13. vṛṣaṇau PAÑCAT. II, 143. śithilāvayava BHĀG. P. 4, 28, 15. kukṣi SUŚR. 1, 368, 3. gātra MṚCCH. 48, 24. deśaḥ ko nu jalāvasekaśithilaḥ “locker” 47, 1. “schlaff, schlotternd, welk” von lebenden Wesen R. 3, 2, 17. -prāya (siṁha) Spr. (II) 2027. sainya KATHĀS. 51, 170. gokarṇaśithilaścaran “unstät wie ein Kuhohr” MBH. 2, 2324. “geschmeidig”: paurayoṣitaḥ Spr. 3276. śārdūlaśithilaścaran “wie ein Tiger” MBH. 4, 345. -samādhi “schlaff, schwach” MĀLAV. 23. -bandhubhayatrapā KATHĀS. 30, 143. kuryurvālapriyatvaṁ śithilam Spr. 2656. bāṣpaṁ kuru sthiratayā śithilānubandham ŚĀK. 90, v. l. sarvā naḥ śithilāḥ kriyāḥ BHĀG. P. 10, 46, 21. prāṇāḥ R. 4, 58, 18. jīvita ad MEGH. 112. vāc “schwach, zitternd” MBH. 13, 270. R. 6, 85, 7. manas “unstät” MBH. 3, 1320. mit einem loc. “lässig in”: kriyāsu R. GORR. 2, 76, 32. śithilam adv. “nicht fest”: tasthau bhuvi RAGH. 15, 96. — Vgl. pra-, śaithilya. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śithila śithila (cf. ślath), adj. 1. Loose, Vikr. d. 115; Pañc. ii. d. 143; loosened, Megh. 69. 2. Flaccid, faded, Śāk. d. 41. 3. Feeble, languid, Bhartṛ. 2, 22. 4. Ineffective. 5. Relaxed, dissolved, Daśak. in Chr. 199, 5. 6. Not very careful, Pañc. ii. d. 82. 7. Not rigidly observed. 8. Loosely retained. 9. Abandoned, Ragh. 2, 41 (°lī kṛ, To abandon). — Comp. a-, adj. tight, close, Utt. Rāmac. 15, 16. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śithila a. loose, flaccid, languid, trembling, feeble. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śithila śithila, a. loose, slackened, unfastened, drooping; supple; unstable, tremulous; languid, feeble; careless in (lc.): -m, ad. tottering (stand): (a) -tā, f. slackness: -ṁ gam or vraj, be neglected. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śithila tri° ślatha–kilac pṛṣo° . 1 ślathe 2 adṛḍhe saṁyogabhede 3 mande ca śithilasaṁyogaśca pracayaḥ . pracayaḥ śithilākhyo yaḥ saṁyogastena janyate bhāṣā° bhūyo’vayavāvacchedetrāvayavāntarasaṁyoginyavayave vartamānaḥ saṁyogaḥ pracayaḥ iti dīnakarī yathā tūlakādau . |
शिलाधातु – śilādhātu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śilādhātu “śilā-dhātu” m. “rock-mineral”, chalk
m. yellow ochre m. red chalk m. a white fossil substance m. an aluminous earth of a white or yellowish colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śilādhātu m. “weisse Kreide” TRIK. 2, 3, 6. “eine best. gelbe mineralische Substanz” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – R. 2, 96, 2 (105, 2 GORR.). 5, 32, 37. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śilādhātu pu° śilāyā dhātuścaramadhāturiva śubhratvāt . 1 śvetopale (khaḍī) trikā° . 2 pītavarṇe gairikabhede ca rājani° . |
शुक्र – śukra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śukra mf (“ā”) n. (fr. 1. “śuc” cf. “śukla”) bright, resplendent
mf (“ā”) n. clear, pure mf (“ā”) n. light-coloured, white mf (“ā”) n. pure, spotless śukra m. N. of Agni or fire śukra m. of a month (Jyeṣṭha = May-June, personified as the guardian of Kubera’s treasure) śukra m. the planet Venus or its regent (regarded as the son of Bhṛigu and preceptor of the Daityas) &c. śukra m. clear or pure Soma śukra m. (with or scil, “graha”) a partic. Graha or receptacle for Soma śukra m. a partic. astrol. Yoga śukra m. a N. of the Vyāhṛitis (“bhūr, bhuvaḥ, svar”) śukra m. a kind of plant (= “citraka”) śukra m. N. of a Marutvat śukra m. of a son of Vasiṣṭha śukra m. of the third Manu śukra m. of one of the seven sages under Manu Bhautya śukra m. of a son of Bhava śukra m. of a son of Havir-dhāna (cf. “śukla”) śukra m. (with Jainas) of a partic. Kalpa (q.v.) śukra n. brightness, clearness, light śukra n. (also pl.)any clear liquid (as water, Soma &c.) śukra n. juice, the essence of anything (also pl.) śukra n. semen virile, seed of animals (male and female), sperm &c. &c. śukra n. a morbid affection of the iris (change of colour &c. accompanied by imperfect vision; cf. “śukla”) śukra n. a good action śukra n. gold, wealth śukra n. N. of a Sāman śukra n. of a Vedic metre Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śukra a. [śuc-raka ni- kutvam] Ved. (1) Bright, radiant, shining. (2) White, pure. –kraḥ (1) The planet Venus. (2) N. of the preceptor of the Asuras, who, by means of his magical charm, restored to life the demons killed in battle; see kaca, devayānī, and yayāti. (3) The month of Jyeṣṭha. (4) N. of Agni or fire. (5) N. of the plant Chitraka. –kraṁ (1) Semen virile; pumān puṁso’dhika śukre strī bhavatyadhike striyāḥ Ms. 3. 49, 5. 63. (2) The essence of anything. (3) Male and female energy. (4) Ved. Water. — Comp. –aṁgaḥ a peacock. –kara a. spermatic. ( –raḥ) the marrow of the bones. –bhuj f. a pea-hen. –bhūḥ m. the marrow of the bones. –varaḥ, –vāsaraḥ Friday –śiṣyaḥ a demon. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śukra (von 1. śuc) UṆĀDIS. 2, 28 (parox.). 1) adj. (f. ā) = śukla KĀŚ. zu P. 8, 2, 18. a) “klar, licht, hell”; von Sonne, Feuer u.s.w. ṚV. 3, 1, 5. 8. vidyutaḥ 14. 6, 16, 34. śocis 1, 45, 4. arcis 3, 6, 3. bhānu 7, 4, 1. 66, 16. ketavaḥ AV. 13, 2, 1. atka ṚV. 1, 95, 7. varṇa 3, 34, 5. vāsas 7, 77, 2. śukrā kṛṣṇādajaniṣṭa (uṣāḥ) 1, 123, 9. svar 2, 2, 7. 4, 51, 9. ŚAT. BR. 4, 3, 1, 26. PAÑCAV. BR. 15, 5, 9. Gold ṚV. 2, 33, 9. 8, 54, 11. arṇas 5, 45, 10. 6, 6, 4. 58, 1. VS. 19, 89. TBR. 1, 1, 7, 2. MBH. 1, 8419. fg. — b) “klar, lauter”; m. “der lautere” Soma ṚV. 1, 84, 4. somāḥ śukrāḥ gavāśiraḥ 137, 1. ayaṁ śukro ayāmi te 2, 41, 2. 3. 7, 64, 5. śukramandhaḥ 4, 27, 5. śukrā āśiraṁ yācante 8, 2, 10. VĀLAKH. 4, 10. AV. 6, 53, 1. VS. 8, 57. somapītha ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 1. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 15, 13. ŚAT. BR. 1, 6, 3, 7. 4, 2, 1, 29. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 19. 11, 3. 14, 2. — c) “hellfarbig, weisslich, weiss”: pṛśnyāḥ śukra ūdhani ṚV. 2, 34, 2. dhūma 6, 2, 6. payas 1, 160, 3. 9, 19, 5. upastir 62, 28. anaḍvāhau 10, 85, 10. AV. 8, 7, 1. svaravaḥ 12, 1, 13. śukraḥ piṅgākṣo hotā syāt ŚĀÑKH. BR. 25, 10. — d) übertr. “hell, rein, fleckenlos”: vacas ṚV. 2, 9, 4. devī manīṣā 7, 34, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 1, 2, 9. āhuti ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 2, 6. — 2) m. a) “Feuer” AK. 1, 1, 1, 51. TRIK. 3, 3, 375. H. 1098. an. 2, 463. MED. r. 93. — b) N. “eines Sommermonats” P. 4, 4, 128, Vārtt. 2, Schol. AK. 1, 1, 3, 16. TRIK. H. 154. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 114. VS. 7, 30. śukraśca śuciśca graiṣmāvṛtū 14, 6. 22, 31. ŚAT. BR. 4, 3, 1, 15. MBH. 1, 5883. R. 7, 15, 16 (personif. als Schatzhüter Kubera’s). SUŚR. 1, 19, 9. VP. 225. — c) “der Planet Venus” (personif. als Sohn Bhṛgu’s und Lehrer der Asura) AK. 1, 1, 2, 26. TRIK. 1, 1, 92. 3, 3, 375. H. 119. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 48. HARIV. 4258. 12794. 14076. R. 2, 100, 38. KUMĀRAS. 3, 43. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 21. 5, 61. 9, 18. 14. 23. 28. BṚH. 2, 4. LAGHUJ. 1, 8. 2, 11. VP. 239. MĀRK. P. 52, 11. Verz. d. B. H. 146, “a” (16). Verz. d. Oxf. H. 41, “a”, 16. 69, “b”, 1. 2. 86, “b”, 43. 330, “a”, 5. 23. 339, “b”, 7. Verz. d. Cambr. H. 34. fg. PAÑCAT. 50, 20. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 345, 2. 348, 4 v. u. asurāṇāmupādhyāyaḥ MBH. 1, 2544. 2606. 12, 2231. 13, 4146. 4687. HARIV. 12200. 12808. fgg. 14234. fgg. KĀM. NĪTIS. 14, 63. BHĀG. P. 9, 14, 6. PAÑCAR. 1, 1, 66. PAÑCAT. Pr. 2. Verz. d. B. H. No. 897. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 25, “a”, 38. 83,a,29. DAŚAK. 186,11. HALL 18. — d) “der” Śukragraha (auch mit Beisatz von graha) VS. 7, 13. 13, 56. ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 1, 1. 5, 4, 4, 20. 3, 3, 2, 7. -pātra 4, 3, 1, 26. 3, 17. śukrāgra 5, 9, 4, 6. 13. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 2, 9. 6, 11. Vgl. 1) “b”). — e) N. eines Joga (viṣkambhādi) KOṢṬHĪPR. im ŚKDR. — f) N. pr. ein Sohn Bhava’s VP. 1, 8, 11. ein Marutvant HARIV. 11546. ein Sohn Vasiṣṭha’s (vgl. śukta) 492. VP. 83. der 3te Manu HARIV. 424. einer der 7 Weisen unter Manu Bhautja MĀRK. P. 100, 31. ein Sohn Havirdhāna’s (vgl. śukla) VP. 1, 14, 2. — 3) n. a) “Helle, Klarheit, Licht”; auch pl. ṚV. 1, 135, 2. 140, 11. 3, 8, 9. vajraṁ śukrairabhīvṛtam 44, 5. VS. 40, 8. TBR. 1, 5, 1, 1. KAṬHOP. 5, 8. MAITRJUP. 6, 24. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 2. dhātaiva khalu bhūtānāṁ sukhaduḥkhe priyāpriye. dadhāti sarvamīśānaḥ purastācchukramuccaran.. MBH. 3, 1138. fg. 5, 917. 2751. 1737. fgg. R. ed. Bomb. 3, 43, 33. — b) “Klares” so v. a. “klare Flüssigkeit, Wasser”, Soma NAIGH. 1, 12. VS. 19, 5. śukraṁ tvā śukra ā dhunomi 8, 48. pra vāyave bharata cāru śukram ṚV. 5, 43, 3. 4. — c) “Saft, Seim”: trayyai vidyāyai AIT. BR. 5, 32. ŚAT. BR. 11, 5, 8, 4. 12, 4, 2, 10. 7, 1, 6. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 4, 8, 2. — d) “Same” AK.2,6,2,13.3,4,31,236. TRIK.3,3,375. H. 619. 629. H. an. MED. HALĀY.3,16.5,67. SIDDH. K. 249,b,3. 4. ṚV.4,3,10.6,66,1. MUṆḌ. UP.3,2,1. śukrātireke pumānbhavati NIR. 14, 6. M. 3, 49. svapne siktvā śukram 2, 181. nirasya śukram 5, 63. 135. YĀJÑ. 3, 93. MBH. 1, 2383. svānna 2434. 8410. 3, 14306. 14311. R. 2, 108, 11 (116, 20 GORR.). SUŚR. 1, 44, 2. 12. 48, 11. 126, 20. -sthāna 270, 19. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 14. fgg. 96. 69, 14. 76, 1. BṚH. 2, 11. LAGHUJ.2, 18 (-sāra). VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 54. einer der sieben Elementarstoffe WISE 54. — e) “eine best. Augenkrankheit: ein weisser Fleck im dunkeln Theile des Auges” TRIK. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 2, 311, 13. fgg. 329, 3. fgg. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 90. — f) N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 240,a. KĀTY. ŚR. 26, 3, 1. LĀṬY. 1, 6, 24. — g) allegorischer N. eines Metrums ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 4. — Vgl. ati-, kṣīra-, tri-, niḥ-, prati-, mūtra-, rakta-, śuddha-, vātaśukratva, śaukra fgg. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śukra (ŚUKRĀCĀRYA) I. Preceptor of the Asuras. śukra 2 II A son of Vasiṣṭha. Seven sons were born to Vasiṣṭha by his wife Ūrjjā; they were, Rajas, Gotra, Ūrddhvabāhu, Savana, Anagha, Sutapas and Śukra. All these seven persons were the Saptarṣis of the third Manvantaram (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1, Chapter 10). śukra 3 III A king who belonged to the dynasty of Emperor Pṛthu. Two sons, Antardhāna and Vādī were born to Pṛthu. Antardhāna had a son named Havirdhāna by wife Śikhaṇḍinī. Havirdhāna married Dhiṣaṇā who was born in Agnikula. Six sons were born to them. They were, Prācīnabarhis, Śukra, Gaya, Kṛṣṇa, Vraja and Ajina. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1, Chapter 14). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śukra śukra, i. e. 2. śuc + ra, I. adj. 1. Resplendent, Chr. 288, 14 = Rigv. i. 48, 14. 2. Pure, Windischmaun, Sankara, 68. II. m. 1. A name of Agni. 2. The planet Venus, Pañc. pr. d. 3. 3. The month Jyeṣṭhā (May — June), Hiḍ. 1, 10. III. n. 1. Semen virile, Vedāntas. in Chr. 207, 13; MBh. 1, 2434; male and female strength, Man. 3, 49. 2. A morbid affection of the iris. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śukra a. clear, bright, pure, white. — m. fire or the god of fire, the planet Venus, a cert. cup of Soma (±graha), N. of sev. men. n. brightness, purity; water, Soma, juice i.g., semen virile. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śukra śuk-ra, a. [śuc] bright, resplendent (V., rare in E.); clear, pure (V.); white (V.); pure, spotless (V.); m. fire, Agni (C.); a summer month (V., C.); planet Venus (persanified as son of Bhṛgu and teacher of the Asuras); pure Soma (V.); n. brightness, light (sts. pl.; V., E.); clear liquid, water, Soma (V.); juice (Br., S.; sts. pl.); semen virile (V. rare, C.): (a) – danta, m. (white tooth), N.; (a) -vat, a. containing pure juice (V.); containing the word sukra (Br.); (a) -var-ṇa, a. brilliant-coloured, bright (RV.); -vā-ra, m. day of Venus, Friday; (a) -vāsas, a. bright-robed (dawn; RV.1); (a) -śocis, a. bright-rayed (Agni; V.); (a) -sadman, a. having a bright dwelling-place (dawn; RV.1). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śukra na° śuca–rak ni° kutvam . 1 majjajāte 2 caramadhātau amaraḥ . 3 netrarogabhede 2844 pṛ° dṛśyam . 5 daityagurau grahabhede amaraḥ . 6 agnau 7 citrakavṛkṣe 8 jyaiṣṭhamāse amaraḥ viṣkambhādiṣu yogeṣa madhye 9 caturviṁśe yoge ca pu° jyo° ta° . dhātubhedaśukrasyotpattikāraṇasvarūpādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā rasādraktaṁ tato māṁsaṁ māṁsānmedaḥ prajāyate . medaso’sthi tato majjā majjñaḥ śukrasya sambhavaḥ . tataḥ sthūlo bhāgo raso māsenaṁ puṁsāṁ śukraṁ strīṇāñcārtavaṁ śukrañca bhavati . uktañca suśrute evaṁ māsena rasaḥ śukro bhavati strīṇāñceti . cakārāt strīṇāmapi śukraṁ bhavati . ataevoktaṁ suśrute yoṣito’pi snavatyeva śukraṁ puṁsaḥ samāgame . tatra garbhasya kiñcittu karotīti na cintyate . gabhasya śuddhasya vikṛtasya tu garmasya kāraṇaṁ tadapi bhavati . yata uktam yadā nāryāvupeyātāṁ vṛṣasyantyau kathañcana . muñcantyo śukramanyo’nyamanasthi tatra jāyate iti . etena strīṇāṁ saptamo dhāturārtavaṁ śukramaṣṭama iti bodhitam āśayādhikyavat . strīṇāṁ garbhopayogi syādārtavaṁ sarvasammatam . tāsāmapi bale varṇaṁ śukraṁ puṣṭiṁ karoti hi . evaṁ rasa eva kedārakulyānyāyena sarvān dhātūn pūravan māsena navadaṇḍottareṇa śukramārtavaṁ ca bhavatīti siddhāntaḥ . evaṁ sati sādraktamiti saṅgatameva . tato māṁsantato raktotpatteranantaraṁ māṁsaṁ jāyate rasādevetyarthaḥ . māṁsānmedaḥ prajāyata iti . māṁsādanantaraṁ medaḥ prajāyate rasādevetyarthaḥ . medaso’sthi jāyate rasādevetyarthaḥ . evaṁ tato majjā agre śuddhaṁ śukraṁ sambhavatītyarthaḥ . rasaḥ śarīre tridhā sañcarati . tathā coktam rasaḥ śarīre śabdārcirjalasantānavat tridhā . sañcaratyanurūpo’yaṁ nityameva hi dehinām . asyāyamabhiprāyaḥ . puruṣāstīkṣṇāgnayo madhyamāgnayo mandāgnayaśca bhavanti . tatra tīkṣṇāgnīnāṁ sa rasaḥ śabdasantānavat śīghraṁ sañcarati . madhyamāgnīnāmarciḥsantānavanmaghyavegena carati mandāgnīnāṁ jalasantānavanmandaṁ carati . tena māsena rasaḥ śukraṁ bhavatīti yaduktam tanmadhyavagena carati . mandāgnīnāṁ jalamantānavanmanda carati . tena māsena rasaḥ śukraṁ bhavatīti raduktaṁ tanmadhyamāgnīnadhikṛtyoktam . dīptāgnīnāntu rasaḥ kiñcinthnena māsena śukraṁ bhavati . mandāgneḥ kiñcida° kena māseneni siddhāntaḥ . tarhi vājīkaraṇānāmoṣadhīnāṁ kiṁ prayojanamityāha vājīkariṇya āṣadhyaḥ svaprabhāvaguṇocchrayāt . virecavanti tāḥ śukraṁ virekidravyavannṛṇām . vājīkariṇyaḥ yābhiḥ oṣadhībhiḥ puruṣaḥ śukrādhikyāt stroṣu vājivat sāmaryaṁ prāpnoti tāḥ vājīkariṇyaḥ svaprabhāvaguṇocchrayāt . tatra kāścidīṣadhyaḥ svaprabhāvādhikyāt, kāścit svaguṇādhikyāt, kāścit svaprabhāvaguṇādhikyāt . tatra saṅkalpapādalepaviśiṣṭakāntāsparśādayaḥ svaprabhāvādhikyāt śukraṁ virecayanti . ghṛtakṣīrādayaḥ svaguṇādhikyāt . snigdhatvādhikyāt māṣādayaḥ svaprabhāvasnigdhatvādiguṇādhikyāt . vājīkaraṇya iti bahuvacanamādyārthānuvartanam . balyaṁ vṛṁhaṇaṁ jīvanīyagaṇādayaḥ tadvadbāddhavyāḥ . virecayanti svaprabhāvaguṇāvikyāt śīghramevaṁ rasādyutpādanapūrvakaṁ śukraṁ janayitvā pravartayanti . yata āha dugdhaṁ māṣāśca bhallātaphalamajjāmalāni ca . janakāni nigadyante recanāni ca retasaḥ . nanu vālānāṁ kathaṁ śustaṁ na dṛśyate ityata āha bālānāṁ śukramastyeva kintu saukṣmyānna dṛśyate . puṣpāṇāṁ mukule gandho yathā sannapi nāpyate . teṣāṁ yadeva tāruṇye puṣṭatvādvyaktimeti hi . kusumānāṁ praphullānāṁ gandhaḥ prādurbhavedyathā . romarājyādayaḥ puṁsāṁ nārīṇāmapi yauvane . jāyate’tra ca yo bhedo jñeyo vyākhyānataḥ sa ca . vyākhyānaṁ yathā puṁsāṁ ronorājīśmaśruprabhṛtayaḥ nārīṇāntu rīmarājīstanastanyārtavaprabhṛtayaḥ . nanu, annaraso vṛddhasya dhātuvṛddhiṁ kathaṁ na karotītyāha vārdhake vardhamānena vāyunā rasaśoṣaṇāt . na tathā dhātuvṛddhiḥ syāttatastatrānilaṁ jayet . atha śukrasya svarūpamāha śukraṁ saumyaṁ sitaṁ snigdhaṁ balapuṣṭikaraṁ smṛtam . garbhavījaṁ vapuḥsāro jīvasyāśraya uttamaḥ . jīvasyāśraya uttama ityāha jīvī vasati sarvasmin dehe tatra viśeṣataḥ . vīrye rakte male yasmin kṣīṇe yāti kṣayaṁ kṣaṇāt . atha garbhasañjananaśukrasya lakṣaṇamāha sphaṭikābhaṁ dravaṁ snigdhaṁ madhuraṁ madhugandhi ca . śukramicchanti kecittu tailakṣīranibhañca tat . atha śukrasya sthānamāha yathā payasi sarpistu gūḍhaścekṣau raso yathā . evaṁ hi sakale kāye śukraṁ tiṣṭhati dehinām . atra sarpirdṛṣṭānto bahuśukre’lpamathanena sarpiḥśukrayorlābhāt . ikṣurasadṛṣṭāntastu svalpaśukre puṁsi atipīḍanenekṣurasaśukrayorlābhāt . atha śukrasya kṣaraṇamārgamāha dvyaṅgule dakṣiṇe pārśve vastidvārasya cāpyadhaḥ . mūtrasrotapathe śukraṁ puruṣasya pravartate . vṛddhavāgbhaṭo’pyāha saptamī śukradharā dvyaṅgule dakṣiṇe pārśve vastidvārasya cāpyadhomūtramārgamāśritā sakalaśarīravyāpinī śukraṁ pravartayatīti . saptamī kalā . atha śukrakṣaraṇakāraṇamāha kṛtsnadehasthitaṁ śukraṁ prasannamanasastathā . strīṣu vyāyacchataścāpi harṣāttat sampravartate . strīsuratarūpaṁ vyāyāmaṁ kurvataḥ . anyacca śukraṁ kāmena kāminyā darśanāt sparśanādapi . śabdasaṁśravaṇātu dhyānāt saṁyīgācca pravartate . daityaguroḥ śukranāmakāraṇaṁ kāśīkha° 17 a° uktaṁ yathā nandinā’pahṛte śukre gilite ca viṣādinā ityupakrame tena śabdena mahatā śukraḥ śambhūdare sthitaḥ . chidrānveṣī bhraman so’tha viniketo yathāniśam . sapta lokān sapātālān rudradehe vilokayan . brahmanārāyaṇendrāṇāṁ sādityāpsarasāṁ tathā . bhuvanāni vicitrāṇi yuddhañca pramathāsuram . savarṣāṇāṁ śataṁ kukṣau bhavasya parito bhraman . tataḥ sa dadṛśe randhraṁ śucerandhraṁ khalo yathā . śāmbhavenātha yogena śukrarūpeṇa bhārgavaḥ . caskanda ca sanāmāpi tato devena bhāṣitaḥ . jaṭharānnirgate śukre devo’pi mumudetarām . mūyaḥ śreyo bhaved yanme na sthito jaṭhare dvijaḥ . śukravanniḥsṛto yasmāttasmāttvaṁ bhṛguvandana . karmaṇānena śukro’pi mama putro’si gamyatām . śukragrahasvarūpādi vṛhajjātake grahayonyadhyāye ukta dṛśyam . tatkakṣādimānaṁ khagolaśabde 2425 pṛ° dṛśyam . |
शुक्ल – śukla | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śukla mf (“ā”) n. (later form of “śukra”, for which it is sometimes w.r.)
bright, light (with “pakṣa” = “śukla-p-” q.v.) &c. mf (“ā”) n. white, whitish &c. &c. mf (“ā”) n. pure, spotless, unsullied &c. śukla m. the bright half of a lunar month or any day in it &c. śukla m. the month Vaiśākha () śukla m. white (the colour) śukla m. mucus, saliva (“śuklaṁ-kṛ”, to spit at) śukla m. ricinus or white śukla m. Mimusops Hexandra śukla m. the 37th (or 3rd) year of Jupiter’s cycle of 60 years śukla m. the 24th of the astronomical śukla m. N. of śiva śukla m. of Viṣṇu śukla m. of a son of Havir-dhāna (cf. “śukra”) śukla m. of a Muni śukla m. of a king śukla m. of a mountain śukla mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a white cow śukla m. white or candied sugar śukla m. Euphorbia Antiquorum śukla m. = “kākOlī” and “vidārī” śukla m. N. of Sarasvatī śukla m. of a daughter of Siṁha-hanu śukla m. of a river śukla n. brightness, light śukla n. a white spot, white substance, anything white śukla n. the white of the eye śukla n. a disease of the cornea or white part of the eye (opacity, albugo; cf. “śukra”) śukla n. silver śukla n. fresh butter Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śukla a. [śuc-luk kutvam] White, pure, bright; as in śuklāpāṁga q. v. — klaḥ (1) A white colour. (2) The bright or light half of a lunar month. (3) N. of Śiva. –klaṁ (1) Silver. (2) A disease of the white part of the eye. (3) Fresh butter. (4) Sour gruel — Comp. –aṁgaḥ, –apāṁgaḥ a peacock (having white corners of the eye); śuklāpāṁgaiḥ sajalanayanaiḥ svāgatīkṛtya kekāḥ Me. 22. –ablaṁ a kind of sorrel. –arman n. a kind of disease of the eyes. –upalā candied sugar. –kaṁṭhakaḥ a kind of gallinule. –karman a pure in conduct, virtuous. –kaṣṭhaṁ white leprosy. –dhātuḥ chalk. –pakṣaḥ the bright half of a month. –maṁḍalaṁ the corner of the eye. –vastra a. dressed in white. –vāyasaḥ a crane. –vṛttiḥ f. 1. a pure mode of life. –2. the maintenance derived by a Brāhmaṇa from other Brāhmaṇas. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śukla (aus śukra) KĀŚ. zu P. 8, 2, 18. parox. UṆĀDIS. 2, 28. ŚĀNT. 1, 13. 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “licht, hell”: pakṣa “die lichte Hälfte eines Monats, die Zeit des zunehmenden Mondes”: pakṣo dvividhaḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaśca tau māsaḥ SUŚR. 1, 19, 6. KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 1, 18. M. 1, 66. 4, 98. śukle daśottare pakṣe MBH. 3, 17126. Spr. 5074. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 32. BHĀG. P. 3, 11, 10. — b) “weiss, weisslich” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1392. an. 2, 513. MED. l. 52. HALĀY. 5, 22. 74. AIT. BR. 1, 29. śuklaṁ vai retaḥ śuklā vapā 2, 14. ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 4, 15. loman 1, 1, 4, 1. 6, 3, 41. aja 6, 2, 2, 6. aśva 7, 3, 2, 14. 16 (auch a-). sikatāḥ 1, 36. -rūpa 6, 2, 2, 13. 14, 7, 1, 20. CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 5. 6, 4, 1. -vatsā ŚAT. BR. 9, 2, 3, 30. KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 3, 36. Reis TS. 2, 3, 1, 3. KĀṬH. 11, 3. Kleid, Zeug LĀṬY. 8, 6, 13. M. 4, 35. 9, 70. MBH. 1, 723. 5330. R. GORR. 2, 100, 61. Spr. 2702. SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. KATHĀS. 4, 9. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 223, No. 543. BHĀG. P. 6, 19, 3. – dhvajapatākin Śiva MBH. 12, 10364. bāstika R. 2, 77, 2. prāsādapaṅktayaḥ 4, 33, 9. -mālya 2, 91, 33. AK. 2, 4, 2, 61. tilāḥ WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. 278. marica SUŚR. 2, 326, 2. Wunde 12, 7. 14. bhūmi 1, 135, 7. śiroruhāḥ R. 2, 45, 27. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77, 1. RĀJA- TAR. 3, 365. śiras Spr. 4965. Śiva MBH. 12, 10359. yajūṁṣi ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33. yājuṣāmnāya Ind. St. 10, 436. neun “weisse” Bala bei den Jaina H. 697. – R. 2, 91, 68. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 23. 11, 8. 20. 28. 30, 11. 33, 14. H. 49. — c) “rein, lauter”: -deha MBH. 3, 13449. tanū BHĀG. P. 5, 3, 20. śuklābhijātīya MBH. 12, 1196. -vṛtta 14, 2713. karman Spr. (II) 4905. BHĀG. P. 4, 29, 27. fg. -lohitakṛṣṇavarṇena karmaṇā 5, 19, 19. dhana 11, 17, 50. von Personen MBH. 5, 3417. Spr. (II) 1836. prajātanti BHĀG. P. 1, 12, 16. karma- 5, 18, 35. — 2) m. a) (sc. pakṣa) “die lichte Hälfte eines Monats” AK. 1, 1, 3, 12. aṣṭamyāṁ navamyāṁ vā phālgunīśuklasya KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 1, 2. 23, 4, 4. 24, 7, 1. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 6. WEBER, JYOT. 26. 54. M. 4, 96. 6, 20. 11, 216. YĀJÑ.3, 193. 324. BHAG. 8, 24. MBH. 1, 1292. 3244. 3, 5068. 14401. 16638. HARIV. 7882. SŪRYAS. 10, 4. 9. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 5. 9. 25, 1. KATHĀS. 26, 4. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 412. 6, 292. BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 12. 7, 14, 21. 15, 54. 8, 16, 48. — b) “der Monat” Vaiśākha (Comm.) BHĀG. P. 7, 14, 21. — c) “die weisse Farbe, Weisse”: ghaṭasya śuklaḥ P. 2, 2, 11, Sch. -kṛṣṇau gaṇa dadhipayaādi zu P. 2, 4, 14. — d) “Auswurf, Schleim, Rotz”: ye brāhmaṇaṁ pratyaṣṭhīvanye vāsmiṁ chuklamīṣire AV. 5, 19, 3. yatra śuklo na kriyate abalana balīyasa “wo man sich nicht vom Schwächeren muss anspeien lassen” 3, 39, 3. — e) “Ricinus” AUSH. 86. “weisser Ricinus” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) N. “des 3ten Jahres im 60jährigen Jupitercyclus” VARĀH. BṚH. S.8,29. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 331,b, No. 782. — g) N. eines Joga H. an. MED. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 28. — h) ein N. Viṣṇu’s (“der Lautere”) BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 16. 35. 51. 22, 19. 23, 23. 24, 1. 5, 10, 17. — i) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Havirdhāna (vgl. śukra) HARIV. 83. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 8. eines Muni Verz. d. Oxf. H. 78,b,13. eines Fürsten TĀRAN. 3. 265. — k) N. pr. eines Berges BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 21. — l) fehlerhaft für śukra “Venus” Verz. d. B. H. 136.a (115). — 3) f. ā a) “Sandzucker” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: = kākolī, vidārī, snuhī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) ein N. der Sarasvatī TRIK. 1, 1, 27. — d) N. pr. einer Tochter Siṁhahanu’s LIA. 2, Anh. II. — e) N. pr. eines Flusses BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 22. — 4) n. a) “Helle, Licht” MAITRJUP. 6, 35. — b) “weisse Farbe, weisser Fleck” u. s. w.: parā śuklāni pātaya AV. 1, 23, 2. triḥ- “drei weisse Streifen habend” KAUŚ. 29. — c) “das Weisse im Auge” ŚAT. BR. 10, 5, 2, 7. 12, 2, 4, 15. 14, 5, 2, 3. kṛṣṇaviśālaśuklaṁ nayanam R. 5, 28, 13. SUŚR. 2, 303, 15. 310. 8. 17. = śuklabhāga z. B. 2, 310, 13. — d) “eine best. Krankheit des Weissen im Auge” (vgl. śukra) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — e) “Silber” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. — f) “frische Butter” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — g) fehlerhaft für śukta “saurer Reisschleim u.s.w.” H. 415. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77, 2. BHAGAVADBHAKTIVILĀSA im ŚKDR. Suppl. — Vgl. kṣīra-, jīva-, pañca-, pāka-, bhīma-, mahā-, śaṁkara-, śaukla, śauklya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śukla A warrior who fought on the side of the Pāṇḍavas. He was a native of Pāñcāla country. Mahābhārata, Karṇa Parva, Chapter 56, Verse 45, mentions that he was slain by Karṇa during the Bhārata battle. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śukla śukla, i. e. 2. śuc + la, I. adj. White, Pañc. i.d. 39; bright, i. d. 104; Man. 1, 66 (with pakṣa, the fortnight of the month in which the moon increases). II. m. 1. White (the colour). 2. One of the astronomical yogas. 3. The light half of the month from new to full moon. Bhag. 8, 24; Rājat. 5, 412. III. f. lā, A name of Sarasvatī. IV. n. 1. Silver. 2. Fresh butter. 3. A disease of the cornea. — Comp. pañcaśukla, i. e. pañcan-, m. a certain poisonous insect, Suśr. 2, 288, 7. mahā-śuklā, f. Sarasvatī. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śukla a. = śukra; m. (±pakṣa) = śuklapakṣa, spawl, phlegm, snot; n. brightness, light; the white part of the eye. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śukla śuk-la, a. [later form of sukra] bright, light (w. pakṣa, m. bright fortnight in which the moon increases; C.); white (ord. mg.; V., C.); pure (C.); m. bright fortnight (sc. pakṣa; (C.); n. white colour (V.); white of the eye (Br., C.): -dant, a. white-toothed (Br., P.); -pakṣa, m. bright fortnight (in which the moon increase); -bhāsvara, a. shining brightly; -vastra, a. white-robed. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śukla na° śuca–lak kutvam . 1 rajate medi° . 2 navanīte śabdaca° . 3 akṣirogabhede cakṣūrogaśabde 2844 pṛ° dṛśyam . 4 śvetavarṇe 5 śvetavarṇayute tri° amaraḥ . 6 śuddhe ca tri° . 7 viṣkambhādiṣu yogabhede medi° . 9 śvetairaṇḍe rājani° 10 śuklapakṣe jyo° ta° . tatra pakṣāvubhau māse śuklakṛṣṇau krameṇa hi . candravṛddhikaraḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaścandrakṣayātmakaḥ ṣaṭtriṁśanmatam . śuklavarṇapadārthāstu kavikalpalatāthāṁ katicit uktā yathā sudhāṁśūccaiḥśravāḥ śambhuḥ kīrtirjyotsnā śaradghanāḥ . prāsādasaudhatagaramandāradruhibhādrayaḥ . sūryendukāntakarpū karambhā rajataṁ halī . nirmokabhasmahiṇḍīracandanaṁ karakā himam . hārorṇanābhastantvasthi svargaṅgebharadābhrakam . śeṣāhiḥ śarkarā dugdhaṁ dadhi gaṅgā sudhā jalam . mṛṇālasikatāhaṁsavakakairavacāmaram . rambhāgarbhaṁ puṇḍarīkaṁ ketakīśaṅkhanirjharāḥ . lodhrasiṁha dhvajacchatraṁ cūrṇaśuktikapardakā . muktākusumanakṣatradantapuṇyośanoguṇāḥ . kailāsakāsakārpāmahāsavāsavakuñjarāḥ . nāradaḥ pāradaḥ kundakhaṭikāsphaṭikādayaḥ . |
शुक्लक – śuklaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuklaka mfn. white
śuklaka m. a white colour śuklaka m. the light fortnight Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śuklaka a. White. –kaḥ (1) White colour. (2) The bright half of a lunar month. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śuklaka m. = śukla “die lichte Hälfte eines Monats” TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. |
शुक्लरूप – śuklarūpa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuklarūpa “śukla-rūpa” mfn. white-coloured
Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śuklarūpa a. white-coloured. |
शुक्लिमन् – śukliman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śukliman m. whiteness, white colour
Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śukliman m. Whiteness. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śukliman m. nom. abstr. von śukla P. 5, 1, 123, Schol. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śukliman m. whiteness, brightness. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śukliman śukl-i-man, m. whiteness, white colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śukliman pu° śuklasya bhāvaḥ imanic . śvetavarṇe . |
शुण्ठ – śuṇṭha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuṇṭha mf (“ā”) n. (applied to a bull or cow) (accord. to either “white
coloured” or “of small stature” or = “āveṣṭita-karṇa”) mf (“ā”) n. a kind of grass (v.l.) mf (“ā”) n. a piece of flesh or meat śuṇṭha mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. see next. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śuṇṭha adj. nach Comm. “weissfarbig” TS. 1, 8, 17, 1. 5, 6, 16, 1. KĀṬH. 13. 5. 15, 9. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 11, 29. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śuṇṭha a. white or small (bull or cow). |
शुचि – śuci | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuci mfn. (f. nom. pl. “śucyas” shining, glowing, gleaming, radiant,
bright &c. &c. mfn. brilliantly white, white mfn. clear, clean, pure (lit. and fig.), holy, unsullied, undefiled, innocent, honest, virtuous &c. &c. mfn. pure (in a ceremonial sense) &c. śuci mfn. (ifc.) one who has acquitted himself of or discharged (a duty see “rahaḥ-ś-“) śuci m. purification, purity, honesty, virtue śuci m. fire śuci m. N. of a partic. fire (a son of Agni Abhimānin and Svāhā or a son of Antardhāna and Sikhaṇḍinī and brother of the fires Pavamāna and Pavaka) śuci m. oblation to fire at the first feeding of an infant śuci m. a partic. hot month (accord. to some = āṣāḍha or Jyeṣṭha, accord. to others “the hot season in general”) &c. śuci m. the sun () śuci m. the moon śuci m. the planet Venus or its regent (cf. “śukra”) śuci m. a ray of light śuci m. wind śuci m. sexual love (= “śṛṅgāra”) śuci m. a Brāhman śuci m. a faithful minister, true friend śuci m. the condition of a religious student śuci m. a fever that attacks pigs śuci m. judicial acquittal śuci m. white (the colour) śuci m. a partic. plant (= “citraka”) śuci m. N. of śiva śuci m. of a son of Bhṛigu śuci m. of a son of Gada śuci m. of a son of the third Manu śuci m. of Indra in the 14th Manv-antara śuci m. of one of the 7 sages in the 14th Manv-antara śuci m. of a Sārthavāha śuci m. of a son of śata-dyumna śuci m. of a son of śuddha (the son of Anenas) śuci m. of a son of Andhaka śuci m. of a son of Vipra śuci m. of a son of Artha-pati śuci m. (also “ī”) f. N. of a daughter of Tāmrā and wife of Kaśyapa, (regarded as the parent of water-fowl) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śuci a. [śac-ki] (1) Clean, pure, clear; sakalahaṁsaguṇaṁ śuci mānasaṁ Ki. 5. 13. (2) White; Ki. 18. 15. (3) Bright, resplendent; prabhavati śucirbibodugrāhe maṇirna mṛdāṁ cayaḥ U. 2. 4. (4) Virtuous, pious, holy, undefiled, unsullied, atha tu vetsi śucivratamātmanaḥ S. 5. 27; pathaḥ śucerdarśayitāra īśvarāḥ R. 3. 46 Ki. 5. 13. (5) Purified, cleansed hallowed; R. 1. 81; Ms. 4. 71. (6) Honest, upright, faithful, true, guileless; sabhāyāṁ vakti sāmarṣaḥ sāvaṣṭraṁbho naraḥ śuciḥ Pt. 1. 200. (7) Correct, accurate. –ciḥ (1) The white colour. (2) Purity, purification. (3) Innocence, virtue, goodness, uprightness. (4) Correctness, accuracy (5) The condition of a religious student. (6) A pureman. (7) A Brāhmaṇa (8) The hot season; upayaryā vidadha. nnavamallikāḥ śucirasau cirasaurabha saṁpadaḥ Śi. 6. 22, 1. 58; R. 3. 3; Ku. 5. 20. (9) The months of Jyeṣṭha and Aṣāḍha. (10) A faithful or true friend. (11) The sun (12) The moon. (13) Fire. (14) The sentiment of love (śṛṁgāra). (15) The planet Venus. (16) The Chitraka tree. (17) Acquittal. (18) An oblation made to fire at the first feeding of an infant. (19) N. of Śiva. (20) The Arka plant. — Comp. –drumaḥ the sacred fig-tree. –praṇī a. sipping water. –maṇiḥ 1. a crystal. –2. a jewel worn on the head. –mallikā a kind of jasmine (Arabian) –rocis m. the moon. –vrata a. holy, virtuous. –smita a. having sweet or pleasant smile; Ku. 5. 20, R. 8. 49. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śuci (wie eben) UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 4, 119. 1) adj. (f. śuci; śucī M. 8, 77) = śveta, dhavala, sita u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 5, 29. H. 1392. an. 2, 60. MED. c. 11. HALĀY. 5, 22. = medhya, śuddha AK. 3, 4, 5, 29. H. 1436. H. an.MED. HALĀY. 1, 132. = anupahata H. an. MED. aśuci und aśuci P. 6, 2, 161. a) “strahlend, glühend; blank” (häufig neben pāvaka): bhāmāsaḥ ṚV. 6, 6, 3. 4. hiraṇya 4, 10, 6. Agni 1, 140, 1. 141, 4. 3, 2, 15. 7, 3, 9. bes. Bez. desselben im Ritus (vgl. u. 2) b) TBR. 1, 1, 5, 10. asau vā ādityo ‘gniḥ śuciḥ 6, 2. AIT. BR. 7, 7. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 1, 25. 3, 13, 4. ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 5. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 10, 9. 25, 4, 34. MAITRJUP. 6, 34. Ushas ṚV. 1, 134, 4. Sonne 1, 160, 1. BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 31. Götter überh. ṚV. 2, 1, 13. 27, 9. 3, 62, 5. 7, 2, 2. 56, 12. 57, 5. 8, 29, 5. Rosse u. s. w. derselben 1, 181, 2. 10, 85, 12. “glänzend weiss”: saudhotsaṅga Spr. 3322. harmyapṛṣṭha (II) 93. — b) “lauter, klar” (vom Soma so v. a. śukra); “rein” ṚV. 1, 30, 2. 7, 90, 1. 2. VĀLAKH. 4, 10. bheṣajā ṚV. 2, 33, 13. Wasser 35, 3. 7, 49, 2. 3. 95, 2. ghṛta 9, 67, 12. pada 7, 41, 6. udidābhyaḥ śucirā pūta emi 10, 17, 10. śucayaḥ śucimupa yanti lokam AV. 4, 34, 2. CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 10. maṇi UTTARAR. 27, 8 (35, 18). salila R. 2, 48, 8. vasana GOBH 2, 8, 2. 10. mṛdvāri- Spr. 5206. — c) übertr. “klar, lauter, rein; tadellos, unschuldig, ehrlich, redlich”: mati ṚV. 6, 8, 1. 8, 3, 3. śucirapaḥ sūyavasā upa kṣeti 2, 27, 13. stoma 7, 93, 1. 10, 29, 1. yo vā rakṣāḥ śucirasmītyāha 7, 104, 16. 8, 13, 19. carita MBH. 3, 1878. AK. 1, 1, 7, 26. karman KĀM. NĪTIS. 11, 43. upacāra MBH. 3, 2928. R. 3, 1, 22 (a-). vrata ŚĀK. 123. pathaḥ śuceḥ RAGH. 3, 46. -vaṁśa RĀJA-TAR. 8, 2338. Personen KAṬHOP. 3, 8. M. 7, 31. 38. 60. 62. fgg. 8, 77. sa jñeyaḥ śapathe śuciḥ 115. 9, 188. 335. MBH. 3, 2446. R. 1, 1, 14. 7, 2. 2, 36, 18. 39, 14. 3, 53, 12. 74, 10. dūta SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. yo ‘rthe śucirhi sa śucirna mṛdvāriśuciḥ śuciḥ Spr. 5206. fg. jānīyāt. – ṛṇe śucim (II) 954. 1828. 2013. 4280. 4921. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 48, 15. BHĀG. P. 3, 30, 35. PAÑCAT. 191, 13. upadhā- Spr. 5338. a- KAṬHOP. 3, 7. M. 4, 71. R. 1, 7, 14. śuci m. = amātyo ‘tyupadhaḥ, upadhāśuddhamantrin, śuddhamantrin AK. 3, 4, 5, 29. H. an. MED. — d) “rein” in rituellem Sinne: vāyu M. 1, 76. deśa CHĀND. UP. 8, 15. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 1, 9. 3, 2, 2. M. 2, 222. 3, 206. BHAG. 6, 11. āyatana KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 4, 34. bhūmi M. 5, 68. pradeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 85, 8. śādvalāni 88, 20. VS. PRĀT. 1, 21. kṣetrāgāra VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 7. māṁsa M. 5, 131. dhana Spr. 2797, v. l. nityamāsyaṁ śuci strīṇāṁ śakuniḥ phalapātane. prasrave ca śucirvatsaḥ śvā mṛgagrahaṇe śuciḥ.. (II) 968. (I) 2996. fgg. PRAB. 59, 14. śruta Spr. 5075. BHĀG. P. 2, 10, 10. Personen VS. PRĀT. 8, 32. M. 2, 51. 107. 109. 115. 176. 3, 258. 4, 35. 5, 62. 8, 87. HARIV. 8439. R. 1, 46, 5. 2, 56, 26. 4, 10, 24. RAGH. 1, 81. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 46, 15. 55, 8. BHĀG. P. 8, 4, 15. a- M. 4, 71. 127. 142. fg. 5, 75. fg. 79. 81. 84. 86. dhvani M. 4, 124. gandha RAGH. 12, 30. — e) am Ende eines comp. “rein von” so v. a. “der sich einer Sache entledigt hat”: rahaḥ- KATHĀS. 101, 358. — 2) m. a) = śuddhi UJJVAL. “Lauterkeit, Reinheit, Ehrlichkeit”: dvijaḥ śucivinā Spr. 2614. — b) “Feuer” AK. 1, 1, 1, 52. 3, 4, 5, 29. TRIK. 1, 1, 67. 3, 3, 79. H. 1099. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 62. Bez. “eines best. Feuers” (vgl. u. 1) “a”), eines Sohnes des Agni Abhimānin und der Svāhā, VP. 84. MĀRK. P. 52, 28. 99, 69. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 59. 24, 4 (ein Sohn Antardhāna’s von der Śikhaṇḍinī). — c) “ein best. Sommermonat” P. 4, 4, 128, Vārtt. 2, Schol. (oxyt.). AK. 3, 4, 5, 29. = āṣāḍha 1, 1, 3, 16. H. 154. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 114. = jyeṣṭha MED. śukraśca śuciśca graiṣmāvṛtū VS. 14, 6. 7, 30. WEBER, Nax. 2, 351. 353. MBH. 1, 5883. VP. 225. ṚT. 1, 2. 3. RAGH. 3, 3. KUMĀRAS. 5, 20. Spr. 3186. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 447. BHĀG. P. 4, 25, 44. “Sommer” (diese Bed. kann an den meisten der eben angegebenen Stellen angenommen werden) TRIK. 3, 3, 79. H. an. MED. — d) “die Sonne” H. 97. MAITRJUP. 6, 36 (nach dem Comm.). ŚĀMBA-P. im ŚKDR. — e) “der Mond” ŚABDĀRTH. bei WILSON. — f) “der Planet Venus” ebend. — g) “Lichtstrahl” H. 99. — h) “Wind” H. ś. 170. — i) “Geschlechtsliebe” AK. 1, 1, 7, 17. H. an. MED. — k) “ein Brahmane” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — l) “the condition of the religious student” ebend. — m) ein N. Śiva’s ebend. — n) N. pr. a) eines Sohnes des Bhṛgu MBH. 13, 4145. — b) eines Sohnes des Gada HARIV. 9193. — g) eines Sohnes des 3ten Manu HARIV. 424. — d) des Indra im 14ten Manvantara VP. 269. MĀRK. P. 100, 30. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 35. — e) eines der sieben Weisen im 14ten Manvantara HARIV. 491. VP. 269. MĀRK. P. 100, 31. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 35. — z) eines Sārthavāha MBH. 3, 2526. — h) eines Sohnes des Śatadyumna VP. 390. BHĀG. P. 9, 13, 22. — j) eines Sohnes des Śuddha, Sohnes des Anenas, BHĀG. P. 9, 17, 11. — i) eines Sohnes des Andhaka VP. 435. BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 18. — c) eines Sohnes des Vipra VP. 465. BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 46. — l) eines Sohnes des Arthapati HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 12. — 3) f. N. pr. einer Tochter Kaśyapa’s von der Tāmrā und Urmutter der Wasservögel HARIV. 222. fg. VP. 148. fg. — Vgl. śauca. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śuci 1 I A deva (god) who was born in Agnivaṁśa. This Śuci was the son of Agnideva who was the eldest son of Brahmā, and his wife Svāhā. Śuci had two brothers by name Pāvaka and Pavamāna. These brothers had fortyfive sons. They are also known as “Agnis”. Thus there are on the whole fortynine Agnis, including the father, three sons and their fortyfive children. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1, Chapter 10). śuci 2 II Cākṣuṣa was a son of Manu. Ten sons were born to Manu by his wife, Naḍvalā. They were, Kuru, Puru, Śatadyumna, Tapasvī, Satyavān, Śuci, Agniṣṭoma, Atirātra, Sudyumna and Abhimanyu. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1, Chapter 13). śuci 3 III There is a passage in Chapter 19 of Agni Purāṇa which says that Kaśyapa Prajāpati had six daughters by his wife Tāmrā, who were, Kākā, Śyenī, Bhāsī, Gṛddhrikā, Śuci and Grīvā and that different classes of birds took their source from them. śuci 4 IV A King of the Solar dynasty. From Bhāgavata, 9th Skandha we learn that he was the son of Śakradyumna and the father of Vanadvāja. śuci 5 V In Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 8, Verse 14, there is a reference to a King Śuci who worships Yama, the son of Sūrya, in Yama’s assembly. śuci 6 VI The leader of a band of merchants. It was he who met and comforted Damayantī who lost her way in the forest after Nala left her. (Vana Parva, Chapter 64, Verse 127). śuci 7 VII One of the sons of Viśvāmitra. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 4, Verse 54). śuci 7i VIII A son of Bhṛgu Maharṣi. (Mahābhārata, Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 55, Verse 128). śuci 1x IX A Maharṣi born in the family of Aṅgiras. By a curse of Vasiṣṭha, this Maharṣi was born as a mortal, as the son of King Vijitāśva. (Bhāgavata, 4th Skandha). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śuci 2. śuc + i, I. adj. 1. White, resplendent, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3322. 2. Clear (as a jewel), Utt. Rāmac. 35, 18. 3. Gentle (cf. śuci-smita, s. v. smi). 4. Clean, Bhartṛ. 2, 17; purified. 5. Pure, Man. 1, 76; pious. 6. Exempt from passion. 7. Honest, upright, Rām. 3, 53, 12; Pañc. 191, 13. 8. Free from fault, Pañc. i. d. 215. II. m. 1. White (the colour). 2. Purity, virtue, correctness. 3. Purification by ablution. 4. Judicial acquittal. 5. A faithful and tried minister. 6. The month Jyeṣṭha (May -June), and Āṣāḍha (June — July), i. e. the hot season, Ragh. 3, 3; Rājat. 5, 477; Hiḍ. 1, 10. 7. The sun. 8. The moon. 9. Fire. 10. The planet Venus. 11. Śiva. 12. A Brāhmaṇa. 13. Oblation to fire at the first feeding of an infant. — Comp. a-, adj. impure, Hit. ii. d. 24. upadhā-, adj. free from deceit, Hit. iii. d. 16. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śuci a. flaming, beaming (lit. & fig.); light, bright, clear, pure; holy, virtuous, honest. m. purity, honesty, fire or a cert. fire, a cert. month in summer & summer i.g., the sun, a man’s name. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śuci śuc-i, a. (f. id., i in pl. y-aḥ) bright, radiant (V.); shining white (C.); clear, pure (V., C.); pure, undefiled, guileless, honest, upright (V., C.); ritually pure (S., C.): -°, rid of (C., rare); m. purity, uprightness (C., very rare); fire (P.); a summer month, hot season (V., C.); N.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śuci pu° śuca–ki . 1 vahnau 2 citrakavṛkṣe 3 āṣāḍhamāse 4 śṛṅgārarase amaraḥ . 5 jyaiṣṭhamāse medi° 6 śuddhācaraṇe 7 grīṣme 8 ṛtau 9 śuddhamantriṇi medi° . 10 agnibhede pāvakaḥ pavamānaśca śuciragniśca te trayaḥ . nimathyaḥ pavamānaḥ syāt vaidyutaḥ pāvakaḥ smṛtaḥ . yaścāgnau tapate sūryaḥ śuciragnistvasau smṛtaḥ kūrmapu° 12 a° . 11 śvetavarṇe 12 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . śucitvañca śaucaṁ śuddhatā vaidikakarmārhatvaprayojakaḥ saṁskāraviśeṣaḥ . śucistatkālajīvī karma kuryāt śrutau śaucasya karmāṅgatvaṁ, sa ca snānādijanyaḥ puṇyabhedo vā . 13 mūrye ca tapanastāpanaścaiva śuciḥ saptāśvavāhanaḥ sūryastavaḥ . 14 arkavṛkṣe 15 kāśyapatnyāstāmrāyāḥ kanyābhede strī ṣaṭsutāśca mahā sattvāstāmrāyāḥ parikīrtitāḥ . śukī śyenī ca bhāse ca sugrīvī śucigṛdhrike garuḍapu° 6 a° . 16 śuddhe 17 anupahate tri° medi° . |
शुब्र – śubra | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
śubra a. [śubha-rak] (1) Shining, bright, radiant. (2) White; paśyati pittopahataḥ śaśiśubraṁ śaṁkhapapi pītaṁ K. P. 10; R. 2. 69. –braḥ (1) The white colour. (2) Sandal (said to be n). –braṁ (1) Silver. (2) Talc. (3) Rock-salt. (4) Green vitriol. — Comp. –aṁśuḥ, –karaḥ 1. the moon. –2. camphor. –datin n. the elephant presiding over the north-west quarter. –raśimaḥ the moon. |
शुभ्र – śubhra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śubhra mf (“ā”) n. radiant, shining, beautiful, splendid &c. &c.
mf (“ā”) n. clear, spotless (as fame) mf (“ā”) n. bright-coloured, white &c. śubhra m. white (the colour) śubhra m. sandal śubhra m. heaven śubhra m. N. of a man g. “kurv-ādi” śubhra m. of the husband of Vikuṇṭhā and father of Vaikuṇṭha śubhra m. of a poet śubhra pl. N. of a people śubhra n. (only silver śubhra n. talc śubhra n. green vitriol śubhra n. rock or fossil salt śubhra n. the root of Andropogon Muricatus. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śubhra (von 3. śubh) UṆĀDIS. 2, 13. 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “schmuck, schön; klar”; = uddīpta, dīpta AK. 3, 4, 25, 194. H. an. 2, 464. MED. r. 93 harī ṚV. 1, 35, 3. 2, 11, 3. 8, 15, 5. grāvan 3, 33, 1. yuvan 9, 14, 5. marya 96, 20. śiśavaḥ 7, 56, 16. die Aśvin 68, 1. die Marut 1, 19, 5. 167, 4. 2, 36, 2. Ushas 1, 57, 3. 7, 75, 6. Agni 3, 26, 2. – 7, 39, 3. 95, 6. śuṣma 2, 11, 4. 7, 56, 8. āpaḥ 5, 41, 12. KAUŚ. 103. andhas ṚV. 9, 62, 5. 107, 24. AV. 11, 1, 17. puruṣa MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 2. ratha MBH. 3, 3031. āsana R. GORR. 1, 3, 68. ābharaṇa R. SCHL. 2, 78, 5. MĀRK. P. 82, 25. guṇāḥ “glänzende Vorzüge” Spr. (II) 3809. — b) “weiss, hellfarbig” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 25, 194. H. 1393. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 47. KĀM. NĪTIS. 14, 32. Spr. 4925. kuthāḥ R. GORR. 2, 72, 20. asthi VET. in LA. (III) 4, 7. triṇayanavṛṣa MEGH. 53. giri KATHĀS. 50, 169. candana WEBER, KṚSAṆAJ. 291. ātapatra RĀJA-TAR. 5, 482. BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 38. gṛha M. 7, 76. R. 4, 40, 40. sadman Spr. 3003. catuḥśālāni R. 2, 91, 32. guṇāḥ “Fäden” Spr. (II) 3809. Perlen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 5. akṣarāṇi, -dhātu Schol. zu NAIṢ 22, 54. mṛd (mṛdā st. sadā zu lesen) PADMA-P. 3, 4. sudhāśubhraṁ sadma Spr. 3268. bhūti- “wie Asche” KATHĀS. 25, 231. hima- 30, 31. karpūra- 75, 104. śaraśubhra (so ist wohl zu lesen st. śaracchubhra) R. GORR. 1, 45, 19. yaśas “weiss, rein” RAGH. 2, 69. KATHĀS. 25, 225. — 2) m. a) “Sandel” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. pr. a) eines Mannes P. 4, 1, 123. gaṇa kurvādi zu 151. Gatte der Vikuṇṭhā und Vater Vaikuṇṭha’s BHĀG. P. 8, 5, 4. — b) pl. eines Volkes MĀRK. P. 58, 12. — 3) f. ā “crystal; Bambu manna; the Ganges” WILSON nach RĀJAN. — 4) n. a) “Talk” H. an. MED. — b) “Silber” H. ś. 161. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “Eisenvitriol” RĀJAN. a. a. O. — Vgl. candra-, tanū-, mahā-, śaubhrāyaṇa, śaubhreya, śaubhrya. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śubhra śubh + ra, I. adj. 1. White, Megh. 53; Lass. 4, 17. 2. Shining, bright, Chr. 291, 3 = Rigv. i. 85, 3; Pañc. i. d. 252. II. m. 1. White (the colour). 2. Sandal, Padmap. 3, 4. III. f. rā. 1. The Ganges. 2. Crystal. 3. Bambu manna. IV. n. 1. Silver. 2. Talc. — Comp. mahā-, n. silver. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śubhra a. beautiful, shining, white, pure, clear (also of sounds). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śubhra śubh-ra, a. V., C.: radiant, splendid, beautiful, handsome; C.: clear, spotless (fame); white (rare): -tā, f., -tva, n. whiteness; -danta, a. (ī) having white teeth; -bhānu, m. moon. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śubhra na° śubha–rak . 1 abhrake medi° 2 raupye 3 kāsīse 4 śubhralavaṇe rājani° . 6 candane śabdaca° . 6 śvetavarṇe pu° 7 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . |
शुभ्रता – śubhratā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śubhratā “śubhra-tā” f.
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śubhratā (von śubhra) f. “die weisse Farbe, das Weiss”: rājahaṁsasya Spr. (II) 2101. kuvastratā śubhratayā virājate 2713. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 117,b,7. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śubhratā f. -tva n. white colour. |
श्येत – śyeta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyeta mf (“śyenī”, or “śyetā”) n. (prob. connected with “śveta” q.v.)
reddish white, white śyeta m. white (the colour) śyeta mf (“śyenī”, or “śyetā”) n. (“śyenī”) f. a white cow (see “śyaineya”) śyeta m. a woman with a lily-white complexion (= “kumuda-pattrābhā”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śyeta a. (tā or nā f.) White. –taḥ The white colour. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śyeta UṆĀDIS. 3, 93 (parox.). adj. (f. śyenī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39; nach dem Schol. auch śyetā) “röthlich weiss (weiss” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1392. nach den Comm. = śveta, śubhra, rakta, āraktaḥ śvetaḥ, ālohitaḥ śvetaḥ): Agni ṚV. 1, 71, 4. 7, 4, 3. Rosse 5, 33, 8. enī, śyenī, kṛṣṇā, rohiṇī AV. 6, 83, 1. 18, 4, 33. VS. 24, 3. die Farbe der auf oder untergehenden Sonne ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 7. KĀṬH. 15, 4. der Aśvin ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 1. 2, 8. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 14, 23. KĀṬH. 13, 4. KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 3, 23. haṁsaśyenī KIR. 5, 31. kumudaśyenī P. 6, 2, 2, Schol. śyenī = kumudapattrābhā HALĀY. 4, 53. — śyenī s. auch unter śyena. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śyeta śyeta (probably from śvi in śvit, cf. śveta and Zend. śpi in śpi + tama, śpi + ti), I. adj., f. tā and śyenī, White, Kir. 5, 31. II. m. White (the colour). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śyeta f. śyenī reddish-white. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śyeta śyeta, a. (enī) reddish white. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śyeta pu° śyai–itac . 1 śullabarṇe 2 tadvati tri° striyāṁ ṅīp tamya naśca . śyenī . |
श्येन – śyena | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyena m. a hawk, falcon, eagle, any bird of prey (esp. the eagle that
brings down Soma to man) &c. &c. m. firewood laid in the shape of an eagle m. a kind of array (in battle) m. a partic. part of the sacrificial victim m. a partic. Ekāha m. a horse m. N. of a ṛiṣi (having the patr. āgneya and author of śyena m. (with or without “indraśya”) N. of a Sāman śyena mfn. eagle-like m. coming from an eagle (as “eagle’s flesh”), Kṛiṣṇaj. (prob. w.r. for “śyaina”). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śyena UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. 1) m. a) “der grösste und stärkste Raubvogel: Adler”; auch “Falke” oder “Habicht” NAIGH. 5, 5. NIR. 4, 24. 11, 1. AK. 2, 5, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 266. H. 1334. an. 2, 288. MED. n. 21. HALĀY. 2, 98. śyeno na bhīto ataro rajāṁsi ṚV. 1, 32, 14. 33, 2. 118, 11. 163, 1. śyenāṁ iva dhrajato antarikṣe 165, 2. 2, 42, 2. 4, 6, 10. 5, 44, 11. 45, 9. 7, 56, 3. 63, 5. 8, 20, 10. śyeno gṛdhrāṇām 9, 96, 6. 10, 99, 8. 127, 5. TS. 2, 4, 7, 1. śyeno vayasāṁ patiṣṭhaḥ 5, 4, 11, 1. VS. 9, 9. 19, 10. AV. 3, 3, 4. yathā śyenātpatatriṇaḥ saṁvijante 5, 21, 6. 7, 41, 2. 11, 9, 9. holt den Soma ṚV. 1, 93, 6. 3, 43, 7. 4, 18, 13. 26, 5. 27, 3. 6, 20, 6. 46, 13. 8, 71, 9. 9, 68, 6. 77, 2. 10, 11, 4. VS. 6, 32. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 1, 6. Gespann der Aśvin ṚV. 1, 118, 4 (daher = aśva NAIGH. 1, 14). Agni heisst divaḥ śyenaḥ ṚV. 7, 15, 4. — ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 19. PAÑCAV. BR. 1, 5, 3. 19. 13, 10, 13. vayasāṁ vīryatamaḥ KĀṬH. 37, 14. kṣepiṣṭhaḥ ṢAḌV. BR. 3, 8. M. 11, 135. MBH. 1, 2621. 2383. fgg. 5991. 3, 15692. 12, 9943 (śyenāścā- mit der ed. Bomb. zu lesen). HARIV. 223. R. GORR. 2, 46, 5. 3, 20, 19. SUŚR. 1, 24, 8. 202, 13. KAP. 4, 5. Spr. 3326. (II) 2852. 4965. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43, 62. 46, 69. 79, 24. 86, 38. 88, 1. 11. 94, 5. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 81. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 23. 5, 23, 3. 6, 6, 27. 7, 8, 28. 8, 10, 10. Verz. d. B. H. No. 897. H. 48. PAÑCAT. 188, 15. — b) N. eines Ekāha ṢAḌV. BR. 3, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 3, 1. 5, 30. MAŚ. 3, 7 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. śyenājirau ĀŚV. GṚHY. 9, 7 1. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 22, 4. — c) Bez. “einer best. Schlachtordnung” MBH. 6, 3062. KĀM. NĪTIS. 18, 48. 19, 44. — d) N. pr. eines Mannes mit dem patron. Āgneya, Liedverfassers von ṚV. 10, 188. — MBH. 2, 293. — 2) f. ī “die Urmutter der Adler, Falken u.s.w.” MBH. 1, 2620. fg. 2633. HARIV. 222. fg. R. 3, 20, 18. fg. 33. fg. VP. 148. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. — 3) n. a) “Brust” KAUŚ. 45; vgl. 4) “a”). — b) N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 240,b. PAÑCAV. BR. 13, 10, 12. LĀṬY. 6, 2, 8. — 4) adj. a) etwa “adlergestaltig”: śyenamasya vakṣaḥ kṛṇutāt TBR. 3, 6, 6, 2. śyenaṁ vakṣa udgātuḥ AIT. BR. 7, 1. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 9, 3; vgl. AV. 9, 7, 5. “vom Adler” oder “Falken kommend”: māṁsa WEBER, KRṢNAJ. 221; vielleicht fehlerhaft für śyaina. — b) = śyeta TRIK. H. an. MED. — Vgl. kṣipra-, divaḥśyenī und śyenī unter śyeta. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śyena 1 I A class of birds. A daughter named “Śyenī” was born to Kaśyapa Prajāpati by his wife Tāmrā. Śyenas were the sons of Śyenī. (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 66, Verse 56). śyena 2 II An ancient sage. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva Chapter 7, Verse 11, describes him as shining in Indra’s assembly. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śyena śyena (akin to the last), I. m. 1. White (the colour). 2. A hawk, Pañc. 188, 15. II. f. nī. A female hawk. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śyena m. eagle, falcon, hawk; a form of military array, N. of a man; f. śyenī the mythol. mother of eagles etc. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śyena śyena, m. eagle (that brings down Soma to man; V.); falcon, hawk; kind of ekāha (S.); kind of battle-array (C.); a. eaglelike (breast; Br., S.): -jīvin, m. falconer; (a) -patvan, a. flying with eagles (car; RV.1); -avapātam, ad. swooping down like an eagle or hawk. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śyena puṁstrī° śyai–inan . 1 pakṣibhede (vāja) amaraḥ . 2 pāṇḍuravarṇe ca 3 tadvati tri° medi° . tatkhagasya śubhāgubhasūcanaṁ yathā pradakṣiṇīkṛtya naraṁ vrajanto yātrāsu vāmega gatāḥ praveśe . śyenāḥ praśastāḥ prakṛtasvarāste śāntāḥ pradīptā vittatasvastaste . śyeno nṛṇāṁ dakṣiṇavāmapṛṣṭhabhāgeṣu bhāgyaiḥ sthitimādadhāti . tiṣṭhan purastānmṛtaye kaṇeti yuddhe jayaṁ channarathadhvajasthaḥ iti vasantarājaḥ . śyenenābhicaran yajeta śrutivihite 2 yāgabhede abhicāraśabde dṛśyam . |
श्येनः – śyenaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
śyenaḥ [śyai-inan] (1) The white colour. (2) Whiteness. (3) A hawk, falcon. (4) Violence. (5) Ved. A horse. — Comp. –avapātaḥ the swoop of a hawk; Māl. 8. 8. –karaṇaṁ, –karaṇikā 1. burning on a separate funeral pile. –2. a hawk-like, i. e. rash and desperate, act. –cit, –jīvin m. a falconer. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 śyenaḥ puṁ, (śyai ṅa gatau + śyāstyāhṛñavibhya inac . uṇā° 2 . 46 . iti inac .) pāṇḍuravarṇaḥ . iti medinī .. pakṣiviśeṣaḥ . sañcālaḥ iti vāj iti ca bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . śaśādanaḥ 2 patrī 3 . ityamaraḥ .. kapotāriḥ 4 patadbhīruḥ 5 . iti śabdaratnāvalī . ghātipakṣī 6 grāhakaḥ 7 mārakaḥ 8 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. śaśādaḥ 9 kravyādaḥ 10 krūraḥ 11 vegī 12 khagāntakaḥ 13 karagaḥ 14 nīlapicchaḥ 15 lambakarṇaḥ 16 raṇapriyaḥ 17 raṇapakṣī 18 picchavāṇaḥ 19 sthūlanīlaḥ 20 bhayaṅkaraḥ 21 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. śaśaghātakaḥ 22 . iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. asya māṁsaguṇāḥ prasahaśabde draṣṭavyāḥ .. * .. tasya śubhāśubhasūcakatvaṁ yathā — pradakṣiṇīkṛtya naraṁ vrajanto yātrāsu vāmena gatāḥ praveśe . śyenāḥ praśastāḥ prakṛtasvarāste śāntāḥ pradīptā vitatasvarāste .. śyeno nṛṇāṁ dakṣiṇavāmapṛṣṭhabhāgeṣu bhāgyaiḥ sthitimādadhāti . tiṣṭhan purastānmṛtaye karoti yuddhe jayaṁ channarathadhvajasthaḥ .. iti vasantarājaśākune aṣṭamavargaḥ .. |
श्रवण – śravaṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śravaṇa n. the act of hearing (also “that which is heard” = “śruti” q.v.;
“iti śravaṇāt”, “because it is so heard or revealed” i.e. “according to a Vedic text”) &c. n. acquiring knowledge by hearing, learning, study (cf. “a-śravaṇāt”) śravaṇa n. (in phil.) the determining by means of the six signs the true doctrine of the Vedānta (in regard to the only really existing Being) n. fame, reputation n. wealth śravaṇa m. (rarely n.) the ear &c. śravaṇa m. (= “śramaṇa”) a Buddhist or Jain monk (cf. “śrāvaka”) śravaṇa m. the hypotenuse of a triangle or the diagonal of a tetragon &c. śravaṇa mfn. (fr. 2. “śru”; for 1. “śravaṇa” see p.1096; cf. “sravaṇa”) limping, lame śravaṇa m. N. of the 20th (or 23rd) Nakshatra (presided over by Viṣṇu, and containing the three stars, [characters] and [characters] Aquilae, supposed to represent three footsteps; cf. “tri-vikrama”) &c. śravaṇa m. a sort of disease (= “śroṇa”) śravaṇa m. N. of a son of Naraka śravaṇa m. (with “bhaṭṭa”) N. of a teacher śravaṇa n. = “śravaṇā-karman” śravaṇa m. a kind of plant used for colouring white śravaṇa n. = “śrapaṇa” śravaṇa w.r. for “sravaṇa”. śravaṇa &c. see 1. “śrava”, p.1096, col.3. śravaṇa &c. see p.1097, col.2. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śravaṇa (von 1. śru) 1) m. (seltener n.) “Ohr” AK. 2, 6, 2, 45. TRIK. 3, 3, 139. H. 574. an. 3, 227 (śravaṇaṁ st. śrāvaṇaṁ zu lesen). MED. ṇ. 79. HALĀY. 2, 361. MAITRJUP. 6, 22. Spr. (II) 4992. MBH. 12, 7397. R. 2, 91, 27 (n.). R. GORR. 2, 100, 24. 3, 50, 17. 52, 30. 5, 14, 19. SUŚR. 1, 125, 8. 126, 4. 2, 363, 3. GṚHYAS. 2, 98. ad ŚĀK. 54. Schol. zu 8. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 9. 51, 8. KATHĀS. 13, 160. 48, 38. CAURAP. 6. MĀRK. P. 34, 71. 82, 17. BHĀG. P. 2, 2, 37. 7, 9, 40 (n.). 9, 2, 7. 11, 23. — 2) m. (wie alle Wörter für “Ohr) Hypotenuse, Diagonale eines Tetragons u.s.w.” COLEBR. Alg. 59. GOLĀDHY. TRIPRAŚN. 48. — 3) n. “das Hören” TRIK. H. an. MED. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 4, 5. 7, 3, 6. PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 10. CHĀND. UP. 8, 12, 4. M. 8, 74. MBH. 1, 865. 2, 277. 7, 2128. HARIV. 12243. R. 2, 102 in der Unterschr. R. GORR. 1, 3, 38. 4, 140. 71, 19. 4, 17, 20. 58, 3. 7, 20, 6. dūrācchravaṇāni darśanāni cāsya bhavanti SUŚR.1,158,11. ŚĀK. 15,15. fg. 59. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 90,8. Spr. 2871. BHĀG. P.1,2,17.8,35.2,4,3.7,15.3,7,14. 16,6.9,3,34. 10,6,3. 41,16. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 85,b,13. 225,a,20. PAÑCAT. 188,10. SARVADARŚANAS.4,6. 76,6. 8. 157,9. 22. -subhaga “angenehm zu hören” MEGH. 11. -paruṣa 62. ugraśravaṇadarśana adj. MBH. 3, 15856. dūra- “weithörig” PAÑCAR. 1, 1, 50. ṇico ‘śravaṇaṁ chāndasam so v. a. “das Fehlen des Causalsuffixes” ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 102. “das Hören” so v. a. “das Lernen, Lesen”: śuśrūṣā śravaṇaṁ caiva grahaṇaṁ dhāraṇaṁ tathā. ūho ‘poho ‘rthavijñānaṁ tattvajñānaṁ ca dhīguṇāḥ.. KĀM. NĪTIS. 4, 22 = H. 310. fg. -manananididhyāsanasamādhyanuṣṭhāna VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 113. fg. NĪLAK. 26. Schol. zu KAP. 1, 60. SARVADARŚANAS. 46, 13. 58, 12. fgg. 85, 4. 103, 20. 124, 22. 139, 10. 159, 5. aśravaṇāt “weil man es nicht lernt, weil es nicht gelehrt wird” LĀṬY. 10, 11, 5. — 4) n. “Leumund, guter Ruf” ĀŚV. ŚR. 1, 10, 8. NIR. 11, 33. — Vgl. kuru-, pitṛ-, vi-. śravaṇa (von 2. śru) 1) adj. a) “lahm” KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 4, 16. — b) “leck” GOBH. 3, 2, 43. — 2) m. a) N. “des 20ten” “21ten, 22ten”) Nakshatra, das unter der Figur von drei Fusstapfen gedacht wird, H. 113. an. 3, 227. MED. ṇ. 79. AV. 19, 7, 4. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 335, 1. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 3, 5, 2. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 20. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 10. 14. WEBER, JYOT. 95. YĀJÑ. 1, 142. MBH. 6, 81.85. 13, 3279. 4265. 14, 1213. R. 5, 55, 1. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 7. 11. 7, 2. 11 (v. l. n.). 9, 3. 33 10, 1. 15. 11, 60. 15, 20. 30. 23, 6. 32, 16. 43, 38. 47, 6. 55, 31. 81, 20. 97, 16. 98, 11. MĀRK. P. 33, 14. BHĀG. P. 4, 12, 48. 7, 14, 20 (pl.). 23. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 230. fg. fem. ā MED. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 15 (v. l. masc.). BHĀG. P. 5, 23, 6 (ed. Bomb. masc.). MĀRK. P. 58, 41. — b) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Naraka BHĀG. P. 10, 59, 12. — 3) f. ā a) N. eines Nakshatra, s. u. 2) “a”). — b) “die Vollmondsnacht im Monat” Śrāvaṇa P. 4, 2, 5. 23. GOBH. 3, 3, 11. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3, 14, 2. -cintā Verz. d. Cambr. K. 64. -karman “die an diesem Tage übliche Ceremonie” ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 1, 1. GOBH. 3, 7, 1. 4, 8, 1. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 14. Verz. d. B. H. No. 206. — c) (neben Śraviṣṭhā) N. pr. einer Tochter Citraka’s HARIV. 1921. 2089. Rājādhideva’s 2034. — 4) n. = śravaṇākarman (s. u. 3) “b”) ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 15. — Vgl. śroṇa, ślavaṇa, 2. śrāvaṇa, śrāvaṇika. śravaṇa m. “eine best. zum Weissfärben dienende Pflanze” SUŚR. 2, 175, 4. f. ā = muṇḍīrikāvṛkṣa (vgl. śrāvaṇā unter 1. śrāvaṇa) RATNAM. im ŚKDR. śravaṇāhvayā f. “eine best. Pflanze” SUŚR. 1, 134, 2. śravaṇa m. fehlerhaft für śramaṇa “Buddhist” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 87, 9 (v. l. śramaṇa). 36. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 51, “b”, 11. f. ā “eine Bettelnonne” H. 532. R. 3, 76, 20. Hierher vielleicht śravaṇa m. als N. Viṣṇu’s H. ś. 63. śravaṇa n. s. sravaṇa. śravaṇa n. = śrapaṇa Randglosse im Comm. zu H. 75. śravaṇa fehlerhaft für 2. śrāvaṇa. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śravaṇa 1 I A son of Murāsura. Murāsura had seven sons. They were: Tāmra, Antarīkṣa, Śravaṇa, Vasu, Vibhāvasu, Nabhasvān and Aruṇa. They were all killed by Śrī Kṛṣṇa. (Bhāgavata, Skandha 10). śravaṇa 2 II One of the twentyseven stars (nakṣatras). Those who perform Śrāddha on the day of this star will attain heaven. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 39, Verse 11). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śravaṇa śravaṇa, i. e. śru + ana, I. m. and n. The ear, Hit. i. d. 193, M.M. II. m., and f. ṇā, The twenty-third lunar asterism. III. n. 1. Hearing, Pañc. 188, 10. 2. Study, Vedāntas. in Chr. 216, 2; learning, Mālat. 6, 5. — Comp. ugra-, adj. dreadful to hear, Johns. Sel. 96, 79. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śravaṇa [1] n. hearing, learning; fame, (good) reputation; ear (also m.). śravaṇa [2] a. lame; m. (& f. ā) N. of a lunar mansion. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śravaṇa 2. śrav-aṇa, a. [2. śru] lame (S., rare); m., ā, f. (rare), N. of the twentieth or twenty-fifth lunar asterism (conceined of as representing the figure of three footsteps): ā, f. night of full-moon in the month of Śrāvaṇa: -karman, n. ceremony on the day of full-moon in Śrāvaṇa. śravaṇa 3. śravaṇa, n. incorr. for sravaṇa. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śravaṇa na° śṛṇotyanena śru–varaṇe lyuṭ . 1 karṇe śabdagrāhakendriyabhede amaraḥ . bhāve lyuṭ . 2 śrutau aśvanyādiṣu dvāviṁśe 3 nakṣatre puṁstrī° jyo° ta° klīvatvamapi amārkapāte avaṇaṁ yadi syāditi smṛtiḥ . 4 muṇḍarikāvṛkṣe strī ratnamā° . |
श्वितान – śvitāna | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvitāna mfn. being white, white-coloured
Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śvitāna , śvitna a. Ved. White. |
श्विति – śviti | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śviti (prob.) f. whiteness, a white colour |
श्वित्य – śvitya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvitya mfn. white, white-coloured
śvitya m. (cf. “śvaitya”) N. of a man () Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śvitya , śvitnya a. White. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śvitya (?) m. N. pr. eines Mannes NĪLAK. zu MBH. 7, 2183. — Vgl. śvaitya. |
श्वेत – śveta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śveta mf (“ā” or “śvenī”) n. white, dressed, in white, bright (with
“parvata” m. “snow-mountain” ; with “kaṭākṣa” m. “a bright side-glance” &c. &c. śveta m. white (the colour) śveta m. a white horse śveta m. a small white shell, cowry śveta m. a silver coin śveta m. a white cloud śveta m. the planet Venus or its regent śukra śveta m. a partic. comet (cf. “-ketu”) śveta m. a partic. plant (= “jīvaka”) śveta m. cumin seed śveta m. N. of a serpent-demon (with “vaidārva” or “vaidārvya” or “vaidarvya”; others give “śvaita-vaidārava” as signifying “a partic. deity connected with the sun”) śveta m. N. of one of Skanda’s attendants śveta m. of a Daitya (son of Vipra-citti) śveta m. of a Muni śveta m. of a partic. Avatāra of śiva śveta m. of a pupil of śiva 122 n. 3 śveta m. of a manifestation of Viṣṇu in his Varāha incarnation (worshipped in a partic. part of India) śveta m. of a Rājarṣi śveta m. of a son of the king Sudeva śveta m. of a general śveta m. of a son of Vapushmat śveta m. of a preceptor śveta m. of a mythical elephant śveta m. of the sixth range of mountains dividing the known continent (the white or “snowy” mountains separating the Varshas of Hiraṇmaya and Ramyaka) ( 420 n. 1) śveta m. of one of the minor Dvīpas or divisions of the world (cf. “- dvīpa”) śveta mf (“ā” or “śvenī”) n. (“ā”) f. one of the seven tongues of Fire śveta m. a small white shell, cowry śveta m. N. of various plants (accord. to the birch tree, a white bignonia, Boerhavia Procumbens, Achyranthes Atropurpurea &c.) śveta m. crystal śveta m. alum śveta m. white or candied sugar śveta m. bamboo-manna śveta m. a mystical term for the letter “s” śveta m. N. of one of the Mātṛis attendant on Skanda śveta m. of the mother of the elephant śveta (or śaṅkha) śveta m. of a princess śveta mf (“ā” or “śvenī”) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a river śveta n. the white of the eye śveta n. the growing white (of the hair) śveta n. silver śveta n. butter-milk and water mixed half and half Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śveta a. (śvetā or śvenī f.) [śvitac ghañ vā] White; tataḥ śvetairhayairyukte mahati syaṁdane sthitau Bg. 1. 14. –taḥ (1) The white colour. (2) A conchshell. (3) A cowrie. (4) The planet Venus. (5) Śukra, the regent of the planet. (6) A white cloud. (7) Cumin seed. (8) N. of a range of mountains; see kulācala or kulaparvata. (9) N. of a division of the world. –taṁ Silver. — Comp. –aṁbaraḥ, –vāsas m. a class of Jaina ascetics. –ikṣuḥ a kind of sugar-cane. –udaraḥ an epithet of Kubera. –kamalaṁ, –padmaṁ a white lotus. –kuṁjaraḥ an epithet of Airāvata, the elephant of Indra. –kuṣṭhaṁ white leprosy. –ketuḥ 1. a Bauddha or Jaina saint. –2. the descending node. –kolaḥ a kind of fish (śaphara). –gajaḥ, –dvipaḥ 1. a white elephant. –2. the elephant of Indra. –garut m., –garutaḥ a goose. –chadaḥ 1. a goose. –2. a kind of basil. –dvīpaḥ N. of one of the eighteen minor divisions of the known continent. –dhātuḥ 1. a white mineral. –2. chalk. –3. the milkstone. –dhāman m. 1. the moon. –2. camphor. –3. the foam of the sea. –4. cuttle-fish bone. –nīlaḥ a cloud. –patraḥ a goose. -rathaḥ an epithet of Brahman. –parṇāśaḥ white basil. –pāṭalā the white trumpetflower. –piṁgaḥ a lion. –piṁgalaḥ 1. a lion. –2. an epithet of Śiva. –bhikṣuḥ a kind of white-robed mendicant; Pt. 3. 76. –maricaṁ white pepper. –mālaḥ 1. a cloud. –2. smoke. –rakta a. pale-red, rosy. ( –ktaḥ) the pink or rosy colour. –raṁjanaṁ lead. –rathaḥ the planet Venus. –rocis m. the moon. –rohitaḥ an epithet of Garuḍa. –valkalaḥ the glomerous fig-tree. –vājin m. 1. the moon. –2. an epithet of Arjuna. –3. camphor. –vāsas m. an ascetic wearing white garments. –vāh m. an epithet of Indra. –vāhaḥ 1. an epithet of Arjuna. –2. of Indra. –vāhanaḥ 1. an epithet of Arjuna. –2. the moon. –3. a marine monster (makara). –vāhin m. an epithet of Arjuna. –śuṁgaḥ, –śṛṁgaḥ barley. –hayaḥ 1. a horse of Indra. –2. an epithet of Arjuna. –3. N. of Indra. –hastin m. Airāvata, Indra’s elephant. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śveta (von 1. śvit) 1) adj. f. ā P. 4, 1, 39; nach VOP. 4, 27 fälschlich auch śvenī, eine Verwechselung mit śyeta). “weiss, licht” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1392. an. 2, 204. MED. t. 67. fg. HALĀY. 4, 47. Ross ṚV. 1, 116, 6. 119, 10. 7, 77, 3. 8, 41, 9. 10. AIT. BR. 6, 35. ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 3, 9. BHAG. 1, 14. R. GORR. 2, 12, 11. HALĀY. 2, 282. ukṣaṇaḥ VĀLAKH. 7, 2. AV. 5, 17, 15. 20, 128, 6. Kuh TS. 2, 1, 8, 1. 4. śvetāyai śvetavatsāyai dugdhe TBR. 1, 7, 3, 7. KAUŚ. 120. govṛṣa R. GORR. 2, 12, 11. vṛṣabha MBH. 2, 415. aśvatarī (vgl. śvetā aśvatarāḥ Ind. St. 3, 258) 1, 8008. R. 4, 16, 41. – daśana 3, 36, 7. drapsa ṚV. 7, 87, 6. (agniḥ) citro yadabhrāṭ chveto na vikṣu 1, 66, 6. 3, 1, 4. 5, 1, 4. 8, 40, 8. kalaśa des Soma 4, 27, 5. 9, 74, 7. 7, 90, 3. 91, 3. 8, 26, 19. 10, 20, 9. lakṣman AV. 1, 23, 4. parvatāḥ “Schneeberge” ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 8, 9. carman KĀṬH. 34, 5. -pipīlikā KAUŚ. 116. — ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 8. mālyāni R. 2, 25, 26. śilāḥ 4, 9, 44. śvetaṁ padaṁ śiroruhāṇām Spr. (II) 6599. 2104. RAGH. 1, 83. SUŚR. 1, 23, 3. surā 189, 6. 2, 440, 5. śatapadī 290, 3. 297, 7. sarṣapa RATNAM. 113. śvetotpala BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 10. yūkā PAÑCAT. 60, 24. -taṇḍulapiṣṭa WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 272. śoṇita HARIV. 8445. kamaṇḍalu MBH. 1, 1149. kuṇḍalabhūṣaṇa HARIV. 2437. 13065. fg. 13070. śvetātapatra Spr. (II) 6495. BHĀG. P. 4, 4, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 25. 5, 53. 34, 23. 38, 3. anatiśveta, anatikṛṣṇa LĀṬY. 1, 1, 7. Ind. St. 1, 51. triḥśvetā śalalī GOBH. 2, 7, 8. — 2) m. a) “Schimmel (Ross”) ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 22. — b) “Otterköpfchen” H. ś. 172. H. an. “Muschel” überh. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) = jīvaka JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. “Kümmel” (dies wäre jīraka) WILSON nach derselben Aut. — d) “eine weisse Wolke” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — e) “der Planet Venus” ebend. — f) “ein best. Komet” (vgl. -ketu) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 39. fg. 97, 3. — g) N. pr. a) eines Schlangendämons PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 14. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 18. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 3, 3. VP. 149. BHĀG. P. 5, 24, 31. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2566. eines Daitja, eines Sohnes des Vipracitti, HARIV. 2437. 2651. eines Muni MBH. 1, 962. KATHĀS. 72, 334. fgg. einer Incarnation Śiva’s Verz. d. Oxf. H. 52,a,14. 53,b,4. eines Schülers dieses Śveta 52,a,15. eines Rājarṣi MBH. 1, 226 (eig. 231). 12, 5743. 13, 5668. 7130. 7681. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 59, “a”, 20. eines Sohnes des Fürsten Sudeva R. 7, 78, 4. eines Heerführers MBH. 6, 1868. 1870. śvetopākhyāna MBH. 1, 333 (viśvopākhyāna ed. Bomb.). R. GORR. 1, 4, 140. eines Sohnes des Vapushmant MĀRK. P. 53, 27. eines Lehrers Ind. St. 8, 222. fg. 364. — b) pl. eines Volkes VARĀH. BṚH. S. 16, 38. — g) eines Weltelephanten MBH. 1, 2630. — d) eines Berges (vgl. – parvata, -śaila, śvetādri) H. an. MED. MBH.3,10820. 11527. 14429.6,198.9,3349. 13,7657. 14,1174. R.5,11,7. MĀRK. P. 54,9. VP. 167. BHĀG. P.5,16,8. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 48,a,40. — e) eines Dvīpa (vgl. -dvīpa) H. an. MED. MBH. 12, 12703. R. 7, 37, 5, 22. = śvetadvīpa bei Kāśī Verz. d. Oxf. H. 57, “a”, N. 4. — 3) f. ā a) “Otterköpfchen” MED. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = kāṣṭhapāṭalī (-pāṭalā) und śaṅkhinī H. an. MED. “Boerhavia procumbens Roxb.” RATNAM. 25. “Birke” 94. “Achyranthes atropurpurea Lam.” 160. = aparājitā, śvetabṛhatī, śvetakaṇṭakārī, pāṣāṇabhedī, śilāvalkalā, śvetadūrvā, chūrikāpattrī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – SUŚR. 1, 144, 13. 2, 114, 8. 130, 21. 285, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 44, 10 (= girikarṇikā Comm.). — c) Bez. verschiedener “weisser” Stoffe: “Zucker”, = vaṁśarocanā und sphaṭī (von WILSON hier durch “Krystall” wiedergegeben) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) mystische Bez. “des Buchstabens” sa WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 317. 319. — e) N. pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 6240. der Mutter des Weltelephanten Śveta (Śañkha R.) MBH. 1, 2625. 2630. R. 3, 20, 22. einer Fürstin RĀJA- TAR. 8, 375. — 4) n. a) “das Weisse im Auge” SUŚR. 2, 303, 13. — b) “das Weisswerden der Haare” CHĀND. UP. 8, 14. — c) “Silber” AK. 2, 9, 97. 3, 4, 14, 82. TRIK. 2, 9, 32. H. 1043. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 5. — d) “Buttermilch und Wasser zu gleichen Theilen gemischt” H. 409. — Vgl. mahā-, śvaitya. śveta 2) g) b) śvetahūṇāḥ besser als ein Name aufzufassen. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śveta 1 I A King in ancient India. By his moral and spiritual power he was able to restore his dead son to life. He did not eat meat. Mahābhārata, Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 150 mentions that he was one of the few Kings who deserve to be remembered with reverence at dawn and dusk. (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 1, Verse 233; Śānti Parva, Chapter 153, Verse 68; Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 115, Verse 66). śveta 2 II A King. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Dākṣiṇātya Pāṭha, Chapter 14 mentions that he was one of the prominent Kings in India. śveta 3 III A son of the Virāṭa King. Śveta was the son of King Virāṭa by his chief wife Surathā, who was a princess of Kosala. Śveta had attended Yudhiṣṭhira’s Rājasūya. This distinguished warrior was killed by Bhīṣma in Bhārata Yuddha. (M.B. Dākṣiṇātya Pāṭha, Virāṭa Parva, Chapter 16; Sabhā Parva, Chapter 44, Verse 20; Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 48). śveta 4 IV A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Mahābhārata, Śalya Parva, Chapter 45, Verse 64). śveta 5 V Son of the elder brother of King Sudeva. There is a story of how Śveta, who was a sinner, attained mokṣa (salvation) by a vision of sage Agastya. Towards the end of his life, Śveta attained Mokṣa by performing austere tapas. But since he failed to earn God’s grace by giving food to the hungry, even in Heaven, he was tormented by hunger and thirst. His hunger was so severe that he began eating his own flesh. At last as suggested by Brahmā he was born again on earth and after a visit to Agastya re-entered Heaven. śveta 7 VII A mountain in Uttarā Khaṇḍa. In Mahābhārata, Vana Parva, Chapter 139, Verse 1, we find that the Pāṇḍavas crossed the Śveta mountain during their life in the forest. śveta 7i VIII A country situated on the northern side of the Nīla mountain. The region known as “Hiraṇyakam” is situated to the north of this country. (M.B. Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 6, Verse 37). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śveta śveta (i. e. śvit + a, or from śvi in śvit, śvind), I. adj., f. tā and nī, White, Pañc. 60, 24; wearing a white dress, Pañc. iii. d. 73. II. m., and f. tā, A small white shell used as a coin. III. m. 1. White (the colour). 2. A white cloud. 3. The planet venus. 4. A fabulous range of mountains. 5. One of the dvīpas, or divisions of the world. 6. A conch. 7. Cumin seed. IV. f. tā. 1. Crystal. 2. Candied sugar. 3. The name of several plants. V. n. Silver. — Comp. mahā-, f. tā, 1. Sarasvatī. 2. candied sugar. 3. the name of two plants. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śveta a. white, bright. m. white horse, N. of a serpent-demon etc. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śveta śvet-a, a. [śvit] white, bright; m. white horse (Br.); N.; n. (C.) white (of the eye). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śveta pu° śvita–aca ghañ vā . 1 dvīpabhede 2 parvatabhede 3 kapardake hemaca° . 4 śukragrahe 5 pubhrābhre śabdaca° . 6 śaṅkhe rājani° . 7 jīvake jaṭā° . 8 śuklavarṇe 9 tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca śvenī . 10 kaliyugīyaśivāvatāraviśeṣe yathā vedadhyāsāvatārāṇi dvāpare kathitāni tu . mahādevāvatārāṇi kalau śṛṇuta suvrata! . ādau kaliyuge śveto devadevo mahādyutiḥ . nāmrā hitāya viprāṇāmabhūdvaipakhate’nmare . himavacchisvare ramye chagale parvatottame . tasya śiṣyāḥ śikhāyuktā bubhūvaramitaprabhāḥ . śvetaḥ śvataśikhaścaiva śvetāsyaḥ śvetalohitaḥ . catvāraste mahātmāno brāhmaṇā vedapāragāḥ . subhāvo damanaścātha suhotraḥ kaṅkaṇastathā . lokākṣiratha yogāndro jaigīṣavyastu saptame . aṣṭame dadhibāhuḥ syānnavame vṛṣabha prabhuḥ . bhṛgustu daśame proktastasmādugraḥ paraḥ smṛtaḥ . dvādaśe’triḥ samākhyāto vālī cātha trayodaśe . caturdaśe gautamastu vedaśīrṣā tataḥ param . gākaṇaścāmavattasmāt guhāvāsaḥ śikhaṇḍyatha . jaṭāmālyaṭṭahāsaśca dāruko lāṅgalī kramāt . śvotastathā paraḥ śūlī tiṇḍo muṇḍī ca vai kramāt . sahiṣṇuḥ somaśarmā ca naṣkulīśo’ntime prabhuḥ . vaivasvate’ntare śambhoravatārāstriśūlanaḥ . aṣṭāviṁśatirākhyātāhyante kaliyage prabhoḥ kaurma 50 a° . śvetaparvatasya parimāṇādi yathā uttarottareṇelāvṛtaṁ nīlaḥ śvetaḥ śṛṅavān iti trayo ramyakahiraṇamaya kurūṇāṁ maryādāgirayaḥ prāgāyatāḥ ubhayataḥ kṣārodāvadhayo dvisahasnayojanapṛthava ekaikaśaḥ pūrvasyāt pūrvasyāduttarodaśāṁśādhikāṁśena dairghya eva hrasanti bhāga° . 5 . 16 . 11 rājabhede vahnipu° . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . rūpye na° rājani° . kapardake pu° . |
श्वेतरण्जन – śvetaraṇjana | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvetaraṇjana “śveta-raṇjana” n. “white-coloured”, lead |
श्वेतवर्ण – śvetavarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvetavarṇa “śveta-varṇa” mfn. white-coloured |
श्वेतिमन् – śvetiman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvetiman m. whiteness, white colour
Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śvetiman m. whiteness, white colour. |
सित – sita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sita mfn. (for 2. see below; for 3. p. 1214, col.2) bound, tied, fettered
&c. &c. mfn. joined with, accompanied by (instr.) sita see 2. “pra-sita” p.697, col.3. sita mf (“ā”) n. (prob. formed fr. “a-sita” as “sura” fr. “asura”; for 1. and 2. “sita” see p.1213, col.1; for 4. see 1. “so”) white, pale, bright, light (said of a day in the light half of a month and of the waxing moon) &c. mf (“ā”) n. candid, pure (see “-karman”) sita m. white (the colour) sita m. the light half of the month from new to full moon sita m. the planet Venus or its regent (= “śukra”) sita m. sugar sita m. Bauhinia Candida sita m. N. of one of Skanda’s attendants sita mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. white sugar, refined sugar sita m. moonlight sita m. a handsome woman. sita m. spirituous liquor sita m. N. of various plants (a species of Aparājitā; white Kaṇṭakārī; white Dūrvā grass; Arabian jasmine &c.) sita m. bamboo juice sita m. N. of the Ganges (in “sitāsitā”, under “sitā”) sita m. one of the 8 Devis () sita n. silver sita n. sandal sita n. a radish sita see s.v. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 sita a. [so-kta] (1) White. (2) Bound, tied, fastened, fettered. (3) Surrounded. (4) Ascertained, known. (5) Finished, ended. –taḥ (1) White colour. (2) The bright half of a lunar month. (3) The planet Venus. (4) An arrow. –taṁ (1) Silver. (2) Sandal. (3) Radish. — Comp. –aṁśu = sitakara q. v. –agraḥ a thorn. –aṁgaḥ the śvetarohita tree. –ajājī white cumin. –apāṁgaḥ a peacock. –abhraḥ, –bhraṁ camphor. –aṁbaraḥ an ascetic dressed in white garments. –arjakaḥ white basil. –aśvaḥ an epithet of Arjuna. –asitaḥ an epithet of Balarāma. ( –tau) Venus and Saturn. –ādiḥ molasses. –ānanaḥ N. of Garuḍa. –ābhaḥ camphor. –ālikā a cockle. –itara a. other than white; i. e. black. -gatiḥ fire. –udaraḥ an epithet of Kubera. –udbhavaṁ white sandal. –upalaḥ a crystal. –upalā candied sugar. –upalaḥ chalk. –karaḥ 1. the moon. –2. camphor. –dhātuḥ a white mineral, chalk. –raśimaḥ the moon. –vājin m. N. of Arjuna. –śarkarā candied sugar. –śiṁbikaḥ wheat. –śivaṁ rock-salt. –śūkaḥ barley. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch sita (von 3. sā) partic. “beendigt” AK. 3, 2, 48. H. an. 2, 206. MED. t. 70. sita partic. “gebunden” s. u. 1. si. sita (aus 2. asita, wie sura aus asura) UṆĀDIS. 3, 89. 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “weiss, hellfarbig, hell” NIR. 9, 26. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 14, 83. H. 1392. an. 2, 206. MED. t. 70. HALĀY. 4, 47. varṇairnīlapītasitāruṇaiḥ R. 2, 94, 20. Ind. St. 2, 258. 278. 8, 273. SUŚR. 1, 296, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 19. 42. 12, 5. 24, 35. 53, 96. Rinder, Pferde M. 11, 130. MBH. 3, 11898. R. 5, 11, 7. 12, 34. KATHĀS. 22, 182. BHĀG. P. 3, 2, 29. Bart, Haupthaar MBH. 1, 3471. 5330. BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 26. Zähne 3, 13, 27. 32. Augen HALĀY. 2, 283. Blüthen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 15, 1. AK. 2, 4, 2, 51. 3, 28. Senf PAÑCAT. 158, 3 (ed. orn. 57, 12). Reis Spr. (II) 2635. PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 1. kisalaya (= śuddha Comm.) BHĀG. P. 5, 3, 6. -taṭasānukandara MBH. 3, 1663. sitoccaśailottamaśṛṅga R. GORR. 2, 12, 38. Gewand, Tuch Spr. (II) 2426. 4102. VIKR. 53. aṅgarāga KUMĀRAS. 7, 32. Gesicht bei Kindern Spr. (II) 7423. kopastimitasitādhara (“bleich”) RĀJA-TAR. 3, 293. 5, 324. Sonnenschein RAGH. 3, 70. KATHĀS. 18, 4. 403. BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 17. 11, 28. 8, 10, 13. cāmaravyajana MBH. 2, 37. RAGH. 9, 66. gṛhaṁ sudhayā sitam R. 4, 33, 21. ṚT. 1, 9. KATHĀS. 27, 136. bhūti- (giri) “weiss wie” oder “durch Asche” 50, 173. 123, 211. gāṅgamambu Spr. (II) 2101. tila SUŚR. 1, 198, 18. indorbhābhirbhānoḥ sitaṁ bhavatyardham “hell” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 1. 11, 17. 19. surānsitamukuṭaratnān 12, 1. jyotsnā- (eine Nacht) KATHĀS. 123, 211. -cchāyā RAGH. ed. Calc. 4, 5. rātryaḥ Spr. (II) 1700. ātapa RĀJA-TAR. 2, 167. -saptamī “der 7te Tag in der lichten Hälfte des Monats” BHĀG. P. 7, 14, 22. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 327. pauṣa 6, 187. pakṣa 311. ahan 312. — b) “rein, lauter”: -karman adj. MBH. 1, 3641. — 2) m. a) “die lichte Hälfte eines Monats” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 9. māghasitottha 10. — b) “der Planet Venus” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 22. 9, 11. 27. 34. 38. 42. 45 (sitāhvayaḥ). 17, 24. fg. 27. 27, 42. Ind. St. 2, 279. 283. fgg. — c) “Zucker”: sitaśailamustāḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77, 11. — d) “Saccharum Sara Roxb.” (śara) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. im ŚKDR. “Pfeil” WILSON. — e) “Bauhinia candida” RATNAM. 158. — f) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2571. — 3) f. ā a) “Zucker” AK. 2, 9, 43. TRIK. 3, 3, 192. H. 403. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 377, 18. – yuktena sarpiṣā 2, 327, 1. 341, 19. 410, 20. 449, 2. kṣīraṁ sasitam 149, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 76, 6. Spr. (II) 7044 (Conj.). PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 1. Vgl. tri-. — b) “Mondlicht” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “Branntwein” RĀJAN. ebend. — d) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen, = parvatajātāparājitā RATNAM. im ŚKDR. = śvetakaṇṭakārī RĀJAN. 4, 33. = vākucī 63. = vidārī, śvetadūrvā, kuṭumbinī, piṅgā (?), trāyamāṇā, tejanī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – SUŚR. 1, 133, 19. 2, 276, 15. — e) Bez. einer der 8 Devī bei den Buddhisten KĀLACAKRA 4, 18. — 4) n. a) “Silber” H. 1043, Schol. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “Sandel” RATNAM. 137. — c) “Rettig” RĀJAN. 7, 14. — d) “Kümmel” RATNAM. 100. sita “geschärft, scharf” fehlerhaft für śita (s. u. 2. śā) ARJ. 7, 7 (-sita MBH. 3, 12109). MBH. 7, 1078 (śita ed. Bomb.). Spr. (II) 3162. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 sita A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Mahābhārata, Śalya Parva, Chapter 45, Verse 69). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 sita sita, I. (cf. si and so), adj. White, Vikr. d. 53; Pañc. 158, 3. II. m. 1. White (the colour). 2. The light half of the month from new to full moon, Rājat. 5, 327. 3. The planet Venus. 4. An arrow. III. f. tā. 1. Candied sugar. 2. Moonlight. 3. A handsome woman. 4. Spirituous liquor. 5. The name of several plants. IV. n. 1. Silver. 2. Sandal. — Comp. a-, adj., f. tā and asiknī, I. adj. 1. black, Rām. 2, 96, 19. 2. the black half of the month from full to new moon, Pañc. ed. orn. i. d. 139. II. m. 1. black (the colour). 2. a proper name, MBh. 1, 106. III. f. tā, a proper name, Hariv. 120. sita-a-, I. adj. white and black. II. m. a name of Baladeva. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 sita [1] -> sā & si. sita [2] a. white, bright, clear, pure. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 sita 1. si-ta, pp. (1. si) bound. sita 2. sita, a. [fr. as-ita, black, misunderstood as a negative] white; pale; bright, light (day or month during the moon’s increase); m. bright half (of a lunar month): ā, f. sugar. sita 3. sita, pp. incorr. for śita. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 sita na° so–kta . 1 raupye 2 mūlake rājani° . 3 candane ratnamā° 4 śare 5 śukragrahe 6 śuklavarṇe ca pu° amaraḥ . 7 tadvati 8 samāpte 9 baddhe 10 jñāta ca tri° viśvaḥ . |
सितकमल – sitakamala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitakamala “sita-kamala” n. a white lotus
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch sitakamala n. “eine weisse Lotusblüthe”; davon adj. -maya KĀLACAKRA 2, 156. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 sitakamala n. a white lotus flower. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 sitakamala sita-kamala, a. white lotus; -kara, m. (white-rayed), moon: -ānana, a. moon-faced; -cchatr-ita, den. pp. turned into or representing a white umbrella; -tara, cpv. extremely white; -tejas, a. having as white light; -dīdhiti, m. moon; -dvija, m. goose; -pakṣa, m. bright half of the month; -puṇḍarīka, a. white lotus; -maṇi, m. crystal: -maya, a. made of crystal; -manas, a. pure-hearted; -ruci, a. bright-coloured, white; m. moon; -varman, m. N. of a minister; -sapti, m. (having white steeds), ep. of Arjuna; -hūṇa, m. pl. the White Huns. |
सितकृष्ण – sitakṛṣṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitakṛṣṇa “sita-kṛṣṇa” mfn. white and black
sitakṛṣṇa “sita-kṛṣṇa” m. white and black colour |
सितरुचि – sitaruci | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitaruci “sita-ruci” mfn. bright-coloured, white
sitaruci “sita-ruci” m. the moon |
सितलोहित – sitalohita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitalohita “sita-lohita” mfn. white and red
sitalohita “sita-lohita” m. white and red colour |
सितश्याम – sitaśyāma | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitaśyāma “sita-śyāma” mfn. blackish-white
sitaśyāma “sita-śyāma” m. blackish-white colour |
सिति – siti | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899siti f. (for 2. see p.1214, col.3) binding, fastening (in 1. “pra-siti”, p.697,
col.3). siti mfn. (w.r. for “śiti”; for 1. see p.1213, col.1; for 3. see 1. “so”) white mfn. black siti see s.v. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 siti a. (1) White. (2) Black. –tiḥ (1) White or black colour. (2) Binding, fastening. — Comp. –kaṁṭha, –vāsas see śitikaṁṭha; śitivāsas. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch siti adj. = śiti “weiss; schwarz” RAMĀN. zu AK. 3, 4, 14, 85 nach ŚKDR. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 siti pu° sī–ktic . 1 śuklavarṇe 2 kṛṣṇavarṇe ca . 2 tadvati tri° rāyamu0 |
सितेतर – sitetara | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitetara mfn. “other than white”, black, dark, blue
mfn. white and black sitetara m. a kind of dark-coloured rice sitetara m. Dolichos Uniflorus sitetara m. “-gati” m. “having a black course”, fire sitetara m. “-saroja” n. a blue lotus Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch sitetara (3. sita + itara) 1) adj. a) “schwarz (dunkelfarbig”) H. 17. KUMĀRAS. 1, 38. VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. H. 1326. HALĀY. 2, 97. — b) “weiss und schwarz” BHĀG. P. 10, 41, 41. — 2) m. Bez. zweier Pflanzen: = śyāmaśāli und kulattha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 sitetara a. black, dark, blue (lit. opposite of white). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 sitetara sita+itara, a. (opposite of white), black, dark, blue; -saroja, n. blue lotus. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 sitetara pu° sitāditaraḥ . 1 śyāmaśālau 2 kulatthe ca 3 śubhetaravarṇe 4 tadvati tri° . |
सु – su | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899su cl.1.P. ā. “savati, -te”, to go, move ( “sru”).
su (= 1. “sū”) cl.1.2. P. ( xxii, 43 and xxiv, 32; “savati, sauti”, only in 3. sg. pr. “sauti” and 2. sg. Impv. “suhi”) to urge, impel, incite ; to possess supremacy su cl.5.P. ā. ( xxvii, 1) “sunoti, sunute” (in 3. pl. “sunvanti, sunvire” [with pass. sense] and “suṣvati”; p. “sunvat” or “sunvāna” [the latter with act. and pass. sense] ; pf. “suṣāva, suṣuma” &c. ; p. in Veda “suṣuvas” and “suṣvāṇa” [the later generally with pass. sense; accord. to on “suṣuvāṇa” with act. sense]; aor. accord. to Gr. “asāvīt” or “asauṣīt, asoṣṭa” or “asaviṣṭa”; in also Impv. “sotu, sutam”, and p. [mostly pass.] “suvāna” [but the spoken form is “svāna” and so written in , “suv-” in ; and 3. pl. “asuṣavuḥ” ; fut. “sotā” ; “soṣyati” ; “saviṣyati” ; inf. “sotave, sotos” ; “sotum” Gr.; ind. p. “-sutya” ; “-sūya” , to press out, extract (esp. the juice from the Soma plant for libations) ; to distil, prepare (wine, spirits &c.) on Pass. “sūyate” (in also ā. 3. sg. “sunve” and 3. pl. “sunvire” with pass. sense; aor. “asāvi” Caus. “-sāvayati” or “-ṣāvayati” (see “abhi-ṣu” and “pra-su”; aor. “asūṣavat” accord. to some “asīṣavat”) Gr.: Desid. of Caus. “suṣāvayiṣati” Desid. “susūṣati, -te” Iutens. “soṣūyate, soṣavīti, soṣoti” su (= 2. “sū”), (only in 3. sg. “sauti” see “pra-sū”) to beget, bring forth. su ind. (opp. to “dus” and corresponding in sense to Gk. [greek]; perhaps connected with 1. “vasu”, and, accord. to some, with pron. base “sa”, as “ku” with “ka”; in Veda also “sū” and liable to become “ṣu” or “ṣū” and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following “na” may become “ṇa”; it may be used as an adj. or adv.), good, excellent, right, virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily, willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; esp. with “u”, = “forthwith, immediately”; with “mo” i.e. “mā u”, = “never, by no means”; “su kam” often emphatically with an Impv. e.g. “tiṣṭhā su kam maghavan mā parā gāḥ”, “do tarry O Maghavan, go not past” ; “su” always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at the beginning of a verse; in later language it is rarely a separate word, but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles, exceptionally also to an ind. p. e.g. “su-baddhvā”, “having well bound” ; or even to a finite verb e.g. “su-nirvavau” su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following). su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following) su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following, in which the initial “ṣ” stands for an orig. “s”): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 su I. 1 U. (suvati-te) To go, move. –II. 1. 2. P. (savati, sauti) To possess power or supremacy. –III. 5. U. (sunoti, sunute, suta; the s of su is changed to ṣ after any preposition ending in i or u) (1) To press out or extract juice. (2) To distil. (3) To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation. (4) To perform a sacrifice, especially the Soma sacrifice. (5) To bathe. (6) To churn. –Desid. (suṣūsati-te) –WITH ud to excite, agitate. –pra to produce, beget. su ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses: (1) Well, good, excellent; as in suṁgadhi. (2) Beautiful, handsome; as in sumadhyamā, sukeśī &c. (3) Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; sujīrṇamannaṁ suvicakṣaṇaḥ sutaḥ suśāsitā strī nṛpatiḥ susevitaḥ &c … sudīrghakāle’pi na yāti vikriyāṁ H. 1. 22. (4) Easily, readily, as in sukara or sulabha q. v. (5) Much, very much, exceedingly; sudāruṇa, sudīrgha &c. (6) Worthy of respect or reverence. (7) It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress. — Comp. –akṣa a. 1. having good eyes. –2. having keen organs, acute. –aṁga a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely. –accha a. see s. v. –aṁta a. having a happy end, ending well. –alpa, -alpaka a. see s. v. –asti, –astika see s. v. –ākāra, –ākṛti a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful. –āgata see s. v. –ādānaṁ taking justly or properly; Ms. 8. 172. –ābhāsa a. very splendid or illustrious; Ki. 15. 22. –iṣṭa a. properly sacrificed. -kṛt m. a form of fire. –ukta a. well-spoken, well-said; athavā sūktaṁ khalu kenāpi Ve. 3. ( –ktā) a kind of bird (sārikā. (–ktaṁ) 1. a good or wise saying; netuṁ vāṁchati yaḥ khalān pathi satāṁ sūktaiḥ sudhāsyaṁdibhiḥ Bh. 2. 6, R. 15. 97. –2. a Vedic hymn, as in puruṣasūkta &c. -darśin m. a hymnseer, Vedic sage. -vāc f. 1. a hymn. –2. praise, a word of praise. –uktiḥ f. 1. a good or friendly speech. –2. a good or clever saying. –3. a correct sentence. –uttara a. 1. very superior. –2. well towards the north. –utthāna a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. ( –naṁ) vigorous effort or exertion. –unmada, –unmāda a. quite mad or frantic. –upasadana a. easy to be approached. –upaskara a. furnished with good instruments. –kaṁṭakā the aloe plant. –kaṁḍuḥ itch. –kaṁdaḥ 1. an onion. –2. a yam. –3. a sort of grass. –kaṁdakaḥ onion. –kara a. (rā or rī f.) 1. easy to be done, practicable, feasible; vaktuṁ sukaraṁ kartuṁ (adhyavasātuṁ) duṣkaraṁ Ve. 3 ‘sooner said than done.’ –2 easy to be managed. ( –rā) a tractable cow. ( –raṁ) charity, benevolence. –karman a. 1. one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. –2. active, diligent. (–m.) N. of Viśvakarman. –kala a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c.). –kāṁḍaḥ the Kāravella plant. –kāṁḍikā the Kāṇḍīra creeper. –kāṁḍin a. 1. having beautiful stems. –2. beautifully joined. (–m.) a bee. –kāṣṭhaṁ firewood. –kuṁdakaḥ an onion. –kumāra a. 1. very delicate or soft, smooth. –2. beautifully young or youthful. ( –raḥ) 1. a beautiful youth. –2. a kind of sugar-cane. –3. a kind of grain (śyāmāka). –4 a kind of mustard. –5. the wild Champaka. ( –rā) 1. the double jasmine. –2. the plantain. –3. the great- flowered jasmine. –kumārakaḥ 1. a beautiful youth. –2. rice (śāli). (–kaṁ) the Tamālapatra. –kumārī the Navamallikā jasmine. –kṛt a. 1. doing good, benevolent. –2. pious, virtuous, righteous. –3. wise, learned. –4. fortunate, lucky. –5. making good sacrifices or offerings (–m.) 1. a skilful worker. –2. N. of Tvaṣṭṛ. –kṛta a. 1. done well or properly. –2. thoroughly done. –3. well- made or constructed. –4. treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. — 5. virtuous, righteous, pious. –6. lucky, fortunate. ( –taṁ) 1. any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; nādatte kasyacitpāpaṁ kasyacitsukṛtaṁ vibhuḥ Bg. 5. 15, Me. 17. –2. virtue, moral or religious merit; svargābhisaṁdhisukṛtaṁ vaṁcanāmiva menire Ku. 6. 47; tacciṁtyamānaṁ sukṛtaṁ taveti R. 14. 16. –3. fortune, auspiciousness. –4. recompense, reward. –kṛtiḥ f. 1. well-doing, a good act. –2. kindness, virtue. –3. practice of penance. –4. auspiciousness. –kṛtin a. 1. acting well or kindly. –2. virtuous, pious, good, righteous; saṁtaḥ saṁtu nirāpadaḥ sukṛtināṁ kīrtiściraṁ vardhatāṁ H. 4. 132; Bg. 7. 16. –3. wise, learned. –4. benevolent. –5. fortunate, lucky. –kṛtyaṁ a good action; Pt. 2. 41. –keśa(sa)raḥ the citron tree. –kratuḥ 1. N. of Agni. –2. of Śiva. –3. of Indra. –4. of Mitra and Varuṇa. –5. of the sun. –6. of Soma. –gaṁ a. 1. going gracefully or well. –2. graceful, elegant. –3. easy of access; Pt. 2. 144. –4. intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. durga). ( –gaṁ) 1. ordure, feces. –2. happiness. –gata a. 1. well-gone or passed. –2 well-bestowed. ( –taḥ) an epithet of Buddha. –gaṁdhaḥ 1. fragrance, odour, perfume. –2. sulphur. –3. a trader. ( –dhaṁ) 1. sandal. –2. small cumin seed. –3. a blue lotus. –4. a kind of fragrant grass. ( –dhā) sacred basil. –gaṁdhakaḥ 1. sulphur. –2. the red Tulasī1. –3. the orange. –4. a kind of gourd. –gaṁdhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –gaṁdhi a. 1. sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes. –2. virtuous, pious. ( –dhiḥ) 1. perfume, fragrance. –2. the Supreme Being. –3. a kind of sweet-smelling mango. ( –dhi n.) 1. the root of long pepper. –2. a kind of fragrant grass. — 3. coriander seed. -triphalā 1. nutmeg. –2. areca nut. –3. cloves. -mūlaṁ the root Uśīra. -mūṣikā the musk-rat. –gaṁdhikaḥ 1. incense. –2. sulphur. –3. a kind of rice. ( –kaṁ) the white lotus. –gama a. 1. easy of access, accessible. –2. easy. –3. plain, intelligible. –gahanā an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. -vṛttiḥ f. the same as above. –gṛha a. (hī f.) having a beautiful house or abode, welllodged; sugṛhī nirgṛṁhīkṛtā Pt. 1. 390. –gṛhīta a. 1. held well or firmly, grasped. –2. used or applied properly or auspiciously. -nāman a. 1. one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; sugṛhītanāmnaḥ bhaṭṭagopālasya pautraḥ Māl. 1. –grāsaḥ a dainty morsel. –grīva a. having a beautiful neck. ( –vaḥ) 1. a hero. –2. a swan. –3. a kind of weapon. –4. N. of one of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa. –5. of Śiva. –6. of Indra. –7. N. of a monkeychief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therefere, killed Vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.]. -īśaḥ N. of Rāma. –gla a. very weary or fatigued. –cakṣus a. having good eyes, seeing well. (–m.) 1. a discerning or wise man, learned man. –2. the glomerous fig-tree. –carita, caritra a. well-conducted, well-behaved. ( –taṁ, -traṁ) 1. good conduct, virtuous deeds. –2. merit; tava sucaritamaṁgulīya nūnaṁ pratanu S. 6. 10. ( –tā, –trā) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife. –carman m. the Bhūrja tree. –citrakaḥ 1. a king-fisher. –2. a kind of speckled snake. –citrā a kind of gourd. –ciṁtā, –ciṁtanaṁ deep thought, deep reflection or consideration. –ciram ind. for a very long time, very long. –cirāyus m. a god, deity. –cūṭī a pair of nippers or tongs. –celakaḥ a fine cloth. –chatraḥ N. of Śiva. ( –trā) the river Sutlej. –jana a. 1. good, virtuous, respectable. –2. kind, benevolent. ( –naḥ) 1. a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. –2. a gentleman. –3. N. of Indra’s charioteer. –janatā 1. goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; aiśvaryasya vibhūṣaṇaṁ sujanatā Bh. 2. 82. –2. a number of good men. –3. bravery, –janman a. 1. of noble or respectable birth; yā kaumudī nayanayorbhavataḥ sujanmā Māl. 1. 34. –2. legitimate, lawfully born. –jalaṁ a lotus. –jalpaḥ 1. a good speech. –2. a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; yatrārjavāt sagāṁbhīryaṁ sadainyaṁ sahacāpalam . sotkaṁṭhaṁ ca hariḥ spṛṣṭaḥ sa sujalpo nigadyate … –jāta a. 1. wellgrown, tall. –2. well made or produced. –3. of high birth. –4. beautiful, lovely; Māl. 1. 16, R. 3. 8. –tanu a. 1. having a beautiful body. –2. extremely delicate or slender, very thin. –3. emaciated. ( –nuḥ, –nūḥ f.) a lovely lady; etāḥ sutanu mukha te sakhyaḥ paśyaṁti hemakūṭagatāḥ V. 1. 10. –taṁtrī a. 1. well-stringed. –2. (hence) melodious. –tapas a. 1. one who practises austere penance. –2. having great heat. (–m.) 1. an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. –2. the sun. (–n.) an austere penance. –tamāṁ ind. most excellently, best. –tarāṁ ind. 1. better, more excellently. –2. exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; tayā duhitrā sutarāṁ savitrī sphuratprabhāmaṁḍalayā cakāśe Ku. 1. 24; sutarāṁ dayāluḥ R. 2. 53, 7. 21, 14. 9, 18. 24. –3. more so, much more so; mayyapyāsthā na te cettvayi mama sutarāmeṣa rājan gatosmi Bh. 3. 30. –4. consequently. –tardanaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo. –talaṁ 1. ‘immense depth’, N. of one of the seven regions below the earth; see pātāla. –2. the foundation of a large building. –tiktakaḥ the coral tree. –tīkṣṇa a. 1. very sharp. –2. very pungent. –3. acutely painful. ( –kṣṇaḥ) 1. the Śigru tree. –2. N. of a sage; nāmnā sutīkṣṇaścaritena dāṁtaḥ R. 13. 41. -daśanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –tīrthaḥ 1. a good preceptor. –2. N. of Śiva. –tuṁga a. very lofty or tall. ( –gaḥ) the cocoa-nut tree. –tejas a. 1. very sharp. –2. very bright, or splendid. –3. very mighty. (–m.) a worshipper of the sun. –dakṣiṇa a. 1. very sincere or upright. –2. liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; Pt. 1. 310. ( –ṇā) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; tasya dākṣiṇyarūḍhena nāmnā magadhavaṁśajā . patnī sudakṣiṇetyāsīt R. 1. 31, 3. 1 –daṁḍaḥ a cane, ratan. –dat a. (tī f.) having handsome teeth. –daṁtaḥ 1. a good tooth. –2. an actor, a dancer. ( –tī) the female elephant of the north-west quarter. –darśana a. (nā or nī f.) 1. good-looking, beautiful, handsome. –2. easily seen. ( –naḥ) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in kṛṣṇopyasudarśanaḥ K. –2. N. of Śiva. –3. of mount Meru. –4. a vulture. ( –nī –naṁ) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra’s capital. ( –naṁ) N. of Jambudvīpa. –darśanā 1. a handsome woman. –2. a woman. –3. an order, a command. –4. a kind of drug. –dā a. very bountiful. –dāṁtaḥ a Buddhist. –dāman a. one who gives liberally. (–m.) 1. a cloud. –2. a mountain. –3. the sea. –4. N. of Indra’s elephant. –5. N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvāraka with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory. –dāyaḥ 1. a good or auspicious gift. –2. a special gift given on particular solemn occasions. –3. one who offers such a gift. –dinaṁ 1. a happy or auspicious day. –2. a fine day or weather (opp. durdina); so sudināhaṁ in the same sense. –dīrgha a. very long or extended. ( –rghā) a kind of cucumber. –durlabha a. very scarce or rare. –dvara a. very distant or remote. (sudūraṁ means 1. to a great distance. –2. to a very high degree, very much. sudūrāt ‘from afar, from a distance’). –ṭṭaḍha a. very firm or hard, compact. –dṛś a. having beautiful eyes. (–f.) a pretty woman. –dhanvan a. having an excellent bow. (–m.) 1. a good archer or bowman. –2. Ananta, the great serpent. –3. N. of Viśvakarman. –dharman a. attentive to duties. (–f.) the council or assembly of gods. (–m.) 1. the hall or palace of Indra. –2. one diligent in properly maintaining his family. –dharmā –rmī the council or assembly of gods (devasabhā); yayāvudīritālokaḥ sudharmānavamāṁ sabhāṁ R. 17. 27. –dhita a. Ved. 1. perfect, secure. –2. kind, good. –3. happy, prosperous. –4. well-aimed or directed (as a weapon). –dhī a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. ( –dhīḥ) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (–f.) a good understanding, good sense, intelligence. -upāsyaḥ 1. a particular kind of royal palace. –2. N. of an attendant on Kṛṣṇa. ( –syaṁ) the club of Balarama. -upāsyā 1. a woman. –2. N. of Umā, or of one of her female companions. –3. a sort of pigment. –dhūmravarṇā one of the seven tongues of fire. –naṁdā N. of a woman. –nayaḥ 1. good conduct. –2. good policy. –nayana a. having beautiful eyes. ( –naḥ) a deer. ( –nā) 1. a woman having beautiful eyes. –2. a woman in general. –nābha a. 1. having a beautiful navel. –2. having a good nave or centre. ( –bhaḥ) 1. a mountain. –2. the Maināka mountain q. v. –nibhṛta a. very lonely or private. ( –taṁ) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately. –niścalaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –nīta 1. well-conducted, well-behaved. –2. polite, civil. ( –taṁ) 1. good conduct or behaviour. –2. good policy or prudence. –nītiḥ f. 1. good conduct, good manners, propriety. –2. good policy. –3. N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v. –nītha a. well-disposed, well-conducted, righteous, virtuous, good. ( –thaḥ) 1. a Brāhmaṇa. –2. N. of Śiśupāla q. v. –3. Ved. a good leader. –nīla a. very black or blue. ( –laḥ) the pomegranate tree. ( –lā) common flax. (–laṁ), –nīlakaḥ a blue gem. –netra a. having good or beautiful eyes. –nau n. water (?). –pakva a. 1. well-cooked. –2. thoroughly matured or ripe. ( –kvaḥ) a sort of fragrant mango. –patnī a woman having a good husband. –pathaḥ 1. a good road. –2. a good course. –3. good conduct. –pathin m. (nom. sing. supaṁthāḥ) a good road. –padmā orris root. –parṇa a. (rṇā or rṇī f.) 1. wellwinged. –2. having good or beautiful leaves. ( –rṇaḥ) 1. a ray of the sun. –2. a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine character. –3. any supernatural bird. –4. an epithet of Garuḍa. –5. a cock. -ketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –parṇakaḥ = suparṇa. –parṇā, –parṇī f. 1. a number of lotuses. –2. a pool abounding with lotuses. –3. N. of the mother of Garuḍa. –paryāpta a. 1. very spacious. –2. well-fitted. –parvan a. well-jointed, having many joints or knots. (–m.) 1. a bamboo. –2. an arrow. –3. a god, deity. –4. a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). –5. smoke. (–f.) white Dūrvā grass. –palāyita a. 1. completely fled or run away. –2. skilfully retreated. –pātraṁ 1. a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. –2. a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person. –pād (pād or padī f.) having good or handsome feet. –pārśvaḥ 1. the wavedleaf fig-tree (plakṣa). –2. N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu. –pītaṁ a carrot. ( –taḥ) the fifth Muhūrta. –puṁsī a woman having a good husband. –puṣpa a. (ṣpā or ṣpī f.) having beautiful flowers. ( –ṣpaḥ) 1. the coral tree. –2. the Śirīṣa tree. ( –ṣpī) the plantain tree. ( –ṣpaṁ) 1. cloves. –2. the menstrual excretion. –puṣpita a. 1. well blossomed, being in full flower. –2. having the hair thrilling or bristling. –pūra a. 1. easy to be filled; Pt. 1. 25. –2. well-filling. ( –raḥ) a kind of citron (bījapūra). –pūrakaḥ the Baka-pushpa tree. –prakāśa a. 1. manifest, apparent. –2. public, notorious. –pratarkaḥ a sound judgment –pratibhā spirituous liquor. –pratiṣṭha a. 1. standing well. –2. very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous. ( –ṣṭhā) 1. good position. –2. good re putation, fame, celebrity. –3. establishment, erection. –4. installation, consecration. –pratiṣṭhita a. 1. well-established. –2. consecrated –3. celebrated. ( –taḥ) the Udumbara tree. –pratiṣṇāta a. 1. thoroughly purified. –2. well-versed in. –3. well- investigated, clearly ascertained or determined. –pratīka a. 1. having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome. –2. having a beautiful trunk. ( –kaḥ) 1. an epithet of Kāmadeva. –2. of Śiva. –3. of the elephant of the north-east quarter. –prapāṇaṁ a good tank. –prabha a. very brilliant, glorious. ( –bhā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –prabhātaṁ 1. an auspicious dawn or day-break; diṣṭyā suprabhātamadya yadayaṁ devo ṭṭaṣṭaḥ U. 6 –2. the earliest dawn. –prayuktaśaraḥ a skilful archer. –prayogaḥ 1. good management or application. –2. close contact. –3. dexterity. –prasannaḥ N. of Kubera. –prasāda a. very gracious or propitious. ( –daḥ) N. of Śiva. –priya a. very much liked, agreeable. ( –yaḥ) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. ( –yā) 1. a charming woman. –2. a beloved mistress. –phala a. 1. very fruitful, very productive. –2. very fertile. ( –laḥ) 1. the pomegranate tree. –2. the jujube. –3. the Karṇikara tree. –4. a kind of bean. ( –lā) 1. a pumpkin, gourd. –2. the plantain tree. –3. a variety of brown grape. –4. colocynth. –phenaḥ a cuttlefish bone. –baṁdhaḥ sesamum. –bala a. very powerful. ( –laḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. –2. N. of the father of Śakuni. –bāṁdhavaḥ N. of Śiva. –bāhu a. 1. handsome-armed. –2. strong-armed. ( –huḥ) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa; see R. 11. 29. –bodha a. 1. easily apprehended or understood. ( –dhaḥ) good information or advice. –brahmaṇyaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. –2. N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice. –bhaga a. 1. very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed. highly favoured. –2. lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; na tu grīṣmasyaivaṁ subhagamaparāddhaṁ yuvatiṣu S. 3. 9; Ku. 4. 34, R. 11. 80; Māl. 9. –3. pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; śravaṇasubhaga M. 3. 4, S. 1. 3. –4. beloved, liked, amiable, dear; sumukhi subhagaḥ paśyan sa tvāmupaitu kṛtārthatāṁ Gīt. 5. 5. illustrious. ( –gaḥ) 1. borax. –2. the Aśoka tree. –3. the Champaka tree. –4. red amaranth. ( –gaṁ) good fortune. -mānin, subhagaṁmanya a. –1. considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; vācālaṁ māṁ na khalu subhagaṁmanyabhāvaḥ karoti Me. 94. –2. vain, flattering oneself. –bhagā a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. –2. an honoured mother –3. a kind of wild jasmine. –4 turmeric. –5. the Priyangu creeper. –6 the holy basil. -sutaḥ the son of a favourite wife. –bhaṁgā the cocoa-nut tree. –bhadra a. very happy or fortunate. ( –draḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. ( –drā) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu. –bhadrakaḥ 1. a car for carrying the image of a god. –2. the Bilva tree. –bhāṣita a. 1. spoken well or eloquent. ( –taṁ) 1. fine speech, eloquence, learning; jīrṇamaṁge subhāṣitaṁ Bh. 3. 2. –2. a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; subhāṣitena gītena yuvatīnāṁ ca līlayā . mano na bhidyate yasya sa vai mukto’thavā paśuḥ Subbish. –3. a good remark; bālādapi subhāṣitaṁ (grāhyaṁ). –bhikṣaṁ 1. good alms, successful begging. –2. abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c. –bhīrakaḥ the Palāśa tree. –bhūtikaḥ the Bilva tree. –bhrū a. having beautiful eyebrows. ( –bhrūḥ f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly subhrūḥ; but subhru is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi, Kālidāsa, and Bha vabhūti; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 17; so V. 3. 22; Ku. 5. 43; Māl. 3. 8. –maṁgala a. 1. very auspicious. –2. abounding in sacrifices. –mati a. very wise. ( –tiḥ f.) 1. a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship. –2. a favour of the gods. –3. a gift, blessing. –4. a prayer, hymn. –5. a wish or desire. –6. N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 60,000 sons. –madanaḥ the mango tree. –madhuraṁ a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words. –madhya, -madhyama a. slender-waisted. –madhyā, -madhyamā a graceful woman. –mana a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. ( –naḥ) 1. wheat. –2. the thorn-apple. ( –nā) the great-flowered jasmine. –manas a. 1. good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent. –2. well-pleased, satisfied. (–m.) 1. a god, divinity. –2. a learned man. –3. a student of the Vedas. –4. wheat. –5. the Nimba tree. (–f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; ramaṇīya eṣa vaḥ sumanasāṁ saṁniveśaḥ Māl. 1 (where the adjectival sense in 1 is also intended); kiṁ sevyate sumanasāṁ manasāpi gaṁdhaḥ kastūrikājananaśaktibhṛtā mṛgeṇa R. G.; Śi. 6. 66. (–f.) 1. the great-flowered jasmine. –2 the Mālatī creeper. – phalaḥ the wood-apple. -phalaṁ nutmeg. –maṁtu a. 1. advising well. –2. very faulty or blameable. (–m.) a good adviser. –maṁtraḥ N. of the charioteer of Daśaratha. –mitrā 1. N. of one of the wives of Daśaratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna –mukha a. (khā or khī f.) 1. having a beautiful face, lovely. –2. pleasing. –3. disposed to, eager for; Ki. 6. 42. ( –khaḥ) 1. a learned man. –2. an epithet of Garuḍa. –3. of Gaṇeśa. –4. of Śiva. ( –khaṁ) the scratch of a finger-nail. ( –khā, –khī) 1. a handsome woman. –2. a mirror. –mūlakaṁ a carrot. –mekhalaḥ the Munja grass. –medhas a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent. (–m.) a wise man. (–f.) heart-pea. –meruḥ 1. the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. –2. N. of Śiva. –yavasaṁ beautiful grass, good pasturage. –yāmunaḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –yuktaḥ N. of Śiva. –yodhanaḥ an epithet of Duryodhana q. v. –raktakaḥ 1. a kind of red chalk. –2 a kind of mango tree. –raṁgaḥ 1. good colour. –2. the orange. –3. a hole cut in a house (suraṁgā also in this sense). ( –gaṁ) 1. red sanders. –2. vermilion. -dhātuḥ red chalk. -yuj m. a house-breaker. –raṁgikā the Mūrvā plant. –rajaḥphalaḥ the jackfruit tree. –raṁjanaḥ the betel-nuttree. –rata a. 1. much sported. –2. playful. –2. much enjoyed. –4. compassionate, tender. ( –taṁ) 1. great delight or enjoyment. –2. copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; suratamṛditā bālavanitā Bh. 2. 44. -tālī 1. a female-messenger, a go-between. –2. a chaplet, garland for the head. – prasaṁgaḥ addiction to amorous pleasures; Ku. 1. 19. –ratiḥ f. great enjoyment or satisfaction. –rasa a. 1. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. –2. sweet. –3. elegant (as a composition). ( –saḥ, –sā) the plant siṁdhuvāra. (–sā) N. of Durgā. ( –sā, -saṁ) the sacred basil. ( –saṁ) 1. gummyrrh. –2. fragrant grass. –rājan a. governed by a good king; surājñi deśe rājanvān Ak. (– m.) 1. a good king. –2. a divinity. –rāṣṭraṁ N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). – jaṁ a kind of poison. -brahmaḥ a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra. –rūpa a. 1. well-formed, handsome, lovely; surūpā kanyā. –2. wise, learned. ( –paḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –rebha a. finevoiced; Ki. 15. 16. ( –bhaṁ) tin. –lakṣaṇa a. 1. having auspicious or beautiful marks. –2. fortunate. ( –ṇaṁ) 1. observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining. –2. a good or auspicious mark. –labha a. 1. easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā V. 2. 9; idamasulabhavastuprārthanādurnivāraṁ 2. 6. –2. ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; niṣṭhyūtaścaraṇopabhogasulabho lākṣārasaḥ kenacit S. 4. 4. –3. natural to, proper for; mānuṣatāsulabho laghimā K. -kopa a. easily provoked, irascible. –locana a. fineeyed. ( –naḥ) a deer. ( –nā) 1. a beautiful woman. –2. N. of the wife of Indrajit. –lohakaṁ brass. –lohita a. very red. ( –tā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –vaktraṁ 1. a good face or mouth. –2 correct utterance. ( –ktraḥ) N. of Śiva. –vacanaṁ, –vacas n. eloquence. –varcakaḥ, –varcikaḥ –kā, –varcin m. natron, alkali. –varcalaṁ linseed. –varcasaḥ N. of Śiva. –varṇa see s. v. –vasaṁtaḥ 1. an agreeable vernal season. –2. the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also suvasaṁtakaḥ in this sense). –vaha a. 1. bearing well. patient. –2. patient, enduring. –3. easy to be borne. ( –hā) a lute. –vāsaḥ 1. N. of Śiva. –2. a pleasant dwelling. –3. an agreeable perfume or odour. –vāsinī 1. a woman married or single who resides in her father’s house. –2. a married woman whose husband is alive. –vikrāṁta a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous. ( –taḥ) a hero. ( –taṁ) heroism. –vid m. a learned man, shrewd person. (–f.) a shrewd or clever woman. –vidaḥ 1. an attendant on the women’s apartments. –2. a king. –vidat m. a king. –viditraṁ 1. a household, family –2. wealth. –vidallaḥ an attendant on the women’s apartments (wrongly for sauvidalla q. v). ( –llaṁ) the women’s apartments, harem. –vidallā a married woman. –vidha a. of a good kind. –vidham ind. easily. –vinīta a. well-trained, modest. ( –tā) a tractable cow. –vihita a. 1. well-placed, well-deposited. –2. well-furnished, wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; suvihitaprayogatayā āryasya na kimapi parihāsyate S. 1; kalahaṁsamakaraṁdapraveśāvasare tatsuvihitaṁ Māl. 1. –3. well done or performed. –vī (bī) ja a. having good seed. ( –jaḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. –2. the poppy. ( –jaṁ) good seed. –vīrāmlaṁ sour rice-gruel. –vīrya a. 1. having great vigour. –2. of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous. ( –ryaṁ) 1. great heroism. –2. abundance of heroes. –3. the fruit of the jujube. ( –ryā) wild cotton. –bṛkti f. 1. a pure offering. –2. a hymn of praise. –vṛtta a. 1. well-behaved, virtuous, good; mayi tasya suvṛtta vartate laghusaṁdeśapadā sarasvatī R. 8. 77. –2. well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; mṛdunātisuvṛttena sumṛṣṭenātihāriṇā . modakenāpi kiṁ tena niṣpattiryasya sevayā; or sumukho’pi suvṛttopi sanmārgapatito’pi ca . mahatāṁ pādalagno’pi vyathayatyeva kaṁṭakaḥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). ( –ttaṁ) a good or virtuous conduct; Pt. 1. 69. –vela a. 1. tranquil, still. –2. humble, quiet. ( –laḥ) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain. –vrata a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly religious or virtuous. ( –taḥ) a religious student. ( –tā) 1. a virtuous wife. –2. a tractable cow, one easily milked. –śaṁsa a. wellspoken of, famous, glorious, commendable. –śaka a. capable of being easily done. –śalyaḥ the Khadira tree. –śākaṁ undried ginger. –śāradaḥ N. of Śiva. –śāsita a. kept under control, well-controlled. –śikṣita a. well-taught trained, well-disciplined. –śikhaḥ fire. ( –khā) 1. a peacock’s crest. –2. a cock’s comb. –śītaṁ yellow sandal-wood. –śīma a. cold, frigid. ( –maḥ) coldness. –śīla a. good-tempered, amiable. ( –lā) 1. N. of the wife of Yama. –2. N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kṛṣṇa. –śrīkā the gum olibanum tree. –śruta a. 1. well heard. –2. versed in the Vedaś. ( –taḥ) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regarded as the olddest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day. –śliṣṭa 1. well-arranged or united. –2. well-fitted; Māl. 1. –śleṣaḥ close union or embrace. –satyā N. of the wife of Janaka. –saṭṭaś agreeable to look at. –sannata a. welldirected (as an arrow). –saraṇa. N. of Śiva. –saha a. 1. easy to be borne. –2. bearing or enduring well. ( –haḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –sāra a. having good sap or essence. ( –raḥ) 1. good sap, essence, or substance. –2. competence. –3. the red-flowering Khadira tree. –sāravat n. crystal. –sikatā 1. good sand. –2. gravel. –3. sugar. –stha a. 1. well-suited, being in a good sense. –2. in health, healthy, faring well. –3. in good or or prosperous circumstances, prosperous. –4. happy, fortunate. ( –sthaṁ) a happy state, well-being; susthe ko vā na paḍitaḥ H. 3. 121. (susthita in the same sense). –sthatā –sthitiḥ f. 1. good condition, wellbeing, welfare, happiness. –2. health, convalescence. –smita a. pleasantly smiling. ( –tā) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance. –svapanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –svara a. 1. melodious, harmonious. –2. loud. –hita a. 1. very fit or suitable, appropriate. –2. beneficial, salutary. –3. friendly, affectionate. –4. satisfied. ( –tā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –hṛda a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate. (–m.) 1. a friend; suhṛdaḥ paśya vasaṁta kiṁ sthitaṁ Ku. 4. 27; maṁdāyaṁte na khalu suhṛdāmabhyupetārthakṛtyāḥ Me. 38. –2. an ally. -bhedaḥ the separation of friends. -vākyaṁ the counsel of a friend. –hṛdaḥ a friend. –hṛdaya a. 1. good-hearted. –2. dear, affectionate, loving. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch su 1 sunoti DHĀTUP. 27, 1 (abhiṣave, saṁdhākledapīḍāmanthe VOP.). sunota ṚV. 7, 32, 8. sunotana 5, 34, 1. sunuta 10, 14, 13. sunavat und sunvat 27, 22. sunvant partic.; med. sunve 3. sg. 7, 29, 1. 9, 88, 1. sunvire, sunudhvam, sunavai 8, 80, 1. suvāna partic.; suṣāva, suṣuma, suṣuviva (VOP. 12, Anf.), suṣuvaṁs, suṣuvuṣas 10, 94, 14. suṣvāṇa med. 4, 29, 2. 10, 148, 1. passivisch 9, 6, 8. sota, sotana, suṣvati 3. pl. (wohl praes.) 2, 16, 5. asāvīt, asoṣṭa und asāvīt P. 7, 2, 72. VOP. 11, 1. 12, Anf. soṣyati und saviṣyati 8, 46. 12, Anf. soṣyant KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 10. (abhi) saviṣyant ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 1, 66. infin. sotave (s. auch sotu) ṚV. 1, 28, 1. pass. sūyate, asāvi; partic. suta. “auspressen, keltern” (den Soma): sunu somam ṚV. 1, 28, 6. 101. 9. 137, 1. yaṁ te suṣāva (adriḥ) 7, 22, 1. andhaḥ 4, 16, 1. 5, 30, 6. 7, 21, 1. athā sunudhvaṁ savanaṁ madāya 4, 35, 4. havaṁ yajamānasya sunvataḥ 6, 60, 15. AV. 6, 6, 1. 54, 3. sotā hi somamadribhiḥ 8, 1, 17. asāvyaṁśuḥ 9, 62, 4. soma u ṣuvāṇaḥ sotṛbhiḥ 107, 8. grāvabhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 2, 14. payasā 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 6, 23. soṣyatyasoṣṭa (zugleich zu 4. su) CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5. śaśvatsūyamānātsūryaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 7. suṣāva ca vahūnsomānsomasaṁsthāstatāna ca MBH. 1, 4695. sarve sunvantaḥ P. 3, 2, 132, Schol. surāṁ sunoti so v. a. “braut” ebend. — asunvan AIT. BR. 4, 17 fehlerhaft für asanvan: s. u. 1. san. – suta partic.: suto aśnaiḥ ṚV. 8, 2. 2. 2, 11, 11. 4, 18, 3. aṁśu 25, 3. soma 41, 3. 6, 40, 1. sutāsa indavaḥ 8, 6, 21. sute adhvare 10, 94, 14. ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 5. pibasva somaṁ sutamadya taṁ mayā MBH. 14, 277. sute somasahasre 1, 8042. sutam Spr. (II) 2694 wohl fehlerhaft für hutam. masc. sg. und pl. “der Saft” d. h. Soma NAIGH. 2, 7. suṣvāṇaḥ pavate sutaḥ ṚV. 9, 6, 8. parīto ṣiñcatā sutam 107, 1. 2. 1, 135, 1. 2, 15, 1. 4, 32, 11. prātaḥ sutamapibaḥ 35, 7. madhumantaḥ 7, 90, 1. 10, 27, 2. TS. 7, 3, 11, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 10, 13. AV. 4, 29, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. -tejas 10, 6, 1, 8. = somayāga BHĀG. P. 7, 15, 48. neutr. CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 1. sava, 1. savana, asuta, adriṣuta, jambhasuta, suṣuta. adhi dass.: adhi suvāno nahuṣyebhirinduḥ ṚV. 9, 91, 2. — Vgl. adhiṣavaṇa. abhi, -suṇoti, abhyaṣuṇot P. 8, 3, 63. 65. -soṣyati, abhyasoṣyat 117. 1) “kelternd verarbeiten, pressen, mit Steinen ausschlagen u.s.w.” ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 7. 2, 2, 2, 1. 4, 4, 15. 3, 3, 2, 6. 4, 5, 10, 2. abhiṣuṇvanta āsate AIT. BR. 4, 14. 3, 15. 7, 17. plākṣāṇi 30. rājānam 32. ṛjīṣam TS. 6, 1, 6, 4. 3, 2, 2, 1. havirdhāne carmannadhi grāvabhirabhiṣutya 6, 2, 11, 4. ghnanti vā etatsomaṁ yadabhiṣuṇvanti 4, 4, 4. 5, 1. sa yadyabhiṣūyamāṇaḥ kiṁcidāpadyate ŚAT. BR. 12, 6, 1, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 1. 10, 3, 12. abhiṣutya R. 1, 13, 5, v. l. abhiṣūya (so ed. Bomb.) somam MBH. 14, 2624. some vṛthābhiṣūyamāṇe 13, 372. “mit Flüssigkeit ansetzen und ausdrücken”: yāni caivābhiṣūyante puṣpamūlaphalaiḥ śubhaiḥ M. 5, 10. kṣīreṇābhiṣutya (v. l. abhiplutya) SUŚR. 1, 317, 12. kiṇvapiṣṭam 2, 73, 17. partic. abhiṣuta ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 16. 4, 1, 1, 15. 6, 1, 9. 14, 3, 2, 30. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 1, 9. LĀṬY. 1, 9, 20. — 2) “bespritzen”: abhisoṣyantaṁ raktai rakṣāṁsi BHAṬṬ. 9, 90. — caus. -ṣāvayati P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 3, Schol. — Vgl. abhiṣava fg., -ṣuta, -ṣotar, -susūs. ā “keltern” u. s. w.: ā sotā pari ṣiñcata ṚV. 9, 108, 7. yo asmai tīvrānsomāṁ āsunoti 10, 42, 5. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 3, 6. 12. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 2. āsava, āsāva. āsāvya (BHAṬṬ. 6, 64). 2. āsuti. ud “aufregen”: utsunoṣīkṣamāṇānāṁ kandukakrīḍayā manaḥ BHĀG. P. 3, 20, 35. Der Bedeutung nach eher zu 2. su (wie auch utsava). ni desid. vgl. nisusūs. nis, niḥṣuṇoti P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 1, Schol. pari, -ṣuṇoti, paryaṣuṇot, -soṣyati, paryasoṣyat Schol. zu P. 8, 3, 63. 65. 117. in Stellen wie ṚV. 9, 10, 4. 87, 7 ist die Präposition zum Verbum finitum zu ziehen. pra “fortkeltern”; partic. “fortgesetzt gepresst, der” Soma “einer nicht bloss einmaligen, sondern andauernden Kelterung”: pūrṇamāse vai devānāṁ sutasteṣāmetamardhamāsaṁ prasutaḥ TS. 2, 5, 5, 4. aharahaḥ sutaḥ prasuto bhavati ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. 4, 1, 2, 6. saṁvatsaram PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 5, 1. 2. 18, 5. KĀTY.ŚR. 6, 6, 27. 8, 10. 7, 1, 26. LĀṬY. 3, 3, 29. 7, 8. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. medial: dvādaśāhaṁ prasuto bhūtvā AIT. BR. 4, 24. — Vgl. 1. prasava, prasut. — caus. “fortgesetzt keltern lassen”: prasāvayet NIDĀNAS. 5, 11, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 284. vi, vyaṣāvīt; visoṣyati und visaviṣyati VOP. 8, 45. 12, Anf. “zerkeltern”: suṣvāṇāso vyadribhiḥ ṚV. 9, 101, 11. sam “gleichzeitig” (Soma) “keltern”: yau dvau saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1. saṁsuta TS. 7, 5, 5, 1. KĀṬH. 34, 4. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 4, 1. — Vgl. saṁsava, saṁsutasoma. abhisam “gleichzeitig keltern für” (acc.): ekaṁ vā etāvindramabhi saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1. su (sū), savati (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ) DHĀTUP. 22, 43. suvati 28, 115 (preraṇe, VOP. kṣepe). suvatāt; med. (in den BRĀHMAṆA): suvate 3. pl. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 3, 13. suvāntai 14. suvante TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. suvai, suvāvahai P. 7, 3, 88, Schol.; später (auch ŚAT. BR.; s. u. pra) sauti DHĀTUP. 24, 32 (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ). sāviṣat (ved. P. 3, 1, 34, Vārtt., Schol.), asāvīt P. 7, 3, 96, Schol. VOP. 13, 1. sāvīs; suṣuve AV. pass.: sūyate, sūyai; partic. suta ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 5. 4, 3, 14. sūta (= īrita, prerita H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg.) in nṛṣūta; s. auch unter pari und pra. (“in Bewegung setzen), veranlassen, zum Vorschein bringen; bescheeren, schicken” (von Savitar’s Wirkung); “aufstellen, bestimmen, weihen für Etwas; Ermächtigung geben zu Etwas”; med. “sich weihen” u. s. w. “lassen”: savitā suvāti ṚV. 7, 40, 1. śreṣṭhaṁ savaṁ savitā sāviṣannaḥ 1, 164, 26. AV. 6, 1, 3. devebhyo hi prathamamamṛtatvaṁ suvasi bhāgam ṚV. 4, 54, 2. fgg. 5, 42, 3. 82, 4. vāmamasmabhyaṁ sāvīḥ 6, 71, 6. yadadya sūra udite suvati savitā bhagaḥ 7, 66, 4. AV. 7, 14, 3. 14, 1, 33. 19, 8, 4. yathā sindhurnadīnāṁ sāmrājyaṁ suṣuve 14, 1, 43. suṣuvāṇa “in der Weihe begriffen, geweiht” TS. 2, 1, 9, 1 (P. 3, 2, 106, Schol., wo suṣuvāṇam zu lesen ist). 5, 6, 3, 4. 7, 5, 15, 2. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 23. 4, 8. 5, 2, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 1. 10, 1. pass.: yo vai somena sūyate (= niṣpadyate Comm.) TBR. 2, 7, 5, 1. sūyate ha vā asya kṣatram AIT. BR. 8, 5. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 3. 3, 11. 15. 9, 3, 4, 6. agnisavena suto bhavati 9. sarvaṁ vastatsutam “zu all diesem seid ihr ermächtigt” 13, 4, 2, 17. sūyate vā eṣa yo ‘gniṁ cinute TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. yasmādeveme candraṛkṣagrahasaṁvatsarādayaḥ sūyante (= abhiṣūyante āpyāyante Comm.) so v. a. “in Thätigkeit gesetzt werden” MAITRJUP. 6, 16. mā na sāvīrmahāstrāṇi so v. a. “schleudere” BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — prajāpateḥ sutaṁ rayiṣṭham N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,225,a. — Vgl. 2. sava, 2. savana, 1. savitar, savīman. anu “nach Andern antreiben” u. s. w.: paśūn ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 19. anu ṣva (vgl. unter nis) TAITT. ĀR. 2, 6, 4 falsch; vgl. AV. 6, 121, 4. 117, 3. apa “wegschicken, vertreiben” ṚV. 10, 37, 4. apāmīvāṁ savitā sāviṣat 100, 8. yattatraino apa tatsuvāmi AV. 6, 119, 3. VS. 35, 11. abhi, -ṣuvati, abhyaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. “weihen für” (acc.): oṣadhīḥ ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 3, 9. “begaben mit”: pāpmanaivainamabhiṣuvati KĀṬH. 13, 2. — desid. -susūṣati P. 8, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1, Schol. ā “zutheilen, zusenden, schicken”: von Savitar ṚV. 1, 110, 3. a smabhyamā suva sarvatātim 3, 54, 11. 56, 6. saubhagam 4, 54, 6. 5, 82, 5. dāśuṣe vāmam 6, 71, 4. vasūni 7, 45, 3. 10, 35, 7. vayaḥ 100, 3. AV. 2, 29, 2. 7, 14, 3. 4, 24, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 2, 9. med. ṚV. 7, 38, 2. PAÑCAV. BR. 21, 10, 15. ā suvorjam (agne) ṚV. 9, 66, 19. (indraḥ) ā sāviṣadarśasānāya śarum “sende” so v. a. “werfe auf” 10, 99, 7. “herbeischaffen, hercitiren”: ā te prāṇaṁ suvāmasi AV. 7, 53, 6. — Vgl. 1. āsava, āsavitar und 1. āsuti. ud “aufwärts gehen heissen”: ūrdhvāmeva varuṇamenimutsuvati KĀṬH. 19, 5. ni, partic. -ṣuta “hineingegeben, eingeworfen”: camase ‘ṣṭātayāni niṣutāni bhavanti AIT. BR. 8, 5. nis “fortscheuchen, fortgehen heissen”: duḥṣvapnyaṁ duritaṁ niḥ ṣvāsmat (suva) AV. 6, 121, 1. 7, 83, 4. 19, 57, 2. 1, 81, 1. 2. niritastatsuvantu ṚV. 7, 50, 3. parā “wegscheuchen” u. s. w.: parā ṛṇā sāvīḥ ṚV. 2, 28, 9. duritāni parā suva 5, 82, 5. 10, 137, 4. AV. 6, 127, 3. 7, 53, 6. 19, 39, 10. VS. 16. 5. TS. 1, 3, 14, 4. pari, -ṣuvati, paryaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. partic. “geheissen, (heraus) getrieben” (vom Grase): devānāṁ pariṣūtamasi varṣavṛddhamasi TS. 1, 1, 2, 1. TBR. 3, 2, 2, 4. iti (“bei Gelegenheit dieses Spruches”) darbhānpariṣauti ĀPAST. in TS. Comm. 1, 53, 3 v. u. so v. a. “zusammenraffen.” — Vgl. pariṣūti. pra “in Bewegung bringen, erregen, zur Thätigkeit rufen” (namentlich von Savitar gesagt); “heissen, veranlassen; Jmd Etwas verstatten, überlassen”: niveśayaṁ ca prasuvaṁ ca bhūma ṚV. 7, 45, 1. 77, 1. 4, 53, 3. 5, 82, 9. prāsāvīddevaḥ savitā jagatpṛthak 1, 157, 1. arthamityai 124, 1. bhadraṁ dvipade 5, 81, 2. matim 9, 21, 7. pra vo grāvāṇaḥ savitā suvatu 10, 175, 1. AV. 1, 10, 2. saubhāgyāya 18, 2. yajñam TBR. 3, 1, 1, 9. dānam VS. 18, 33. jīvātave 67. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 4, 8. adhvaryum 5, 2, 1. 8, 3, 20. 2, 5, 2, 30. omiti brahmā prasauti TAITT. UP. 1, 8. auṣṇyaṁ prāsuvat MAITRJUP. 2, 6. sanim TS. 2, 1, 6, 3. annam ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 1. vahvannaṁ prasuvīran “zur Verfügung stellen” ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 18, 8. puruṣān ŚAT. BR. 13, 6, 2, 9. yamu dviṣmastamu te pra suvāmasi “hingeben” AV. 12, 2, 3. śvānaṁ prasauti “überlassen” (zum Todtschlagen) TBR. 3, 8, 4, 1. prasuhi (v. l. -sūhi, in paralleler Stelle -suva) KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 14, 19. so v. a. “schleudere” Comm. zu BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — partic. prasūta “angetrieben, gesandt, geheissen; verstattet, dem es verstattet ist” ṚV. 1, 113. 1. arṣantvāpastvayeha prasūtāḥ 3, 30, 9. dūta 54, 19. janāḥ sūryeṇa prasūtāḥ 7, 63, 4. pṛṣṭhe ninaddho jayati prasūtaḥ “entsandt” (Pfeil) 6, 75, 5. 11. prasūto bhakṣamakaram 10, 167, 4. AV. 6, 63, 1. 19, 51, 2. savitṛ- AIT. BR. 1, 7. 2, 38. 7, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 2, 17. 5, 1, 1, 4. TS. 2, 5, 2, 6. 5, 3, 4, 4. – ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 15, 1. varuṇa- KAUŚ. 3. a- “keine Erlaubniss habend” ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 7, 2. “nicht gestattet, nicht erlaubt” ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 4, 3. – AV. 3, 1, 4 ist (vgl. ṚV. 3, 30, 6) zu verstehen pra sū te. — Vgl. 2. prasava, 1. prasavitar, 1. prasūti, indraprasūta, bṛhaspati-, brahma-, vāja-, haryaśva-. adhipra “wegschicken von” (abl.): prajāpatirindraṁ vajrādadhi prasuvati KĀṬH. 14, 7. abhipra “hintreiben zu”: yadenāmabhiprasuvanti nadyaḥ NIR. 9, 26. – sūta “veranlasst, geheissen” 11, 12. pratipra, partic. -sūta “wieder verstattet” Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 6, 23. vi, -ṣuvati, vyaṣāvīt VOP. 8, 45. 13, 1. su adj. in dāvasu vielleicht auf 2. su zurückzuführen. su (sū), sūte DHĀTUP. 24, 21 (prāṇigarbhavimocane). P. 6, 1, 186. VOP. 9, 39. suve 1. sg. ṚV. 10, 125, 7. suvai VOP. 9, 40. suvāte, suvate 3 pl., suvāna; asūta, sūta; später auch sūyate DHĀTUP. 26, 23 (prāṇiprasave). savati und sauti s. u. pra. suṣuve, susāva, sasūva (P. 7, 4, 74) ṚV. 4, 18, 10. 10, 86, 23. AV. 10, 1, 23. asaviṣṭa und asoṣṭa (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5) VOP. 8, 40. 46.11, 5. savitā und sotā P. 7, 2, 44. soṣyate und soṣyati (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5); sūṣyantī und soṣyantī ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 22. sūtave ṚV. 10, 184, 3. AV. 1, 11, 2. savitave 6, 17, 1. sūtvā KĀŚ. zu P. 7, 2, 44. TS. 2, 1, 5, 4. partic. sūta, suta (s. besonders; nur wegen suta und suṣuti ist die Annahme von su mit kurzem u gerechtfertigt) und sūna (P. 8, 2, 45. VOP. 26, 88. fg.). “zeugen, gebären” ṚV. 1, 135, 8. 164, 17. 168, 9. nārī naryaṁ susāva 7, 20, 5. sūṣyantī 5, 78, 5. asūta pūrvo vṛṣabhaḥ “wurde geboren” 3, 38, 5. yadīṁ suvāte uṣasā 5, 1, 1. 2, 2. starīryatsūta 10, 31, 10. suvānā putrān AV. 2, 36, 3. “brüten” (von Vögeln) ṚV. 1, 164, 22. pass. wohl hierher: asāvanyo asura sūyata dyauḥ 10, 132, 4. — In der späteren Sprache meist in der Bed. “gebären”: āyuṣmantaṁ sutaṁ sūte M. 3, 263. 9, 9. 10, 39. Spr. (II) 1748. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 41. suvāte R. 1, 23, 14. asūta RAGH. 3, 13. 15, 13. KUMĀRAS. 1, 20. KATHĀS. 23, 64. 28, 66. 42, 70. PRAB. 11, 10. BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 30. 17, 18. 26, 19. 4, 1, 34. 38. 13, 15. 24, 8. 9, 20, 17. 24, 47. sūyate CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 12. asūyata MBH. 1, 2599. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 39. 51. suṣuve MBH. 1, 2539. 5908. 3, 8844. 16638. R. 2, 90, 11. 92, 21. R. GORR. 2, 99, 14. 5, 36, 57. RAGH. 5, 36. 7, 54. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 74. BHĀG. P. 3, 23, 48. 4, 13, 18. 6, 18, 11. 9, 11, 11. PAÑCAT. 238, 6 (suṣūve gedr.). suṣuvire KATHĀS. 39, 18. suṣāva MBH. 1, 4765. R. GORR. 1, 39, 16. MĀRK. P. 104, 6. suṣuvus 49, 9. soṣyate KATHĀS. 21, 35. 34, 43. sūtvā BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 19. sūya MBH. 3, 10004. pass.: kausalyayāsāvi sukhena rāmaḥ prāk BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. “erzeugen”: sūte M. 10, 32. 34. suṣuve (subj. Mann und Weib) ŚĀK. 186. pass.: akrūraḥ suṣuve tasmāt HARIV. 1916. “erzeugen” uneig.: prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram BHAG. 9, 10. phalaṁ sūte pādapaḥ KATHĀS. 27, 99. asūta sadyaḥ kusumānyaśokaḥ KUMĀRAS. 3, 26. khanibhiḥ suṣuve ratnaṁ kṣetraiḥ sasyaṁ vanairgajān (bhūḥ) RAGH. 17, 66. payaḥ sūte ‘dya medinī, ratnaṁ vaiḍūryabhūḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 300. sūṣyant BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. dhūmāt – payaḥ sūte ghanasyodgamaḥ Spr. (II) 3162. dharmaṁ sūyanti prajāḥ MBH. 3, 11298. — partic. sūta mit act. Bed. = prasūta H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg. sūtā “gekalbt habend” M. 8, 242. vanye sattve sūte “wenn ein wildes Thier Junge geworfen hat” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 91, 3. — Vgl. savitrī. nis vgl. niḥṣūti. pra 1) “gebären”: prasūte sma sutam KATHĀS. 39, 19. 56, 287. MĀRK. P. 51, 114. prāsūta R. 7, 35, 21. KATHĀS. 17, 65. kanyā prasūyate MBH. 3, 13057. 4, 71. ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 11. SUŚR. 1, 367, 18. Spr. (II) 1403. VARĀH. BṚH. 5, 8. 11. 16. PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 34. gauryā prativarṣaṁ prasūyate Schol. zu P. 5, 2, 12. prasūyante mithunānyeva tāḥ MĀRK. P. 49, 10. prasavanti MBH. 1, 6077. prasavantī M. 4, 44. prasuṣuve BHĀG. P. 3, 17, 2. prāsoṣṭa RĀJA-TAR. 3, 106. 4, 39. BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. prasaviṣyasi R. 7, 9, 24. MĀRK. P. 51, 113. 77, 6. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 29. prasoṣyantī 11, 1, 15. prasūya ŚĀK. 94. 95, v. l. KATHĀS. 14, 38. PRAB. 11, 10. prasotum BHAṬṬ. 1, 13. “erzeugen”: prasūyate M. 10, 27. 30. fg. anena prasaviṣyadhvam “Nachkommenschaft haben” BHAG. 3, 10. “erzeugen” in uneig. Bed.: (buddhiḥ) prasūte hi phalaṁ śrīmadaraṇīva hutāśanam KĀM. NĪTIS. 13, 2. Spr. (II) 7062. dhūmaṁ prasauti (agniḥ) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125. aṣṭamāsadhṛtaṁ garbham – dyauḥ prasūyate R. 4, 27, 3. prasūyate saṁgatiḥ śriyam PRAB. 86, 18. (drumāḥ) śayanāni prasūyante citrāstaraṇavanti R. 4, 44, 99. MĀRK. P. 49, 30. 59, 19. dīpaḥ kajjalaṁ prasūyate Spr. (II) 2816. taravaḥ prāsūyanta “trugen Früchte” BHĀG. P. 4, 19, 8. yathā prasūyamānastu phalī dadyātphalaṁ bahu MBH. 14, 498. (śāstraviṭapī) phalaṁ prasūya Spr. (II) 5426. — 2) “geboren werden, entspringen, entstehen”: kārāvaro niṣādāttu carmakāraḥ prasūyate M. 10, 36. tiryagyonau prasūyate MBH. 3, 12500. asyāmeva prasūyadhvam 1, 2502. 2504. etasmācca jagatsarvaṁ prasūyeta janārdanāt HARIV. 11053. prasūyatas 2. du. MBH. 13, 2565. prasūyāmas HARIV. 173 = VP. 1, 15, 128. sarveṇa khalu martavyaṁ martyaloke prasūyatā Spr. (II) 6949. sindhoḥ prasūya kamalā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 317. pra keśāḥ suvate TBR. 2, 7, 17, 1. śabdaḥ u. s. w. vedādeva prasūyante M. 12, 98, v. l. — 3) partic. prasūta a) mit act. Bed. f. ā “geboren habend, niedergekommen” (die Ergänzung im acc.; hier und da statt des verbi finiti) AK. 2, 6, 1, 16. MED. t. 124. HALĀY. 118. 285. 345. AV. 12, 1, 62. YĀJÑ. 2, 145. SUŚR. 2, 180, 8. devasadṛśānputrān HARIV. 4625. R. 7, 66, 3. UTTARAR. 38, 7 (52, 1). WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 282. fg. 289. KATHĀS. 21, 117. 29, 137 (śatapadī). MĀRK. P. 51, 101. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 65. PAÑCAT. 218, 21. HIT. 72, 14. a- Spr. (II) 2055. pratyagra- Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 6, 8. jananī prasūtatanayā “deren Tochter niedergekommen ist” Spr. (II) 6033. prasūtamātrā “eben niedergekommen” KATHĀS. 28, 67. — b) “geboren, erzeugt, entsprungen, entstanden” H. an. 3, 273. MED. mit gen. oder loc. (auch abl.) P. 2, 3, 39. VOP. 5, 29. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1, 2. tasyām M. 3, 19. tataḥ MBH. 1, 35. mama kāyāt R. 2, 74, 21. tadanvaye RAGH. 1, 12. nīcakule Spr. (II) 6475. yasya tasya 5369. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. R. 1, 16, 26. ŚĀK. 178, v. l. Spr. (II) 1431. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 11. BṚH. 23, 14. MĀRK. P. 76, 17. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 266. 284. etaddeśa- M. 2, 20. kālanemi- ŚĀK. CH. 144, 4. KATHĀS. 50, 139. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 24. 9, 6, 3. kula- R. 2, 82, 31 (Pferde) Spr. (II) 5970. BHĀG. P. 9, 3, 21. nandakula- PAÑCAT. 45, 2. veda- PRAB. 86, 19. vindhyapāda- (nadī) MĀRK. P. 57, 25. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 14. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 40. kalpavṛkṣa- (madhu) MEGH. 67. matprasūtaṁ bhayam MBH. 3, 2844. matprasūtena tejasā 11970. bhīṣma- (duḥkha) 5, 7029. dharmaviśeṣa- KAṆ. 1, 1, 4. saraladrumāṇāṁ srutakṣīratayā prasūto gandhaḥ KUMĀRAS. 1, 9. prasūtaṁ tarhi saukhyaṁ naḥ Z. f. d. K. d. M. 2, 426. — c) n. als Synonym von avyakta TATTVAS. 5. — 4) partic. prasūna a) = prasūta H. an. 3, 388. = jāta MED. n. 87. — b) n. “Blüthe, Frucht”; s. u. prasūna. In der Bed. “Blüthe” auch Spr. (II) 7411, v. l. UTTARAR. 98, 6 (129, 12). MĀLATĪM. 57, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 18, 8 (“engendre” BURNOUF). PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 50. — Vgl. 3. prasava, prasavana, 2. prasavitar, 2. prasavin, prasūta, 2. prasūti, prasūna, devaprasūta (hierher oder zu 2. su). anupra, partic. -sūta “darauf entstanden”: sṛṣṭistathaiveyamanuprasūtā MBH. 13, 7361. abhipra, partic. -sūta “erzeugt, geboren”: mātuḥ pituḥ karmaṇābhiprasūtaḥ saṁvardhate vidhivadbhojanena MBH. 5, 964. saṁpra 1) “erzeugen”: -sūte MBH. 13, 2582. -sūyate M. 10, 33. — – sūyate MBH. 13, 5850 fehlerhaft für -ṇūyate, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. — 2) “geboren werden”: tadāhaṁ saṁprasūyāmi gṛheṣu śubhakarmaṇām MBH. 3, 12978. — 3) partic. -sūta “erzeugt, geboren”: bahvīḥ prajāḥ puruṣāt MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 5. śarmiṣṭhayā MBH. 5, 5044. brahmāsyatas, bāhubhyām 12, 11814. 13, 4426. guṇavipuleṣu kuleṣu R. 4, 41, 79. māyā guṇasaṁprasūtā BHĀG. P. 11, 10, 13. — Vgl. saṁprasūti. vi “gebären”: sumatyapi garbhaṁ tumbaṁ vyasūyata R. GORR. 1, 40, 17. sam dass.: śāradvatasya (so die neuere Ausg.) dāyādamahalyā samasūyata HARIV. 1784. “erzeugen” in uneig. Bed.: dattaṁ śreyāṁsi saṁsūte (Conj.) Spr.(II) 4252. su 5 savati v. l. für sru (gatau) DHĀTUP. 22, 42. VOP. 8, 95. asāvīt, suṣavitha, suṣuviva, savitā und sotā 96. su adv. gaṇa cādi zu P. 1, 4, 57. VOP. 1, 8. über die euphonischen Veränderungen des Wortes (ṣu, ṣū), über die Dehnung eines vorangehenden Vocals und über den Wandel eines nachfolgenden na in ṇa handeln VS. PRĀT. 4, 183. TS. PRĀT. 3, 7. 14. P. 6, 3, 134. 8, 3, 107. 4, 27. “wohl, gut”; überhaupt verstärkend oder versichernd: “gewiss, leichtlich, völlig” u. s. w. wie “wohl” in älteren deutschen Liedern. Die indischen Lexicographen geben dem Worte folgende Bedeutungen: pūjana (pūjā) AK. 3, 5, 5. MED. avj. 79. nirbhara AK. 3, 5, 2. H. 1535, Schol. MED. bhṛśa, anumati, kṛcchra, samṛddhi MED. anāyāsa BHAR. zu AK. nach ŚKDR. 1) selbständig; nie am Versanfang; im AV. selten und meist in Verbindung mit u. u ṣu ṚV. 1, 26, 5. 4, 6, 2. 20, 4. vidmo ṣvasya mātaram AV. 1, 2, 1. 6, 84, 3. mo ṣu ṚV. 2, 18, 3. 3, 55, 2. AV. 5, 11, 7. mā su VS. 11, 68. uta su ṚV. 8, 2, 42. itsu 4, 22, 10. ā su 8, 34, 12. pra su 1, 136, 1. 8, 6, 32. vi ṣū 2, 28, 7. 8, 32, 19. ni ṣu 5, 13. adhi ṣū 8, 24, 7. paryū ṣū 9, 110, 1. asmāntsu 1, 9, 6. 17, 7. asmabhyaṁ su 3, 30, 21. asmākaṁ su 31, 14. asmābhiḥ su 8, 70, 8. tvaṁ su VS. 4, 14. asme su 4, 32, 14. sa su 12, 1. imaṁ su 2, 35, 2. idaṁ su AV. 14, 2, 8. yaṁ svaśnaṁ jaghāna ṚV. 2, 14, 5. sakṛtsu 16, 8. 8, 1, 14. namaḥ su te VS. 12, 63. vasvī ṣu te ṚV. 7, 20, 10. jīvātave su 10, 59, 5. ni māmṛje pura indraḥ su sarvāḥ ṚV. 7, 26, 3. su kam am Ende 1, 191, 6. 3, 53, 2. nāsmāllokātsvetavyamiva “nicht wohl” TS. 6, 1, 1, 1. bodhā su ṚV. 7, 22, 3. juṣasva sū 3, 24, 2. mandasvā su 8, 6, 39. pibā su 17, 4. AV. 6, 32, 1. jarāṁ su gaccha 19, 24, 5. na vai su viduriva manuṣyā nakṣatram KĀṬH. 8, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 296. su veda KENOP. 9. sūrmī jvalantīṁ svāśliṣyet M. 11, 103. su virājate sma MBH. 4, 2089. svanuyāsyanti 8, 1321. su śakyante R. 2, 33, 4. su samīkṣyatām Spr. (II) 1402. su saṁdadhīta 1961, v. l. su śobhante 4157. svanuṣṭhīyatām 6275. svaśikṣayat RĀJA-TAR. 4, 51. – MBH. 3, 14392 und 7, 8603 hat die ed. Bomb. tu und hi st. su. Vor einem absol. MBH. 7, 5783 (so ‘bhidrutya st. svabhidrutya ed. Bomb.). vicintya MṚCCH. 103, 16. baddhvā 176, 1. cintya und vicārya Spr. (II) 7100. snātvā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 291. — 2) am Anfange eines comp. vor Adjectiven und Substantiven (über solche compp. handelt P. 1, 4, 94. 2, 1, 6. 5, 4, 69. 6, 2, 117. fgg, 145. 172. fgg. 195. 7, 1, 68. 8, 1, 67. fg. Vārtt. 4 zu 1, 4, 60. Vārtt. 1 der SAUNĀGA zu 2, 2, 18. VOP. 6, 88). svalaṁkṛta “schön geschmückt” MBH. 3, 2114. surakṣita “wohl gehütet” 2144. suprīta “hocherfreut” R. 1, 1, 76. sūcchritadhvaja 2, 43, 10. susaṁrabdhatara 6, 31, 44. susādhya “gut zu handhaben” PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 33. sumanohara “überaus reizend” MBH. 1, 5976. sudāruṇa R. 1, 8, 12. susūkṣma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 44. sunikhilam “ganz vollständig” HARIV. 7034. suprākṛta “ganz gemein” R. GORR. 2, 11, 24. susita “schön weiss” PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 8. susugandha “sehr wohlriechend” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 32. suduṣkara “sehr schwer zu vollbringen” MBH. 1, 6118. sunistriṁśa “ein schönes Schwert” MBH. 6, 5639. subhakṣya “eine prächtige Speise” Spr. (II) 7113. susahāya “einen guten Gefährten habend” M. 7, 31. sulalāṭa “eine schöne Stirn habend” R. 1, 1, 12. sukara (s. d.) “leicht auszuführen”, sulabha (s. d.) “leicht zu erlangen”, susaṁtoṣa (s. d.) “leicht zu befriedigen.” — su verhält sich wohl zum demonstrativen sa wie ku zum interrogativen ka. Vgl. sutarām. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 su 1. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par., and sū sū, ii. 4, suya (properly pass. refl. of su), and ii. 2, Ātm. 1. To beget, Man. 10, 32. 2. To bear, to bring forth, Man. 10, 39; Pañc. pr. d. 5. ii. 5, sunu, Par. Ātm. (the act of expressing the Soma juice being compared to the act of generating, cf. Rigv. i. 28), To express the Soma juice, Chr. 294, 3 = Rigv. i, 92, 3. Ptcple. of the pf. pass. I. suta, 1. m. A son, Pañc. i. d. 185. 2. f. tā, A daughter, Chr. 3, 9. 3. m. pl. Cildren, Man. 2, 28. Comp. giri-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Pañc. i. d. 175. jahnu-, f. tā, the Gaṅgā, MBh. 1, 3913. jīva-, adj. one who has living children, Bhāg. P. 6, 19, 25. dāra-, m. wife and son, Yājñ. 2, 175. dāsī-, m. a base man, Rājat. 5, 179. dharma-, m. (the son of the god Dharma), epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhāg. P. 1, 7, 49. bhū- and mahī-, m. the planet Mars. bhṛgu-, m. 1. Śukra or Venus. 2. Paraśurāma. rādhā-, m. Karṇa. śaila-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Vikr. d. 128. II. sūla, 1. Engendered. 2. Born. f. tā, 1. A daughter, Pañc. 181, 5. 2. A woman lying in; see s.v. Comp. sūra-, m. Aruṇa, the dawn. III. sūna, 1. Born, produced. 2. Blown, budded (as a flower). m. A son, Pañc. 198, 2. f. nā, A daughter. n. 1. Bringing forth, parturition. 2. A flower. — With the prep. abhi abhi, ṣu, 1. To express the Soma juice, Rām. 1, 13, 5 (cf. Sclegel’s translation). 2. To extract juice, Man. 5, 10. 3. To sprinkle, Bhaṭṭ. 9, 90. — With ud ud, ii. 5, To agitate, Bhāg. P. 3, 20, 35 (cf. 2. sū). — With pra pra, 1. To beget, Man. 10, 30. 2. To bring forth, Man. 4, 44. 3. Pass. To be brought forth, Man, 10, 36; with the termination of the Par. (i. 4, Par.), MBh. 12, 5687. prasūta, 1. Engendered, Hit. pr. d. 23, M.M. 2. Born, Pañc. 45, 2. 3. Produced, Chr. 294, 8 = Rigv. i. 92, 8. 4. Engendering, Man. 3, 19. 5. Having brought forth, delivered, Hit. 72, 14; Utt. Rāmac. 52, 1 (she has brought forth). Comp. a-, adj. one who has not brought forth, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 809. kula-, adj. descended from a respectable family, Pañc. pr. d. 6. prasūna, Born, produced. n. 1. A bud, a blossom, Utt. Rāmac. 129, 12; flower, Mālat. 57, 13. 2. Fruit. Comp. visa-, n. a lotus. — With saṁpra sam-pra, 1. To beget, Man. 10, 33. 2. Pass. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 12978 (with the termination of the Par.). — Cf. [greek] Goth. sunus; A.S. sunu (cf. sūnu). su 2. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par. † To possess power or supremacy (cf. the last). su 3. su, i. 1, Par. Ātm. † To go. su 4. su (for original vasu, cf. [greek] = Zend. vaṅhvām = Sskr. *vasvām), I. adv. ved. Beautifully, Chr. 296, 1 = Rigv. i. 112, 1. II. Very seldom combined and compounded with a verbum finitum; e. g. Pañc. i. d. 205, but cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 647; but very often with nouns, 1. Good, well, Rām. 3, 53, 6; Ṛt. 6, 2; Lass. 15, 5. 2. Beautiful, beautifully, Rām. 3, 52, 35. 3. Much, very, Chr. 4, 12. 4. Easily, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 2. Comparat. sutarām, 1. Better. 2. With na, Very badly, Pañc. 199, 24; with mā, In no way, Megh. 108. 3. More, Śiś. 9, 67; Pañc. 163, 3. 4. Exceedingly, Śiś. 9, 55. 5. Consequently, of course. — Cf. [greek] Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 su sunoti sunute v pp. suta1 (q.v.) press out, extract, esp. the Soma. — adhi = S. abhi press out, prepare or win by extracting. ā & vi = S. sam & abhisam press out together. — Cf. prasuta. su [2] (sū) adv. well, indeed (strengthening and assevering); often °– in adj., adv., & subst. = Gr. ‘eu (opp. dus). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 su 1. SU, V.P. suno, sunu, (sts. Ā.) press out, extract (Soma; V., rare in E.): pr. pt. sunvāna, suvāna; pp. suta, pressed, extracted. abhi (-ṣuṇoti), press out; ps. -ṣūyate, be extracted: pp. abhiṣuta (V.). ā, press out, extract (V.); boil, prepare (ghee). pra, pp. prāsuta (V.), pressed continuously; having continuously pressed. su 2. SU (= 1. sū), in sauti, suhi, and pp. suta, urged, instigated (ŚB.). su 3. SU (= 2. sū), in pra-savati (rare), pra-sauti (rare), pp. suta, son, and suṣuti. su su (in V. also sū), ad. [perh. for vasu = Gk.[greek]: cp. uṣu, ū shu, and u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used independently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in C.; very common °- with a. or N., in C. also with gd.). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 su gatau . aiśvarye . prasave . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka °-aniṭ .) savati . iti durgādāsaḥ .. su ña gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-aniṭ .) ña, susāva suṣuve . iti durgādāsaḥ .. su vya, nirbharam . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 2 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 158 . 16 . viditvā vyavasiṣyāmi yadyapi syāt suduṣkaram ..) pūjā . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 5 .. (śobhanam . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 31 . praṇetuṁ śakyate daṇḍaḥ susahāyena dhīmatā ..) anumatiḥ . kṛcchram . samṛddhiḥ . iti medinī .. anāyāsaḥ . iti bharataikārthasaṁgrahaḥ .. upasargaviśeṣaḥ . yathā . supūjānāyāsātiśayeṣu . iti mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. saptamyā vahuvacanavibhaktiḥ . iti vyākaraṇam .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 su avya° su–ḍu . 1 pūjāyām 2 atiśaye amaraḥ . 3 kṛcche 4 anumatau 5 mamṛddhau medi° 6 anāyāse ca anekārthako° . pūjāyāmasya nopasargatvam tena sustutamityādau na ṣatvam . atiśayādau tu suṣṭuta ityādi . gaṇaratne’rthaviśeṣānuktakrameṇodāhṛtam yathā su praśaṁsānumatipūjābhṛśakṛcchraśubheṣu . surūpaḥ sukṛtaṁ susādhuḥ sutaptaḥ suduḥ karaṁ sugandhaḥ . |
सेराह – serāha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899serāha m. a horse of milk-white colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch serāha m. “ein milchweisses Pferd, Schimmel” H. 1238. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 serāha serāha, m. A horse of a milk-white colour. |
सेराहः – serāhaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
serāhaḥ A horse of a milk-white colour. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 serāhaḥ puṁ, pīyūṣavarṇāśvaḥ . sa tu dugdhavacchretavarṇaḥ iti hemacandraḥ .. |
स्वच्छ – svaccha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899svaccha “sv-accha” mf (“ā”) n. very transparent or clear, pellucid,
crystalline &c. mf (“ā”) n. bright-coloured mf (“ā”) n. clear, distinct (as speech) mf (“ā”) n. pure (as the mind or heart) mf (“ā”) n. healthy, sound, convalescent (in this sense perhaps Prākṛit for “svastha”) svaccha “sv-accha” m. rock-crystal svaccha “sv-accha” m. the jujube tree svaccha “sv-accha” mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. white Dūrvā grass svaccha “sv-accha” n. a pearl svaccha “sv-accha” n. an alloy or amalgam of silver and gold svaccha “sv-accha” n. pure chalk &c. (= “vimaloparasa”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 svaccha a. [suṣṭhu acchaḥ prā-] (1) Very clear or transparent, pure, bright, pellucid; svacchasphaṭika, svacchamuktāphalaṁ &c. (2) White. (3) Beautiful. (4) Healthy. –cchaḥ A crystal. –cchā White Dūrvā grass. –cchaṁ (1) A pearl. (2) Pure chalk. — Comp. –patraṁ talc. –vālukaṁ pure chalk. –maṇiḥ a crystal. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch svaccha 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “schön klar” (accha), — “durchsichtig, – hell”: Wasser (Wasserbehälter) und andere Flüssigkeiten R. 2, 91, 71. Spr. (II) 4728. 4983. 6717. 6789. 7272. KATHĀS. 18, 101. 21, 8. 42, 41. RĀJA- TAR. 1, 203. 213. 4, 212. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 20. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 47. Thränen Spr. (II) 7001. sphaṭika KATHĀS. 50, 191. BHĀG. P. 3, 33, 17. Rubine VARĀH. BṚH. S. 82, 3. Farbe 68, 83. pratisūryaka 37, 1. Mondstrahlen R. GORR. 1, 36, 17. kānti KATHĀS. 34, 14. Spiegel und Bösewicht (durch Bestreuung von Asche) Spr. (II) 7245. -sindūrabhās ṚT. 1, 24. tanu BHĀG. P. 8, 6, 3. bhagavataḥ padam 3, 26, 21. puṣpa “hellfarbig” KATHĀS. 24, 97. PAÑCAR. 1, 6, 22. ātapratra RĀJA-TAR. 4, 719. übertragen auf Geistiges: vacas “klar, deutlich” KATHĀS. 17, 163. cetas “rein, lauter” MBH. 9, 2345. hṛdaya Spr. (II) 2819. antarātman 367. vṛtti 1543. vṛtta KĀM. NĪTIS. 5, 79. svabhāva PAÑCAR. 1, 14, 91. guṇāḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 40. vidyā NĪLAK. 253. — b) “gesund, geheilt” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. aus svastha entstanden. — 2) m. a) “Bergkrystall” RĀJAN. 13, 204. — b) “Judendorn” (badara) RĀJAN. 11, 140. — 3) f. ā “weisses” Dūrvā – “Gras” RĀJAN. 8, 112. — 4) n. a) “Perle” RĀJAN. 13, 155. — b) “mit Silber versetztes Gold” RĀJAN. 13, 139. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 svaccha a. very clear, transparent, bright, pure; abstr. -tā f., -tva n. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 svaccha su+accha, a. beautifully clear, transparent, or bright; clear, distinct (speech); pure (heart, conduct, etc.): -ka, a. beautifully clear or bright; -tā, f., -tva, n. perfect clearness or transpareness; purity of heart. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 svaccha tri° suṣṭhu acchaḥ prā° . 1 atinirmale kāluṣyarahite 2 muktāyāṁ 3 sphaṭike ca pu° rājani° . 4 śvetadūrvāyām strī rājani° . 5 vimaloparame na° 6 rogaviyute tri° śabdara° . 7 śukle ca . |
हंस – haṁsa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haṁsa m. (ifc. f. “ā”; accord. to 1. “han”, “to go?”) a goose, gander,
swan, flamingo (or other aquatic bird, considered as a bird of passage; sometimes a mere poetical or mythical bird, said in to be able to separate Soma from water, when these two fluids are mixed, and in later literature, milk from water when these two are mixed; also forming in the vehicle of the Aśvins, and in later literature that of Brahmā; ifc. also = “best or chief among”) &c. &c. m. the soul or spirit (typified by the pure white colour of a goose or swan, and migratory like a goose; sometimes “the Universal Soul or Supreme Spirit”, identified with Virāj, Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, śiva, Kāma, and the Sun; du. “the universal and the individual Spirit”; accord. to resolvable into “ahaṁ sa”, “I am that”) &c. m. one of the vital airs m. a kind of ascetic m. a man of supernatural qualities born under a partic. constellation m. an unambitious monarch m. a horse m. an excellent draught-ox (accord. to some, “a buffalo”) m. a mountain m. a temple of a partic. form m. a kind of Mantra or mystical text m. silver m. envy, malice m. N. of two metres haṁsa m. (in music) a kind of measure m. a mystical N. of the letter “h” m. a spiritual preceptor m. N. of a Deva-gandharva m. of a Dānava m. of a son of Brahmā m. of a son of Vasu-deva m. of a son of A-riṣṭā m. of a son of Brahma-datta and general of Jarā-saṁdha m. of various authors &c. m. of one of the Moon’s horses m. of a mountain haṁsa pl. N. of the Brāhmans in Plaksha-dvīpa haṁsa Nom. P. “-sati”, to act or behave like a swan Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haṁsa UṆĀDIS. 3, 62. Kār. aus SIDDH.K. zu P.6,3,109. 1) m. a) “Gans” (ein Zugvogel), “Gänserich”; auch wohl “Schwan” und “andere verwandte Wasservögel” AK. 2, 5, 23. 25. 3, 4, 30, 228. TRIK. 2, 5, 31. 3, 3, 454. H. 1325. an. 2, 594. fg. MED. s. 11. HALĀY. 2, 96. 98. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. ṚV. 1, 65, 5. in Reihen fliegend 163, 10. 3, 8, 9. 2, 34, 5. 4, 40, 5. 5, 78, 1. 8, 35, 8. 9, 97, 8. 10, 124, 9. ihr Schnattern 3, 53, 10. 9, 32, 3. 10,67, 3. AV. 8, 7, 24. 11, 2, 24. 12, 1, 51. TS. 5, 5, 21, 1. als Gespann der Aśvin ṚV. 4, 45, 4. als ein in der Nacht waches Thier (vgl. den Kranich) AV. 6, 12, 1. von der Sonne (vgl. b) gesagt 10, 8, 17. fg. (vgl. TAITT. ĀR. 2, 15, 8). 11, 4, 21. 13, 3, 14. hiraṇmaya TBR. 3, 10, 9, 11. somamadbhyo vyapibacchandasā haṁsaḥ (wie später Milch und Wasser) śuciṣat VS. 19, 74. -mukha KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 3, 37. CHĀND. UP. 4, 7, 1. 2 (= “Sonne” ŚAṁK.). ŚIKṢĀ in Ind. St. 4, 108. -vāraṇagāminī M. 3, 10. 5, 12. 11, 135. 12, 62. MBH. 3, 2090. fgg. 2416. matta- R. 2, 112, 15. 5, 55, 2. SUŚR. 1, 205, 12. 19. 334, 4. MṚCCH. 120, 17. MEGH. 24. 58. 74. ṚT. 1, 5. RAGH. 17, 25. VIKR. 95. dhṛtiṁ na labhate haṁso ‘pi kūpodake Spr. (II) 1613. 1787. haṁsā yathā mānasaṁ smaranti 3716. na śobhate sabhāmadhye haṁsamadhye bako yathā 4800. 5078. yena śuklīkṛtā haṁsāḥ 5537. 7357. fgg. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 12, 4. 8. 33, 10. 44, 24. 48, 9. 68, 115. 81, 3. KATHĀS. 69, 131. LA. (III) 5, 3. 49, 9. BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 10. 3, 10, 23. 15, 38. 5, 13, 17. 11, 4, 17. -jātīya PAÑCAT. 76,7. 8. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 93,a,1. 123,a,50. 281,b,37. haṁso hi kṣīramādatte tanmiśrā varjayatyapaḥ ŚĀK. 155. KAP. 4, 23. Spr. (II) 544. Brahman’s Gespann 4771. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 24. haṁso bhūtvātha sauvarṇastvajo nityaḥ prajāpatiḥ. sa vai paryeti lokāṁstrīn MBH. 12, 10993. fgg. haṁsā dhārtarāṣṭrā devalokanivāsinaḥ HARIV. 8585. fgg Śākyamuni als “Gans” VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 233. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā MBH. 7, 510. 4086. 9, 442. RAGH. 16, 56. — b) Bez. “der Sonne” (vgl. unter “a”) AK. 1, 1, 2, 32. 3, 4, 30, 228. TRIK. 3, 3, 454. H. 96. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 37. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH. 3, 191. — c) “(die wie die Gans reine und wandernde) Seele”, auch “die Weltseele” (du. “die individuelle und die Weltseele”) ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 1, 6. 3, 18. 6, 15. hiraṇyavarṇaḥ śakuno hṛdyāditye pratiṣṭhitaḥ. madgurhaṁsastejovṛṣaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 34. 35 (= CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 10). Ind. St. 2, 63. 9, 14. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 7. 28, 61. 64. 29, 80. 5, 5, 10. 7, 13. 6, 16, 47 (parama-). 11,17,10. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 149,b,22. 150,a,5. mit Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa identificirt TRIK. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH. 1, 2431. 12, 12864. 13, 6970. HARIV. 11389. 14114. PAÑCAR. 4, 3, 26. 8, 88. = virāj LIÑGA-P. bei MUIR, ST. 4, 326. = Śiva ANEKĀRTHAK. im ŚKDR. = Kāma WILSON ohne Angabe einer Aut. — d) “ein best. Wind im Körper” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. Ind. St. 1, 385. — e) Bez. “einer Art von Asketen” H. an. MED. MBH. 13,6478. HARIV. 15469. 15472. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 269,a,12. fgg. 42. fgg. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 362. BHĀG. P.3,12,43.7,9,18. 11,17,9. 29,3. — f) Bez. “eines unter bestimmten Constellationen geborenen Wundermenschen” (mahāpuruṣa) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 2. 7. 24. 26. 35. — g) pl. Bez. “der Brahmanen in” Plakṣadvīpa BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 4. — h) “ein genügsamer Fürst” TRIK. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. — i) “Pferd” NAIGH. 1, 14 (wohl weil die “Gans” das “Reitthier” der Aśvin ist). H. ś. 177. “ein best. Pferd” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. des Mondgottes VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 104. — k) Bez. “eines vorzüglichen Zugochsen” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 61, 17. “Büffel” schlechte v. l. H. 1283; vgl. haṁsakālītanaya. — l) Bez. “einer best. Tempelform” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 56, 18. haṁso haṁsākāraḥ 26. — m) “Neid, Missgunst” H. an. MED. — n) “ein best. Zauberspruch” diess. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 236,b,16. — o) = śreṣṭha und agrataḥ sthitaḥ H. an. — p) Bez. zweier Metra: a) metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 158 (V, 1). — b) metrical sequenceebend. 162 (X, 18). — q) mystische Bez. “des Buchstabens” ha Verz. d. Oxf. H. 97,a, No. 151. — r) N. pr. a) eines Devagandharva HARIV. 14159. eines Dānava 9141. eines Sohnes des Brahman BHĀG. P. 4, 8, 1. des Vasudeva 9, 24, 50. der Ariṣṭā MBH. 1, 2718. KĀD. in ZdmG.7, 584. des Citragupta Verz. d. Oxf. H. 341,b, No. 799. des Brahmadatta und Heerführers des Jarāsaṁdha MBH. 2, 576. 601. fgg. HARIV. 15404. des Arthapati HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 12. – PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 59,20. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 259,a, No. 713. HALL 165. — b) eines Berges VP. 169. BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 27. “Berg” überh. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) f. ī a) “eine weibliche Gans” VOP. 4, 15. H. 1327. MṚCCH. 120, 17. KATHĀS. 43, 155. 69, 131. fg. CHANDOM. 114. — b) Bez. verschiedener Metra: a) metrical sequenceŚRUT. 18. COLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 159 (V, 12; hier fehlerhaft). — b) metrical sequence Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 514. — g) metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 163 (XVII, 3). CHANDOM. 114. — c) N. pr. einer Tochter Bhagīratha’s und Gattin Kautsa’s MBH. 13, 6270. einer Sängerin RĀJA-TAR. 5, 359. 386. — Vgl. eka-, para-, parama-, bhakti-, mahā-, rakta-, rāja-. haṁsa 1) m. a) “Gans” (ein Zugvogel), “Gänserich” ; auch wohl “Schwan” und “andere verwandte Wasservögel.” am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā. b) *am Ende eines Comp. “der Beste unter.” c) Bez. “der Sonne.” d) “die (wie die Gans weiss und wandernde) Seele”, auch “die Weltseele.” Du. “die individuelle und die Weltseele.” Wird mit Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa, Virāg, *Śiva und *Kāma identificirt. e) “ein best. Wind im Körper.” f) Bez. “einer Art von Asketen” Spr.7681. g) Bez. “eines unter bestimmten Constellationen geborenen Wundermenschen.” h) Pl. Bez. “der Brahmanen” in Plakṣadvīpa. i) “*ein genügsamer Fürst.” k) “*Pferd.” l) Bez. “eines vorzüglichen Zugochsen.” Angeblich auch “Büffel.” m) “*Berg.” n) “eine best. Tempelform.” o) “ein best. Zauberspruch.” p) “*Neid, Missgunst.” q) Bez. “zweier Metra.” r) “ein best. Tact” S.S.S.113. s) mystische Bez. “des Lautes” ha. t) N.pr. a) eines Devagandharva. b) eines Dānava. g) eines Sohnes des Brahman. d) eines Sohnes des Vasudeva. e) verschiedener anderer Person. z) eines Rosses des Mondgottes VP.2,299. h) eines Berges. 2) f. haṁsī a) “eine weibliche Gans” 250,21. ŚIŚ.8,7. b) Bez. “verschiedener Metra.” c) N.pr. verschiedener Frauen. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 haṁsa 1 I An incarnation of Mahā Viṣṇu in Kṛtayuga. He instructed great sages like Sanaka on yoga in the presence of Brahmā. He is also called yajña. (Bhāgavata 11th Skandha). Hamsa, who was a prajāpati as well advised the Sādhyadevas about the means to attain salvation and the advice is known as Haṁsagītā. (Śānti Parva, Chapter 288). haṁsa 2 II A son born to Kaśyapa of his wife, Ariṣṭā. He was a Gandharva and it is believed that Dhṛtarāṣṭra was an aṁśāvatāra of this Gandharva. (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 6, See also under Aṁśāvatāṛa). haṁsa 3 III haṁsa(ṁ) Swan. For story about the origin of haṁsa on earth see under Sṛṣṭi, Para 12. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 haṁsa haṁsa, I. m. 1. A goose, a gander, a swan, a phoenicopteros, Vikr. d. 95; Man. 3, 10; it is the vehicle of Brahman. 2. A sort of horse. 3. The sun. 4. A devotee. 5. A liberal prince. 6. One of the vital breaths. 7. Brahman, Viṣṇu, Śiva, Kāma, the god of love. 8. (In composition), Best, excellent. II. f. sī. 1. A goose. 2. A proper name, Rājat. 5, 359. — Comp. para-, and parama-, m. an ascetic who has subdued all his senses, MBh. 13, 6478 (parama). rājahaṁsa, i. e. rājan-, m. 1. an excellent king. 2. m., f. sī, a white goose with red legs and bill, Vikr. d. 19; a flamingo, Hit. 79, 7. 3. a drake. — Cf. O. H. G. gans; A. S. gós, gandra; Lat. anser; [greek] Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 haṁsa f. ī goose, also applied to the swan, flamingo and like water-fowl; fig. the sun, the soul, du. the individual and universal soul. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 haṁsa haṁsa, m. gander, goose (a bird of passage, vehicle of Brahman), perh. also swan or flamingo (possessing the power of separating Soma form water in V., and milk from water in C.); (white and migratary like the goose), soul, sts. universal soul (U., C.): identified with Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa, and Virāj; kind of ascetic; N.: -ka, m. (little or poor) goose; m. or n. (?) anklet; -gāminī, a. f. having the gait of a haṁsa, walking gracefully; -cihna-dukūla-vat, a. clad in a garment interwoven with figures of geese; -tā, f. condition of a goose; -tūla, n. swansdown; -tva, n. condition of a goose; -dvāra, n. Swan’s gate, N. of a pass on the way lake Mānusa; -dvīpa, m. N. of an island; -nāda, m. N. of a fairy; -pada, n. goose-foot (as a mark); -padikā, f. N. of a the first wife of Duṣyanta: -mālā, f. flight of geese or swans; -yāna, n. goose as a vehicle, car drawn by geese; a. (ī) riding on a goose; -ratha, m. N.; -4āja, m. king of geese, large gander; m. N.; -vat, a. containing the word haṁsa (Br.): -ī, f. N., esp. of the first wife of Duṣyanta; -vāhana, m. (riding on a goose), ep. of Brahman; -vega, m. N.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 haṁsa puṁstrī° hasa–ac–paṣo° varṇāgamaḥ . svanāmakhyāte 1 pakṣibhede amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīṣ 2 nirlobhanṛpe 3 viṣṇau 4 sūrye 5 paramātmani haṁsaṁ tanau sānnahitaṁ caratama naiṣa° . 6 matsare 7 gatibhede 8 mantrabhede 9 dehasthavāyubhede 10 aśvamede medi° 11 gurau 12 parvate śabdara° . 13 śibe amaraḥ 14 agrasthite 15 śreṣṭhe hemaca° . 16 viśuddhe amaraḥ . 17 ajapāmantrarūpe varṇe ca haṁkāreṇa vāharyāti sakāreṇa viśet punaḥ . haseti satataṁ mantraṁ jīvo japati sarvadā iti tantram . ajapāśabde 89 pṛ° dṛśyam . haṁsakhagasya bhedāḥ tanmāṁsaguṇāśca yathā haṁsāḥ pittaharāḥ snigdhā madhurā guravo himāḥ . vātaśleṣmapradāścāpi balaśukrakarā matāḥ bhāvapra° taḍḍimbaguṇāḥ haṁsaḍimbaṁ paraṁ valya vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātanāśanam . pāke laghutaraṁ proktaṁ sarvāmayavināśanam rājani° . asya darśanādeḥ śubhāśubhatvaṁ vasantarājñaśākune uktaṁ yathā kāṣṭhāsu sarvāsvapi darśanena haṁsasya śabdasya tu sarvasiddhiḥ . nāmāni haṁsasya śṛṇoti yastu prayānti nāśaṁ duritāni tasya . cauraiḥ samaṁ darśanamādyaśabde nidhirdvitīye’tha bhayaṁ tṛtīye . yuddhaṁ caturthe nṛpatiprasādaḥ syāt pañcame haṁsarave narāṇām . yatibhedahasalakṣaṇaṁ paramahaṁsaśabde 4237 pṛ° dṛśyam . prāṇasya hasapadārthatve heturuktaḥ padārthādarśe ucchvāse caiva śvāme ca hasa ityakṣaradvayam . tasmāt prāṇastu haṁsātmā ātmākāreṇa saṁsthitaḥ . nābherucchāsaniśvasāt hṛdayāgnervyavasthitiḥ . |
हंसांशु – haṁsāṁśu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haṁsāṁśu mfn. “swan-rayed”, swan-coloured, white |
हरि – hari | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hari mfn. (for 2. see col.3) bearing, carrying (see “dṛti” and “nātha-h-“).
hari mfn. (prob. fr. a lost “hṛ”, “to be yellow or green”; for 1. “hari” see above, col.2) fawn-coloured, reddish brown, brown, tawny, pale yellow, yellow, fallow, bay (esp. applied to horses), green, greenish &c, &c. hari m. yellow or reddish brown or green (the colour) hari m. a horse, steed (esp. of Indra) &c. &c. hari m. a lion &c. hari m. the sign of the zodiac Leo hari m. the sun hari m. = “hari-nakṣatra” hari m. a monkey &c. hari m. ( also, a ray of light; the moon; Phaseolus Mungo; a jackal; a parrot; a peacock; the Koil or Indian cuckoo; a goose; a frog; a snake; fire) hari m. the wind or N. of Vāyu (god of the wind) hari m. of Indra &c. hari m. (esp.) N. of Viṣṇu-Kṛiṣṇa (in this sense thought by some to be derived from “hṛ”, “to take away or remove evil or sin”) &c. hari m. of Brahmā hari m. of Yama hari m. of śiva hari m. of śukra hari m. of Su-parṇa hari m. of a son of Garuḍa hari m. of a Rākṣasa hari m. of a Dānava hari m. of a son of Akampaua (or Anukampana) hari m. of a son of Tārakākṣa hari m. of a son of Parājit hari m. of a son of Parāvṛit hari m. of a worshipper of Viṣṇu hari m. of various authors and scholars (esp. of the poet Bhartṛi-hari as the author of the Vākya-padīya; also with “miśra, bhaṭṭa, dīkṣita” &c.) hari m. of a mountain hari m. of a world (cf. “hari-varṣa”) hari m. of a metre hari m. of a partic. high number hari pl. men, people (= “manuṣyāḥ”) mfn. a partic. class of gods under Manu Tāmasa hari mfn. (“ī”) f. N. of the mythical mother of the monkeys ‘holus’, ‘helvus’, ‘fulvus’; Lith. ‘zalias’, ‘zelti’; Slav. ‘zelenu’; Germ. ‘gelo’, ‘gelb’; Eng. ‘yellow’.] hari ind. (for 1. see p.1289, col.2; for 2. an exclamation (“alas!”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 hari a. [hṛ-in] (1) Green, greenishyellow. (2) Tawny, bay, reddishbrown (kapila); hariyugyaṁ haristasmai prajibāya puraṁdaraḥ R. 12. 84, 3. 43. (3) Yellow. –riḥ (1) N. of Viṣṇu; hariryathaikaḥ puruṣottamaḥ smṛtaḥ R. 3. 49. (2) N. of Indra; R. 3. 55, 68, 8. 79. (3) N. of Śiva. (4) N. of Brahman. (5) N. of Yama. (6) The sun. (7) The moon. (8) A man. (9) A ray of light. (10) Fire. (11) Wind. (12) A lion; Bv. 1. 50, 51. (13) A horse. (14) A horse of Indra; satyamatītya harito harīṁśca vartaṁte vājinaḥ S. 1, 7. 7. (15) An ape, a monkey; U. 3. 45, R. 12. 57. (16) The cuckoo. (17) A frog. (18) A parrot. (19) A snake. (20) The tawny green or yellow colour. (21) A peacock. (22) N. of the poet Bhartṛhari. — Comp. –akṣaḥ 1 a lion. 2. N. of Kubera. 3. of Śiva. –aśvaḥ 1 Indra. –2. Śiva. –kāṁta a. 1. dear to Indra. –2. beautiful as a lion –kelīyaḥ the country called vaṁga q. v. –keśaḥ N. of Śiva. –gaṁdhaṁ a kind of sandal. –caṁdanaḥ –naṁ 1. a kind of yellow sandal (the wood or tree); R. 3. 59, 6. 60; S. 7. 2; Ku. 5. 69. –2. one of the five trees of paradise; paṁcaite devataravo maṁdāraḥ pārijātakaḥ . saṁtānaḥ kalpavṛkṣaśca puṁsi vā haricaṁdanaṁ Ak. ( –naṁ.) 1. moonlight. –2. saffron. –3. the filament of a lotus. –tālaḥ (by some regarded as derived from harita) a kind of yellow-coloured pigeon. ( –laṁ) yellow orpiment; H. D. 1; Śi. 4. 21; Ku. 7. 23, 33. ( –lī) (1) the Dūrvā grass. –2. a streak or line in the sky. –3. = haritālikā (1). –tālakaḥ a kind of yellow-coloured pigeon. (–kaṁ) 1. yellow orpiment. –2. a theatrical de coration. –tālikā 1. the fourth day of the bright half of Bhādrapada. –2. the Dūrvā plant. –turaṁgamaḥ N. of Indra. –dāsaḥ a worshipper or votary of Viṣṇu. –dinaṁ a particular day sacred to Viṣṇu. –devaḥ the asterism Śravaṇa. –dravaḥ 1. a green fluid. –2. powder of the blossoms of the Nāgakeśara tree. –druḥ a tree. –dvāraṁ N. of a celebrated Tīrtha or sacred bathing-place. –netraṁ 1. the eye of Viṣṇu. –2. the white lotus. (–traḥ) an owl. –padaṁ the vernal equinox. –parṇaṁ a radish. –priyaḥ 1. the Kadamba tree. –2. a conch-shell. –3. a fool. –4. a madman. –5. Śiva. (–yaṁ) the root Uśīra. –2. a sort of sandal. –priyā 1. Lakṣmī. –2. the sacred basil. –3. the earth. –4. the twelfth day of a lunar fortnight. –bhaktaḥ a worshipper of Viṣṇu. –bhuj m. a snake. –maṁthaḥ, –maṁthakaḥ a chick-pea. –locanaḥ 1. a crab. –2. an owl. –vaṁśaḥ N. of a celebrated work by Vyāsa supplementary to the Mahābhārata. –varṣaḥ N. of one of the nine divisions of Jambudvīpa. –vallabhā 1. Lakṣmī. –2. the sacred basil. –vāsaraḥ ‘Viṣṇu’s day,’ the eleventh day of a lunar fortnight (ekādaśī). –vāhanaḥ 1. Garuḍa. –2. Indra. -diś f. the east. –vījaṁ yellow orpiment. –śaraḥ an epithet of Śiva (Viṣṇu having served Śiva as the shaft which burnt down ‘the three cities’ or cities of the demon Tripura). –sakhaḥ a Gandharva. –saṁkīrtanaṁ repeating the name of Viṣṇu. –sutaḥ, –sūnuḥ N. of Arjuna. –hayaḥ 1. Indra; R. 9. 18. –2. the sun. –3. N. of Skanda. –4. of Gaṇeśa. –haraḥ a particular form of deity consisting of Viṣṇu and Śiva conjoined. -ātmakaḥ 1. N. of Garuḍa. –2. of Śiva’s bull. –hetiḥ f. 1. the rain-bow; kathamavalokayeyamadhunā harihetimatīḥ (kakubhaḥ) Māl. 9. 18. –2. the discus of Viṣṇu. -hūtiḥ the ruddy goose; Śi. 9. 15. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hari UṆĀDIS. 4, 118. 1) adj. “fahl, blassgelb, gelblich” (namentlich als Farbe des Rosses); “grünlich” AK. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1396. an. 2, 470. fg. MED. r. 100. fg. HALĀY. 4, 50. ṚV. 4, 15, 7. 8. 5, 27, 2. Agni heisst vṛṣā hariḥ 7, 10, 1. 8, 25, 23. VS. 13, 42. insbes. der Rosse des Indra NAIGH. 1, 15. du. ṚV. 1, 20, 2. 35, 2. 55, 7 u.s.w. 2, 18, 4. TS. 6, 5, 9, 2. pl. ṚV. 3, 44, 1. 50, 2. 4, 16, 1 u.s.w. 6, 47, 18. des Vāyu 4, 48, 5. harīṇāṁ patiḥ 8, 24, 14. als Farbe des Soma 1, 121, 8. 8, 58, 5. 9, 30, 5. 32, 2. 50, 3. divā harirdadṛśe naktamṛjraḥ 97, 9. 10, 96, 2. 6. VS. 8, 11. der Soma – Steine ṚV. 3, 44, 1. 5. des Indra – Keils 4. Indra’s selbst (nach Comm.) 3. des Feuers 8, 43, 4. des suparṇa AV. 19, 65, 1. der Sonne ṚV. 10, 96, 1. 1, 95, 1. des haṁsa AV. 10, 8, 18. vṛṣā hariḥ VS. 38, 22; vgl. ŚAT. BR. 14, 3, 1, 26 und vārṣāhara. Haare ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. 3, 2, 1, 3. pitā hariḥ heisst Varuṇa AV. 5, 11, 1. — Rosse (subst. s. bes.) MBH. 3, 1720. R. 3, 9, 5. 10. 5, 12, 34. RAGH. 3, 43. 12, 84. -śmaśrujaṭādhara MBH. 13, 2660. -locana R. 4, 16, 9. candana (vgl. haricandana) MBH. 7, 2922. -madhyā (zugleich Viṣṇu) RĀJA-TAR. 3, 416. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 2. śaṣpa BHĀG. P. 10, 20, 11. -dhūmrakeśa HARIV. 12949. -piṅga MBH. 1, 8080. -piṅgala 13, 7414. R. GORR. 1, 60, 12. 4, 20, 21. 7, 23, 4, 32. — 2) m. a) “Ross”, insbes. Indra’s (s. auch unter 1) AK. H. 1233. TRIK. 2, 8, 41 (hariḥ krāntaḥ zu lesen). H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 281. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 11903. 11921. 12003. 13, 4896. HARIV. 4943. RAGH. 12, 103. KATHĀS. 19, 108. harito harīṁśca “die Rosse des Sonnengottes und” Indra’s ŚĀK. 6, 5. 166. BHĀG. P. 8, 11, 16. — b) “Löwe” AK. 2, 5, 1. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1283. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 59. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 15645. 7, 7634. R. 2, 97, 5. RAGH. 2, 59. VIKR. 16. ZdmG.27, 96. SĀH. D. 237, 16. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 47. Spr. (II) 3366. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 44. 8, 2, 6. 10, 9. 10, 53, 56. — c) “der Löwe im Thierkreise” VARĀH. BṚH. 18, 16. 19, 2. 24, 14. — d) “Affe” AK. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1292. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 76. 5, 70. MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. 3, 16275. R. 1, 16, 6. 2, 96, 22. 3, 20, 26. 78, 19. 4, 28, 28. 38, 26. 30. 7, 91, 10. UTTARAR. 65, 14 (84, 9). RAGH. 12, 57. 15, 99. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 299. — e) “Schakal” (bhīru) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 194,a, No. 445. — f) “Papagei” AK. H. an. MED. “Pfau, der indische Kuckuck” und “Gans” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — g) “Frosch” AK. H. 1354. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 3, 40. 5, 70. “Schlange” AK. H. an. MED. — h) “Phaseolus Mungo” (mudga) H. 1172. — i) “die Sonne” AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 99. H. an. MED. HĀR. 11. HALĀY. 1, 35. 5, 70. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 18. — k) “Lichtstrahl” AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 86. H. an. MED. — l) “der Mond” AK. H. an. MED. HĀR. 13. HALĀY. 5, 70. — m) “Wind” AK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 76. 5, 70. “der Gott des Windes” R. ed. Bomb. 1, 32, 23. vāyu v. l. im Comm. — n) ein Name a) Indra’s AK. TRIK.1,1,57. H. 171. H. an. MED. HALĀY.1,52.5,70. JAṬĀDH. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 191,a,29. Spr. (II) 207. R.1,15,26. RAGH.3,43. 55. 68.9,57. 12,103. ŚĀK. 95,1. 156. 162. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 53,19. SĀH. D. 237,16. — b) Viṣṇu’s oder Kṛṣṇa’s AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 28. H. 214. H. an. HALĀY. 1, 23. 5, 70. Ind. St. 1, 79. 2, 7. 92. 9, 81. BHAG. 11, 9. 18, 77. MBH. 1, 1167. 3, 15553.6, 301. HARIV. 10. 2382. 7447. R. 1, 31, 13. 45, 23. RAGH. 3, 49. KUMĀRAS. 7, 44. ŚĀK. 165. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 286. KṚṢṆAJ. 222 u.s.w. Spr. (II) 671. 3452. 6408. 6859. 7173. 7369. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 5. 99, 1. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 126. 416 (zugleich adj.). 451. PRAB. 54,12. BHĀG. P.1,2,23.4,30,24.7,10,24.8,1,30. PAÑCAT. Pr. 1. VET. in LA. (III)1,14. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 45,b,31. SĀH. D. 237,16. HALL 126. SARVADARŚANAS. 46,3. 57. 16. 66,15. 67,9. 69,13. 17. 72,4. BURNOUF, Intr. 131. — g) Jama’s AK. H. 184. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 72. 5, 70. — d) Brahman’s und Śiva’s MED. hariṁ (= Brahman Comm.) harantamanuyanti devāḥ TAITT. ĀR. 10, 49. — e) Śukra’s und Suparṇa’s (vgl. unter 1) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. a. a. O. — z) “des Feuers” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. KĀLAC. 1, 15. — o) “ein best. Metrum: metrical sequence”COLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 8). — p) elliptisch für -nakṣatra “das” Nakshatra Śravaṇa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 60, 21. 98, 17; vgl. harideva. — q) pl. = apatya NAIGH. 2, 2. — r) “eine best. hohe Zahl” bei den Buddhisten VYUTP. 182. Mel. asiat. 4, 638, N. — s) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter Manu Tāmasa VP. 262. MĀRK. P. 74, 57. BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 28. = jayāḥ in einer früheren Geburt Verz. d. Oxf. H. 56,b,33. — b) eines Sohnes des Garuḍa MBH. 5, 3598. — g) eines Rākṣasa MBH. 3, 16365. — d) eines Dānava HARIV. 2283. 14284. — e) verschiedener Männer: ein Sohn Akampana’s (Anukampaka’s) MBH. 7, 2030. fgg. 12, 9151. fgg. Tārakākṣa’s 8, 1417. fgg. Parājit’s HARIV. 1980. Parāvṛt’s VP. 421, N. 12. ein Verehrer Viṣṇu’s BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11. = bhartṛ- TRIK.2,7,26. ZdmG.7,164. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 161,b,9. 162,b,30. 247,b,13. Verz. d. Tüb. H. 13. SARVADARŚANAS. 140,1. 144,5. 146,5. — Verz. d. B. H. No. 969. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b, No. 760. 335,a, No. 787. 352,b,7 (sein Geschlecht). RĀJA-TAR. 6, 166. HALL 31. 50. 75. — z) einer Welt H. an. MED.; vgl. harivarṣa. — 3) f. harī N. “der Urmutter der Affen” MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. R. 3, 20, 26. — Vgl. nara-, nṛ-, bhartṛ-, vana-, śrī-, sarva-. hari (von 1. har) adj. “tragend” u. s. w. in dṛti- und nātha- P. 3, 2, 25. hari1 1) Adj. “fahl, blassgelb, gelblich” (namentlich als Farbe des Rosses) ; “grünlich.” 2) m. a) “Ross”, insbes. Indra’s. b) “Löwe.” c) “der Löwe im Thierkreise.” d) “Affe.” e) “Schakal.” f) “Papagei” g) Pfau ; der indische Kuckuck. (!) h) Gans i) “Frosch.” k) “Schlange.” l) “Phaseolus Mungo.” m) “die Sonne.” n) “Lichtstrahl.” o) “der Mond.” p) “Feuer.” q) “Wind, der Gott des Windes.” r) Bein. a) Indra’s. b) Viṣṇu-Kṛṣṇa’s. g) Jama’s. d) Brahman’s. e) *Śiva’s. z) Śukra’s. h) Suparṇa’s. s) “ein best. Metrum.” t) elliptisch für harinakṣatra “das Mondhaus Śravaṇa” u) “eine best. hohe Zahl” (buddh.). v) Pl. = apatya. w) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter Manu Tāmasa und = jayās in einer früheren Geburt. b) eines Sohnes des Garuḍa. g) eines Rākṣasa. d) eines Dānava. e) verschiedener Männer. z) eines Berges VP.2,4,41. h) einer Welt. 3) f. harī N.pr. “der Urmutter der Affen.” hari2 Adj. “tragend” u.s.w. in dṛti- und nātha-. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 hari 1 I A synonym of Viṣṇu. (See under Viṣṇu). hari 2 II A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Śalya Parva, Chapter 45, Verse 61). hari 3 III A warrior who fought on the side of the Pāṇḍavas and was killed by Karṇa. hari 4 IV An asura, the son of Tārakākṣa, who got from Brahmā a boon enabling him to prepare Mṛtasaṅjīvanī. (a medicine to revive dead people). (Karṇa Parva, Chapter 33, Verse 27). hari 5 V Son of King Akaṁpana. Though he was as powerful and proficient in archery as Mahāviṣṇu, and equal in prowess to Indra in war he got into the hands of his enemies and was killed. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 52, Verse 27). hari 6 VI A particular sect of the attendants of Rāvaṇa. They attacked the army of monkeys. (Vana Parva, Chapter 285). hari 7 VII A very powerful bird born in Garuḍa’s dynasty. (Udyoga Parva, Chapter 101, Verse 13). hari 7i VIII A particular species of horses. They possess long hairs on the neck and are golden in colour. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 23, Verse 13). hari 1x IX A daughter born to Kaśyapaprajāpati by his wife Krodhavaśā. Lions and monkeys originated from this Hari. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Araṇyakāṇḍa, Canto 14). hari x X A son of Dharmadeva. Dharmadeva begot four sons, Hari, Kṛṣṇa, Nara and Nārāyaṇa of the daughters of Dakṣa. (Devi Bhāgavata, 4th Skandha). hari xi XI A sect of Devas. During the Tāmasamanvantara there were four such sects, viz. Haris, Satyas, Supāras and Sudhīs. (See Manvantara). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hari hari (curtailed harit), I. adj. 1. Green. 2. Tawny. 3. Yellow, Indr. 1, 7; Arj. 4, 12. II. m. 1. Green, tawny, yellow, the colour. 2. Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa, Hit. pr. d. 28, M. M.; Pañc. pr. d. 1. 3. Indra, Śāk. d. 156. 4. Śiva. 5. Yama. 6. The sun, Mālat. 149, 1. 7. The moon. 8. A ray of light. 9. Fire. 10. Wind. 11. A horse (of Indra; cf. the ved. use of harit, and Śāk. 6, 5); Arj. 4, 32. 12. A lion, Vikr. d. 16. 13. A parrot. 14. The Indian cuckoo. 15. A peacock. 16. A goose. 17. An ape, Utt. Rāmac. 84, 9. 18. A frog. 19. A snake. 20. One of the varṣas, or divisions, into which the continent is divided. — Comp. nara-, and nṛ-, m. Viṣṇu, in his fourth avatāra, as a lionheaded man, Bhāg. P. 5, 18, 7; 7, 8, 27. — Cf. A. S. growan; O.H.G. groen, groni; A. S. groen, grene; also geal, gealla; Lat. gilvus; [greek] and probably [greek] cf. harit. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hari a. fallow, yellowish, greenish. m. horse, esp. the steeds of Indra (2, but also 20-200), lion, ape, the sun, fire, wind, E. of Viṣṇu, Indra etc. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hari har-i, a. [3. hṛ, be yellow] tawny, yellow (esp. of horses); greenish (rare, C.); m. (C.) steed (sp. of Indra); lion; monkey; N. of Indra and (more commonly) of Viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa; N. of a various men; (hari)-keśa, a. tawny-haried; -gaṇa, m. troop of horses; N.; -ghoṣa, m. N.; -candana, m. (?) Indra’s sandal tree (one of the five trees in Indra’s paradise); kind of sandal tree; n. yellow sandal; -candra, m. N.; -cāpa, m. n. Indra’s bow, rainbow. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hari pu° hṛ–in . 1 viṣṇau 2 siṁhe 3 sarpe 4 vānare 5 bheke 6 śukakhage amaraḥ . 7 cadre 8 sūrye 9 vāyau 10 aśve 11 yame 12 hare 13 brahmaṇi 14 kiraṇe jambudvīpasya 15 varṣabhede 16 indre ca medi° 17 mayūre 18 kokile 19 haṁse 20 vahnau śabdara° . bhartṛharināmake vākyapradīya granthakārake 21 paṇḍite trikā° . 22 piṅgalavarṇe 23 hari dvarṇe hemaca° 24 tadvati tri° . hariṁ viditvā haribhiśca vājibhiḥ raghu . 25 pīte anekārthako° . |
हरिण – hariṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariṇa mf (“ī”) n. (the fem. “hariṇī” belongs to “harita”) fawn-coloured,
yellowish, tawny (also said of unhealthy complexion), greenish, green hariṇa m. yellowish (&c.) the colour hariṇa m. a deer, antelope, fawn, stag (one of 5 kinds, others being called “ṛṣya, ruru, pṛṣata, mṛga”) &c. &c. hariṇa m. an ichneumon hariṇa m. a goose hariṇa m. the sun hariṇa m. a minor division of the world hariṇa m. N. of Viṣṇu or śiva hariṇa m. of a Gaṇa of śiva hariṇa m. of a serpent. demon hariṇa m. of an ichneumon (v.l. “harita”) hariṇa mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. see below. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 hariṇa a. (ṇī f.) [hṛ-inan] (1) Pale, whitish. (2) Reddish or yel lowish white. –ṇaḥ (1) A deer, an antelope; (said to be of five kinds: –hariṇaścāpi vijñeyaḥ paṁcabhedo’tra bhairava . ṛṣyaḥ khaḍgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca mṛgastathā Kalikā P.); api prasannaṁ hariṇeṣu te manaḥ Ku. 5. 35. (2) The white colour. (3) A goose. (4) The sun. (5) Viṣṇu. (6) Śiva. — Comp. –akṣa a. deer-eyed, fawn-eyed. ( –kṣaḥ) N. of Śiva. ( –kṣī) ‘deer-eyed’, a woman with beautiful eyes. –aṁkaḥ 1. the moon. –2. camphor. –kalaṁkaḥ, –dhāmanu m. the moon. –nayana, –natre, –locana a. deereyed, fawn-eyed. –nartakaḥ a Kinnara. –hṛdaya a. deer-hearted, timid. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariṇa UṆĀDIS. 3, 46. 1) adj. proparox. ŚĀNT. 2, 10. “fahl, gelblich” (vgl. hari, harit, harita) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1392. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87 (lies viśade). HALĀY. 4, 47. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. die Sonne PRAŚNOP. 1, 8 = MAITRJUP. 6, 8. ein siecher Mann MBH. 2, 1741. 5, 3742. 13, 4828. 5886. 5889. fgg. f. ī s. u. harita. — 2) m. a) “Gazelle (Antilope cervicapra” MOLESWORTH s. v. haraṇa) AK. 2, 5, 8. 3, 4, 3, 24. H. 1293. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 75. VIŚVA a. a. O. ṚV. 1, 163, 1. 5, 78, 2. gehörnt AV. 3, 7, 1. 2. 6, 67, 3. yaddhariṇo yavamatti VS. 23, 30. TS. 5, 5, 19, 1. ŚAT. BR. 13, 2, 9, 8. -carman KAUŚ. 16. MBH. 3, 11342. 15629. R. 2, 34, 50. SUŚR. 1, 46, 20. 73, 6. 200, 8. 15. VĀGBH. 6, 44. RAGH. 9, 57. KUMĀRAS. 5, 15. ad ŚĀK. 78. Spr. (II) 7368. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 28. KATHĀS. 22, 128. 96, 26 (arthahariṇāḥ “Reichthümer als Gazellen”). BHĀG. P.3,21,44.8,2,21. PAÑCAT. 140,23. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,a,1. v. u. – lolākṣī R. 5, 25, 45. -locanā 33, 17. hariṇākṣa adj. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 65. f. hariṇākṣī Spr. (II) 637. 2509. 6519. KATHĀS. 33, 88. PRAB. 40, 12. hariṇekṣaṇā Spr. (II) 6408. śiśuhariṇadṛś 3801. — b) “die Sonne; Gans”; ein N. Viṣṇu’s und Śiva’s ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) N. pr. a) eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2152. — b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 523. — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12, 4942 nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb.; harita ed. Calc. — 2) f. ī gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41. a) “Gazellenweibchen” AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. TS. 7, 4, 19, 2 (v. l. zu VS. 23, 20). MBH. 3, 2424. 11342. HARIV. 4827. R. 3, 62, 37. RAGH. 2, 11. 9, 55. 14, 69. Spr. (II) 1456. 7370. CAURAP. 28. BHĀG. P. 5, 8, 1. 9, 23, 8. cakitahariṇīprekṣita MEGH. 102. cakitahariṇīprekṣaṇā 80. — b) Bez. “zweier Pflanzen”: = mañjiṣṭhā und svarṇayūthī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) Bez. “einer best. Schönen” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. śukābhā HALĀY. 4, 53. — d) “eine Statue von Gold” AK. H. 1464. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. HALĀY. 1, 131. Spr. (II) 5497. — e) “ein best. Metrum” H. an. (vṛtta st. vṛnta zu lesen). MED. VIŚVA. a. a. O. metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 4). ŚRUT. 39. CHANDOM. 93. Ind. St. 8, 394. fg. — f) Bez. “einer best.” Svarabhakti Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. WEBER, PRATIJÑĀS. 108. — g) N. pr. a) einer Apsaras RAGH. 8, 78. — b) einer Yakṣiṇī SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 297 (67). — g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s) BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 30. — Vgl. mandara-, vegi-, hāriṇa, hāriṇika. hariṇa 1) Adj. (f. hariṇī) gehört zu harita “fahl, gelblich” (auch von der Farbe siecher Männer) ; “grünlich, grün.” 2) m. a) “Gazelle”, wohl “Antilope cervicapra” ŚIŚ.6,9.13,56. b) “Ichneumon” MAITR.S.3,9,3 (116,17). Vgl. f)greek). c) die Sonne. d) “Gans.” e) Bein. Viṣṇu’s und Śiva’s. f) N.pr. a) eines Schlangendämons. b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s. g) eines Ichneumons MBH.12,138,31. vgl. 20 “b).” 3) f. ī a) “Gazellenweibchen” ŚIŚ.12,30. b) “Rubia Munjista” RĀJAN.6,192. c) “gelber Jasmin” RĀJAN.10,99. d) Bez. “einer best. Schönen.” e) “eines Statue von Gold.” f) Pl. Bez. “der Verse” AV.18,2,11-18 KAUŚ.80,3.5.82.83. VAITĀN.37,24. g) “ein best. Metrum.” h) “eine best. Svarabhakti.” i) N.pr. a) einer Apsara’s. b) einer Yskṣṇī. g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s). Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 hariṇa A nāga which belonged to the Airāvata family. It was burnt to death at the Sarpasatra of Janamejava. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 57, Verse 11). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hariṇa (akin to harit, cf. hari), I. adj., f. ṇī, Yellowish-white, MBh. 13, 5893; Rājat. 5, 482. II. m. 1. Yellowish-white (the colour). 2. White. 3. A deer, an antelope, Pañc. 140, 23. 4. A goose. 5. Viṣṇu, Śiva. 6. A minor division of the world. III. f. ṇī. 1. A doe, Megh. 80; 102. 2. Yellow jasmine. 3. A beautiful woman. 4. A golden image, Rājat. 5, 15. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hariṇa a. fallow, pale, yellowish, green; m. a kind of antelope (f. -ṇī), ichneumon, N. of a serpent-demon etc. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hariṇa hariṇa, a. (ī) yellowish, tawny (also of unhealthy complexion); m. antelope, gazelle: -ka, m. dim. gazelle; -dhāman, m. abode of the antelope, moon; -nayanā, f. gazelle-eyed woman; -lakṣman, m. (marked with an antelope), moon; -lāñchana, m. id.; -locana, a. gazelle-eyed; -śiśu, m. fawn; -akṣa, a. (ī) gazelle-eyed: -ī, f. — woman. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hariṇa puṁstrī° hṛ–inan . svanāmakhyāte 1 paśau amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 2 śive 3 viṣṇau 4 haṁse 5 śuklavarṇe 6 pāṇḍuvarṇe ca . 7 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . hariṇaḥ śītalo vaddha° viṇmūtro dīpano lathuḥ . rase pāke ca madhuraḥ sugandhaḥ sannipātahā rājava° tanmāṁsaguṇāḥ . hariṇaścāpi vijñeyaḥ pañcabhedo’tra bhairava! . ṛṣyaḥ khaṅgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca mṛgastathā . ete balipradāneṣu carmadāne ca kīrtitāḥ kālikāpu° 66 a° . |
हरिनेत्र – harinetra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harinetra “hari-netra” n. the eye of Viṣṇu
n. a white lotus n. an eye of a greenish colour harinetra “hari-netra” mfn. having yellow eyes harinetra “hari-netra” m. an owl Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harinetra n. 1) Hari’s d. i. Viṣṇu’s “Auge” MĀRK. P. 81, 52. — 2) “eine weisse Lotusblüthe” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. harinetra 1) adj. “gelbäugig”: Śiva MBH. 14, 194. — 2) m. “Eule” TRIK. 2, 5, 14. HĀR. 185. harinetra1 n. 1) “Hari’s ~, d.i. Viṣṇu’s Auge.” 2) “*eine weisse Lotusblüthe” RĀJAN.10,182. harinetra2 1) Adj. “gelbäugig.” 2) *m. “Eule.” Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 harinetra a. yellow-eyed (Śiva). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harinetra na° harernetramiva . 1 śvetapadme rājani° . 6 ta° . 2 viṣṇorlocane . hareḥ siṁhasyeva netramasya dīrṣatvāt . 3 pecake puṁstrī° trikā° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . |